GTN 6XX/7XX

AML STC
Installation Manual

190-01007-A3 December 2012 Revision 4

 2011 - 2012 Garmin International or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual
and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and
to print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of
this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that
any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin, FliteCharts and SafeTaxi are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries.
Connext, SVT, GDU, and Telligence are also trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;
Skywatch is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications.
2012 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
MATLAB is a registered trademark of The MathWorks, Inc.;
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries;
Bose is a registered trademark of Bose Corporation.
At Garmin, we value your opinion.
Please send comments on this manual to [email protected].
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: 913-397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): 888.606.5482
http://www.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 870 850 1243
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd., SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: 503.581.8101
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
2 3/3/11 See current revision description for complete list of changes.
3 5/23/11 Updated for Software version 2.01.
Updated for Software Version 3.00. See current revision description for list of
4 12/17/12
changes.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page A
 CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION
Section Description
Page D Added definitions of warnings, cautions, and notes.
1.1 Added STC information for GMA 35.
1.3 Rewrote section.
1.3.4 Added new section about required documentation for all installations.
1.5.1 Added new section and subsections about GTN/GTX installation overview.
1.6.1 Added new section about environmental qualification forms.
1.6.2 Added new section about power requirements.
1.6.3 Added new section about system documentation.
1.8.5 1.8.7 Added information and new phone number about databases.
2.2 Added enablement card part numbers.
2.2.2.2 Added statement about MIL-W-22759/18 wire.
2.3.2.5 Added new section about materials required for instrument panel bonding.
2.4.1.1 2.4.1.3 Added new subsections to section 2.4.1, Minimum System Configuration.
2.4.3 Added new section about GDL 88 installation considerations.
2.4.4.1 Rewrote entire section.
2.4.5 Added new section about electrical bonding.
Added paragraph to section about if a GNS 400W/500W is installed concurrently with a
2.4.10.1
GTN.
2.4.16 Added new section about considerations for weather radar wiring.
3.1 Updated part numbers of antennas in subsections.
3.3.3.1 Added recommended hardware to use for NAV antenna cable splitter installations.
3.3.3.2 Added recommended hardware to use for NAV antenna cable diplexer installations.
3.4.4 Added section about GMA 35 unit insertion and removal.
3.5 Added sample aircraft weight and balance calculation.
3.6.3.2 Added section and subsections about configuration module installations.
3.6.8 Added section and subsections about instrument panel bonding procedures.
3.7 Added information about electrical load analysis.
3.8 Added section and subsections about AFMS completion.
4.1.2 Updated pin names of P1002 connector.
4.1.5 Updated pin names of the P1005 connector.
4.2.2 Updated pin names of P3502 connector.
5.3 Rewrote procedure for connector engagement check.
5.4.4 5.4.5 Added sections on GWX 68/70 and GDL 88 software loading.
5.5.1.1 Added tables about ARINC 429 DATA IN and OUT selections.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page B Rev. 4
Section Description
5.5.1.2 Added tables about RS-232 input and output selections.
5.5.1.4.3 Added new section about GDL 88.
5.5.1.4.5 Added new section about GWX.
5.5.1.4.6 Added new section about GSR 56.
5.5.1.8 Added information about the traffic page concerning the installation of a GDL 88.
5.5.1.9 Added information concerning upgrading from software version 2.00 to 3.00.
5.5.1.12 Added new section about ARINC 453/708 configuration page.
5.5.2.4 Added new section about Digital Radar.
5.5.2.5 Added new section about GWX 70 advanced features.
5.5.3.14 Added new section about clear configuration module.
5.5.4.5.1 Added new section about Ryan TCAD.
5.5.4.7.2 Clarified descriptions of items found on the remote XPDR configuration page.
5.5.4.8.2 Added new information about the GMA 35 audio panel configuration settings.
5.5.4.9 Added new section and subsections about GDL 88 configuration.
Added new subsections about GWX 68/70, ARINC 708, GSR 56, and Ryan TCAD interface
5.7.8
checks.
5.7.9 Added new section about GDL 88 interface check.
5.7.11 Added new section about EMI/RFI checks.
5.10.3 Revised the GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log.
7.2.7 Added information to GPS/WAAS Antenna Limitations section.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C
 DOCUMENT PAGINATION
Section Pagination
Table of Contents i - xiv
Chapter 1 1-1 through 1-20
Chapter 2 2-1 through 2-38
Chapter 3 3-1 through 3-50
Chapter 4 4-1 through 4-8
Chapter 5 5-1 through 5-116
Chapter 6 6-1 through 6-2
Chapter 7 7-1 through 7-2
Chapter 8 8-1 through 8-2
Appendix A A-1 through A-16
Appendix B B-1 through B-8
Appendix C C-1 through C-12
Appendix D D-1 through D-2
Appendix E E-1 through E-90
Appendix F F-1 through F-10
Appendix G G-1 through G-8
Appendix H H-1 through H-2
Appendix J J-1 through J-4

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page D Rev. 4
 INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations
("EAR") issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and
which may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United
States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the EAR may be subject to a penalty of up
to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000 under Section 2410 of the Export Administration
Act of 1979. Include this notice with any reproduced portion of this document.

DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING
Warnings are used to bring to the installers immediate attention that not only
damage to the equipment but personal injury may occur if the instruction is
disregarded.
CAUTION
Cautions are used to alert the individual that damage to equipment may result
if the procedural step is not followed to the letter.
NOTE
Notes are used to expand and explain the preceding step and provide further
understanding of the reason for the particular operation.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page i
 WARNING

This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This Notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like additional information, please refer to our web site
at www.garmin.com/prop65.

WARNING

Perchlorate Material special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

CAUTION

The GTN 6XX and 7XX has a display coated with a special anti-reflective coating that
is very sensitive to waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important
to clean the display using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is safe
for anti-reflective coatings.

NOTE

All screen shots used in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen
shots are intended to provide visual reference only. All information depicted in screen
shots, including software file names, versions, and part numbers, is subject to change
and may not be up to date.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page ii Rev. 4
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 SCOPE............................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC ................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 Part 23 Aircraft Not Identified on the AML........................................................................... 1-3
1.3.3 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the AML ............................................................................... 1-3
1.3.4 Required Documentation for All Installations ....................................................................... 1-3
1.4 GTN/GMA 35 SYSTEM OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 1-4
1.4.1 GTN Unit Descriptions .......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4.2 GMA 35 Audio Panel Description (Optional)........................................................................ 1-5
1.4.3 GTN Interface Summary ........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.4 GMA 35 Interface Summary .................................................................................................. 1-7
1.5 GTN/GMA 35 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.1 GTN/GTX Installation Overview ........................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.2 Pre-Installation Checklist ..................................................................................................... 1-12
1.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.1 Environmental Qualification Forms ..................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.2 Power Requirements............................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.3 System Documentation......................................................................................................... 1-14
1.7 GPS/WAAS ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 1-16
1.8 GTN DATABASES ....................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.8.1 Basemap Database................................................................................................................ 1-17
1.8.2 Navigation Database............................................................................................................. 1-18
1.8.3 FliteCharts Database (GTN 7XX Only) ............................................................................ 1-18
1.8.4 ChartView Database (GTN 7XX Only) ........................................................................... 1-18
1.8.5 SafeTaxi Database .............................................................................................................. 1-19
1.8.6 Terrain Database................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.7 Obstacle Database ................................................................................................................ 1-19
1.9 FAULT DETECTION AND EXCLUSION (FDE) ............................................................................... 1-20
1.10 STC PERMISSION ........................................................................................................................ 1-20
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 AVAILABLE EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.1 Accessories Available from Garmin ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Materials Required but not Supplied ...................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.3 GTN Software Loader Card ................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.4 Special Tools Required ........................................................................................................ 2-11
2.4 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.1 Minimum System Configuration .......................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 GTN External Sensors and Devices ..................................................................................... 2-13
2.4.3 GDL 88 Installation Considerations ..................................................................................... 2-17
2.4.4 Antenna Considerations ....................................................................................................... 2-17

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page iii
 2.4.5 Electrical Bonding ................................................................................................................ 2-23
2.4.6 Placards and Labels .............................................................................................................. 2-25
2.4.7 Power Distribution ............................................................................................................... 2-25
2.4.8 Optional Switch Installation ................................................................................................. 2-27
2.4.9 External Annunciators .......................................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.10 Unit Mounting Considerations ............................................................................................. 2-28
2.4.11 Cable and Wiring Considerations......................................................................................... 2-35
2.4.12 Audio Electrical Noise ......................................................................................................... 2-37
2.4.13 Transmit interlock and Split COM Operation ...................................................................... 2-37
2.4.14 GMA 35 Wiring Considerations for Failsafe Operation ...................................................... 2-38
2.4.15 Magnetic Compass Recalibration ......................................................................................... 2-38
2.4.16 Weather Radar Wiring Considerations................................................................................. 2-38
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna Options................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 GPS Antenna Doubler ............................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 ANTENNA INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.2 COM Antenna Cable Considerations ..................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.3 NAV Antenna ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4 GTN/GMA 35 LOCATION AND MOUNTING ................................................................................ 3-10
3.4.1 GTN Rack Installation.......................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.2 GTN Unit Insertion and Removal ........................................................................................ 3-10
3.4.3 GMA 35 Rack Installation ................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.4 GMA 35 Unit Insertion and Removal .................................................................................. 3-11
3.5 WEIGHT AND BALANCE .............................................................................................................. 3-11
3.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 3-13
3.6.1 Special Tools Required ........................................................................................................ 3-13
3.6.2 Wire Harness Buildup .......................................................................................................... 3-13
3.6.3 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors......................................................... 3-15
3.6.4 GTN Fan Installation ............................................................................................................ 3-27
3.6.5 TVS, Fuse and Resistor Installation (nonmetallic aircraft only).......................................... 3-29
3.6.6 Coaxial Cable Termination .................................................................................................. 3-32
3.6.7 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Termination........................................................................ 3-33
3.6.8 Instrument Panel Bonding Procedure ................................................................................... 3-34
3.7 ELECTRICAL LOAD ANALYSIS .................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis .................................................................. 3-36
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis ............................................................. 3-37
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement ................................................... 3-38
3.8 AFMS COMPLETION ................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.8.1 System Capabilities .............................................................................................................. 3-46
3.8.2 Autopilot Listed in GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC................................................................... 3-47
3.8.3 Autopilot Not Listed in GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC............................................................ 3-48
4 CONNECTOR PINOUT INFORMATION ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 GTN 6XX/7XX ............................................................................................................................ 4-1

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page iv Rev. 4
 4.1.1 P1001 Connector .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 P1002 Connector .................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 P1003 GTN COM Connector (GTN 635/650/750 Only) ....................................................... 4-3
4.1.4 P1004 GTN NAV Connector (GTN 650/750 Only) .............................................................. 4-4
4.1.5 P1005 Connector (GTN 7XX only) ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 GMA 35 ........................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.1 P3501 Connector .................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.2 P3502 Connector .................................................................................................................... 4-7
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT ......................................................... 5-1
5.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 MOUNTING, WIRING, AND POWER CHECKS ................................................................................. 5-2
5.3 CONNECTOR ENGAGEMENT CHECK ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.4 SOFTWARE LOADING .................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.4.1 GTN Software Loading .......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.2 GMA 35 Software Loading .................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4.3 GDL 69/69A Software Loading ............................................................................................. 5-5
5.4.4 GWX 68/70 Software Loading............................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.5 GDL 88 Software Loading ..................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.6 System Information Page ....................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 CONFIGURATION MODE OPERATIONS .......................................................................................... 5-6
5.5.1 GTN Setup Page ..................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.2 GTN Options Configuration Page ........................................................................................ 5-32
5.5.3 GTN Diagnostics Page ......................................................................................................... 5-40
5.5.4 External Systems Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-42
5.6 GROUND CHECKS (CONFIGURATION MODE) .............................................................................. 5-83
5.6.1 Main Indicator Check (Analog Only)................................................................................... 5-83
5.6.2 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator (GTN 650/750 Only) .................................................................... 5-83
5.6.3 Discrete Inputs Checkout ..................................................................................................... 5-84
5.6.4 Discrete Outputs Checkout ................................................................................................... 5-84
5.6.5 HSDB Wiring Checkout ....................................................................................................... 5-85
5.6.6 Crossfill Check (If Dual GTNs Installed) ............................................................................ 5-85
5.6.7 TAWS Audio Check (For Units with TAWS Only) ............................................................ 5-86
5.6.8 GAD 42 Interface Check ...................................................................................................... 5-86
5.6.9 Lighting Bus Interface Check............................................................................................... 5-87
5.6.10 Air/Fuel Data Interface Check.............................................................................................. 5-88
5.6.11 AHRS/IRU Interface Check ................................................................................................. 5-88
5.7 GROUND CHECKS (NORMAL MODE) .......................................................................................... 5-89
5.7.1 Display of Self Test Data ..................................................................................................... 5-89
5.7.2 Signal Acquisition Check ..................................................................................................... 5-90
5.7.3 VHF COM Interference Check ............................................................................................ 5-91
5.7.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 650/750 Only) ......................................................................... 5-92
5.7.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 635/650/750 Only).................................................................. 5-92
5.7.6 GMA 35 Audio Panel Checkout (GTN 7XX Only) ............................................................. 5-92
5.7.7 TAWS System Check (For Units with TAWS Only)........................................................... 5-96
5.7.8 Interface Checks ................................................................................................................... 5-96
5.7.9 GDL 88 Interface Check .................................................................................................... 5-106
5.7.10 Magnetic Compass Check .................................................................................................. 5-106

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page v
 5.7.11 EMI/RFI Check .................................................................................................................. 5-106
5.8 FLIGHT CHECKS ........................................................................................................................ 5-107
5.8.1 GPS Flight Check ............................................................................................................... 5-107
5.8.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 635/650/750) ................................................................... 5-107
5.8.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 650/750) .................................................................................... 5-107
5.8.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 650/750) ...................................................................................... 5-107
5.8.5 Autopilot Flight Check ....................................................................................................... 5-108
5.8.6 TAWS Audio Flight Check (TAWS-equipped Units Only) .............................................. 5-108
5.8.7 Marker Beacon Receiver Flight Check (GMA 35) ............................................................ 5-108
5.9 DATABASE CHECK .................................................................................................................... 5-109
5.10 DOCUMENTATION CHECKS ....................................................................................................... 5-110
5.10.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement .................................................................................. 5-110
5.10.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) ................................................................ 5-110
5.10.3 Checkout Log ..................................................................................................................... 5-110
6 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................... 6-1
7 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Operations .............................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Previous Operational Approvals ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 INSTALLATION LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTN/GMA 35 Unit................................................................... 7-1
7.2.2 Preservation of Previous Systems .......................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the GTN..................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.4 Major Alterations ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.5 Rotorcraft Installation............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.6 Aircraft Radio Station License ............................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.7 GPS/WAAS Antenna Limitations .......................................................................................... 7-2
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................ 8-1
APPENDIX A OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS ..................................... A-1
APPENDIX B INSTALLATION GUIDANCE AND SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS ...... B-1
B.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR GTN 6XX/7XX INSTALLATIONS ............................................................... B-1
B.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GTN 6XX/7XX INSTALLATIONS............................................... B-3
B.3 AVIONICS STACK CUTOUT........................................................................................................... B-5
B.4 MODIFICATION OF AVIONICS STACK MOUNTING RAILS ............................................................. B-5
B.5 FABRICATION OF INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................................................ B-7
B.6 EXAMPLE INSTRUMENT PANEL LAYOUTS WITH GTN 6XX/7XX NAVIGATOR INSTALLATIONS B-8
APPENDIX C GTN EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION ...... C-1
C.1 AUDIO PANEL .............................................................................................................................. C-1
C.2 AIR DATA COMPUTER.................................................................................................................. C-2
C.3 ALTITUDE SERIALIZER OR FUEL/AIR DATA ................................................................................ C-3
C.4 AUTOPILOT .................................................................................................................................. C-4
C.5 EFIS DISPLAYS ............................................................................................................................ C-6

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page vi Rev. 4
 C.6 EHSI ............................................................................................................................................ C-6
C.7 IRU/AHRS................................................................................................................................... C-7
C.8 TRANSPONDER ............................................................................................................................. C-8
C.9 NAV INDICATOR.......................................................................................................................... C-8
C.10 WEATHER, TRAFFIC, AND TERRAIN............................................................................................. C-9
C.11 DME ............................................................................................................................................ C-9
C.12 CDI/HSI SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATORS ......................................................................... C-10
C.13 TAWS ANNUNCIATOR PANELS ................................................................................................. C-11
C.14 MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYS ....................................................................................................... C-11
C.15 INTERFACE ADAPTERS ............................................................................................................... C-11
C.16 SYNCHRO HEADING SOURCES ................................................................................................... C-11
C.17 WEATHER RADAR ...................................................................................................................... C-12
C.18 IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER .............................................................................................................. C-12
C.19 ADS-B TRAFFIC AND FIS-B WEATHER SOURCES ..................................................................... C-12
APPENDIX D GMA 35 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY.............................................. D-1
D.1 COM RADIOS ............................................................................................................................... D-1
D.2 NAV RADIOS ............................................................................................................................... D-1
D.3 OTHER AUDIO SOURCES .............................................................................................................. D-1
APPENDIX E GTN INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS ....................................................... E-1
APPENDIX F GMA 35 INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS ..................................................F-1
APPENDIX G LIGHTNING PROTECTION..................................................................... G-1
G.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION IN METAL AIRCRAFT ........................................................................... G-1
G.1.1 HSDB Weather Radar Interface ............................................................................................ G-1
G.1.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied .................................................................................... G-1
G.1.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure........................................................................................... G-1
G.1.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding ................................................................................................ G-2
G.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR NONMETALLIC AIRCRAFT ............................................................ G-6
APPENDIX H AIRCRAFT MODEL SPECIFIC INFORMATION ................................ H-1
APPENDIX J ACCEPTABLE HARDWARE ..................................................................... J-1

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page vii
 LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1. GTN System Interface Overview ............................................................................................ 1-6
Figure 1-2. GMA 35 System Interface Overview ...................................................................................... 1-7
Figure 1-3. Interface between One GTN and One GTX ............................................................................ 1-8
Figure 1-4. Interface between One GTN and Two GTXs.......................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-5. Interface between Two GTNs and One GTX.......................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-6. Interface Between Two GTNs and Two GTXs ..................................................................... 1-10
Figure 1-7. Interface Between Two GTNs and Two GTXs with TIS Traffic.......................................... 1-10
Figure 2-1. GTN Software Updater Installation ........................................................................................ 2-8
Figure 2-2. System and Software Version ................................................................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-3. GTN Software Loader Card Formatting ................................................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-4. Update Progress Window ...................................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-5. Update Completion ............................................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-6. GPS/WAAS Antenna Mounting Considerations .................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2-7. GPS/WAAS Antenna Minimum Ground Plane Radius ........................................................ 2-21
Figure 2-8. Electrical Bonding Preparation Nut Plate .......................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-9. Electrical Bonding Preparation Bolt/Nut Joint ................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-10. Electrical Bonding Preparation Terminal Lug ................................................................. 2-24
Figure 2-11. Power and Ground Distribution - Single GTN, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lb ......... 2-25
Figure 2-12. Power and Ground Distribution - Dual GTNs, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lb .......... 2-26
Figure 2-13. Power and Ground Distribution - Single GTN, Aircraft Weight Greater Than 6000 lb .... 2-26
Figure 2-14. Power and Ground Distribution - Dual GTNs, Aircraft Weight Greater than 6000 lb ...... 2-27
Figure 2-15. GTN CDI Source Selection Annunciation Field of View (30)........................................ 2-30
Figure 2-16. GTN Unit GPS Navigation Annunciation Field of View (35) ........................................ 2-32
Figure 2-17. TAWS Annunciation Field of View (35) ........................................................................ 2-34
Figure 3-1. GPS/WAAS Antenna Cable Overbraid Installation Details ................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-2. Connector and Backshell Assembly ...................................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-3. Shielded Cable Preparation ................................................................................................... 3-18
Figure 3-4. Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Preferred Method) ......................................... 3-19
Figure 3-5. Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Alternate Method) ......................................... 3-20
Figure 3-6. Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module) ........................................................... 3-24
Figure 3-7. Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer) ................................................... 3-26
Figure 3-8. Fan Wiring Installation.......................................................................................................... 3-28
Figure 3-9. TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1) ......................................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-10. Detail of TVS Pin Assembly ............................................................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-11. TVS 2 Assembly ................................................................................................................. 3-30
Figure 3-12. Coaxial Cable Installation ................................................................................................... 3-32
Figure 3-13. GMA 35 Marker Beacon Coaxial Cable D-Sub Termination ............................................. 3-33
Figure 3-14. Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation ................................................................ 3-37
Figure 3-15. Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements ................................................................. 3-39
Figure 3-16. Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form .............................................................................. 3-41

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page viii Rev. 4
Figure 3-17. Example Electrical Load Tabulation ................................................................................... 3-43
Figure 3-18. Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form ....................................................... 3-44
Figure 3-19. Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation ..................................... 3-45
Figure 5-1. Configuration Mode ................................................................................................................ 5-4
Figure 5-2. Updates Page ........................................................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3. System Information Page ........................................................................................................ 5-6
Figure 5-4. Setup Page ............................................................................................................................... 5-8
Figure 5-5. Main ARINC 429 Configuration Page .................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-6. RS-232 Configuration Page .................................................................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-7. HSDB Ethernet Port Configuration Page .............................................................................. 5-19
Figure 5-8. Interfaced Equipment Configuration Page ............................................................................ 5-20
Figure 5-9. Main Indicator Configuration Page ....................................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-10. Lighting Configuration Page ............................................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-11. Photocell Configuration Page.............................................................................................. 5-24
Figure 5-12. Audio Configuration Page ................................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-13. Traffic Configuration Page.................................................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-15. Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset ................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-14. Main System Configuration Page........................................................................................ 5-26
Figure 5-16. COM Configuration Page.................................................................................................... 5-29
Figure 5-17. VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page ..................................................................................... 5-30
Figure 5-18. GTN Options Configuration Page ....................................................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-19. TAWS Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-32
Figure 5-20. TAWS Audio Configuration Page ...................................................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-21. TAWS Configuration Page ................................................................................................. 5-36
Figure 5-22. Chart Configuration Page .................................................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-23. COM Transmit Power Configuration Page ......................................................................... 5-38
Figure 5-24. Weather Radar Enable Page ................................................................................................ 5-39
Figure 5-25. GTN Diagnostics Page ........................................................................................................ 5-40
Figure 5-26. External Systems Configuration Page ................................................................................. 5-42
Figure 5-27. Stormscope Page ................................................................................................................. 5-43
Figure 5-28. Stormscope Configuration Page .......................................................................................... 5-43
Figure 5-29. Stormscope Test Page ......................................................................................................... 5-44
Figure 5-30. Traffic Test Page ................................................................................................................. 5-44
Figure 5-31. GAD 42 Configuration Page ............................................................................................... 5-46
Figure 5-32. Remote XPDR Configuration Page..................................................................................... 5-47
Figure 5-33. Remote XPDR Inputs/Outputs Page ................................................................................... 5-47
Figure 5-34. Remote XPDR Configuration page ..................................................................................... 5-55
Figure 5-35. Remote XPDR Audio Configuration page .......................................................................... 5-58
Figure 5-36. Audio Panel Configuration Page ......................................................................................... 5-60
Figure 5-37. Audio Panel Configuration Page (Volume) ........................................................................ 5-63
Figure 5-38. Audio Panel Configuration Page (Squelch) ........................................................................ 5-64

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page ix
Figure 5-39. Connected Radios Configuration page ................................................................................ 5-65
Figure 5-40. GDL 88 Faults Page ............................................................................................................ 5-66
Figure 5-41. GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page .................................................................................. 5-67
Figure 5-42. GDL 88 Antenna Configuration Page ................................................................................. 5-70
Figure 5-43. GDL 88 Audio Configuration ............................................................................................. 5-71
Figure 5-44. GDL 88 ARINC 429 Configuration Page ........................................................................... 5-72
Figure 5-45. GDL 88 RS-232 Port Configuration ................................................................................... 5-74
Figure 5-46. GDL 88 Ethernet Configuration Page ................................................................................. 5-76
Figure 5-47. Roll Trim Configuration in Normal Mode .......................................................................... 5-79
Figure 5-48. Discrete Inputs Page ............................................................................................................ 5-84
Figure 5-49. Discrete Outputs Page ......................................................................................................... 5-84
Figure 5-50. HSDB Diagnostics Page...................................................................................................... 5-85
Figure 5-51. Audio Configuration Page ................................................................................................... 5-86
Figure 5-52. GAD 42 Configuration Page ............................................................................................... 5-86
Figure 5-53. Lighting Bus Configuration Page ........................................................................................ 5-87
Figure 5-54. Main Data Inputs Page ........................................................................................................ 5-88
Figure A-1. GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity ......................................................................... A-2
Figure A-2. GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly Overview ..................................................................... A-3
Figure A-3. GTN 6XX Dimensions and Center of Gravity ...................................................................... A-4
Figure A-4. GTN 650 Mounting Rack Assembly ..................................................................................... A-5
Figure A-5. GTN 7XX Dimensions and Center of Gravity ...................................................................... A-6
Figure A-6. GTN 750 Mounting Rack Assembly ..................................................................................... A-7
Figure A-7. GTN 750 with GMA 35 Installation Dimensions and Center of Gravity.............................. A-8
Figure A-8. GTN 750 with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly.............................................................. A-9
Figure A-9. Panel Cutout Detail ............................................................................................................. A-10
Figure A-10. GTN 6XX/7XX Mounting Rack Tab Alignment Detail ................................................... A-11
Figure A-11. GMA 35 Connector Layout Detail .................................................................................... A-13
Figure A-12. GTN 6XX Connector Layout DetailRear View ............................................................ A-15
Figure A-13. GTN 7XX Connector Layout DetailRear View ............................................................ A-15
Figure B-1. GTN 6XX/7XX Instrument Panel Installation Decision Tree ............................................... B-2
Figure B-2. GTN 6XX/7XX Mounting Rack Plate Support ..................................................................... B-4
Figure B-3. Avionics Rack Mounting Rail Considerations ...................................................................... B-6
Figure B-4. GTN 6XX and GTN 7XX Example Installation ................................................................... B-8
Figure B-5. GTN 6XX Example Installation ............................................................................................ B-8
Figure B-6. GTN 7XX Example Installation ............................................................................................ B-8
Figure E-1. GTN System Interface Diagram ............................................................................................ E-3
Figure E-2. GTN 650/750 Typical Installation Interconnect .................................................................... E-4
Figure E-3. GTN 625/725 Typical Installation Interconnect .................................................................... E-6
Figure E-4. GTN Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect ................................................................. E-7
Figure E-5. GTN 6XX/7XX PFD/MFD Interconnect.......................................................................... E-10
Figure E-6. GTN 6XX/7XX ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect .............................................................. E-12

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page x Rev. 4
Figure E-7. External Navigation Source Selection Annunciator Interconnect ....................................... E-15
Figure E-8. GTN 6XX/7XX CDI Interconnect .................................................................................... E-19
Figure E-9. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King KI 209A Interconnect ....................................................... E-22
Figure E-10. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King KI 208A Interconnect ..................................................... E-23
Figure E-11. GTN 6XX/7XX VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect.......................................................... E-25
Figure E-12. GTN 6XX/7XX Transponder Interconnect .................................................................... E-27
Figure E-13. GTN 6XX/7XX Traffic Sources Interconnect ................................................................ E-31
Figure E-14. GTN 6XX/7XX Audio Panel Interconnect ........................................................................ E-35
Figure E-15. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather/Terrain Interconnect .............................................................. E-39
Figure E-16. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather Radar Interconnect................................................................. E-41
Figure E-17. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 69/69A Interconnect ................................................................... E-44
Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect .............................................................................. E-45
Figure E-19. GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS Annunciators Interconnect ....................................................... E-51
Figure E-20. GTN 6XX/7XX Switch Interconnect (Optional) ............................................................... E-53
Figure E-21. GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 Interconnect ............................................................................ E-55
Figure E-22. GTN 6XX/7XX GAD 42 Interconnect ........................................................................... E-57
Figure E-23. GTN 6XX/7XX Air Data/AHRS Computer Interconnect .............................................. E-59
Figure E-24. GTN 650/750 RMI Interconnect..................................................................................... E-61
Figure E-25. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3500 Interconnect ................................................................ E-62
Figure E-26. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3308 Interconnect ................................................................ E-63
Figure E-27. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs Interconnect ..................................................... E-65
Figure E-28. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs and Two SN3308s Interconnect ....................... E-67
Figure E-29. GTN 650/750 Bendix King DME Interconnect .............................................................. E-69
Figure E-30. GTN 650/750 DME Interconnect ................................................................................... E-71
Figure E-31. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King Autopilot Interconnect .................................................... E-72
Figure E-32. GTN 6XX/7XX Century Autopilot Interconnect ........................................................... E-75
Figure E-33. GTN 6XX/7XX Cessna Autopilot Interconnect ............................................................. E-77
Figure E-34. GTN 6XX/7XX Collins Autopilot Interconnect ............................................................. E-78
Figure E-35. GTN 6XX/7XX S-TEC Interconnect.............................................................................. E-80
Figure E-36. GTN 7XX Heading Synchro Interconnect...................................................................... E-83
Figure E-37. GTN GTN Crossfill Interconnect ................................................................................... E-84
Figure E-38. GTN 6XX/7XX - GSR 56 Interconnect............................................................................. E-85
Figure E-39. GTN 6XX/7XX GDU 620 Interconnect ......................................................................... E-86
Figure E-40. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 88/88D Interconnect ................................................................... E-88
Figure E-41. GTN 6XX/7XX Sperry Autopilot Interconnect .............................................................. E-90
Figure F-1. GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect ..................................................................................... F-2
Figure F-2. GMA 35 Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect .......................................................... F-4
Figure F-3. GMA 35 Headset Interconnect ........................................................................................... F-5
Figure F-4. GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect....................................................................... F-7
Figure F-5. GMA 35 Discrete Interconnect ........................................................................................... F-9

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page xi
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page xii Rev. 4
 LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-3. Pre-Installation Checklist ....................................................................................................... 1-12
Table 1-4. GTN 6XX/7XX and GMA 35 Environmental Qualification Forms ...................................... 1-13
Table 1-5. GTN and GMA 35 Current Specifications ............................................................................. 1-13
Table 1-6. Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX Reference Documentation .............................................................. 1-14
Table 1-7. Garmin GMA 35 Reference Documentation .......................................................................... 1-14
Table 1-8. Other Reference Documentation ............................................................................................ 1-14
Table 1-9. Garmin Product Reference Documentation ............................................................................ 1-15
Table 1-10. GPS/WAAS Antennas .......................................................................................................... 1-16
Table 1-11. GTN Database Summary ...................................................................................................... 1-17
Table 2-1. GTN 6XX/7XX Unit Part Numbers ......................................................................................... 2-1
Table 2-2. GTN Options Available ............................................................................................................ 2-1
Table 2-3. Optional GMA 35 Unit Part Numbers ...................................................................................... 2-1
Table 2-4. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00811-50 Accessories .............................................................. 2-2
Table 2-5. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00812-50 Accessories .............................................................. 2-2
Table 2-6. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00813-50 Accessories .............................................................. 2-2
Table 2-7. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00819-50 Accessories .............................................................. 2-3
Table 2-8. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00820-50 Accessories .............................................................. 2-3
Table 2-9. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00889-50 Accessories .............................................................. 2-3
Table 2-10. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00890-50 Accessories ............................................................ 2-4
Table 2-11. Optional GMA 35 Installation Kit P/N 010-00831-01 Accessories ....................................... 2-4
Table 2-12. Replacement Fan Part Numbers ............................................................................................. 2-4
Table 2-13. Accessories Required but Not Supplied ................................................................................. 2-5
Table 2-14. Recommended Crimp Tools ................................................................................................. 2-11
Table 3-1. GA 35 Antenna ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Table 3-2. GA 36 Antenna ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Table 3-3. GA 37 Antenna ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-4. Miscellaneous Options - Other ................................................................................................. 3-2
Table 3-5. LRU Weights .......................................................................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-6. Sample Aircraft Weight and Balance Calculation .................................................................. 3-12
Table 3-7. Socket Contact Part Numbers [1] ........................................................................................... 3-14
Table 3-8. GTN Backshell Assembly ...................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-9. GMA 35 Backshell Assembly ................................................................................................ 3-16
Table 3-10. Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart ............................................................ 3-23
Table 3-11. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03 (P1001) ............................................................... 3-23
Table 3-12. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-00 (P1001) ............................................................... 3-25
Table 3-13. Fan Kit .................................................................................................................................. 3-27
Table 3-14. Fan Cable Wire Color Reference Chart ................................................................................ 3-27
Table 3-15. Autopilot Coupling Limitations............................................................................................ 3-47
Table 5-1. ARINC 429 Speed Selections................................................................................................... 5-9
Table 5-2. ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections .......................................................................................... 5-10

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page xiii
Table 5-3. ARINC 429 DATA OUT Selections ...................................................................................... 5-12
Table 5-4. SDI Selections ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
Table 5-5. RS-232 Channel Input Selections ........................................................................................... 5-14
Table 5-6. RS-232 Channel Output Selections ........................................................................................ 5-17
Table 5-7. GPS Selected Course .............................................................................................................. 5-21
Table 5-8. VLOC Selected Course .......................................................................................................... 5-22
Table 5-9. V-Flag State ............................................................................................................................ 5-22
Table 5-10. Display and Key Lighting Adjustable Fields........................................................................ 5-23
Table 5-11. Air/Ground Discrete Configurations .................................................................................... 5-26
Table 5-12 . Fuel Type ............................................................................................................................. 5-27
Table 5-13. Synchro Heading Input (GTN 7XX Only) ........................................................................... 5-27
Table 5-14. GPS Select ............................................................................................................................ 5-27
Table 5-15. Heading Source Input ........................................................................................................... 5-28
Table 5-16. Altitude Source Input............................................................................................................ 5-28
Table 5-17. Voice Command (software version 3.00 or later) ................................................................ 5-28
Table 5-18. ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (TX)................................................................................ 5-30
Table 5-19. SDI........................................................................................................................................ 5-30
Table 5-20. DME Mode ........................................................................................................................... 5-30
Table 5-21. DME Channel Mode............................................................................................................. 5-31
Table 5-22. NCR-CAUTION Field ......................................................................................................... 5-33
Table 5-23. EDR-CAUTION Field.......................................................................................................... 5-33
Table 5-24. PDA-CAUTION Field.......................................................................................................... 5-33
Table 5-25. IOI-CAUTION Field ............................................................................................................ 5-33
Table 5-26. ROC-CAUTION Field ......................................................................................................... 5-34
Table 5-27. ITI-CAUTION Field............................................................................................................. 5-34
Table 5-28. RTC-CAUTION Field .......................................................................................................... 5-34
Table 5-29. IOI-WARNING Field ........................................................................................................... 5-34
Table 5-30. ROC-WARNING Field ........................................................................................................ 5-34
Table 5-31. ITI-WARNING Field ........................................................................................................... 5-35
Table 5-32. RTC-WARNING Field......................................................................................................... 5-35
Table 5-33. EDR-WARNING Field ........................................................................................................ 5-35
Table 5-34. VCO-WARNING Field ........................................................................................................ 5-35
Table 5-35. TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data ..................................................................... 5-36
Table 5-36. RS-232 Channel 1 Inputs...................................................................................................... 5-47
Table 5-37. RS-232 Channel 1 Outputs ................................................................................................... 5-47
Table 5-38. RS-232 Channel 2 Inputs...................................................................................................... 5-48
Table 5-39. RS-232 Channel 2 Outputs ................................................................................................... 5-48
Table 5-40. RS-232 Baud Rate Selections ............................................................................................... 5-49
Table 5-41. RS-232 Parity Selections ...................................................................................................... 5-49
Table 5-42. ARINC 429 Speed Selections............................................................................................... 5-49
Table 5-43. ARINC 429 Input Selections ................................................................................................ 5-50

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page xiv Rev. 4
Table 5-44. AHRS Labels ........................................................................................................................ 5-50
Table 5-45. Air Data Computer (ADC) Labels........................................................................................ 5-51
Table 5-46. EFIS Display System (EFIS/ADC) Labels ........................................................................... 5-51
Table 5-47. GPS/FMS Navigation System (GPS) Labels........................................................................ 5-52
Table 5-48. Garmin Display Labels ......................................................................................................... 5-52
Table 5-49. Garmin TAS Labels .............................................................................................................. 5-52
Table 5-50. AFCS Labels ........................................................................................................................ 5-52
Table 5-51. Garmin Format Output Labels (1) ........................................................................................ 5-53
Table 5-52. Garmin Format Output Labels (2) ........................................................................................ 5-54
Table 5-53. Aircraft Weight ..................................................................................................................... 5-55
Table 5-54. Air/Ground Logic ................................................................................................................. 5-56
Table 5-55. Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 only) ..................................................................................... 5-56
Table 5-56. Address Type (GTX 33 only) ............................................................................................... 5-56
Table 5-58. GDL 88 Air/Ground Discrete Configurations ...................................................................... 5-69
Table 5-59. ARINC 429 RECEIVE Selections ....................................................................................... 5-73
Table 5-60. ARINC 429 TRANSMIT Selections .................................................................................... 5-73
Table 5-61. ARINC 429 SPEED Selections ............................................................................................ 5-73
Table 5-62. RS-232 INPUT Selections .................................................................................................... 5-75
Table 5-63. RS-232 OUTPUT Selections ................................................................................................ 5-75
Table 5-65. Marker Beacon Annunciator Light Duration ...................................................................... 5-109
Table 5-66. GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log ................................................................................. 5-111
Table C-1. Compatible Audio Panel Models ............................................................................................ C-1
Table C-2. Compatible Air Data Computer Models ................................................................................. C-2
Table C-3. Compatible Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data Models ....................................................... C-3
Table C-4. Compatible Autopilot Models................................................................................................. C-5

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page xv
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page xYL Rev. 4
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
This manual is written for software version 2.00 or later. The software version and information in this
document are subject to change without notice. Visit the Dealer Resource Center on Garmins website
(www.garmin.com) for current updates and supplemental information concerning the operation of this
and other Garmin products.
This manual describes the physical, mechanical, and electrical characteristics as well as instructions,
conditions, and limitations for installation and approval of the GTN 6XX and 7XX navigators as well as
the optional GMA 35. The GTN AML STC SA02019SE-D applies to the optional GMA 35 audio panel
as well as the GTN 625/635/650 and GTN 725/750.
1.2 Terminology
Except where specifically noted, references made to the GTN will equally apply to the
GTN 625/635/650/725/750. In addition, GTN 7XX refers specifically to the GTN 725 and GTN 750,
and GTN 6XX refers specifically to the GTN 625, GTN 635, and GTN 650.
Throughout this document references will be made to metallic and nonmetallic aircraft. For the
purposes of this installation manual, metal aircraft will be those with an aluminum skin. Nonmetallic
aircraft will refer to all other aircraft (e.g., wooden aircraft, aircraft with composite skin, or aircraft with
tube and fabric construction).
SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System) refers to a system that supports wide-area augmentation
through the use of broadcast messages from satellites to improve the GPS navigation system accuracy.
SBAS is a general term used to describe systems such as WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) and
EGNOS (European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service).

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-1
1.3 Scope
This installation manual applies to the modification of an aircraft under AML STC SA02019SE-D to
install the equipment described in Table 1-1. Interfaces between the equipment listed in the second
column and the GTN and/or GMA 35 are covered by STC SA02019SE-D.

Table 1-1. Scope of STC SA02019SE-D

Equipment Installation Covered by STC Equipment Installation NOT Covered by STC

SA02019SE-D SA02019SE-D

GTN 625 GPS/SBAS Antenna(s)

GTN 635 VHF COM Antenna(s)
GTN 650 VHF NAV Antenna(s)
GTN 725 Marker Beacon Antenna
GTN 750 Equipment listed in Appendix C (except
those listed in the left column of this table)
GMA 35
Equipment listed in Appendix D (except
NAV Antenna Cable Splitter those listed in the left column of this table)
NAV Antenna Cable Diplexer
Equipment necessary to support
installation of the equipment above, such
as the installation kit accessories
(Section 2.3.1) and the wiring and circuit
breakers shown in Appendix E and
Appendix F.

This STC approves the interface to the equipment listed in Appendices C and D. However, this STC
assumes that these devices are existing. Additional airworthiness approval beyond this STC will be
required to install these devices.
This STC is applicable for implementation in Part 23 aircraft that are on the Approved Model List (AML).
Only the equipment and systems interfaces described in this manual have been determined to be mutually
compatible and operationally suitable; these are approved for use as characterized herein.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-2 Rev. 4
1.3.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems Not Covered by the STC
Aircraft identified on the Approved Model List have been determined to meet a minimum required
configuration for applicability of the STC. However, since some of these aircraft may have been modified
over the years or may have been manufactured with systems which are not identified or approved in this
manual for integration with the GTN, it may be difficult to use the data herein to completely substantiate
the installation in compliance with the STC. It is the installers responsibility to make the final
determination of applicability for each aircraft. Use this manual to assess each installation prior to
modifying any Type Certified aircraft to ensure the applicability of the GTN AML STC.
It is possible/permissible for installers and other appropriately certificated persons to seek FAA approval
for installation and operational use of the GTN equipment with systems not identified in this manual, such
as for aircraft certificated under 14 CFR parts 25, 27, or 29, by means of a field approval, STC, or TC.
Refer to FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 20-138( ) and other applicable guidance when applying for
installation and operational approval. AC 21-40 provides guidance for the STC approval process and
AC 43-210 provides guidance for the field approval process. If the field approval process is used, it is
advisable to consider the conditions and stipulations in FAA Flight Standards Information Bulletin for
Airworthiness (FSAW), 94-32c, Guidance for Performing Field Approvals of Installation and
Operational Use of Global Positioning Systems (GPS) or GPS with Wide Area Augmentation Systems
(GPS/SBAS), Referred to as Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS) Equipment, as revised.
1.3.2 Part 23 Aircraft Not Identified on the AML
Aircraft identified in AC 23.1309-1D as Class I, II, III, or IV airplanes which are not identified on the
GTN AML STC may be valid candidates for installation of the GTN/GMA 35. Installers should contact
Garmin Tech Support with detailed drawings of the aircrafts proposed installation. Engineering analysis
may allow for the inclusion of these aircraft in a future revision of the FAA Approved Model List. Also,
data provided in this manual may be used to perform the alteration but additional FAA approval is
required.
1.3.3 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the AML
Transport Category Aircraft (Part 25), and Rotorcraft (Part 27/29) are not part of this GTN AML STC.
However, these aircraft may be valid candidates for installation of this system. Installers may contact
Garmin for possible additional information that may support an installation of this type. Data provided in
this manual may be used to perform the alteration but additional FAA approval is required.
1.3.4 Required Documentation for All Installations
Regardless of applicability of the AML STC or alternative field approval application for installation and
operational approval, the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the cognizant
aviation authority. An example would be submission of an FAA Form 337; Major Repair and Alteration
Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance to the appropriate FAA Flight Standards District Office
describing the work accomplished. The FAA Form 337 must detail the equipment and systems to which
the respective GTN System is interfaced and reflect appropriately approved or acceptable data for which
any follow-on FAA Field Approval is being sought. See AC 43.9-1F for instructions for completing the
FAA Form 337. In addition, the Configuration and Checkout Log must be completed and attached with
the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness such that any aircraft with the modifications detailed in this
manual may be properly maintained.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-3
1.4 GTN/GMA 35 System Overview
The GTN WAAS navigators are a family of aviation panel mounted retro-fit products that are intended to
supersede the Garmin 400/500 WAAS series GPS, GPS/COM, and GPS/NAV/COM retro-fit products.
The GTN 6XX product family consists of the GTN 625 GPS/SBAS navigator, the GTN 635
GPS/SBAS/COM navigator, and the GTN 650 GPS/SBAS/NAV/COM navigator. The GTN 7XX product
family consists of the GTN 725 GPS/SBAS navigator, and the GTN 750 GPS/SBAS/NAV/COM
navigator. See Appendix E for an overview of the system interfaces to the GTN unit.
The optional GMA 35 audio panel is both a marker beacon receiver and an audio panel with 6-place
intercom that interfaces to the GTN 7XX, communications and navigation radios, headsets, microphones,
and speakers. The GMA 35 is feature-rich, but is similar in basic function to the GMA 340 and GMA 347
audio panels, except that the GMA 35 is remote-mounted and relies upon the GTN 725 or GTN 750 to
control and display the audio functions. The GTN 7XX controls and displays the functions of the
GMA 35 via digital interface.
1.4.1 GTN Unit Descriptions
Table 1-2 shows the attributes of each GTN unit.

Table 1-2. Attributes of GTN Units

GTN 625 GTN 635 GTN 650 GTN 725 GTN 750

GPS/SBAS
COM Radio
NAV Radio
GMA 35 Control

1.4.1.1 GTN 7XX Series Description

The GTN (Garmin Touch Navigation) 7XX WAAS navigators are a family of GPS/NAV/COM aviation
panel-mounted products that supersede the Garmin 500W Series GPS/NAV/COM navigators. The
GTN 7XX series units include the GTN 725 and GTN 750. The GTN 7XX units are 6.25 inches wide and
6.00 inches tall. They feature a 600 by 708 pixel color LCD touchscreen which provides a rich and
intuitive user interface. The GTN 725 is a GPS/SBAS unit that meets the requirements of Technical
Standard Order (TSO)-C146c and may be approved for IFR en route, terminal, oceanic, non-precision,
and precision approach operations when installed in accordance with the instructions in the manuals
referenced in the GTN AML STC. The GTN 750 includes all of the features of the GTN 725 in addition
to an airborne VHF communications transceiver and airborne VOR/localizer (LOC) and glideslope (G/S)
receivers. The GTN 725 and 750 also have the ability to remotely control GMA 35 audio panel functions.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-4 Rev. 4
1.4.1.2 GTN 6XX Series Description
The GTN 6XX WAAS navigators are a family of panel-mounted products that supersede the 400W series
GPS/NAV/COM navigators. The GTN 6XX series units include the GTN 625, GTN 635, and GTN 650.
They are 6.25 inches wide and 2.65 inches tall. The GTN 6XX features a 600 by 266 pixel color LCD
touchscreen. The GTN 625 is a GPS/SBAS unit that meets the requirements of Technical Standard Order
(TSO)-C146c and may be approved for IFR en route, terminal, Oceanic, non-precision, and precision
approach operations when installed in accordance with the instructions in the manuals referenced in the
GTN AML STC. The GTN 635 includes all of the features of the GTN 625 in addition to an airborne
VHF communications transceiver. The GTN 650 includes all of the features of the GTN 625 in addition
to an airborne VHF communications transceiver and airborne VOR/localizer (LOC) and glideslope (G/S)
receivers.
1.4.2 GMA 35 Audio Panel Description (Optional)
The GMA 35 is a remote mounted audio panel that interfaces via RS-232 to the GTN 7XX for control and
display of audio panel functions. The system delivers reliability and versatility for all audio controlling
functions. The GMA 35 can be optionally installed with the GTN 7XX. With the increased size of the
GTN 7XX over the previous 500W series GPS/SBAS navigator, the 7XX has the option of incorporating
the audio panel into a much more intuitive touch-screen interface.
Additionally, the GMA 35 includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) with electronic cabin noise de-
emphasis, two stereo music inputs, and independent pilot, copilot, and passenger volume controls. To
further simplify cockpit workload, the intercom provides three selectable isolation modes. A pilot-
selectable cabin speaker output can be used to listen to the selected aircraft radios or to broadcast PA
announcements.
The GMA 35 also includes a marker beacon receiver with dual sensitivity and audio muting with
automatic re-arming.
Features Summary
User-friendly, intuitive control via the GTN 7XX touchscreen navigator
Six position intercom: pilot, copilot, and four passengers
3D Audio
Three stereo headset amplifiers: one for pilot, one for copilot, and one for the passengers
Two stereo music source inputs
Three selectable intercom operational modes
Independent pilot, copilot, and passenger volume controls
Individual VOX circuits for each of six (6) mic inputs
Automatic selection of radio audio source when corresponding mic is selected
Split COM transceiver function. Copilot may transmit and receive on COM2 while pilot transmits
and receives on COM1
COM swap function
TX indication via GTN 7XX
Speaker output for radios or PA function
Power-off fail-safe to connect Pilot PTT, mic, and Headset to COM1 if unit is turned off or loses
power
Power loss fail-safe warning audio

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-5
1.4.3 GTN Interface Summary
The GTN utilizes ARINC 429, RS-232, discrete inputs/outputs, and Garmin High Speed Data Bus
(HSDB) interfaces to communicate with other LRUs and Systems on the aircraft. A summary of the GTN
interfaces are shown in Figure 1-1. For more detail, refer to Appendix E.

NAV Antenna COM Antenna

GTN 650/750 Only GTN 635/650/750 Only

GPS/WAAS
Air Data Antenna

Fuel
Management
System

Altitude Encoder

Crossfill
Transponder Garmin (from another
GTN)
GTN 6XX/7XX
Switches/
Autopilot Annunciators

Traffic System Audio Panel

Lightning PFD/MFD
Detection

Datalink
(XM Radio, CDI/HSI
NEXRAD, etc.)

Weather Radar* DME

GDL 88* GSR 56*

*GTN Software Version 3.00 or later

Figure 1-1. GTN System Interface Overview

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-6 Rev. 4
1.4.4 GMA 35 Interface Summary
A summary of the GMA 35 interfaces is shown in Figure 1-2.

Marker Beacon
GTN 7XX Control RS-232 Antenna
Head

COM 1
Transceiver

COM 2 Cockpit Speaker

Transceiver

COM 3
Transceiver
Pilot/Copilot
Garmin Headsets (x 2)
NAV 1 Radio
GMA 35
Audio Panel
Passenger
NAV 2 Radio Headset (x 4)

Unswitched,
DME Radio Unmuted Audio
Input (x 4)

ADF Radio Music Input (x 2)

Marker Beacon
Telephone Audio Annunciators

Figure 1-2. GMA 35 System Interface Overview

The GMA 35 utilizes RS-232, discrete inputs/outputs, and analog audio inputs/outputs to communicate
with other systems on the aircraft. For more detail, refer to Appendix F.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-7
1.5 GTN/GMA 35 Installation Overview
Always follow acceptable avionics installation practices per AC 43.13-1B, AC 43.13-2B, or later FAA
approved revisions of these documents. The GPS/SBAS installation instructions have been prepared to
meet the guidance material contained in AC 20-138A, Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation
Satellite System (GNSS) Equipment. The communications installation instructions have been prepared
to meet the guidance material defined by AC 20-67B, Airborne VHF Communications Equipment
Installations. Follow the installation procedure in this section, as it is presented, to accomplish a
successful installation. Read the entire section before beginning the work.
Prior to installation, consider the structural integrity of the GTN/GMA 35 installation as defined in
Section 3.4. Complete an electrical load analysis in accordance with the instructions in Section 3.6.8 on
the aircraft prior to starting the modification to ensure the aircraft has the ability to carry the additional
GTN and optional GMA 35 electrical load. Once the installation is complete, perform the post installation
checkout described in Chapter 5 before closing the work area in case problems occur.
1.5.1 GTN/GTX Installation Overview
This section contains considerations for connecting GTN units with the GTX 32/33/327/328/330
transponders. The GTN utilizes RS-232 to communicate with the GTX transponders. If GTN control of
the transponder is desired, see Section 1.5.1.1 for more information. If GTN control of the GTX 327 or
330 is not desired, see Section 1.5.1.2 for more information.
Pressure altitude is transmitted from the GTN to the GTX over the RS-232 connections discussed below.
Pressure altitude is not transmitted from the GTX to the GTN over these RS-232 connections (except for
some GTX 327 installations, see Section 1.5.1.1 for more information). For this reason, it is
recommended that the aircrafts pressure altitude source be connected directly to the GTN.
If there is only one GTN and one GTX, they communicate over a direct RS-232 connection as shown in
Figure 1-3.

RS232
GTN 6XX/7XX GTX 3X/3XX

Figure 1-3. Interface between One GTN and One GTX

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-8 Rev. 4
If there are two GTX units, they must both be connected to the GTN as shown in Figure 1-4. In this case,
the GTN can control both GTX #1 and GTX #2.

GTX 3X/3XX
#1
RS232

GTN 6XX/7XX

RS232

GTX 3X/3XX
#2

Figure 1-4. Interface between One GTN and Two GTXs

Similarly, to connect one GTX to dual GTNs, each of the GTNs needs to have an RS-232 connection to
the single GTX as shown in Figure 1-5. In this case, both GTN #1 and GTN #2 can control the
transponder.

GTN 6XX/7XX RS232

#1

HSDB GTX 3X/3XX

GTN 6XX/7XX
#2 RS232

Figure 1-5. Interface between Two GTNs and One GTX

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-9
If there are two GTXs connected to dual GTNs, GTN #1 should be connected to GTX #1 and GTN #2
should be connected to GTX #2 as shown in Figure 1-6. In this configuration, each of the GTN units is
capable of controlling either GTX through the HSDB interface.

GTN 6XX/7XX RS232 GTX 3X/3XX

#1 #1

HSDB

GTN 6XX/7XX GTX 3X/3XX

#2 RS232 #2

Figure 1-6. Interface Between Two GTNs and Two GTXs

To enable TIS traffic for the combination of two GTXs connected to dual GTNs, each of the GTX units
must be connected to both GTNs because the TIS data is not transmitted over HSDB. Also, only the
GTX 33 and the GTX 330 are capable of receiving TIS traffic data. This arrangement is shown in
Figure 1-7. The pressure altitude source must also be connected to both GTNs.

GTN 6XX/7XX RS232 GTX 33/330

#1 RS232
#1

HSDB

RS232

GTN 6XX/7XX GTX 33/330

#2 RS232 #2

Figure 1-7. Interface Between Two GTNs and Two GTXs with TIS Traffic

1.5.1.1 Installation with GTN Control of GTX Transponder

When connected to a GTX 32/33/327/328/330, the GTN can control the transponder as well as transmit
pressure altitude (if a pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN). GTN and GTX configuration
settings can be found in Section C.8 and Figure E-12, respectively.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-10 Rev. 4
1.5.1.2 Installation without GTN Control of GTX Transponder
The GTX 327, 328, and 330 can be connected to the GTN without allowing the GTN to control the
transponder functions. GTN and GTX configuration settings can be found in Section C.8 and
Figure E-12, respectively.
If the GTN is not set to control the GTX 327, the interface to the GTX 327 is not required. However, the
GTN can send GPS groundspeed to the transponder. Also, if the GTN is not controlling the GTX 327, the
GTN can optionally receive pressure altitude from the GTX 327.

NOTE

When the GTN is not controlling the GTX 327 transponder, pressure altitude data is not
sent from the GTN to the GTX 327. Instead, the pressure altitude source must be
connected to the transponder.

For the GTX 330, TIS traffic can still be sent to the GTN even if the GTN is not controlling the
transponder. If GTN control of the GTX 330 and display of TIS traffic from the transponder on the GTN
is not desired, GPS position, track, and velocity can still be sent to the transponder.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-11
1.5.2 Pre-Installation Checklist
Before beginning a GTN/GMA 35 installation, it is important to ensure the aircraft meets the pre-
requisites for the installation of the GTN system under this STC. The following checklist is provided to
help the installer determine the necessary requirements that must be met before beginning installation of
the GTN in a specific aircraft. Ensure each of the items outlined are completed as necessary before
beginning the modification.

Table 1-3. Pre-Installation Checklist

Complete
GTN 625

GTN 635

GTN 650

GTN 725

GTN 750

GMA 35
Item Reference

MDL (P/N 005-00533-C0)

Aircraft is on Approved Model List (AML)
Sections 1.4, 1.5, 1.6
Acceptable mounting provisions have
been identified for GTN
Appendix B
Acceptable mounting provisions have
been identified for GMA 35
Appendix B
Acceptable GPS/SBAS antenna installed Section 1.7
NAV antenna installed Section 2.4.4.6
COM antenna installed Section 2.4.4.6
Marker beacon antenna installed for
GMA 35 installations
Section 2.4.4.6.2
External annunciations supplied if
required for IFR installations
Section 2.4.10.1
Planned equipment interfaces are
Appendix C,
approved under the STC or have other
Appendix D
FAA Approval
Installation/operational limitations
reviewed to ensure no adverse impact to Section 7
the installation
Aircraft electrical system is sufficient for
GTN and optional GMA 35 installation
Section 3.7
External CDI for IFR installations Section 2.4.1.2
Second GPS navigator, COM radio, or
NAV radio for IFR Installations
Section 2.4.1.2
Section 2.3.2.4,
Determination of applicable lightning Section 2.4.1.2,
protection needed for each aircraft model Section 2.4.1.3,
Appendix G

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-12 Rev. 4
1.6 Technical Specifications
For GTN 6XX technical specifications, see GTN 625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual, P/N 190-01004-02.
For GTN 7XX technical specifications, see GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual, P/N 190-01007-02.
1.6.1 Environmental Qualification Forms
The latest revision of the Environmental Qualification Forms for the GTN 6XX and 7XX as well as the
GMA 35 are available directly from Garmin under the part numbers listed in Table 1-4.

Table 1-4. GTN 6XX/7XX and GMA 35 Environmental Qualification Forms

Document Garmin Part Number

GTN 625/635/650 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00532-13
GTN 725/750 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00533-13
GMA 35 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00567-01

To obtain a copy of these forms, see the Dealer Resource Center on Garmins website.
1.6.2 Power Requirements
The GTN and GMA 35 are capable of operating at either 14 or 28 VDC. See the individual
GTN 6XX/7XX or GMA 35 Environmental Qualification Forms for details on surge ratings and
minimum/maximum operating voltages. See Table 1-5 for current draw specifications.

Table 1-5. GTN and GMA 35 Current Specifications

14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw

LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GTN 625, 635, 650
1.6 A [1] 2.8 A [2] 0.8 A [1] 1.5 A [2]
(Main Connector)
GTN 635, 650 2.33 A (16W COM)
0.45 A 4.02 A (10W COM) 0.21 A
(COM Connector) 1.76 A (10W COM)
GTN 650
0.60 A 1.16 A [2] 0.30 A 0.58 A [2]
(NAV Connector)
GTN 725, 750
2.4 A [1] 3.4 A [2] 1.2 A [1] 1.8 A [2]
(Main Connector)
GTN 750 2.33 A (16W COM)
0.45 A 4.02 A (10W COM) 0.21 A
(COM Connector) 1.76 A (10W COM)
GTN 750
0.60 A 1.16 A [2] 0.30 A 0.58 A [2]
(NAV Connector)
GMA 35 0.80 A 1.50 A 0.40 A 1.0 A
[1] The specified current draw is with the display backlight set to 100% and the fan operating
at low speed. If the superflags are connected, their current draw must be added in
addition to the specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA each regardless
of the GTNs input voltage.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-13
 [2] The specified current draw does not include the superflags. If connected, their current
draw must be added to the specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA
each regardless of the GTNs input voltage.

1.6.3 System Documentation

Table 1-6. Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX Reference Documentation

Document Garmin P/N

Master Drawing List, GTN 6XX/7XX 005-00533-C0
Equipment List, GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC 005-00533-C1
GTN 6XX/7XX Series Training Software 006-A0411-00
GTN 625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual 190-01004-02
GTN 625/635/650 Pilots Guide 190-01004-03
GTN 625/635/650 Cockpit Reference Guide 190-01004-04
GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual 190-01007-02
GTN 725/750 and GMA 35 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03
GTN 725/750 Cockpit Reference Guide 190-01007-04
GTN 6XX/7XX System Maintenance Manual, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC 190-01007-A1
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS
190-01007-A2
Navigation System
GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3
VFR GPS Limited Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX
190-01007-A5
GPS/SBAS Navigation System
GTN 6XX/7XX Installation Checklist 190-01007-E1

Table 1-7. Garmin GMA 35 Reference Documentation

Document Garmin P/N

GMA 35 Installation Manual 190-00858-11

Table 1-8. Other Reference Documentation

Document P/N
FAA Advisory Circular, Airborne VHF Communications Equipment Installations FAA AC 20-67B
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
FAA AC 43.13-1B
Aircraft Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices
FAA AC 43.13-2B
Aircraft Alterations
FAA Advisory Circular, Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation Satellite
FAA AC 20-138A
System (GNSS) Equipment
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP1870
Compatibility and Safety
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis ASTM F2490-05e1

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-14 Rev. 4
 Table 1-9. Garmin Product Reference Documentation

Garmin
Document
Part Number
400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
G500 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01102-06
G600 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06
GA 35, GA 36, GA 37 Antenna Installation Instructions 190-00848-00
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GDL 88 STC Installation Manual 190-01310-00
GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GMA 35 Installation Manual 190-00858-11
GMA 350/350H Installation Manual 190-01134-11
GMX 200 Installation Manual 190-00607-04
GNS 480 (CNX80) Color GPS/NAV/COM Installation Manual 560-0982-01
GSR 56 Installation Manual 190-00836-00
GTX 32 Installation Manual 190-00303-60
GTX 327 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00187-02
GTX 328 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00420-04
GTX 33 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00906-00
GTX 330/330D Transponder Installation Manual 190-00207-02
GWX 68 Installation Manual 190-00286-01
GWX 70 Installation Manual 190-00829-01

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-15
1.7 GPS/WAAS Antenna Requirements
Antenna Performance is critical to GPS/SBAS operation. Table 1-10 lists antennas that meet Garmins
minimum performance specifications. The GTN must be installed with one of these antennas to achieve
acceptable performance. The installation of these antennas must be previously FAA-approved (i.e. field
approval) or installation must be completed via Garmin GPS/WAAS antenna AML STC SA02018SE-D.
Before starting any modifications for the GTN STC, ensure that the GPS/WAAS antenna(s) can be
installed on the aircraft via one of these methods.

Table 1-10. GPS/WAAS Antennas

Garmin Order
Model, Description Connector Type Manufacturer Part Number
Number
GA 35, GPS/WAAS [1] TNC Garmin 013-00235-( ) 013-00235-( )
GA 36, GPS/WAAS TNC Garmin 013-00244-( ) 013-00244-( )
GA 37, GPS/WAAS/XM TNC Garmin 013-00245-( ) 013-00245-( )
A33W, WAAS Antenna [5] TNC Garmin [3] 013-00261-( ) 013-00261-( )
GPS/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC [2] Comant [3] CI-2580-200 N/A
GPS/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC [2] Comant [3] CI-2728-200 N/A
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC [2] Comant [3] CI-2580-410 N/A
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna TNC/TNC/BNC [4] Comant [3] CI-2728-410 N/A
GPS Antenna TNC Comant [3] CI-428-200 N/A
GPS/XM Antenna TNC/TNC Comant [3] CI-428-410 N/A
[1] Same mounting hole pattern as GA 56, but GA 35 antenna has a physically larger
footprint.
[2] The GPS/WAAS connector is a TNC type. The VHF connector is a BNC type.
[3] Installation of this antenna is not covered by the GA antenna STC SA02018SE-D
[4] The GPS/WAAS connector is a TNC type. The XM connector is a TNC type. The
VHF connector is a BNC type.
[5] Same mounting hole pattern as A33.
[6]

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-16 Rev. 4
1.8 GTN Databases
The GTN utilizes various databases. With the exception of the Navigation, Basemap, SafeTaxi, and
Obstacle databases which reside internal to the GTN, all databases are stored in a single SD memory card
that is inserted into the vertical slot on the left side of the GTN. The following describes each database
and how the databases are updated. See Table 1-11 for a summary of the database location and update
rate.
The GTN Database card, Garmin Part Number 010-00900-00, includes the following databases:
Basemap, Obstacle, SafeTaxi, and Navigation.

CAUTION
The databases on the Supplemental Data Card are locked to specific GTN installations.
The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted into a GTN, it associates
exclusively with that particular GTN and will not work in other installations.

Table 1-11. GTN Database Summary

Database Update Rate Stored Location

Terrain Database Periodic (When available) SD Card
FliteCharts Database 28 Days SD Card
ChartView Database 14 Days SD Card
Obstacle Database 56 Days Internal
SafeTaxi Database 56 Days Internal
Basemap Database Periodic (When available) Internal
Navigation Database 28 Days Internal

1.8.1 Basemap Database

The basemap provides ground-based references such as major roads and bodies of water. The database is
stored in the GTN internal memory. The basemap does not have a scheduled update cycle and as such
does not have an expiration date. The basemap database is updated infrequently. Should this database
need to be updated in the future, Garmin will provide details on how to load the updated data into the
GTN.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-17
1.8.2 Navigation Database
The Jeppesen navigation database provides the GTN with the required information for displaying flight
plan information.
The GTN utilizes a database stored on an SD memory data card for easy updating and replacement. The
navigation database may be updated by inserting an updated navigation database update card into the
vertical SD card slot on the left side of the GTN. The actual database is downloaded into the unit, so the
card can be removed after the update. Each card will only update one system. Alternately, the navigation
database may be updated by copying the database to the Garmin-supplied Supplemental Data card. It will
be downloaded into the GTN on first use, and the file can be left on the Supplemental Data card until the
next update cycle.
The navigation database on the GTN database card is generated from current Jeppesen Sanderson data
and converted to a format that is used by the GTN. The data conversion process is performed using
software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management according to
RTCA/DO-200A, Level 1, 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data. GTN users update their
database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is
programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687, www.fly.garmin.com,
or www.jeppdirect.com/Garmin for more information and instructions.
1.8.3 FliteCharts Database (GTN 7XX Only)
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services (formerly named National Aeronautical
Charting Office) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color
for applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. The FliteCharts
database is stored on the GTN SD card. When viewing these charts on the GTN, the aircraft position is
not depicted on the chart. The FliteCharts database is updated by removing the database card from the
GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one
system. GTN users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin.
The database card is programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687
or www.fly.garmin.com for more information and instructions.
1.8.4 ChartView Database (GTN 7XX Only)
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The GTN depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in
the plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams. The ChartView database is stored on the SD
memory card that remains in the GTN for normal operation. The ChartView database is updated by
removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card.
Each card can only be used with one system. GTN users update their ChartView data by purchasing
database subscription updates from Jeppesen Sanderson. The database card is programmed using an SD
card reader and Jeppesen-provided software. Contact Jeppesen at 800-621-5377 or www.jeppesen.com
for more information and instructions.
ChartView is an optional feature that must be activated for use. Instructions for activating the ChartView
function are found in Section 5.5.2.2.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-18 Rev. 4
1.8.5 SafeTaxi Database
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 900 airports in
the United States. The data conversion process is performed using software that is developed and
maintained under Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards
for Processing Aeronautical Data.
The SafeTaxi database is stored internally in the GTN for normal operation. The SafeTaxi database is
updated by removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting
the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GTN users update their database card by
purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is programmed using an SD
card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or www.fly.garmin.com for more information and
instructions.
1.8.6 Terrain Database
The Terrain database is used to provide basic terrain awareness functionality. The terrain database is
stored on the GTN SD card. The terrain database is also used to provide TAWS alerts to the pilot (with
TAWS software only). The data conversion process is performed using software that is developed and
maintained under Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards
for Processing Aeronautical Data.
The terrain database is available from Garmin for updating as needed. The terrain database is updated by
removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card in
the vertical card slot on the left side of the GTN. The terrain database can be downloaded via the internet
and the card can be programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687
or www.fly.garmin.com for more information or instructions.
1.8.7 Obstacle Database
The obstacle database provides identification of known obstacles greater than 200 feet AGL. This
database is also used with Terrain awareness and TAWS functionality. The data conversion process is
performed using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management
according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data.
The obstacle database is stored internal to the GTN. The Obstacle database is updated by removing the
database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card. The Obstacle
database can be downloaded via the internet and the card programmed using an SD card reader. Contact
Garmin at 866-739-5687 or fly.garmin.com for more information or instructions.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 1-19
1.9 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)
The GTN, when installed as defined in this manual, complies with the requirements for GPS primary
means of navigation in oceanic and remote airspace when used in conjunction with the provided FDE
prediction program.
The GTN includes internal Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) software which is active for all flight
phases including oceanic and remote operations, en route and terminal, and precision and non-precision
approaches. FDE does not require any pilot interaction. The FDE consists of two parts:
The fault detection function detects a satellite failure that can affect navigation; and
The exclusion function is the capability to exclude one or more failed satellites and prevent them
from affecting navigation.
The FDE Prediction program is used to predict FDE availability. This program must be used prior to all
oceanic or remote area flights for all operators using the GTN as a primary means of navigation under
FAR parts 91, 121, 125, and 135. The FDE program is part of the GTN trainer, available for download
from the GTN product information page of Garmins website, www.garmin.com.
1.10 STC Permission
Consistent with Order 8110.4B and AC 21-40, a permission letter to use this STC data is available for
download from the Dealer Resource Center on Garmins website.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 1-20 Rev. 4
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
2.1 Introduction
This chapter is an overview of the steps required for the installation of the GTN 6XX and 7XX
navigators.
2.2 Available Equipment
The GTN and GMA 35 are available under the part numbers listed in Table 2-1. The GPS/WAAS
antennas are available under the part numbers listed in Table 1-10.

Table 2-1. GTN 6XX/7XX Unit Part Numbers

Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N Voltage (VDC)

GTN 625 011-02254-00 010-00811-00
GTN 635 011-02255-00 010-00812-00
011-02256-00 010-00813-00
GTN 650
011-02256-50 [1] 010-00889-00 [1] 11-33
GTN 725 011-02281-00 010-00819-00
011-02282-00 010-00820-00
GTN 750
011-02282-50 [1] 010-00890-00 [1]
[1] Indicates gray bezel part number.

Table 2-2. GTN Options Available

Item Part Number

GTN 6XX/7XX 16 Watt COM Enablement Card [1] [2] 010-00878-04
GTN 7XX ChartView Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-40
GTN 6XX/7XX Internal TAWS-B Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-01
GTN 7XX Digital Radar Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-42
GTN 7XX Radar AGCS Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-44
GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection [1] 010-00878-45
[1] An SD enablement card is required to enable the indicated feature. Each enablement
card can only be used one time, and once used, the card will only work with that
particular installation.
[2] The 16 Watt COM Enablement Card is allowed only for 28 VDC aircraft only.

Table 2-3. Optional GMA 35 Unit Part Numbers

Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N Voltage (VDC)
GMA 35 011-02299-00 010-00831-00 11-33

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-1
2.3 Installation Materials
2.3.1 Accessories Available from Garmin
Table 2-4 through Table 2-11 list the items provided in the GTN and GMA 35 installation kits.

Table 2-4. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00811-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number

Connector Kit, GTN 625 011-02325-00
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00
GTN 625
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 625 011-02245-00
(Black)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 6XX K00-00487-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

Table 2-5. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00812-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number

Connector Kit, GTN 635 011-02325-01
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00
GTN 635
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 635 011-02245-01
(Black)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 6XX K00-00487-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

Table 2-6. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00813-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number

Connector Kit, GTN 650 011-02325-02
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00
GTN 650
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 650 011-02245-02
(Black)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 6XX K00-00487-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-2 Rev. 4
 Table 2-7. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00819-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number

Connector Kit, GTN 725 011-02326-00
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 7XX 115-01294-00
GTN 725
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 725 011-02246-00
(Black)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 7XX K00-00488-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

Table 2-8. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00820-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number
Connector Kit, GTN 750 011-02326-02
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 7XX 115-01294-00
GTN 750
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 750 011-02246-02
(Black)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 7XX K00-00488-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

Table 2-9. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00889-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number
Connector Kit, GTN 650 011-02325-02
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00
GTN 650
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 650 011-02245-02
(Gray)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 6XX K00-00487-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-3
 Table 2-10. GTN Installation Kit P/N 010-00890-50 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number

Connector Kit, GTN 750 011-02326-02
Database Card, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-00900-00
SMP, Mounting Rack, GTN 7XX 115-01294-00
GTN 750
Backplate Sub-Assembly, GTN 750 011-02246-02
(Gray)
Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03
Product Info Kit, GTN 7XX K00-00488-00
Cleaning Kit, GTN 6XX/7XX 010-11527-00

Table 2-11. Optional GMA 35 Installation Kit P/N 010-00831-01 Accessories

Used With Item Part Number

Backplate Assembly, GMA 35 011-02300-00
GMA 35 Connector Kit, GMA 35 011-02302-00
Install Rack, SMP 011-02645-00

Table 2-12. Replacement Fan Part Numbers

Used With Item Part Number

GTN 625
Fan, w/ connector 371-00014-01
GTN 635
GTN 650
GTN 725 Fan mounting screws, qty 4 211-60234-23
GTN 750

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-4 Rev. 4
2.3.2 Materials Required but not Supplied
2.3.2.1 Accessories Required but not Supplied
The following installation accessories are required for the installation but not supplied by Garmin.

Table 2-13. Accessories Required but Not Supplied

Item Requirements
COM Antenna Shall meet TSO-C37( ) and C38( ) or TSO-C169( ). 50 , vertically polarized
(GTN 635/650/750 with coaxial cable
only)
Shall meet TSO-C40( ) and C36( ). 50 , horizontally polarized with coaxial
NAV Antenna
cable. Note that if the NAV antenna is a combined VOR/LOC/GS antenna, it
(GTN 650/750 only)
must meet TSO-C40( ), C36( ), and C34( ).
Glideslope Antenna Shall meet TSO-C34( ). 50 , horizontally polarized with coaxial cable or low-
(GTN 650/750 only) loss splitter used with the VOR/LOC antenna.
Headphones 500 nominal impedance
Microphone Low impedance, carbon or dynamic, with transistorized pre-amp

2.3.2.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied for GTN Installations

The GTN unit and GMA 35 are intended for use with standard aviation accessories. The following items
are required for installation, but not supplied:
Wire (MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent) If MIL-W-22759/18 wire is utilized because the smaller
insulation diameter works better with the high density contacts used in the GTN system, care
must be taken to adequately support and protect the wiring due to its thinner insulation.
Shielded Wire (MIL-C-27500 cable utilizing M22759/18 wire (TG) or ETFE jacket (14), or
equivalent)
Aircraft Grade Category 5 Ethernet Cable (required only for installations utilizing HSDB
interfaces such as a second GTN, a GDL 69/69A or the GTS 8XX). See interconnect diagrams in
Appendix E and Appendix F for Ethernet cable part number.
Mounting Hardware for GTN (8 minimum NASM24693 Screw, Machine, Flat Countersunk
Head 100, Cross Recessed with .1380-32 UNC-2A Thread, Corrosion Resistant Steel (alternates
include MS24693 or AN507) and NASM21042 Nut, Self-Locking, Reduced Height with .1380-
32 UNJC-3B Thread (alternates include MS21042 and Monadnack Clip Nut 6-32))
Push/pull manually resettable circuit breakers (see drawings in Appendix E for circuit breaker
ratings)
Tie Wraps or Lacing Cord
Ring Terminals (for grounding and circuit breaker connections)
Coaxial Cable (RG-400, RG-142B or equivalent Refer to Section 2.4.11.2 for additional
information)
Shield Terminators (See Figure 3-2)
Silicon Fusion Tape, Garmin P/N 249-00114-00

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-5
2.3.2.3 Materials Required but Not Supplied for Optional GMA 35 Installations
Mounting Screws for the GMA 35 (6 minimum MS24693 Screw, Machine, Flat Countersunk
Head 100, Cross Recessed with .1380-32 UNC-2A Thread, corrosion resistant steel)
Marker Beacon Antenna approved to TSO-C35( )
Stereo headphone jacks (up to 6), microphone jacks (up to 6), 3.5mm stereo jacks (up to 2), and
insulating washers for all.
2.3.2.4 Materials Required for Lightning Protection (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only)
If additional lightning protection is required for a particular aircraft, the following items may also be
required for the installation. Refer to Appendix G for detailed information regarding which parts are
required for a particular aircraft model.
Applicable to certain nonmetallic aircraft (Except VFR only aircraft). Refer to Appendix G.
Transient Voltage Suppressor 30KPA48A
OR
Transient Voltage Suppressor 15KPA48A
Referred to as TVS1 in the interconnect drawings in Appendix E
Fuse, 3AG Fast-Acting, 4A Littelfuse P/N 0312-004
Referred to as F1 in Figure E-4
Fuse Holder, Inline, Cooper Bussmann P/N HFB
Referred to as F1 in Figure E-4
Four same P/N TVSs (identified as TVS1 above) are combined in accordance with
Section 3.6.5.1.1 to make an assembly referred to TVS2 in Appendix E.
Connector, 4-Pin Plug (socket housing) and Cap (pin housing),
Tyco Electronics P/Ns 1-480424-0 and 1-480426-0 respectively
Referred to as 4 Pin Connector in Section 3.6.5.1.1 and Appendix E.
Sockets, Qty. 4, Tyco Electronics P/N 60617-1 or 60619-1 (Section 3.6.5.1.1)
Pins, Qty. 4, Tyco Electronics, P/N 60618-1 or 60620-1 (Section 3.6.5.1.1)
Tinned Copper Braid, 1/4 nominal flat width, 32 Amp current carrying capacity. Aircraft Spruce
P/N 863. (For GPS/WAAS antenna cable overbraid)
Electrical Tie-Down connector, MS3367-1-X (Section 3.3.1.1)
Aluminum foil tape, 3M P/N 438 (Section 2.4.4.4)
2.3.2.5 Materials Required for Instrument Panel Bonding
If the instrument panel is electrically isolated from the aircraft structure, additional bonding may also be
required for the installation. Refer to Section 3.6.8 for the installation procedure of the instrument panel
bonding strap. The following items are required but not supplied:
Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4, QQB575F36T0781 (recommended)
OR Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16, QQB575R30T0437
Terminal lug, 5/16-inch, uninsulated, MS20659-131
Bolt, AN5-XA
Locking nut, 5/16-inch
Washer, NASM970-516 (AN970-516)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-6 Rev. 4
2.3.2.6 Manufacturer Information

NOTE

Manufacturer information is provided for convenience only. It was current at the time of
initial publication and may change at any time.

Aluminum Foil Tape: Fuse holder:

3M COOPER Bussmann
3M Corporate Headquarter 114 Old State Road
3M Center Ellisville, MO 63021-5942
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000 Phone: 636-527-1270
Phone: 1-888-364-3577 Fax: 636-527-1607
www.3m.com www.cooperbussmann.com

Fuse: Resistor:
Littelfuse World Headquarters Vishay Americas (Vishay Dale)
8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500 One Greenwich Place
Chicago, IL 60631 USA Shelton, CT 06484
Phone: (773) 628-1000 Phone: (402) 563-6866
Fax: (847) 391.0894 Fax: (402) 563-6296
www.littelfuse.com www.vishay.com

Tinned Copper Braid: TVS:

Alpha Wire Company Microsemi Commercial Business Unit
711 Lidgerwood Avenue Macau
Elizabeth, NJ 07207-0711 Phone: (853) 787991
Phone: 1-800-522-5742 Fax: (858) 787995
Fax: (908) 925-6923 www.microsemi.com
www.alphawire.com
OR
OR
Littelfuse World Headquarters
Daburn Electronics & Cable 8755 West Higgins Road Suite 500
44 Richboynton Road Chicago, IL 60631 USA
Dover, NJ 07801 Phone: (773) 628-1000
Phone: (973) 328-3200 Fax: (847) 391.0894
Fax: (973) 328-3130 www.littelfuse.com
www.daburn.com

4-Pin Connector & Contacts:

Tyco Electronics Corporation
1050 Westlakes Drive
Berwyn, PA 19312
Phone: (610) 893-9800
www.tycoelectronics.com

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-7
2.3.2.7 Materials Required for Some GTN 650/750 NAV Antenna Installations
Some aircraft may require the use of a splitter or diplexer for connection of the VOR/LOC and G/S
antennas, or combination VOR/LOC/GS antennas. Refer to Figure E-18 to determine if a splitter or
diplexer is required for the installation.
Garmin Part Number 013-00112-00 (Mini-Circuits ZFSC-2-1B+BNC.)
Comant Diplexer VOR/GS, Model CI-507.
2.3.3 GTN Software Loader Card
A GTN Software Loader card may be created using a GTN Downloadable Software SD Card
P/N 010-01000-00 in conjunction with a GTN software application downloaded from the Dealer
Resource Center on Garmins website. As an alternative, a pre-programmed software loader card may be
purchased from Garmin. Refer to the Equipment List (005-00533-C1) for the correct part number of the
pre-programmed GTN Software Loader Card.

NOTE

The downloadable application to create the GTN Software Loader Card only runs on
Windows PCs (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, and Windows 7 are supported). There is no
Mac support at this time.

NOTE

An SD card reader is needed to create the GTN Software Loader Card using the
application that is downloaded from Garmin. The approved readers are SanDisk
SDDR-99 and SDDR-93, although other SD card readers will work.

Create a GTN Software Loader Card as follows:

1. Go to the Dealer Resource Center on Garmins website.
2. Download the GTN Software Loader Image. Refer to the Equipment List (P/N 005-00533-C1) for the
correct Software Loader Image part number.
3. Ensure that you have an SD card reader connected to the PC. Insert the GTN Downloadable Software
SD Card P/N 010-01000-00 into the card reader.
4. Run the executable file. The window shown in Figure 2-1 will appear.

Figure 2-1. GTN Software Updater Installation

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-8 Rev. 4
5. Click Setup. The window shown in Figure 2-2 will appear to guide you through the software loader
card creation process.

Figure 2-2. System and Software Version

6. Click Next to get to the window shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3. GTN Software Loader Card Formatting

CAUTION

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-9
 In order to create a GTN Software Loader Card, the drive that you select will be
completely erased.

7. Ensure that the correct drive is selected. Click Next to create the card. Click Next to acknowledge any
warnings that appear. The progress window shown in Figure 2-4 will appear when the card is being
created.

Figure 2-4. Update Progress Window

8. After the card has been created, the window shown in Figure 2-5 will appear. Click Finish to
complete the update process.

Figure 2-5. Update Completion

9. Eject the card from the card reader (or stop the card reader in Windows). The GTN Software Loader
Card is now ready to use.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-10 Rev. 4
2.3.4 Special Tools Required
Some of the connectors use crimp contacts. The table below identifies crimp tools required to ensure
consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors.
A milliohm meter with an accuracy of 0.1 m (or better) is required to measure the electrical bonding
between the GTN and GMA 35 system components and aircraft ground.

Table 2-14. Recommended Crimp Tools

Standard Density High Density

Hand 20-24 AWG (Power/Ground) 22-28 AWG (P1001-P1005)
Manufacturer Crimping Insertion/ Insertion/
Tool Positioner Extraction Positioner Extraction
Tool Tool
Military
M81969/14-02 M81969/14-01
Specification M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
P/N
Positronic 9507 9502-5 M81969/1-02 9502-3 M81969/1-04
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-604 980-2000-426 995-0001-739 N/A
AMP 601966-1 601966-5 91067-2 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K13-1 M81969/1-02 K42 M81969/1-04
Astro 615717 615724 M81969/1-02 615725 M81969/1-04

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-11
2.4 Installation Considerations
2.4.1 Minimum System Configuration
The following section describes the minimum configuration required for IFR and VFR installations of the
GTN.
2.4.1.1 VFR GPS Installation
The minimum GTN unit installation requires the following items for a VFR Installation:
GTN 6XX/7XX unit (installed in the aircraft manufacturer approved location for 6.25 inch wide
avionics equipment).
GPS/WAAS antenna required for GPS navigation functions.
An external CDI and proper source selection annunciation are required for installations using the
VOR navigation and glideslope information. If the GTN does not meet the field-of-view
requirements outlined in Section 2.4.10.1.1, then remote source selection annunciators must be
installed. The GTN provides these annunciations if mounted within the required field of view.
A NAV antenna is required for VHF NAV functions. (GTN 650/750 only).
A COM antenna is required for COM functions. (GTN 635/650/750 only).
VFR installations must be placarded GPS LIMITED TO VFR USE ONLY in clear view of the pilot.
The placard must be located immediately adjacent to the GTN. See Section 2.4.6 for additional placard
requirements. VFR GPS installations should use the VFR GPS Limited Airplane Flight Manual
Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A5).
2.4.1.2 IFR Installation of a GTN 625/635/725
For an IFR installation of a GTN 625, GTN 635, or GTN 725, the criteria in Section 2.4.1.1 must be met
in addition to the following:
If the GTN is installed for GPS primary navigation, then the GTN must be interfaced to a
navigation indicator installed in the pilots primary field-of-view (or in the aircraft manufacturer
approved mounting location). The indicator must have a vertical deviation indicator (GS) in order
to perform approaches with vertical guidance. EFIS, EHSI, and NAV Indicators approved by this
STC are listed in Appendix C.
A second GPS navigator (Garmin or non-Garmin) is required if the aircraft requires GPS coaxial
cable overbraid (reference Appendix G).
Either a second GPS navigator (Garmin or non-Garmin) or a separate VHF navigation radio
(Garmin or non-Garmin) must be installed. See the following section if installing a GTN 650 or
GTN 750.
For installations meeting these requirements, use the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin
GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A2).

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-12 Rev. 4
2.4.1.3 IFR Installation of a GTN 650/750
For an IFR installation of a GTN 650 or GTN 750, the criteria in Section 2.4.1.1 must be met in addition
to the following:
If the GTN is installed for GPS primary navigation, then the GTN must be interfaced to a
navigation indicator installed in the pilots primary field-of-view (or in the aircraft manufacturer
approved mounting location). The indicator must have a vertical deviation indicator (GS) in order
to perform approaches with vertical guidance. EFIS, EHSI, and NAV Indicators approved by this
STC are listed in Appendix C.
If the GTN does not meet the field-of-view requirements outlined in Section 2.4.10, then remote
source selection annunciators must be installed. The GTN provides these annunciations if
mounted within the required field of view.
A second GPS navigator (Garmin or non-Garmin) is required if the aircraft requires GPS coaxial
cable overbraid (reference Appendix G).
Either a second GPS navigator (Garmin or non-Garmin) or a separate VHF navigation radio
(Garmin or non-Garmin) is required in the following installations:
o Aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of greater than 6000 pounds.
o Aircraft that are turbine-powered.
o Multi-engine aircraft.
o Installations in which a CDI is connected to connector P1004 pin 29 (Reference Figure E-9,
Figure E-10, and Figure E-11), and there is no other way of displaying VHF navigation
deviation information from the GTN 650/750. This is not required for installations which
have a CDI or HSI connected to the Main connector P1001, which can be switched to
output either GPS or VHF navigation information.
For installations meeting these requirements, use the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin
GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A2).
2.4.2 GTN External Sensors and Devices
When the GTN is interfaced to external sensors, these sensors must be installed in accordance with the
sensor manufacturer's data. See Appendix C for a list of sensors approved to interface with the GTN. This
manual does not provide data for the installation mounting or approval of any external sensors or devices.
The GTN can accept data from multiple sources. If multiple sources are used, the GTN will accept data as
described below. The input priority of each external data source cannot be configured. If available, ensure
that the higher priority sources are connected to the GTN.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-13
2.4.2.1 Multiple Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources
The GTN unit can accept uncorrected pressure altitude from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources.
If multiple sources of altitude data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority
source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest
priority source. The priorities of the altitude sources are as follows from highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 203 from Airdata
2. ARINC 429 label 203 from Airdata/AHRS
3. ARINC 429 label 203 from GDU Format 1, 2, 3, or 4
4. ARINC 429 label 203 from EFIS Format 2
5. ARINC 429 label 203 from Data Concentrator
6. ARINC 429 label 203 Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
7. RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
8. RS-232 Altitude Format 1 or 3

NOTE

Only certain altitude sources are acceptable for providing altitude to the GDL 88.
Refer to Section 2.4.3 for more information.

2.4.2.2 Multiple Baro-Corrected Altitude Sources

NOTE

Barometric altitude is not required by the GTN unit to meet the requirements of TSO-
C146c; however, to take full advantage of the GTN unit capabilities, an optional
barometric altitude source is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg
types. If no barometric altitude data is provided to the GTN unit, altitude leg types
must be manually sequenced.

The GTN unit can accept baro-corrected altitude from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources.
If multiple sources of baro-corrected altitude data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the
highest priority source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the
next-highest priority source. The priorities of the baro-corrected altitude sources are as follows from
highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 204 from Airdata
2. ARINC 429 label 204 from GDU Format 1
3. ARINC 429 label 204 from EFIS Format 1, 2, 3, or 4
4. ARINC 429 label 204 from Data Concentrator
5. RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-14 Rev. 4
2.4.2.3 Multiple Heading Sources

NOTE

Heading is not required by the GTN; however, to take full advantage of the GTN unit
capabilities, an optional heading source is recommended to allow the map to be
oriented to heading up, to provide autopilot roll steering on ARINC 424 heading legs,
to display TAS traffic and WX-500 Stormscope data on the moving map, and to
calculate winds if airspeed is also available.

The GTN unit can accept heading data from multiple ARINC 429, RS-232, and Synchro sources. If
multiple sources of heading data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source
is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest priority
source. The priorities of the heading sources are as follows from highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 314 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
2. ARINC 429 label 320 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
3. ARINC 429 label 320 from EFIS Format 2
4. ARINC 429 label 320 from GDU Format 1
5. ARINC 429 label 314 from INS/IRU
6. ARINC 429 label 314 from Data Concentrator
7. ARINC 429 label 320 from INS/IRU
8. ARINC 429 label 320 from Airdata/AHRS
9. ARINC 429 label 320 from GAD Format 1
10. ARINC 429 label 320 from EFIS Format 4
11. ARINC 429 label 314 from GAD Format 1
12. XYZ Synchro
13. ARINC 429 label 320 from Data Concentrator
14. ARINC 429 label 320 from Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
15. RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
16. RS-232 bus from Lightning Detector 1
2.4.2.4 Multiple Indicated Airspeed Sources
The GTN unit can accept indicated airspeed data from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources. If
multiple sources of indicated airspeed data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest
priority source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-
highest priority source. The priorities of the indicated airspeed sources are as follows from highest to
lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 206 from GDU Format 1
2. ARINC 429 label 206 from Airdata/AHRS
3. ARINC 429 label 206 from Data Concentrator
4. RS-232 bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-15
2.4.2.5 Multiple True Airspeed Sources

NOTE

True Airspeed is not required for the GTN; however, the GTN uses true airspeed to
calculate winds aloft if heading is also available.

The GTN unit can accept true airspeed data from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources. If multiple
sources of true airspeed data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source is
used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest priority
source. The priorities of the true airspeed sources are as follows from highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 210 from Airdata
2. ARINC 429 label 210 from Airdata/AHRS
3. ARINC 429 label 210 from GDU Format 1
4. ARINC 429 label 210 from EFIS Format 2
5. ARINC 429 label 210 from GAD Format 1
6. ARINC 429 label 210 from Data Concentrator
7. RS-232 bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
2.4.2.6 Multiple VLOC Selected Course Sources
The GTN unit can accept VLOC Selected Course data from the sources list below. If multiple sources of
VLOC Selected Course data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source is
used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest priority
source. The priorities of the VLOC selected course sources are as follows from highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 100 from EFIS Format 4
2. ARINC 429 label 110 from GAD Format 1
3. TO/FROM course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control
2.4.2.7 Multiple GPS Selected Course Sources
The GTN unit can accept GPS selected course data from multiple ARINC 429 sources. If multiple
sources of GPS selected course data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority
source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest
priority source. The priorities of the GPS selected course sources are as follows from highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 100 from EFIS Format 1 or 3
2. ARINC 429 label 100 from GDU Format 1
3. ARINC 429 label 100 from EFIS Format 2
4. ARINC 429 label 100 from EFIS Format 4
5. ARINC 429 label 100 from GAD Format 1
6. ARINC 429 label 100 from Data Concentrator
7. TO/FROM course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-16 Rev. 4
2.4.2.8 Multiple Total Air Temperature Sources
The GTN unit can accept total air temperature data from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources. If
multiple sources of total air temperature data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest
priority source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-
highest priority source. The priorities of the total air temperature sources are as follows from highest to
lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 211 from Airdata
2. ARINC 429 label 211 from GDU Format 1
3. ARINC 429 label 211 from EFIS Format 2
4. ARINC 429 label 211 from Data Concentrator
5. RS-232 bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
2.4.2.9 Multiple Static Air Temperature Sources
The GTN unit can accept static air temperature data from multiple ARINC 429 sources. If multiple
sources of static air temperature data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority
source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest
priority source. The priorities of the static air temperature sources are as follows from highest to lowest:
1. ARINC 429 label 213 from Airdata
2. ARINC 429 label 213 from GDU Format 1
3. ARINC 429 label 213 from EFIS Format 2
4. ARINC 429 label 213 from Data Concentrator
2.4.3 GDL 88 Installation Considerations
When a GDL 88 is installed with a GTN, altitude data can be forwarded from sources connected to the
GTN to the GDL 88. The GTN is also capable of forwarding Grey Code received from an altimeter
connected to a GTX transponder. All of these sources must meet the minimum performance requirements
of TSO-C10 or TSO-C106, or altitude digitizers/encoders must meet TSO-C88. (Reference AC 20-165,
Section 3-4(a)(1) and (2)).
If a compatible TAS system and the GDL 88 are installed in an aircraft, the compatible TAS system
should be directly connected to the GDL 88. The traffic data is then sent from the GDL 88 to the GTN
over HSDB. Refer to Figure E-40 for more information on the connection.
For more information on configuration of the GDL 88 and systems connected to the GDL 88, refer to the
GDL 88 Installation Manual, P/N 190-01122-00 and the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual,
P/N 190-01310-00.
2.4.4 Antenna Considerations
This section contains mounting location considerations for the antennas required for the GTN units.
General installation guidance is provided to ensure the installed antennas meet the GTN requirements;
however, the approval of antenna installations is beyond the scope of the GTN AML STC. For mounting
the GPS/WAAS antennas, refer to Garmin Antenna STC SA02018SE-D. The installer may use other
FAA approved data to gain a separate antenna installation approval from this STC.
Figure 2-6 shows the recommended placement of GPS/SBAS and COM antennas.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-17
 ANTENNA MASKED BY VERTICAL FIN, T-
TAIL OR DORSAL FIN. ANTENNA NOT
MOUNTED LEVEL WITH RESPECT TO THE
NORMAL FLIGHT ATTITUDE
DISTANCE BETWEEN COM AND GPS/WAAS
ANTENNAS SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 2 FT.
SEE ITEM 2.5.1 IN THIS SECTION FOR GPS/WAAS
ANTENNA LOCATION.

GOOD BETTER

GREATER THAN 3" AFT OF WINDSCREEN

NORMAL
FLIGHT
ATTITUDE

SIDE VIEW
ANTENNA MUST BE ON
TOP OF AIRCRAFT

CENTERLINE

GPS 1

COMM

GPS 2

GPS/WAAS ANTENNA
OFFSET FROM

TOP VIEW CENTERLINE WITH

TYPICAL DUAL GPS
INSTALLATION

Figure 2-6. GPS/WAAS Antenna Mounting Considerations

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-18 Rev. 4
2.4.4.1 GPS Antenna Location
The GPS antenna is a key element in the overall system performance and integrity for a GPS/SBAS
system. The mounting location, geometry, and surroundings of the antenna can affect the system
performance and/or availability. The following guidance provides information to aid the installer in
ensuring that the most optimum location is selected for the installation of the GPS antenna. The
installation guidelines presented here meet the intent of the latest revision of AC 20-138A Chapter 12,
Section 12-1. The greater the variance from these guidelines, the greater the chance of decreased signal
availability. Because meeting all of these installation guidelines may not be possible on all aircraft, these
guidelines are listed in order of importance to achieve optimum performance. The sub-items of step 3
below are of equal importance and their significance may depend on the aircraft installation. The installer
should use their best judgment to balance the installation guidelines.
Figure 2-6 shows the recommended placement of the GPS antenna.
1. Mount the antenna as close to level as possible with respect to the normal cruise flight attitude of
the aircraft. If the normal flight attitude is not known, substitute with the waterline, which is
typically referenced as level while performing a weight and balance check. A shim may be used
to level the antenna.
2. The GPS antenna should be mounted in a location to minimize the effects of airframe shadowing
during typical maneuvers. Typically mounting farther away from the tail section reduces signal
blockage seen by the GPS antenna.
3. The GPS antenna should be mounted:
a. no closer than two feet from any VHF COM antenna or any other antenna which may emit
harmonic interference at the L1 frequency of 1575.42 MHz. An aircraft EMC check (see
Section 5) can verify the degradation of GPS in the presence of interference signals. If an
EMC check reveals unacceptable interference, either insert a GPS notch filter in line with
the offending VHF COM or the (re-radiating) ELT transmitter, or select a different
GPS Antenna location.
NOTE
When mounting a combination antenna, the recommended distance of two feet or more is
not applicable to the distance between the antenna elements in a combination antenna
(e.g. GPS and COM, GPS and SiriusXM) provided the combination antenna is TSO
authorized and has been tested to meet Garmins minimum performance standards.
b. no closer than two feet from any antennas emitting more than 25 watts of power. An
aircraft EMC check can verify the degradation of GPS in the presence of interference
signals. If an EMC check reveals unacceptable interference, select a different GPS Antenna
location.
c. no closer than nine inches (center to center) from other antennas, including passive
antennas such as another GPS Antenna or XM antenna. This will minimize the effects of
shadowing at 5 elevation angles.
4. To maintain a constant gain pattern and limit degradation by the windscreen, avoid mounting the
antenna closer than 3 inches from the windscreen.
5. For multiple GPS installations, the antennas should not be mounted in a straight line from the
front to the rear of the fuselage (i.e. so that a single lightning strike does not damage all GPS
systems). This is required in non-metallic aircraft, and recommended for all aircraft. Also varying
the mounting location will help minimize any aircraft shading by the wings or tail section (in a
particular azimuth, when one antenna is blocked the other antenna may have a clear view).

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-19
 6. A 12-inch center-to-center spacing between GPS antennas is needed to achieve the best possible
low-elevation antenna gain by minimizing pattern degradation due to shadowing and near-field
interaction. When practical, 12-inch center-to-center spacing between GPS antennas must be
used. If 12-inch spacing is not practical, the maximum center-to-center spacing possible must be
used, but never less than 9-inch center-to-center spacing. Spacing less than 9 inches center-to-
center results in unacceptable antenna pattern degradation.
2.4.4.2 COM Antenna Location
The GTN 635/650/750 COM antenna should be mounted well away from all projections that could
interfere with RF communications, engines and propellers. The ground plane surface directly below the
antenna should be a flat plane over as large an area as possible (18 inches square, minimum). The COM
antenna must be grounded to the ground plane. The antenna should be mounted a minimum of six feet
from other COM antennas for best performance, four feet from any ADF sense antennas, and two feet
from the GTN unit and its GPS/WAAS antenna. The COM antenna should also be mounted as far apart as
practical from the ELT antenna.
Some ELTs have exhibited re-radiation problems generating harmonics that may interfere with GPS
signals. This can happen when the COM (GTN COM or any other COM) is transmitting on certain
frequencies such as 121.15 or 121.175 MHz, which may cause the ELT output circuit to oscillate from the
signal coming in on the ELT antenna coaxial. In addition, the COM antennas should be spaced for
maximum isolation. A configuration of one topside antenna and one bottom side antenna is
recommended.
2.4.4.3 NAV Antenna Location
The GTN 650/750 NAV antenna should be mounted well away from all projections, engines and
propellers. It should have a clear line of sight if possible. The antenna must be mounted along the
centerline of the aircraft, minimizing the lateral offset.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-20 Rev. 4
2.4.4.4 Ground Plane
Ensure that the GPS/NAV/COM antennas are electrically bonded to the aircraft. Follow the aircraft
manufacturers instructions for the NAV and COM antenna installations, or obtain other FAA approval.
The GPS/WAAS antenna requires a minimum ground plane radius of 7.5 inches around the perimeter of
the antenna. Refer to Figure 2-7. For metal aircraft, the surrounding metal skin on which the antenna is
mounted supplies the ground plane. For non-metal aircraft, the ground plane can be composed of heavy
duty aluminum foil tape, such as 3M P/N 438 or other adhesive backed dead soft aluminum foil minimum
0.012 inches thick. It should be noted that if the antenna is struck by lightning, the foil by itself may not
be sufficient to dissipate lightning currents. Additional protection may be needed depending on the
construction of the structure to which the antenna is mounted.

GPS ANTENNA
GROUND PLANE

UM
IM
IN
.M
IN
5
7.

Figure 2-7. GPS/WAAS Antenna Minimum Ground Plane Radius

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-21
2.4.4.5 Interference of GPS
On some installations, VHF COM transceivers, Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) antennas, and
Direction Finder (DF) receiver antennas can re-radiate harmonics that can potentially interfere with the
GPS antenna. The GTN unit COM does not interfere with its own GPS section. However, placement of
the GPS antenna relative to a COM transceiver and COM antenna (including the GTN 635/650/750
COM antenna), ELT antenna, and DF receiver antenna is important.
Use the following guidelines, in addition to others in this document, when locating the GTN unit and its
antennas.
GPS/WAAS antennaLocate as far as possible from all COM antennas and all COM
transceivers (including the GTN unit COM), ELT antennas, and DF receiver antennas. The
GPS/WAAS antenna is less susceptible to harmonic interference if a 1.57542 GHz notch filter is
installed on the COM transceiver antenna output.
Locate the GTN unit as far as possible from all COM antennas.
If a COM antenna is found to be the problem, a 1.57542 GHz notch filter (Garmin P/N 330-00067-00)
may be installed in the VHF COM coax, as close to the COM as possible. This filter is not required for
the GTN 635/650/750 transmitter.
If a COM is found to be radiating, the following can be done:
1. Replace or clean VHF COM rack connector to ensure good coaxial ground.
2. Place a grounding brace between the GTN unit, VHF COM and ground.
3. Shield the VHF COM wiring harness.
2.4.4.6 COM and NAV Antenna Installation Considerations
Install the COM and NAV antennas according to the manufacturers recommendations, and obtain FAA
approval. (Other FAA approval for installation of the COM and NAV antennas are required, and is not a
part of this STC.) Ensure that the COM and NAV antennas are electrically bonded to the aircraft. Avoid
running other wires and coaxial cables near the NAV antenna cable. If there are two separate COM
antennas, attempt to run the COM coaxial cables independently of each other and provide zonal
separation as much as possible in the aircraft to avoid loss of both COMs in a single event.
2.4.4.6.1 NAV Antenna Cable Splitter/Diplexer Considerations
The GTN 650/750 includes one NAV antenna input. It is recommended that a single
VOR/Localizer/Glideslope antenna be used for the installation. Some installations will require the use of
a splitter or diplexer. Use Splitter, Garmin P/N 013-00112-00 or Comant Diplexer, P/N CI 507. Refer to
Figure E-18 for splitter and diplexer installation wiring details. Install the splitter and diplexer in
accordance with Section 3.3.3.
2.4.4.6.2 Marker Beacon Antenna Installation Considerations
Install the marker beacon antenna according to the manufacturers recommendations. (Other FAA
approval for installation of the marker beacon antenna is required, and is not a part of this STC.) The
marker beacon antenna should be mounted on a flat surface on the underside of the aircraft body. Mount
the marker beacon antenna so that there is a minimum of structure between it and the ground radio
stations. Locate it as far as possible from transmitter antennas.

NOTE

Do not install the antenna inside the aircraft fuselage. Installing the antenna inside the
aircraft fuselage limits the antenna reception, especially on metal aircraft and increases

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-22 Rev. 4
 the antennas susceptibility to RF radiation from components inside the aircraft.
2.4.5 Electrical Bonding
Electrical equipment chassis, shield/ground terminations, antennas, supporting brackets, and racks must
be electrically bonded to the aircrafts main structure (metallic or tube/fabric aircraft) or instrument panel
(composite aircraft). Refer to SAE ARP 1870 Section 5 when surface preparation is required to achieve
electrical bond. The electrical bond must achieve direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to:
2.5 milliohms to local structure in equipment mounting locations for metallic or tube and fabric
aircraft.
5.0 milliohms to the instrument panel for composite aircraft.
For some aircraft the instrument panel is attached with vibration mounts. For these aircraft, it must be
verified that the vibration-isolated instrument panel is grounded to the airframe metallic structure with a
bonding jumper the same or equivalent to the specification below. If no such jumper is installed, a
bonding strap meeting the following criteria must be installed to accomplish this:
The cross sectional area of the strap must be greater than 0.016 square inches (approx 20800
circular mils). A 7/16 inch or wider tubular braid (QQB575R30T437, 24120 circular mils) or a
3/4 inch or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils) must be used.
The strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed 6 inches. Detailed design of a
bonding strap meeting these requirements is shown in Section 3.6.8.
Compliance must be verified by inspection using a calibrated milliohm meter.
The antenna ground plane must be electrically bonded to the antenna baseplate. The electrical bond must
achieve direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to 2.5 milliohms. Do not remove paint on outer
skin of aircraft under the footprint of the antenna baseplate unless necessary to meet bonding
requirements. The painted surface prevents corrosion and should be left intact if possible.
Brackets installed to main structure or instrument panel with four or more rivets can provide sufficient
electrical bond to allow equipment chassis or equipment rack to be bonded to the bracket. More rivets or
surface preparation may be needed for brackets that will carry large DC/AC or lightning currents.
The correct material finish is important when mating untreated or bare dissimilar metals. They should be
galvanically compatible. When corrosion protection is removed to make an electrical bond any exposed
area after the bond is completed should be protected again. Additional guidance can be found in
AC 43.13-1B and SAE ARP1870.
Typical electrical bonding preparation examples are shown in Figure 2-8, Figure 2-9, and Figure 2-10.
Aluminum surface preparation is detailed in Section 2.4.5.1.
2.4.5.1 Aluminum Surface Preparation
To prepare an aluminum surface for proper bonding, this general procedure should be followed. For a
more detailed procedure, reference SAE ARP1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat such as Alodine 1200 to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, if any films or coatings were removed from the surface, reapply a
suitable film or coating to the surrounding area.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-23
 Figure 2-8. Electrical Bonding Preparation Nut Plate

(LOCKING WASHER SHOULD BE USED)

Figure 2-9. Electrical Bonding Preparation Bolt/Nut Joint

ELECTRICAL BOND PREP TERMINAL LUG.

(LOCKING WASHER SHOULD BE USED)

Figure 2-10. Electrical Bonding Preparation Terminal Lug

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-24 Rev. 4
2.4.6 Placards and Labels
All placards and labels must be readable in all cockpit lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is
acceptable. Placards added as part of the GTN and GMA 35 installation must be displayed in a
conspicuous place and must not be easily erased, disfigured, or obscured. Text height must be a minimum
of 0.10 inch, and the text must contrast with the placard surroundings such that it is easily readable. The
text must be a high-quality, solid-color font of at least 300 DPI (dots per inch). Dot-matrix fonts are
unacceptable.
New circuit breakers and switches installed for the GTN or GMA 35 unit must be labeled as shown in the
applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix E or Appendix F.
2.4.7 Power Distribution
For the purpose of this section, an avionics bus is considered to be any group of circuit breakers fed from
a common source or multiple sources with a remote switch for the intent of controlling the power to
avionics equipment.
2.4.7.1 Circuit Protection
Circuit protection devices for the GTN and GMA 35 must be push-pull manually resettable circuit
breakers (e.g. Klixon 7274 or 7277 Series circuit breakers). Refer to Figure E-4 for GTN circuit breaker
ratings or Figure F-2 for GMA 35 circuit breaker ratings. The circuit breakers must be labeled as specified
in the interconnect diagrams in Appendix E and Appendix F and the circuit breakers must be readily
accessible to the pilot.
A single circuit breaker must be dedicated to the GTN Main and NAV power inputs as shown in
Figure E-4. A single circuit breaker must also be dedicated to the COM input for the GTN 635/650/750.
See Figure E-4 for more information. Do not combine more than one unit on the same circuit breaker.
2.4.7.2 Power Distribution Single GTN, Aircraft Weight Less than 6000 Pounds
When one GTN is installed in aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of less than 6000
pounds, the GTN should be connected to the avionics bus. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers
(Reference Figure E-4) must be connected to the same avionics bus.
When the GTN is the second NAV/COM unit being installed in the aircraft, the GTN should be connected
to the avionics bus. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers (Reference Figure E-4) must be connected
to the same avionics bus. The GTN and other NAV/COM must be grounded at separate ground
terminal/stud locations on the aircraft. The power and ground wiring for the GTN should be routed
separately from the power and ground wiring for the other NAV/COM. This method, shown in
Figure 2-11, will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one radio fails.
Avionics Bus
COM

Other NAV/COM GTN 6XX/7XX

Ground Plane

Figure 2-11. Power and Ground Distribution -

Single GTN, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lb

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-25
2.4.7.3 Power Distribution Dual GTNs, Aircraft Less than 6000 Pounds
When two GTNs are installed in aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of less than 6000
pounds, connect GTN #1 to the avionics bus. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers (reference
Figure E-4) for GTN #1 must be connected to the same avionics bus. If a second avionics bus is available,
connect GTN #2 to the second avionics bus; otherwise connect GTN #2 to the same avionics bus as
GTN #1. The NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers for GTN #2 must be connected to the same avionics
bus.
The GTNs must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the aircraft. Power and ground
wiring for GTN #1 should be routed separately from the power and ground wiring for GTN #2, as shown
in Figure 2-12. This will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one GTN fails.

Preferred Alternate
Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Avionics Bus

COM

COM
COM

COM

GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX

Ground Plane Ground Plane

Figure 2-12. Power and Ground Distribution -

Dual GTNs, Aircraft Weight Less Than 6000 lb

2.4.7.4 Power Distribution Single GTN, Aircraft Greater than 6000 Pounds
When a single GTN is installed in aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of 6000 pounds
or greater, the GTN must be installed on a bus (main or avionics bus) separate from that of other pre-
existing NAV/COM systems in the aircraft, as shown in Figure 2-13. The GTN NAV/GPS and COM
circuit breakers (reference Figure E-4) must be connected to the same avionics bus.
The GTN and other NAV/COM must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the
aircraft. The power and ground wiring for the GTN must be routed separately from the power and ground
wiring for the other NAV/COM, including no shared connectors. This will maximize system redundancy
if the ground connection for one radio fails.

Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Avionics Bus Main Bus

COM

COM

Other NAV/COM GTN 6XX/7XX OR Other NAV/COM GTN 6XX/7XX

Ground Plane Ground Plane

Figure 2-13. Power and Ground Distribution -

Single GTN, Aircraft Weight Greater Than 6000 lb

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-26 Rev. 4
2.4.7.5 Power Distribution Dual GTNs, Aircraft Greater than 6000 Pounds
When dual GTNs are installed in aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight of 6000 pounds
or greater, each GTN must be installed on a separate avionics bus. If two avionics busses are not available
in the aircraft, install GTN #1 on the main bus and GTN #2 on the avionics bus. Both options are shown
in Figure 2-14. Preferably, GTN# 1 should not be connected to the bus that supplies power to the GTN #2
avionics bus. The GTN #1 NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers (reference Figure E-4) must be
connected to the same bus, and the GTN #2 NAV/GPS and COM circuit breakers must also be connected
to the same bus.
The GTNs must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the aircraft. The power and
ground wiring for GTN #1 must be routed separately from the power and ground wiring for GTN #2,
including no shared connectors. This will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one
GTN fails.

Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Main Bus Avionics Bus

COM

COM
COM

COM

GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX

OR

Ground Plane Ground Plane

Figure 2-14. Power and Ground Distribution -

Dual GTNs, Aircraft Weight Greater than 6000 lb

2.4.7.6 Power Distribution GMA 35 Audio Panel

When a GMA 35 audio panel is installed, it should be connected to an avionics bus. If GTN #1 and GTN
#2 are on separate electrical buses, the GMA 35 must be connected to the same avionics bus as the GTN
that is controlling the GMA 35.
2.4.8 Optional Switch Installation
If optional switches are installed as part of the GTN 6XX/7XX and GMA 35 installation, each switch
installed must meet the following requirements:
The switch must be labeled as specified in the interconnect drawings in Appendix E.
The label must be adjacent to the switch.
The switch must be readily accessible to the pilot.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-27
2.4.9 External Annunciators
Installations completed in accordance with the requirements specified in this manual may not require the
use of any external annunciators, since all annunciations are provided on the GTN units front panel.
Refer to Section 2.4.10.1.1 to determine whether or not external annunciators are required.
If external GPS annunciators are required as part of the GTN installation, the preferred annunciator is the
Mid-Continent MD 41-151X, as shown in Figure E-7. The MD 41-151X provides SUSP annunciations
when the GTN is in Suspend Mode. Suspend mode is active when the GTN is not automatically
sequencing waypoints.
The annunciator panels designed for the Garmin 400/500 series units, such as the MD41-14XX,
annunciate OBS mode but do not annunciate Suspend mode. If it is desired to use a pre-existing MD41-
14XX, wiring changes will be required as outlined in Figure E-7. A placard must also be installed with
the following text: Green OBS indicates OBS or SUSP mode GTN annunciator bar indicates which is
active. Push OBS button to change OBS or SUSP mode. The placard must be located immediately
adjacent to the annunciator panel and must meet the requirements outlined in Section 2.4.5.
2.4.10 Unit Mounting Considerations
2.4.10.1 GTN Mounting Considerations
The GTN unit is designed to mount in the avionics stack in the aircraft instrument panel within view and
reach of the pilot. The primary unit location should minimize pilot head movement when transitioning
between looking outside of the cockpit and viewing or operating the GTN. The location should be such
that the GTN unit is not blocked by the glare shield on top, or by the engine controls, control yoke, etc. on
the bottom. If the aircraft has a throw-over yoke, ensure that it does not interfere with the GTN.
For VFR-only installations, the GTN unit must be mounted in the aircraft manufacturers approved
location or other FAA approved location. No CDI/HSI interface is required but if provided, proper source
selection annunciation must be used.
In accordance with AC 20-138A, for IFR GPS installations the GTN unit must be mounted in the aircraft
manufacturers approved location or other FAA approved location, and the required CDI/HSI must be
mounted in the primary field of view. CDI/HSI navigation source selection annunciation must be on or
near the affected display and any additional annunciations must be mounted within the normal field-of-
view.
An FAA issue paper was written to clarify the TSO-C146c annunciation requirement of on or near the
affected display. This issue paper said, in order to preclude the need for external source selection
annunciations (i.e. using the annunciation within the GTN unit), the source selection annunciation
displayed on the GTN unit must be within 13.9 inches of pilot view centerline. If the CDI is to the left or
right of centerline, it must favor the same side as the GTN unit placement (i.e. typically the radio stack is
on the right of the pilots view centerline, so the CDI should be on the right side of the basic primary
flight instruments). A CDI/HSI with a built-in annunciation may also be used in lieu of a separate external
annunciator to satisfy the source selection annunciation requirement. In addition, any required GPS
navigation annunciations must be within 16.8 inches of the pilot view centerline. If the GTN unit display
is within this area, then no external GPS navigation annunciations are required.
The GTN unit, as a redundant or secondary TSO-C146c certified navigation device, may be installed
outside the acceptable view parameters if the unit is used as a backup system. Example: To the right of a
center radio stack, when two columns of avionics are available. This places the unit too far from the
pilots normal scan. As such, IFR flights may not originate or be predicated on this unit unless the
primary system has failed.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-28 Rev. 4
If the GNS 400W/500W is installed concurrently with a GTN 6XX/7XX, there are special mounting
guidelines. The GTN crossfills flight plan and user waypoint data to the GNS. Since the data flows from
the GTN to the GNS, it is recommended that the GTN be mounted in the #1 position relative to the GNS
in a GTN/GNS installation. In a typical radio stack, this would be above the GNS. This recommendation
is only applicable if the GTN-GNS crossfill function is utilized in the installation.
2.4.10.1.1 Determination of Acceptable Field of View
The FAA has determined that the acceptable field-of-view for TSO-C146c annunciations related to
navigation source selection is approximately 30 horizontally from the center of the attitude indicator (or
centerline of the pilots seat/yoke), and that the acceptable field-of-view for TSO-C146c annunciations
related to GPS navigation data is approximately 35 horizontally from the center of the attitude
indicator. These angles are based on the closest panel distance of 24 inches resulting in a measured offset
from the attitude indicator of 13.9 inches and 16.8 inches respectively.
The acceptable vertical field-of-view includes the area from the top of the instrument panel to the portion
of the instrument panel that is immediately below the basic T instruments. For an IFR-approved GPS
installation, either (i) the GTN unit must be located within the 35 horizontal acceptable field-of-view or
(ii) source selection and GPS annunciations are required to be installed. If the GTN unit is installed
between 30 and 35, at a minimum, source selection annunciation must be installed. Note that
Figure 2-15, Figure 2-16, and Figure 2-17 show a GTN 7XX. The dimensions shown in these drawings
are also applicable to the GTN 6XX. If the GTN is installed within 30, no external annunciations are
required.

NOTE
If a GTN is installed with an external EFIS in the primary field of view that provides the
annunciations discussed in the following sections, then separate external annunciators are
not required. The GDU 620 provides all of the annunciations required by these sections.

2.4.10.1.2 Source Selection Annunciation

Use the steps below to determine whether or not the integrated source selection annunciation displayed on
the GTN unit to be installed is within the acceptable field-of-view. See Figure 2-15.
1. Determine the pilots primary view centerline, utilizing the following criteria:
o For aircraft with a basic T instrument configuration with the attitude indicator in the
upper center location, the center of this instrument should be used as the primary view
centerline.
o If the basic T is offset away from the radio stack with respect to the control yoke or a
non-standard instrument cluster is present in the aircraft, the center of the control yoke or
stick in the neutral position may be used as the primary view centerline.
o If the control yoke/stick is offset from the center of the pilots seat, an imaginary line
extended through the center of the pilots seat may be used as the primary view centerline.
2. Measure the horizontal distance from the primary view centerline to the left or right edge of the
GTN unit, as appropriate.
3. If the GTN unit is mounted to the right of the primary instruments, the internal display of
annunciation within the GTN is considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the
following criteria are met:
o The left edge of the GTN unit bezel is within 10.6 0.25 inches of the primary view
centerline and;

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-29
 o The top edge of the GTN unit is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight
instruments or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
4. If the GTN unit is mounted to the left of the primary instruments, the internal display of
annunciation within the GTN unit is considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the
following criteria are met:
o The right edge of the GTN unit is within 10.0 0.25 inches of the primary view center line
and;
o The top edge of the GTN unit is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight
instruments or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
If the internal display of annunciation within the GTN unit does not meet the criteria for acceptable field-
of-view as defined above, an external source selection annunciator must be integrated in the affected
CDI/HSI or an additional annunciator which clearly indicates the CDI/HSI source as VLOC or GPS must
be installed within 13.6 0.25 inches of the view centerline.
All annunciations must be within 13.6 0.25 inches of the view centerline.

UPPER LIMIT PILOTS INSTRUMENT T

Glareshield

ACCEPTABLE
FIELD-OF-VIEW
AREA

GTN 750 SHOWN

2 3

LOWER LIMIT

10.3 10.9
13.9 13.9

Instrument T Centerline 1

NOTES:

1 FOR AIRCRAFT WITHOUT THE BASIC INSTRUMENT T CONFIGURATION, THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS YOKE
OR CONTROL STICK IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION SHOULD BE USED TO DETERMINE THE CENTERLINE. IF THE
CONTROL YOKE/STICK IS OFFSET FROM THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS SEAT, AN IMAGINARY LINE EXTENDED
THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS SEAT MAY BE USED AS THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE.

2 THE TOP EDGE OF THE GTN UNIT SHOULD BE NO LOWER THAN THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE PRIMARY
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS.

3 FOR AIRCRAFT IN WHICH THE TYPE CERTIFICATED CDI OR HSI LOCATION IS BELOW THE BASIC T, THE
LOWER LIMIT OF THE ACCEPTABLE FIELD-OF-VIEW SHOULD BE THE BOTTOM OF THE CDI OR HSI.

Figure 2-15. GTN CDI Source Selection Annunciation Field of View (30)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-30 Rev. 4
2.4.10.1.3 GPS Navigation Annunciation
Use the steps below to determine whether or not the integrated GPS navigation annunciation displayed on
the GTN unit to be installed is within the acceptable field of-view as depicted in Figure 2-16.
1. Determine the pilots primary view centerline, as defined in Step 1 of Section 2.4.10.1.2.
2. Measure the horizontal distance from the primary view centerline to the left or right edge of the
GTN unit, as appropriate.
3. If the GTN unit is mounted to the right of the primary instruments, the internal display of
annunciation within the GTN is considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the
following criteria are met:
o The left edge of the GTN unit bezel is within 14.4 inches of the primary view centerline.
o The top edge of the GTN unit is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight
instruments or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
4. If the GTN unit is mounted to the left of the primary instruments, the internal display of
annunciation within the GTN unit is considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the
following criteria are met:
o The right edge of the GTN unit bezel is within 12.2 inches of the primary view center line.
o The top edge of the GTN unit is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight
instruments or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
If the internal display of GPS navigation annunciation within the GTN unit does not meet the criteria for
acceptable field-of-view as defined above, an external annunciator unit must be installed within 16.8
inches of the view centerline.
The external GPS Navigation annunciator unit must contain, at a minimum, the following annunciations:
INTEG, INTG or LOI
TERM
APR
MSG
WPT
All annunciations must be within 16.8 inches of the view centerline.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-31
 UPPER LIMIT PILOTS INSTRUMENT T

Glareshield

ACCEPTABLE
FIELD-OF-VIEW
AREA

GTN 7XX SHOWN

2 3

LOWER LIMIT

12.2 14.4
16.8 16.8

Instrument T Centerline 1

NOTES:

1 FOR AIRCRAFT WITHOUT THE BASIC INSTRUMENT T CONFIGURATION, THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS YOKE
OR CONTROL STICK IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION SHOULD BE USED TO DETERMINE THE CENTERLINE. IF THE
CONTROL YOKE/STICK IS OFFSET FROM THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS SEAT, AN IMAGINARY LINE EXTENDED
THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS SEAT MAY BE USED AS THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE.

2 THE TOP EDGE OF THE GTN UNIT SHOULD BE NO LOWER THAN THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE PRIMARY
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS.

3 FOR AIRCRAFT IN WHICH THE TYPE CERTIFICATED CDI OR HSI LOCATION IS BELOW THE BASIC T, THE
LOWER LIMIT OF THE ACCEPTABLE FIELD-OF-VIEW SHOULD BE THE BOTTOM OF THE CDI OR HSI.

Figure 2-16. GTN Unit GPS Navigation Annunciation Field of View (35)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-32 Rev. 4
2.4.10.1.4 TAWS Annunciation (units with TAWS only)

Use the steps below to determine whether or not the integrated TAWS annunciations displayed on the
GTN unit to be installed is within the acceptable field of view as depicted in Figure 2-17.
1. Determine the pilots primary view centerline, as defined in Step 1 of Section 2.4.10.1.2.
2. Measure the horizontal distance from the primary view centerline to the left or right edge of the
GTN unit, as appropriate.
3. If the GTN unit is mounted to the right of the primary instruments, the internal display of
annunciation within the GTN is considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the
following criteria are met:
o The left edge of the GTN unit bezel is within 15.4 inches of the primary view centerline.
o The top edge of the GTN unit is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight
instruments or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
4. If the GTN unit is mounted to the left of the primary instruments, the internal display of
annunciation within the GTN unit is considered to be within the acceptable field-of-view if the
following criteria are met:
o The right edge of the GTN unit bezel is within 11.5 inches of the primary view center line.
o The top edge of the GTN unit is no lower than the bottom edge of the primary flight
instruments or the unit is line abreast with the affected CDI.
If the internal display of TAWS annunciation within the GTN unit does not meet the criteria for
acceptable field-of-view as defined above, an external annunciator unit must be installed within 16.8
inches of the view centerline.

The external TAWS annunciator unit must contain, at a minimum, the following annunciations:
PULL UP (terrain warning) red
TERR (terrain caution) amber/yellow
TER N/A (terrain not available) amber/yellow
TER INHB (terrain inhibited) white
All annunciations must be within 16.8 inches of the view centerline.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-33
 UPPER LIMIT PILOTS INSTRUMENT T

Glareshield

ACCEPTABLE
FIELD-OF-VIEW
AREA

GTN 750 SHOWN

2 3

LOWER LIMIT

11.5 15.4
16.8 16.8

Instrument T Centerline 1

NOTES:

1 FOR AIRCRAFT WITHOUT THE BASIC INSTRUMENT T CONFIGURATION, THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS YOKE
OR CONTROL STICK IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION SHOULD BE USED TO DETERMINE THE CENTERLINE. IF THE
CONTROL YOKE/STICK IS OFFSET FROM THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS SEAT, AN IMAGINARY LINE EXTENDED
THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE PILOTS SEAT MAY BE USED AS THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE.

2 THE TOP EDGE OF THE GTN UNIT SHOULD BE NO LOWER THAN THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE PRIMARY
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS.

3 FOR AIRCRAFT IN WHICH THE TYPE CERTIFICATED CDI OR HSI LOCATION IS BELOW THE BASIC T, THE
LOWER LIMIT OF THE ACCEPTABLE FIELD-OF-VIEW SHOULD BE THE BOTTOM OF THE CDI OR HSI.

Figure 2-17. TAWS Annunciation Field of View (35)

2.4.10.1.5 Angle of Regard

To prevent the bezel from obscuring the display screen, the GTN must be mounted so that the pilots
angle of regard with reference to the display surface is within the following angles:
From the left: 45
From the right: 35
From the top: 30
From the bottom: 10

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-34 Rev. 4
2.4.11 Cable and Wiring Considerations
Wiring should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, sections 8 through 13. The
following issues should be addressed:
It should not be possible for the cable harness to be exposed to wire chafing;
It should not be possible for a cable harness to be exposed to wire chafing in a manner that both
GPS units fail simultaneously;
The cable harness should not be located near flight control cables, high capacity electrical lines
(e.g. DC electric motor cables) or fuel lines;
The cable harness should be located in a protected area of the aircraft ( i.e. isolated from engine
rotor burst); and
Do not route cable near high-energy sources. (i.e. DC motors, high heat sources)
Wiring which is required to be shielded per the interconnect diagrams in Appendix E must be
shielded.
Pigtail lengths must be less than 3.0 inches.
For dual GTN unit installations, care should be taken to ensure separation between wires of
redundant systems to reduce the possibility of loss of navigation due to a single event.
Refer to Sections 3.3 and 3.6.7 for recommended coaxial cable types.
Refer to Appendix E and Appendix F for the appropriate wiring connections to assemble the wiring
connectors.
2.4.11.1 Pressurized Aircraft Considerations
In pressurized aircraft, wiring that penetrates the pressure vessel must be installed in accordance with the
Type Design of the aircraft. Any wires that penetrate the pressure bulkhead must use existing provisions
such as spare pins in the existing bulkhead connectors, or existing sealed wire through holes in
accordance with the aircraft maintenance manual.
Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this manual and would
require additional data from the aircraft manufacturer or other FAA approved data.
2.4.11.2 Coaxial Cable Considerations
When routing coaxial cables, observe the following precautions:
5. All cable routing should be kept as short and as direct as possible.
6. Avoid sharp bends.
7. Avoid routing cables near power sources (e.g., 400 Hz generators, trim motors, etc.) or near
power for fluorescent lighting.
See Section 3.6.6 for more information on the installation of coaxial cable.
2.4.11.3 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Installation
When routing marker beacon antenna cables, observe the following precautions:
All cable routing should be kept as short and as direct as possible.
Avoid sharp bends.
Avoid routing cables near power sources (e.g., 400 Hz generators, trim motors, etc.) or near
power for fluorescent lighting.
Avoid routing the marker beacon antenna cable near other antenna cables (e.g. ADF, COM, NAV, GS). See
Section 3.6.7 for marker beacon antenna termination technique.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-35
2.4.11.4 Shield Termination Consideration
Shield termination at non-Garmin equipment end must be as short as possible and not to exceed 3.0
taking into consideration any non-Garmin equipments installation requirements. When there are no
requirements given by the non-Garmin equipment installation manual, then the shields may be connected
to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe chassis ground. Alternately,
the shield termination may be directly connected to airframe chassis ground. Although the interconnects
in Appendix E do not show intermediate connectors, all shields must have continuity at any intermediate
connectors used unless otherwise specified. When shields are terminated to the aircraft ground or metal
backshell to provide this continuity, the shield drain wire must be no longer than 3 inches, unless non-
Garmin equipment requires shorter length. The termination method from Section 3.6.3.1 may be used at
these locations unless this conflicts with the requirement of non-Garmin equipment.
If intermediate connectors are used on an audio line, run the shields through a pin on all intermediate
connectors. Audio line shields should be continuous from end to end and be grounded only at one end to
prevent ground loops. See Section 2.4.12.
Shield splicing should be done at the GTN end close to the connector, similar to other non-spliced shields,
unless this conflicts with requirements from remote-end equipment. Honeywell equipment with EMI
backshells (e.g. 360 degree circular connectors, backshells with shields terminated inside a metal
backshell) require the shields to be terminated at the remote end from the GTN utilizing the EMI
backshell.
If a wire from the GTN connector goes to a connector at the remote end that includes overbraided wires
then the new wiring added at the remote end connector must also be overbraided. Any wires spliced into
this wire must also be overbraided. If the wiring passes through bulkhead connectors then each segment
shall be overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends, unless otherwise shown in the
remote equipments installation manual. The overbraid must be terminated as close to the connector as
possible taking into account any requirements imposed by the non-Garmin equipment. These additional
wires must be separately overbraided and ensure they are routed with the existing cable where possible.
The overbraid shall have a minimum of 90% optical coverage.
2.4.11.5 GTN Cooling Requirements
The GTN unit meets all TSO requirements without external cooling. However, as with all electronic
equipment, lower operating temperatures extend equipment life. Reducing the operating temperature may
reduce the mean time between failures (MTBF).
Units tightly packed in the avionics stack heat each other through radiation, convection, and sometimes
by direct conduction. Even a single unit operates at a much higher temperature in still air than in moving
air. Fans or some other means of moving the air around electronic equipment are usually a worthwhile
investment.
The GTN has a cooling fan integrated into the backplate to draw forced-air cooling through the unit.
There are inlets along the left, right, and bottom sides of the GTN bezel that allow air to flow through the
unit. Ensure that there are no obstructions to the air inlets or fan exhaust. Airflow should be unrestricted
from the bezel inlets to the fan outlet in the backplate on the rear of the unit.
2.4.11.6 GMA 35 Cooling Requirements
The GMA 35 does not have provisions for attaching cooling air and does not generate an excessive
amount of heat during typical operations, however the thermal characteristics of the installation should
always be assessed. An undesirable thermal condition could be created due to the unit's own internal
power dissipation combined with restricted ventilation, or due to heat generated by adjacent equipment.
Limiting thermal build up, by means of an external fan or natural convection is always a good practice
and is recommended to increase the product life.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-36 Rev. 4
2.4.12 Audio Electrical Noise
Because the audio panel is a point in the aircraft where signals from many pieces of equipment are
brought together, take care to minimize effects from coupled interference and ground loops. Coupled
interference can creep into audio system interconnecting cables when they are routed near large AC
electric fields, AC voltage sources and pulse equipment (strobes, spark plugs, magnetos, EL displays,
CRTs, etc). Interference can also couple into audio system interconnecting cables by magnetic induction
when they are routed near large AC current-carrying conductors or switched DC equipment (heaters,
solenoids, fans, autopilot servos, etc).
Ground loops are created when there is more than one path in which return currents flow or when signal
returns share the same path as large currents from other equipment. These large currents create
differences in ground potential between the various equipment operating in the aircraft. These differences
in potential can produce an additive effect on audio panel input signals. The audio panel may hear the
desired input signal plus an unwanted component injected by ground differentials, a common cause of
alternator-related noise. This is the main reason why all audio jacks should be isolated from ground.
Terminating audio shields at one end eliminates a potential ground loop injection point. The audio shields
should only be grounded at one end to prevent ground loops. The wiring diagrams and accompanying
notes in this manual should be followed closely to minimize noise effects.
2.4.13 Transmit interlock and Split COM Operation
In small aircraft, COM and NAV receiver interference is affected by both the distance between antennas
and the tuned frequency separation. With transmit interlock activated in the COM transceivers, split COM
operation between a flight crew of more than one pilot is affected.
In aircraft that have a transmit interlock feature, when either transmitter is keyed, all other receivers are
muted so that they wont pick up interference from the active COM transmitter. This is the preferred
option for single pilot operation.
For aircraft with two flight crew members, transmit-interlock would likely interfere with communications.
When the pilot or the copilot transmit, no audio is heard on any other receiver. This means that if the pilot
is communicating with ATC while the copilot transmits on another radio, all pilot reception is cut off
during the time of copilot transmission.
If the installation does not have transmit-interlock activated, all the receivers are listening all the time
whether any radio is transmitting or not. Split COM performance varies significantly across installations.
If the transceivers interfere with each other, transmission by one radio produces static or squeal, thus loss
of communication from any other radio.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 2-37
2.4.14 GMA 35 Wiring Considerations for Failsafe Operation
The GMA 35 includes a failsafe circuit that connects the pilots headset and microphone directly to
COM1 in the event that power is interrupted or RS-232 communication with the GTN is lost.
When the GMA 35 is installed with a GTN 750 and a second COM radio, the GTN 750 COM must be
connected to the COM 2 pins (J3501-13,-14,-15) on the GMA 35. The other radio should be connected to
the COM 1 pins. This will prevent the loss of both COM radios if power to the GMA 35 or RS-232
communication to the GMA 35 is lost. The GTN includes a configuration setting to allow the GTN 750
COM radio to appear as COM 1 in the GTN user interface. COM 1 is connected as COM 2 should be
set to True in this case. See Section 5.5.4.8 for information about this setting.
If the GMA 35 is installed with a GTN 725 (no COM) and two other COM radios, wire COM 1 to the
COM 1 pins on the GMA 35, and COM 2 to the COM 2 pins. COM 1 is connected as COM 2 should be
set to False in this case. See Section 5.5.4.8 for information about this setting.
If the GMA 35 is installed with dual GTN 750s, wire GTN 750 #1 to the COM 1 pins on the GMA 35,
and wire GTN 750 #2 to the COM 2 pins on the GMA 35. COM 1 is connected as COM 2 should be set
to False in this case.
2.4.15 Magnetic Compass Recalibration
After reconfiguring the avionics in the cockpit panel, if the GTN unit is mounted less than 12 inches from
the compass, recalibrate the compass and make the necessary changes for noting correction data.
2.4.16 Weather Radar Wiring Considerations
The GTN can interface with weather radar only in a metal aircraft. Any HSDB weather radar wiring in
the radome area must be overbraided. Refer to Section G.1.1 for more information.
Weather radar data can be displayed only on GTN 7XX units. Weather radars that use ARINC 453/708
for data transfer must be connected directly to the GTN 7XX. For an installation that includes a
GWX 68/70 and two GTNs (one of which must be a GTN 7XX), the GWX 68/70 can be connected to any
GTN and the data will be forwarded over HSDB to the GTN 7XX.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 2-38 Rev. 4
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 Optional Accessories
3.1.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna Options
For information regarding antenna selection, refer to Section 1.10. Once the antenna type is decided upon,
refer to the information below for detailed parts information for antennas available from Garmin. Contact
the antenna manufacturer directly for non-Garmin antennas.
3.1.1.1 GA 35 Antenna
The GA 35 antenna, Garmin P/N 013-00235-XX, contains one of the items listed in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. GA 35 Antenna

Item Part Number Qty

013-00235-00 (White)
GA 35 GPS/WAAS Antenna [1] 013-00235-01 (Black) 1
013-00235-02 (Olive Green)
[1] Antenna includes 8-32 UNC-2A x 1.00 Stainless Steel mounting screws (qty 4) and
O-ring (qty 1).

An antenna doubler may also be required. Refer to Section 3.1.2 for additional information.
To secure the antenna #8 washers (qty 4) and #8 (qty 4) self-locking nuts are required in addition to the
antenna, or suitable nutplates may be installed on the doubler.
To connect the GPS antenna coaxial cable to the antenna a TNC plug is required.
3.1.1.2 GA 36 Antenna
The GA 36 antenna, Garmin P/N 013-00244-XX, contains one of the items listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2. GA 36 Antenna

Item Part Number Qty

013-00244-00 (White)
GA 36 GPS/WAAS Antenna [1] 013-00244-01 (Black) 1
013-00244-02 (Olive Green)
[1] Antenna includes 8-32 UNC-2A x 1.00 Stainless Steel mounting screws (qty 4) and
O-ring (qty 1).

An antenna doubler may also be required. Refer to Section 3.1.2 for additional information.
To secure the antenna #8 washers (qty 4) and #8 (qty 4) self-locking nuts are required in addition to the
antenna, or suitable nutplates may be installed on the doubler.
To connect the GPS antenna coaxial cable to the antenna a TNC plug is required.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-1 Rev. 4
3.1.1.3 GA 37 Antenna
The GA 37 antenna, Garmin P/N 013-00245-XX, contains the one of the items listed in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3. GA 37 Antenna

Item Part Number Qty

013-00245-00 (White)
GA 37 GPS/WAAS + XM Antenna [1] 013-00245-01 (Black) 1
013-00245-02 (Olive Green)
[1] Antenna includes 8-32 UNC-2A x 1.00 Stainless Steel mounting screws (qty 4) and
O-ring (qty 1).
An antenna doubler may also be required. Refer to Section 3.1.2 for additional information.
To secure the antenna #8 washers (qty 4) and #8 (qty 4) self-locking nuts are required in addition to the
antenna, or suitable nutplates may be installed on the doubler.
To connect the GPS antenna coaxial cable to the antenna a TNC plug is required.
3.1.2 GPS Antenna Doubler
If installing the GPS/WAAS antenna onto existing provisions a doubler may not be required. If installing
the GPS antenna using AML STC SA02018SE-D as the basis for approval, one of the following antenna
doublers is required:
Antenna doubler P/N 115-00846-00, for the GA 36 and GA 37 antennas. This doubler contains
nut plates (qty. 4) for the antenna mounting screws.
Antenna doubler P/N 115-00846-10, for the GA 35 antenna. This doubler does not contain nut
plates.
Antenna doubler P/N 115-00873-00, for the GA 36 and GA 37 antennas. This doubler contains
nut plates (qty. 4) for the antenna mounting screws.
The above doublers may be purchased from Garmin or fabricated in accordance with the Antenna STC
Installation Manual, P/N 190-01284-00.
3.2 Miscellaneous Options
The connector used to connect the coaxial cable to the antenna is listed in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4. Miscellaneous Options - Other

Item Amphenol P/N

Connector, TNC, Male, Crimp 031-4452

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-2 Rev. 4
3.3 Antenna Installation and Connections
3.3.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna
This section provides information on the antenna cable installation. Refer to Section 2.4.4.1 for antenna
installation location considerations.

NOTE

The internal GTN unit COM does not interfere with its own GPS receiver. However,
placement of the GTN unit antenna relative to other COM transceivers and antennas
(including the GTN unit COM antenna) is critical.

It is permissible to temporarily locate the GPS antenna with a coaxial cable connected to the GTN and
check the GPS performance as described in Section 5.7.2. Permanently mount the antenna once a suitable
location has been verified.
Once the antenna mounting position has been established, route the coaxial cable from the antenna to the
GTN. Proper selection of coaxial cable and assembly of connectors is critical to GPS signal performance.

NOTE

GPS/WAAS antenna cable loss must be between 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB in order to
maintain proper rejection of interference signals.

Additional loss from coaxial connectors and adapters, such as TNC to BNC, should be considered when
computing cable loss. A typical loss of 0.2 dB can be used for each connection. To maintain integrity of
the WAAS signal, the GPS antenna coaxial cable must have a minimum of two shields (e.g. RG-400 or
RG-142B).

NOTE

GPS antennas listed in Section 3.3 require a cable loss between 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB. If
RG-142B or RG-400 is used, 1.5 dB equates to a length of approximately 6.5 feet of
cable with a connector on each end. RG-142B or RG-400 cable can be used as long as
the length is less than 35 feet. For longer lengths, use low-loss double or triple-
shielded, 50 coaxial.

For very short runs, where the loss is less than 1.5 dB, additional cable should be used to increase the loss
to within 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB. This additional cable may be coiled, taking into account the minimum bend
radius of the cable.
During the post-installation checkout, susceptibility to harmonics of VHF COM transmitters will be
evaluated. If problems arise, better isolation or distance may be required between the GPS and COM
antennas, or a 1575.42 MHz notch filter may be installed in series with the antenna coaxial of the VHF
COM transceiver to reduce or eliminate the harmonic interference. A notch filter for this use (P/N 330-
00067-00) is available from Garmin.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-3 Rev. 4
If a VHF COM transmitter causes problems with the GPS on the selected frequencies as listed in the post-
installation checkout, the problem may be due to the ELT. This can be verified by disconnecting the ELT
antenna coaxial at the ELT unit. If the ELT is found to cause the problem, then contact the ELT
manufacturer or replace the ELT.
3.3.1.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna Cable Installation for IFR-Certified Non-Metal Aircraft
The GPS/WAAS antenna cable for non-metal aircraft must be overbraided to protect against lightning
currents being injected into the antenna port during a lightning strike to the aircraft. Aircraft constructed
of metal tube and fabric that have the antenna grounded to the metal tubes do not require this overbraid.
See Appendix G for a list of aircraft requiring this overbraid. Both GPS/WAAS antenna cables must be
overbraided in a dual GTN installation. Nonmetallic VFR-only aircraft do not need overbraid on the
GPS/WAAS antenna cable. Install the overbraid in accordance with the procedure below and measure the
length of cable needed to route it through the aircraft from the mounted antenna location to the GTN
backplate in the radio stack. Cut the cable to the measured length. The length of overbraid required will
be the length of the GPS/WAAS antenna cable plus 6 inches.
1. Slide the overbraid over the entire length of the GPS/WAAS antenna cable.
2. Route the GPS/WAAS antenna cable/connector assembly with overbraid from the GPS/WAAS
antenna to the GTN backplate in the radio stack per the instructions in Section 3.3.1.
3. Roll back approximately 1.5 inches of the overbraid end at the antenna end.
4. Leaving the rolled-back portion free, secure the outboard end of the overbraid around the
GPS/WAAS antenna connector with an electrical tie-down strap.
5. Fold the free overbraid ends back over the tie-down strap and secure them to the cable with two
additional tie-down straps.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-4 Rev. 4
 NOTES:

1 THE OVERBRAID MUST BE INSERTED INTO THE GROUNDING LUG BY COMBING OUT AND
TWISTING THE WIRE STRANDS AND BEFORE TERMINATING THEM IN A TERMINAL LUG.

2 WHEN INSTALLING OVERBRAID AT CONNECTOR END OF PIGTAIL, THE OVERBRAID IS

PUSHED DOWN UNTIL IT TOUCHES THE TOP SURFACE OF THE CONNECTOR.
CONTINUE PUSHING BRAID DOWN BY SPREADING IT OUT ALONG THE TOP SURFACE
OF THE CONNECTOR. APPLY THE FIRST TIE WRAP AROUND THE BRAID AND ANTENNA
CABLE WHERE IT ENTERS THE CONNECTOR. THEN LIFT THE SPREAD PORTION OF
THE BRAID UP TO COVER THE FIRST TIE-WRAP, DOUBLING BACK ON ITSELF. INSTALL
THE REMAINING TWO TIE-WRAPS ABOVE THE BULGE CREATED BY THE FIRST TIE-
WRAP WHICH IS NOW COVERED BY THE BRAID.

ANTENNA
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA CONNECTOR
#8 TERMINAL LUG
MS25036-156

CONNECT TO P1001
SHIELD BLOCK
GROUND
ELECTRICAL TIE DOWN CONNECTOR 1.5"
MS3367-1-X 2
3 PLCS

TO GPS ANTENNA CONNECTOR

1
ON GTN BACKPLATE
OVERBRAID DOUBLED BACK
ON SELF

2" MAX
OVERBRAID INTSTALLED OVER ENTIRE
OVERBRAID
LENGTH OF THE GPS ANTENNA CABLE
AIRCRAFT SPRUCE P/N 863

Figure 3-1. GPS/WAAS Antenna Cable Overbraid Installation Details

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-5
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-6 Rev. 4
3.3.2 COM Antenna Cable Considerations
The GTN requires a standard 50 vertically polarized antenna. Follow the antenna manufacturers
installation instructions for mounting the antenna, and gain other FAA approval.
For optimum performance the antenna should be mounted on a metal surface or a ground plane with a
minimum area of 18 x 18 inches. Refer to Section 2.4.4.2 for installation location considerations.
The antenna coaxial cable must be made of RG-142B, RG-400 or a comparable quality 50 coaxial.
Check for insertion loss and VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio). VSWR should be checked with an in-
line type VSWR/wattmeter inserted in the coaxial transmission line between the transceiver and the
antenna. The VSWR/ wattmeter should be inserted as close to the transceiver as possible. When rack and
harness buildup is performed in the shop, the coaxial termination may be provisioned by using a 6 inch
inline BNC connection. This would be an acceptable place to insert the VSWR. Any problem with the
antenna installation is most likely seen as high reflected power. A VSWR of 3:1 may result in up to a
50% loss in transmit power.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-7
3.3.3 NAV Antenna
The NAV antenna is a standard 50 horizontally polarized NAV/VOR/Localizer/Glideslope antenna. The
NAV antenna receives VOR frequencies between 108.00 and 117.95 MHz and localizer frequencies
between 108 and 112 MHz and glideslope information between 328.6 and 335.4 MHz Follow the antenna
manufacturers installation instructions for mounting antennas, and gain other FAA approval. It is
recommended that the installer use RG-142B, RG-400 or equivalent 50 coaxial for the NAV antenna(s).
3.3.3.1 NAV Antenna Cable Splitter Installation
The splitter P/N 013-00112-00 is required to be installed with the NAV antenna coaxial cable wiring in
certain configurations, and it must be installed in accordance with the guidance below. Connecting the
splitter is installation-dependent. Wire the splitter as shown in the applicable diagram in Figure E-18.
When determining a proper location to mount the splitter, use the following guidance:
Locate the splitter such that minimal coaxial cable is used in the installation. In general, this will
be as close to the GTN as practical.
Install the splitter on a flat surface in the fuselage in a location free from excessive vibration.
Splitter installation requires four (4) 4-40 fasteners (torque within 5 to 6 in-lbs). The following
fasteners are recommended:
Stainless Hardware
Name Part Number
Screw, Pan Head, Stainless MS51957, (AN515C)
Washer, .016 thickness NAS1149CN416R, (AN960C-4L)
Washer, .032 thickness NAS1149CN432R, (AN960C-4)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex, Thin NASM21043-04, NAS1291C04, (MS21043-04)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex NASM21046C04, (MS21046C04)
Nutplate, One Lug, Fixed MS21052, MS21054, MS21072
Nutplate, One Lug, Floating MS21062
Nutplate, Two Lug, Fixed MS21048, MS21050, MS21070
Nutplate, Two Lug, Floating MS21060, MS21076
Nutplate, Corner MS21056, MS21058, MS21074
Nutplate, Side-by-side MS21087
Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may
still be available and/or referenced on packaging material.
Steel Hardware
Name Part Number
Screw, Pan Head, Low Carbon Steel NASM35206, (MS35206), (AN515)
Screw, Pan Head, Alloy Steel NAS600
Washer, .016 thickness NAS1149FN416P, (AN960-4L)
Washer, . 032 thickness NAS1149FN432P, (AN960-4)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex, Thin NASM21042L04, NAS1291-04, (MS21042L04)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex NASM21045L04, (MS21045L04)
Nutplate, One Lug, Fixed MS21051, MS21053, MS21071
Nutplate, One Lug, Floating MS21061
Nutplate, Two Lug, Fixed MS21047, MS21049, MS21069
Nutplate, Two Lug, Floating MS21059, MS21075
Nutplate, Corner MS21055, MS21057, MS21073
Nutplate, Side-by-side MS21086
Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may
still be available and/or referenced on packaging material.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-8 Rev. 4
3.3.3.2 NAV Antenna Cable Diplexer Installation
The Comant CI-507 diplexer is required to be installed with the NAV antenna coaxial cable wiring in
certain configurations, and it must be installed in accordance with the guidance below. Connecting the
diplexer is installation-dependent. Wire the diplexer as shown in the applicable diagram in Figure E-18.
When determining a proper location to mount the diplexer, use the following guidance:
Locate the diplexer such that minimal coaxial cable is used in the installation. In general, this will
be as close to the antennas as practical.
Install the diplexer on a flat surface in the fuselage in a location free from excessive vibration.
Diplexer installation requires two (2) 10-32 fasteners (torque within 22 to 25 in-lbs). The
following fasteners are recommended:
Stainless Hardware
Name Part Number
Screw, Pan Head, Stainless NASM51958, (MS51958), (AN520C)
Washer, .032 thickness NAS1149C0332R, (AN960C-10L)
Washer, .063 thickness NAS1149F0363P, (AN960C-10)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex, Thin NASM21043-3, NAS1291C3, (MS21043-3)
NASM21046C3, MS20365C1032C, NAS1021C3,
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex
(MS21046C3), (AN363C1032)
Nutplate, One Lug, Fixed MS21052, MS21054, MS21072
Nutplate, One Lug, Floating MS21062
Nutplate, Two Lug, Fixed MS21048, MS21050, MS21070
Nutplate, Two Lug, Floating MS21060, MS21076
Nutplate, Corner MS21056, MS21058, MS21074
Nutplate, Side-by-side MS21087
Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may
still be available and/or referenced on packaging material.
Steel Hardware
Name Part Number
Screw, Pan Head, Low Carbon Steel NASM35207, (MS35207), (AN520)
Screw, Pan Head, Alloy Steel NAS603
Washer, .032 thickness NAS1149F0332P, (AN960-10L)
Washer, .063 thickness NAS1149F0363P, (AN960-10)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex, Thin NASM21042L3, NAS1291-3, (MS21042L3)
Nut, Self-locking Metal, Hex NASM21045L3, (MS21045L3), (AN363-1032)
Nutplate, One Lug, Fixed MS21051, MS21053, MS21071
Nutplate, One Lug, Floating MS21061
Nutplate, Two Lug, Fixed MS21047, MS21049, MS21069
Nutplate, Two Lug, Floating MS21059, MS21075
Nutplate, Corner MS21055, MS21057, MS21073
Nutplate, Side-by-side MS21086
Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may
still be available and/or referenced on packaging material.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-9
3.4 GTN/GMA 35 Location and Mounting
3.4.1 GTN Rack Installation
Use the dimensions shown in Figure A-4 (GTN 6XX) or Figure A-6 (GTN 7XX) to prepare the mounting
holes for the GTN 6XX or GTN 7XX unit. The GTN 6XX or GTN 7XX unit mounting rack itself may
also be used as a template for drilling the mounting holes.
1. The backplate of the rack may optionally be removed for ease of mounting in the aircraft panel.
To do so, remove the two #4-40 screws, tilt the backplate away from the tray, and then slide the
backplate to the side.
2. Figure A-9 shows outline dimensions for the aviation rack for the various GTN units. Install the
rack in a rectangular 6.320 x 4.600 hole (or gap between units) in the instrument panel (See
Figure A-10). The lower-front lip of the rack should be flush with, or extend slightly beyond, the
face of aircraft instrument panel.

NOTE

If the front lip of the mounting rack is behind the surface of the aircraft panel, the GTN
unit connectors may not fully engage.

3. Make sure that no screw heads or other obstructions prevent the unit from fully engaging in the
rack (see Section 5.3). Exercise caution when installing the rack into the instrument panel.
Deformation of the rack may make it difficult to install and remove the GTN.
4. Install the rack in the aircraft panel using six #6-32 flat head screws and six self-locking nuts. The
screws are inserted from the inside through the holes in the sides of the rack. Torque screws 12-
15 in-lbs.
5. Verify GTN/GMA rack is electrically bonded to aircraft structure or instrument panel as required
in Section 2.4.5.
6. If the backplate was previously removed (see Step 1), replace the backplate by positioning the
tabs on the backplate in the slots of the left side of the rack (viewing it from the cockpit) and
attaching it by replacing the two #4-40 screws. Torque 5 to 6 in-lbs.
3.4.2 GTN Unit Insertion and Removal
It may be necessary to insert the hex drive tool into the access hole and rotate the cam mechanism 90
counterclockwise to ensure correct position prior to placing the unit in the rack. The GTN is installed in
the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops, about 1 inch short of the final position. A 3/32-inch hex
drive tool is then inserted into the access hole at the bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool clockwise
while pressing on the left side of the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
To remove the unit from the rack, insert the hex drive tool into the access hole on the unit face and rotate
counterclockwise until the unit is forced out about 3/8 inches and can be freely pulled from the rack.
Be sure not to over-tighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbs can damage the locking mechanism.
NOTE
After installing a GTN unit, verify that the unit power-up self-test sequence is
successfully completed and no failure messages or configuration error messages are
annunciated. Section 5.7.1 outlines the power-up self-test sequence.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-10 Rev. 4
3.4.3 GMA 35 Rack Installation
Use the six 6-32 screws that accompany the GMA 35 installation kit to install the GMA 35 mounting rack
to a GTN 7XX mounting rack. The screws are installed from the bottom side of the GTN 7XX mounting
rack using through-holes to access the mounting locations on the GMA 35 mounting rack. Refer to
Figure A-2 and Figure A-8.
3.4.4 GMA 35 Unit Insertion and Removal
The GMA 35 is installed into the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops. A 3/32-inch hex drive tool is
then inserted into the hex hole at the bottom center of the unit. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while
pressing the unit on the front until the GMA 35 is firmly seated in the rack.
To remove the GMA 35 from the rack, insert the hex drive tool into the hex hole on the bottom center of
the unit and rotate counterclockwise until the unit is forced out about 3/8 inches and can be freely pulled
from the rack.
Be sure not to over-tighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbs can damage the locking mechanism.
3.5 Weight and Balance
Weight and balance computation is required after the installation of the GTN is complete. Follow the
guidelines as established in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 10, Section 2, as appropriate. Make appropriate entries
in the equipment list indicating items added, removed, or relocated along with the date the installation
was accomplished. Include your name and certificate number in the aircraft records. See Table 3-6 for a
sample calculation. Include a copy of the updated aircraft weight and balance in the aircraft POH/AFM.
Table 3-5 lists GTN 6XX/7XX and GMA 35 unit weights. Refer to Figure A-3 (GTN 6XX) and
Figure A-4 (GTN 7XX) for unit centers of gravity.

Table 3-5. LRU Weights

LRU Std. Wt [Metric Wt.]

GTN 750 (unit only) 7.4 lb [3.38 kg]
GTN 750 (with rack and backplate) 9.3 lb [4.24 kg]
GTN 725 (unit only) 6.1 lb [2.80 kg]
GTN 725 (with rack and backplate) 7.7 lb [3.52 kg]
GTN 650 (unit only) 5.5 lb [2.48 kg]
GTN 650 (with rack and backplate) 7.0 lb [3.20 kg]
GTN 635 (unit only) 4.8 lb [2.18 kg]
GTN 635 (with rack and backplate) 6.2 lb [2.82 kg]
GTN 625 (unit only) 4.2 lb [1.90 kg]
GTN 625 (with rack and backplate) 5.4 lb [2.48 kg]
GMA 35 (unit only) 1.4 lb [0.64 kg]
GMA 35 (with rack and backplate) 2.2 lb [1.00 kg]

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-11
 Table 3-6. Sample Aircraft Weight and Balance Calculation

Previous Aircraft
Weight and Useful Load (lb) Empty Weight (lb) C.G. (in) Moment (lb-in)
Balance

Calculated:
1093.3 2306.70 138.83 320233.96
06/29/12

Description of Items removed from

Weight (lb) Arm (in) Moment (lb-in)
aircraft

SL15 Audio Panel 1.00 55.00 55.00

GMX200 4.60 55.00 253.00

CNX80/GNS480 Color GPS/NAV/COM 6.10 55.00 335.50

SL30 NAV/COM 2.30 55.00 126.50

Total Removed: 14.00 770.00

Description of items added to aircraft Weight (lb) Arm (in) Moment (lb-in)

GTN 750 9.30 54.90 510.57

GTN 650 7.00 54.90 384.30

GMA 35 2.20 52.90 116.38

Total Added: 18.50 1011.25

Change 4.50 241.25

New Aircraft
Weight and Useful Load (lb) Empty Weight (lb) C.G. (in) Moment (lb-in)
Balance

Calculated: 1088.8 2311.2 138.66 320475.21

08/29/12

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-12 Rev. 4
3.6 Electrical Installation Procedure
3.6.1 Special Tools Required
A crimp tool meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01 and a positioner/locator are required to ensure
consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. Refer to Table 2-14 for a list
of recommended crimp tools. A milliohm meter is required to check GTN and optional GMA 35
installation bonding to aircraft structure or instrument panel.
3.6.2 Wire Harness Buildup
The installation kit for the GTN and optional GMA 35 include connectors and crimp contacts. Use wire
specified in Section 2.3.2 for all connections. Make the crimp connections with a crimp tool as specified
in Table 2-14.
Refer to the interconnect diagrams in Appendix E and Appendix F for the appropriate connections. Use
22 or 24 AWG wire for all connections. For power and ground, use the wire gauge specified in the
interconnect drawing in Appendix E, then 22 AWG for the short length from the splice to the connector,
for high-density connectors only. Install the configuration module as described in Section 3.6.3.2. Once
the cable assemblies have been made, use anti-chafe tape and attach the backshell/connector to the rear of
the mounting unit. Route the wiring bundle as appropriate. Avoid sharp bends that may damage the wire
bundle.
Allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and fabricates all of
the cables. See interconnect diagrams in Appendix E and Appendix F. Refer to Section 4 for connector
pinout information. All electrical connections to the GTN are made through the following connectors
provided by Garmin:
J1001 Main 78-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male)
J1002 Main 26-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male)
J1003 COM 44-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male) (GTN 635/650/750 only)
J1004 NAV 62-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male) (GTN 650/750 only)
J1005 I/O 62-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male) (GTN 7XX only)
All electrical connections to the GMA 35 are made through the following connectors provided by
Garmin:
J3501 44-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male)
J3502 44-pin high-density D-Subminiature connector (male)
Construct the wiring harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections.
Cable lengths will vary depending upon installation. Strip all wires going to the connectors 0.17. Insert
the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools. Insert the pin
into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawing in Appendix E. Verify that
the pin is properly engaged into the connector by gently tugging on the wire. Route and secure the cable
runs from the GTN and GMA 35 away from sources of electrical noise.
Section 4 provides the pin-out information for the GTN as well as the GMA 35. Required connectors and
associated hardware are supplied with the connector kits.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-13
 CAUTION

Check wiring connections for errors before inserting the unit into the tray. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.

Table 3-7. Socket Contact Part Numbers [1]

P1001-P1005
(including P1001
Wire Gauge configuration module) [2]

22-28 AWG
Garmin 336-00021-00
Military M39029/58-360 [3]
AMP 204370-2 [3]
Positronic MC8522D [3]
ITT Cannon 030-2042-000 [3]
[1] Recommended crimp tools are listed in Table 2-14.
[2] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire
(indenter setting of 4).
[3] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to
change without notice.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-14 Rev. 4
3.6.3 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors
The GTN connector kits (P/N 011-02325-00 [GTN 625], P/N 011-02325-01 [GTN 635],
P/N 011-02325-02 [GTN 650], P/N 011-02326-00 [GTN 725], and P/N 011-02326-01 [GTN 750])
include Garmin backshell assemblies and Garmin ground adapter assemblies. Backshell connectors give
the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing using the shield block ground
kit. Table 3-8 lists Garmin part numbers for the D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.

Table 3-8. GTN Backshell Assembly

Figure 3-2 thru

Description Garmin P/N Notes
Figure 3-5 Ref
Backshell (P1001) 125-00085-00
Backshell (P1002) 125-00082-00
1 [2]
Backshell (P1003) 125-00083-00
Backshell (P1004, P1005) 125-00084-00
Shield block (P1002, P1003) 117-00147-00
2 [3]
Shield block (P1001, P1004, P1005) 117-00147-01
3 Screw, 4-40 x.250, FLHP100, SS/P, Nylon 211-63234-08 [3], [4]
6 Screw, 4-40 x.375,PHP,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10 [2]
Strain Relief (P1001, P1004, P1005) 115-00499-03
7 Strain Relief (P1002) 115-00499-01 [2]
Strain Relief (P1003) 115-00499-02
Cover (P1001) 115-00500-04
Cover (P1002) 115-00500-01
8 [2]
Cover (P1003) 115-00500-02
Cover (P1004, P1005) 115-00500-03
9 Screw,4-40x.187, FLHP100,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [2]
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 78 Pin (P1001) 330-00185-78
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 26 Pin (P1002) 330-00185-26
10 Connector, D-Sub, HD, 44 Pin (P1003) 330-00185-44 [4]
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 62 Pin (P1004) 330-00185-62
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 62 Pin (P1005) 330-00185-62
Multiple Conductor Shielded Cable
11 As Required [5]
(See Interconnect Diagrams, Appendix E)
12 Shield Terminator As Required [5], [6]
13 Wire, Insulated (20-22 AWG), 3 max length As Required [5], [6]
14 Pin Contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [4]
MS25036-149,
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG,
15 MS25036-153, [5], [7]
14-16 AWG, 1210 AWG
MS25036-156
MS51957-42,
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32x.312", Stainless or Cad Plated Steel [5], [7]
MS35206-242
Split Washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) Stainless or MS35338-137,
17 [5], [7]
Cadmium plated steel MS35338-42
Flat Washer, #8, .032" thick, .174"ID, .375" OD, Stainless or NAS1149CN832R,
18 [5], [7]
Cad Plated Steel NAS1149FN832P
19 Silicon Fusion Tape 249-00114-00 [5]
[1] All items are applicable to P1001, P1002, P1003, P1004, and P1005 unless otherwise
specified.
[2] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/N 011-00950-04 (P1001), P/N 011-00950-01
(P1002), P/N 011-00950-02 (P1003) and P/N 011-00950-03 (P1004 and P1005).
[3] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kits P/N 011-01169-01 (P1001, P1004, P1005) and
P/N 011-01169-00 (P1002, P1003).
[4] Supplied as part of GTN Connector Kit P/N 011-02325-00 (GTN 625), P/N 011-02325-01
(GTN 635), P/N 011-02325-02 (GTN 650), P/N 011-02326-00 (GTN 725), and P/N 011-
02326-01 (GTN 750).
[5] Not supplied must be purchased separately.
[6] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used instead of items 12 and 13.
[7] Not a Garmin part number.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-15
 Table 3-9. GMA 35 Backshell Assembly

Figure 3-2 thru

Description Garmin P/N Notes
Figure 3-5 Ref
1 Backshell 125-00083-00 [2]
2 Shield block 117-00147-00 [3]
3 Screw, 4-40x.250, FLHP 100, SS/P 211-63234-08 [3]
6 Screw, 4-40x.437, FLHP100, SS/P, Nylon 211-60234-11 [2]
7 Strain Relief 115-00499-02 [2]
8 Cover 115-00500-02 [2]
9 Screw, 4-40x.187, FLHP100, SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [2]
10 Connector, D-Sub, HD, 44 Pin 330-00185-44 [4]
11 Multiple Conductor Shielded Cable As Required [5]
12 Shield Terminator As Required [5], [6]
13 Wire, Insulated (20-22 AWG), 3 max length As Required [5], [6]
14 Pin Contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [4]
15 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, MS25036-149 [5], [7]
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32x.312", Stainless or Cad Plated MS51957-42, [5], [7]
17 Split Washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) MS35338-137 [5], [7]
18 Flat Washer, #8, .032" thick, .174"ID, .375" OD, NAS1149CN832R, [5], [7]
Stainless or Cad Plated Steel NAS1149FN832P
19 Silicon Fusion Tape 249-00114-00 [5]
[1] All items are applicable to P3501 and P3502 unless otherwise specified.
[2] Supplied as part of Backshell Kit P/N 011-00950-02 (P3501 and P3502).
[3] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kit P/N 011-01169-00 (P3501 and P3502)
[4] Supplied as part of GMA 35 Connector Kit P/N 011-02302-00
[5] Not supplied must be purchased separately.
[6] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used instead of items 12 and 13.
[7] Not a Garmin part number.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-16 Rev. 4
3.6.3.1 Shield Block Assembly Procedure
The parts for the connector and backshell assemblies for the GTN installation are listed in Table 3-8. The
parts for the connector and backshell assemblies for the GMA 35 installation are listed in Table 3-9.
Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing
using the Shield Block ground kit. Table 3-8 and Table 3-9 list Garmin part numbers for the GTN and
GMA 35 D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.
The three tapped holes on the shield block above the GTN fan must not be used for grounding shield
terminal lugs on P1001. There is insufficient clearance between the fan case and the P1001 shield block to
allow these holes to be used for grounding shield terminal lugs. Refer to Section 3.6.4 for more
information. If the remaining three tapped holes on the shield block are unable to accommodate the shield
terminal lugs, the extra shields can be daisy chained to allow the shields to be grounded to the shield
block. A maximum of two shields can be daisy chained together. The daisy chaining method must only be
used if the three tapped holes are insufficient to ground the shields on P1001. See Figure 3-3 for the daisy
chaining method.

9 2X

1
5X 6

3 4X

Figure 3-2. Connector and Backshell Assembly

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-17
 PREFERRED METHOD

ALTERNATE METHOD 1

SHIELD DRAIN COMPONENTS AS SHORT AS

PRACTICAL (3" MAX COMBINED)

13
12

2.5 INCHES MAX 13

0.17 INCHES 0.31 INCHES MAX

ALTERNATE METHOD 2 (DAISY CHAIN)

Figure 3-3. Shielded Cable Preparation

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-18 Rev. 4
 OF ACT
GE NT .
A/R 14 ED CO
M AX
ET
CK 2.5"
SO

D
H IEL
O FS
ING
NN
GI
BE
12 A/R
10

11 A/R

A/R 19
.
15 A/R
M AX D
" E
.31 POS LD
X
E HIE
S

18 A/R 13 A/R

17 A/R

16 A/R

Figure 3-4. Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Preferred Method)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-19
The screws (16) used to ground the shields to the shield block must not penetrate too far past the shield
block when installed. If the screws are too long, they could potentially damage the wires going into the
backshell.
Note that a maximum of three ring terminals per screw is allowed for grounding shields to the shield
block. A maximum of two shield drains may be inserted into each ring terminal, meaning that one shield
block grounding screw (16) may accommodate grounding of up to six shield drains. Figure 3-4 shows
how to terminate the shields on the backshell. Note that only two wires are shown for clarity; the actual
installation will utilize more than two wires.

F ACT
A/R 14 G E O NT X.
ED T C
O
" MA
K E 2.5
SOC

D
H IEL
OFS
IN G
G INN
BE
12 A/R
10

11 A/R
A/R 19
.
15 A/R AX
1 " M SED
3
. PO D
L
EX HIE
S

18 A/R 13 A/R

17 A/R

16 A/R

Figure 3-5. Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Alternate Method)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-20 Rev. 4
Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in Figure 3-3. Refer to Figure 3-5 for details of the shield
termination to the connector backshell. Skip to step 5 below for wires with no shielding.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (11), strip back a 2.5 maximum length of the jacket to expose
the braid. Remove this exposed braid. Carefully score the jacket 1/4 to 5/16 from the end and
remove the jacket to leave the braid exposed.

NOTE

Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains should be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires, although separate shield terminators and individual
wires can be used.

2. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (13) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. (See
Figure 3-2). AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 may be a helpful reference for termination techniques. Note
that 3 methods are shown in Figure 3-2. The Daisy-Chain method should only be used on P1001
if there are insufficient holes in the shield block to accommodate the shields. Limit the combined
length of the daisy chained shields to 3 maximum.

NOTE

A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03 Series with the thermochromic
temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a pre-installed lead and
effectively take the place of items 12 and 13. For detailed instructions on product use,
refer to Raychem installation procedure.

3. Slide a shield terminator (12) onto the prepared cable assembly (11) and connect the wire (13) to
the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The chosen size of solder sleeve
must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable and the wire (13) to be
attached.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 as needed for the remaining shielded cables. Note that a maximum of 2
shields can be daisy-chained together.
5. Crimp pins/sockets (14) onto the wires and terminate in the connector (10) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
6. For P1001, install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to Section 3.6.3.2 for
instructions on installing the configuration module.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-21
Complete the following steps to assemble the backshell onto the connector:
1. Attach the Shield Block (2) to the backshell (1) by inserting the flathead screws (3) through the
holes on the Shield Block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (1)
(See Figure 3-2).
2. Wrap the cable bundle with Silicone Fusion Tape (19 or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
3. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief (7) across the cable bundle and secure using
the three screws (6). Ensure that each half of the strain relief bar is supporting half of the cable
bundle.

CAUTION

Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle may damage wires.

4. For P1001, install the configuration module into the connector backshell. Refer to Section 3.6.3.2
for instructions on installing the configuration module into the backshell.
5. Attach the cover (8) to the backshell using two screws (9).

NOTE

Each tapped hole on the shield block (2) may accommodate only three ring terminals
(15). Two wires per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8,
insulated, 14-16 AWG (MS25036-153). Each hole in the shield block can accommodate
six shield drains.

6. Install ring terminals (15) onto the wires (13), grouping wires as appropriate for the connector.
7. Terminate the ring terminals to the shield block (2) by placing items on the pan head screw (16)
in the following order: split washer (17), flat washer (18), first ring terminal, second ring terminal
if needed, before finally inserting the screw into the tapped holes on the shield block.
8. Insert the assembled connector into the backplate. Using screws (6), secure the connector into the
backplate.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-22 Rev. 4
3.6.3.2 Configuration Module Installation (P1001 only)
GTN P1001 connector assemblies serve as the housing for a configuration module. This sections lists
configuration module assemblies for new and existing GTN installations.

Table 3-10. Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P1001 Contact

Red Vcc 65
Black Ground 64
Yellow Data 62
White Clock 63

NOTE
The pin contacts supplied with the GTN configuration module are specifically
made to accommodate 28 AWG wire. The crimp tool should have the indenter
set to the correct setting when crimping these contacts to the configuration
module harness.

3.6.3.2.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB (new installations)

Refer to Figure 3-6 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip 0.17 of insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Crimp pins (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3).
5. Insert the newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing (5)
locations shown in Figure 3-6 and Figure E-4.
6. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB (1).
7. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (6) recess.
8. Attach cover (7) to backshell (6) using screws (8).

Table 3-11. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03 (P1001)

Figure 3-6
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-23
 Figure 3-6. Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-24 Rev. 4
3.6.3.2.2 Configuration Module Assembly with Spacer (existing installations)

NOTE

Configuration module assembly P/N 011-00979-00 may not be available for

new GTN installations. For new GTN installations, refer to Section 3.6.3.2.1.

Table 3-12. Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-00 (P1001)

Figure 3-7
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00

Refer to Figure 3-7 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip 0.17 of insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing
location shown in Figure 3-7 and Figure E-4.
4. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the PCB board (1) making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole provided in the spacer.
5. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB board (1).
6. With pad (2) in position, insert PCB board (1) into the backshell recess.
7. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted four conductor wire harness (3) is on the same
side of the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1).

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-25
 Figure 3-7. Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-26 Rev. 4
3.6.4 GTN Fan Installation

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the GTN, take precautions to prevent Electro-Static Discharge

(ESD) when handling the GTN, connectors, fan, and associated wiring. ESD damage can
be prevented by touching an object that is of the same electrical potential as the GTN
before handling the GTN itself.

Table 3-13 lists part numbers for the Fan Kit which is used with P1001 only.

Table 3-13. Fan Kit

Figure 3-8 Ref Description Garmin P/N

1 Fan Cable Assembly, 3 conductor harness 320-00600-00
2 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
3 Silicon Fusion Tape 249-00114-00

Table 3-14. Fan Cable Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P1001 Contact

Red Power 59
Black Ground 43
Yellow Fan tach 58

The GTN backplate assembly has a cooling fan mounted to it. The cooling fan is mounted to the
backplate assembly at the factory. The fan is necessary for proper cooling and air circulation within the
unit. The fan is powered from the GTN and must be wired to the GTN connector, P1001.
1. Crimp socket contacts onto each wire of the three-conductor wire harness. Strip 0.17 of
insulation from each wire prior to crimping. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires into
the appropriate connector housing location as shown in Figure 3-8 and the interconnect drawings
in Appendix E.
2. Plug the three-conductor wire harness connector into the connector on the fan.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-27
 1
Do not use 3 tapped holes on shield block above the fan. There is insufficient clearance between
the fan casing and terminal lugs.
2
Wrap fan wires with fusion tape separately from the main harness to prevent the fan wires from
being dislodged or damaged if there is movement between the main harness and the fan harness.
3
Ensure the fan wires do not exceed a length of 8 inches.
Figure 3-8. Fan Wiring Installation

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-28 Rev. 4
3.6.5 TVS, Fuse and Resistor Installation (nonmetallic aircraft only)
This section applies to IFR, nonmetallic aircraft only. VFR, non-metal aircraft do not require the use of
TVSs or fuses.
Certain nonmetallic aircraft will require TVSs at the main and NAV power inputs of the GTN. Refer to
Appendix G to determine which aircraft require them. Refer to Section 2.3.2.4 for TVS component part
numbers.
3.6.5.1 TVS/Fuse Installation

NOTE

Only TVS1/F1 are installed as described below. The TVS2 assembly uses standard
terminal lugs and should be installed in accordance with the notes on the applicable
interconnect diagram in Appendix E.

For all TVS/fuse assemblies that are required for lightning protection, install them in accordance with
Figure 3-11 and the notes on the applicable interconnect diagram in Appendix E.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-29
 Figure 3-9. TVS/Fuse Installation (TVS1/F1)

3.6.5.1.1 TVS2 Assembly (Nonmetallic Aircraft Only)

Certain nonmetallic aircraft will require a TVS assembly at the power bus that supplies power to the GTN
(refer to Appendix G to determine which aircraft require them). Refer to Section 2.3.2.4 for component
part numbers. Refer to Figure E-4 for interconnect drawings that show the TVS installed.

SOCKET CONTACT

CRIMP & SOLDER

0.5"
Max

Figure 3-10. Detail of TVS Pin Assembly

DETAIL OF TVS
HEAT SHRINK ANODE
CATHODE
0.44" FUSE
Max HOLDER
SOLDER

TO TO POWER
GROUND BUS

Environmental Splice
0.75" TVS (Qty. 4)
Max
4 Pin Connector

12.0"
Max
NOTE:
All four TVSs must be installed with the cathode facing the connector.

Figure 3-11. TVS 2 Assembly

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-30 Rev. 4
3.6.5.1.2 TVS2 Fabrication
1. Cut the TVS leads to 0.75+0.00/-0.10 inches on both sides.
2. Crimp and solder each of the four TVS banded side (cathode) leads to their connector specific
sockets (refer to Figure 3-10), and insert into the 4-pin connector with sockets.
3. Install heat shrink around the four TVSs this will help to hold them in place during the
following steps.
3.6.5.1.3 TVS2 Assembly Build
Refer to Figure 3-11 while completing the following steps.
1. Solder the four leads at the anode (ground) end of the assembly onto a length of 18 AWG wire.
Attach a terminal lug onto the wire end.
2. Attach an appropriately sized piece of heat shrink to cover the soldered TVS leads and four TVS
pieces. A second appropriately sized (larger) piece of heat shrink should then be attached to
shrink over the 4-pin connector with sockets and back over the four TVSs. These two pieces of
heat shrink should overlap along the entire length of the TVSs.
3. Crimp and solder four 18 AWG wires to their connector specific pins, and insert them into the 4-
pin connector with pins.
4. Attach lengths of 18 AWG to both ends of the fuse and fuse holder assembly.
5. Splice the four wires from the connector with pins to one of the wires attached to the fuse
assembly.
6. Attach a terminal lug onto the 18 AWG coming from the other end of the fuse assembly.
7. Connect the two four-pin connectors together.
8. Ensure that the fuse is installed in the fuse holder.
3.6.5.1.4 TVS2 Assembly Polarity Check
Using a multimeter that is set to the diode mode, check conductivity across the entire TVS2 assembly. In
one direction, the meter should read open and in the other direction it should read 2.0 to 2.5 volts. When
installed in the aircraft, the TVS assembly should be oriented so that it does not normally conduct from
power to ground. The meter should indicate open when the red lead is attached to the power bus terminal
lug, and the black lead is attached to the ground terminal lug. The meter should indicate 2.0 to 2.5 volts
when the red lead is attached to the ground terminal lug, and the black lead is attached to the power bus
terminal lug.
3.6.5.1.5 TVS2 Assembly Installation
Refer to Figure E-4 while completing the following steps.
1. Attach the fuse (power) end of the TVS assembly to the power bus at the specific point detailed in
the drawing.
2. Attach the ground end of the TVS2 assembly to aircraft ground.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-31
3.6.6 Coaxial Cable Termination
Follow the steps below for installation of coaxial cables:
1. Route the coaxial cable to the radio rack location, keeping in mind the recommendations above.
Secure the cable in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Section 11. If overbraid is required
on the GPS antenna coaxial cable, refer to Figure 3-1.
2. Trim the coaxial cable to the desired length and install the TNC or BNC connectors per the
cabling instructions in Figure 3-12 below. If the connector is provided by the installer, follow the
connector manufacturers instructions for cable preparation.

GASKET

NUT
1. PLACE NUT AND GASKET OVER CABLE AND STRIP JACKET
TO DIMENSION SHOWN.

9
16

2. COMB OUT BRAID AND TRIM DIELECTRIC TO

DIMENSION SHOWN.

3
16

3. PULL BRAID WIRES FORWARD AND TAPER TOWARD CENTER

CONDUCTOR. PLACE CLAMP OVER BRAID AND PUSH BACK
AGAINST JACKET.

4. FOLD BACK BRAID OVER CLAMP AS SHOWN. TRIM OFF

EXCESS BRAID. SOLDER CONTACT TO CENTER CONDUCTOR.

5. INSERT CABLE CLAMP AND GASKET INTO CONNECTOR

BODY MAKING SURE THAT SHARP EDGE OF CLAMP SEATS
PROPERLY AND TIGHTEN NUT.

Figure 3-12. Coaxial Cable Installation

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-32 Rev. 4
3.6.7 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Termination
This section provides guidance for terminating the coaxial cable into the D-Sub connector. See
Appendix F for pin assignments. RG-400 coaxial cable is recommended for the marker beacon antenna.
Since RG-400 is too thick to fit through the backshell strain relief, RG-179 or RG-188 may be used
instead. Route the cable to the D-Sub as described in Section 2.4.11.
When terminating the coaxial cable into the D-Sub observe the following guidance (refer to Figure 3-13)
Keep the distance from the end of the exposed shield to D-Sub as short as practical.
Ensure the distance from the beginning of the exposed shield to D-Sub is no more than 1.5 inches
long.
Terminate the center conductor by directly connecting it to the D-sub through a crimp pin without
a pigtail.
Figure 3-13 below represents a suggested method for terminating the marker beacon coaxial cable using
RG-188 terminated into a high density D-Sub connector. Refer to Table 2-14 for Crimp Tool, Pin, and
Crimp Tool Insert part numbers. Terminate the antenna end with a BNC-F connector and attach to the
marker beacon antenna.

GPN
336-00021-00
USE ON SHIELD
PIGTAIL

OF OR
GE T
K ED NNEC
C
BA B CO
U
DS
X
MA
H ES
INC
1.5

SOLDER PIGTAIL
TO SHIELD
D
IEL
D SH
SE D
PO IEL
EX SH
DO
F SED
GPN EN XPO
336-00044-00 O FE
ING
USE ON CENTER INN
CONDUCTOR BEG
G LD
BIN HIE RG-188
E TU ED S IL
CENTER BL S TA
KA XPO PIG
CONDUCTOR
H RIN ND E RED
S
OU LDE
AR SO
N D
A

TO BNC
Connector

Figure 3-13. GMA 35 Marker Beacon Coaxial Cable D-Sub Termination

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-33
3.6.8 Instrument Panel Bonding Procedure
If the instrument panel is electrically isolated from the aircraft structure, additional bonding may also be
required for the installation. A copper bonding strap with cross sectional area greater than 0.016 sq inches
(approx 20816 circular mils) is required. A 7/16-inch or wider QQ-B-575B (24120 circular mils)
overbraid meets this requirement. The strap length should be as short as possible and must not exceed six
inches in length. The installation shall be such that it avoids the bonding strap looping back on itself.
Refer to Section 2.3.2.5 for hardware specifications. Complete the installation using the following
procedure along with the guidance in AC 43.13-2B, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices -
Aircraft Alterations, AC 43.13-1B, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices Aircraft Inspection
and Repair, and aircraft make/model specific structural repair documentation, as indicated.
Construct a bonding strap by attaching 5/16-inch inside diameter terminal lugs to both ends of the
overbraid.
Prepare the bonding strap installation on the instrument panel with following procedure:
1. Drill a 5/16-inch hole in the instrument panel.
2. Drill a 5/16-inch hole in an existing structure, gusset, or tab of minimum dimensions 1.5"L x
1.5"W x 0.063"T on the aircraft structure; or refer to Section 3.6.8.1 for guidance on attaching the
bonding strap to tubular structure.
3. The bonding strap must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel and to the gusset or tab via
a spot face at least 0.125 larger in diameter than the bonding strap terminal lug and washer.
Install the bonding strap with the following procedure:
1. Secure one end of the bonding strap to the instrument panel with a 5/16-inch bolt, washers, and
nut in accordance with bonding requirements in Section 2.4.5. The washers must seat fully
against the panel, without overhang or interference from other hardware.
2. Secure the other end of the bonding strap to the tab with a 5/16-inch bolt and nut in accordance
with bonding requirements in Section 2.4.5. The washers must seat fully against the tab, without
overhang or interference from other hardware.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-34 Rev. 4
3.6.8.1 Attaching Bonding Strap to Tubular Structure
A tab may be welded to the tubular structure, or a conductive clamp may be used with the following
limitations. Complete the installation using the following procedures along with the guidance in
AC 43.13-2B, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft Alterations, AC 43.13-1B,
Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices Aircraft Inspection and Repair, and aircraft
make/model specific structural repair documentation, as indicated.
If a gusset or tab on the tubular structure suitable for attaching the bonding strap is not available, add a
new tab as follows:
1. Match the aircraft tube structure material with a tab of minimum dimensions 1.5"L x 1.5"W x
0.0.063"T.
2. Weld the tab to the tube.
3. Drill a 5/16-inch hole in the tab.
4. After assembly and bonding check, apply corrosion protection. Apply zinc chromate primer that
meets FED STD TT-P-1757, or epoxy primer that meets MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion
protection methods listed in the aircrafts maintenance manual.
If using an electrical bonding clamp, the install must be in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 and
the following criteria:
The AN735 conductive clamp must not be installed in lightning zone 1A, 1B, or 2B.
Use cadmium plated steel clamp, nut, and washers. Only AN735-6 and larger diameter clamps
are permitted.
Select location to minimize the presence of moisture and allow for easy inspection.
Remove 0.38 square inches of finish on the tubular frame to ensure required contact surface.
After assembly and bonding check, prime airframe tube and clamp in accordance with the
approved maintenance manual or MIL-PRF-85285 Type I, Color to suit (36081 Flat Gray
Preferable) Coating: Polyurethane, Aircraft And Support Equipment, or MIL-PRF-23377 Type I,
Class N, Primer Coatings: Epoxy, High-Solids.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-35
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis
A complete electrical load analysis (ELA) must be completed on each aircraft prior to installation to
verify that the aircraft electrical system is capable of supporting the GTN and optional GMA 35. If it is
determined that the modification results in an increase in electrical load then it must be further verified
that the aircraft electrical system remains in compliance which includes both electrical generation
capacity, and if loads have been increased, that reserve battery capacity remains adequate to support loads
essential to continued safe flight and landing. If the existing battery does not meet the battery capacity
requirements, a battery that has sufficient capacity must be installed. The installation of another battery is
not approved by this manual and is beyond the scope of this manual and STC. Separate airworthiness
approval must be obtained. The Blank Emergency Power Calculation Form, Figure 3-18, may be used for
this reserve battery capacity calculation.
ASTM F2490-05, Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load for Power Source Analysis, provides
acceptable guidance for conducting a complete analysis of increased electrical load.
As part of the installation it must be shown that the maximum electrical system demand does not
normally exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating. Satisfactory completion of the ELA should be
recorded on FAA Form 337. There are several approaches that could be taken, as described in the
following sections. For each approach, use the values outlined in Table 1-5.

NOTE

Circuits should be protected in accordance with the approved data in this document (see
Appendix E for recommended circuit breaker ratings) and the guidelines in AC 43.13-1B,
Chapter 11, Section 4.

3.7.1 Aircraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis

If there is an existing ELA for the aircraft, this must be updated to reflect the modification. It must show
that the alternators/generators have adequate capacity to supply power to the modified systems in all
anticipated conditions. Add the applicable typical current draw values from to the existing ELA under
continuous operating conditions. Ensure that the new aircraft electrical load does not exceed the rated
capacity of the installed generator/alternator. After performing the calculations, if the additional load of
the GTN exceeds the rated capacity of the generator/alternator, proceed to the steps in Section 3.7.2. If the
additional GTN load still exceeds the generator rated capacity, alternate FAA approval is required for
installation of the GTN in the aircraft.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-36 Rev. 4
3.7.2 Aircraft without Existing Electrical Load Analysis
Prior to undertaking a complete electrical load analysis, the net change to the electrical load resulting
from the GTN installation should be determined (refer to Figure 3-14 for a sample calculation). The
results of this analysis will determine how to proceed further.

Items removed from aircraft: Electrical Load (A) [1] Comment

GNS 530W (Main Connector) 1.4 A
GNS 530W (Com Connector) 0.015 A Used non-transmitting
current draw
GNS 530W (NAV Connector) 0.5 A
PMA 7000M 2.5 A
Subtotal: 4.415 A

Items added to aircraft: Electrical Load (A) Comment

[1] [2]
GTN 750 (Main Connector) 1.2 A
GTN 750 (Com Connector) 0.21 A Used non-transmitting
current draw
GTN 750 (NAV Connector) 0.3 A
GMA 35 0.40 A
Subtotal: 1.91 A

Net Change in Bus Load: -2.305 A [3]

[1] Use typical current draw when performing this calculation

[2] Use 28V current draw values for this calculation
[3] To obtain the Net Change in bus load, subtract the Items Removed
subtotal from the Items Added subtotal.

Figure 3-14. Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation

3.7.2.1 Electrical Load is Reduced Following Modification

In many instances when older systems are replaced with newer equipment, the electrical load presented to
the power system may be reduced. If the overall load on the electrical system is reduced as a result of the
GTN installation (as shown in the previous example), no further analysis is required. This assumes that
the electrical system was within all limits prior to the GTN/GMA 35 installation. The amended electrical
load calculation should be added to the aircraft permanent records to document the electrical load
reduction.
3.7.2.2 Electrical Load is Increased Following Modification
If it is determined that the electrical load has increased, a complete electrical load analysis must be
performed to show that the capacity of the alternator/generator and battery are sufficient for the additional
electrical load. For guidance on preparing an ELA, refer to ASTM F2490-05: Standard Guide for Aircraft
Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis.
Alternatively, the loads under various operating conditions may be measured, as described in
Section 3.7.3.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-37
3.7.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement

NOTE

According to FAR 23.1351(a)(2)(ii), performing an ELA using electrical measurements is

not acceptable for commuter category airplanes.

If the installation of the GTN/GMA 35 increases the overall load, an electrical load analysis must be
performed. Due to the age of much of the equipment, adequate information regarding the current draw of
this equipment may not exist. One acceptable method of performing an electrical load analysis is to
determine the electrical loads by measurement. The measurements must account for loads applied to the
electrical system in probable combinations and durations for aircraft operation. The maximum electrical
demand should not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating. The following section describes how to
perform an ELA for a single alternator / single battery electrical system. This should be modified
accordingly for aircraft with multiple batteries or alternators, and it must be shown that the maximum
electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating.
In this section the following definitions are used:
normal operation: the primary electrical power generating system is operating normally
emergency operation: the primary electrical power generating system is inoperative
An in-circuit or clamp-on, calibrated ammeter with 0.5 A or better accuracy can be used for current
measurement. Record the continuous (data plate / nameplate) rating for the alternator and battery.
1. Using the blank electrical load tabulation form provided in Figure 3-15, compile a list of
electrical loads on the aircraft (generally, this is just a list of circuit breakers and circuit breaker
switches). Refer to the example in Figure 3-17.
2. Identify whether each load is continuous (e.g. GPS) or intermittent (e.g. stall warning horn,
landing gear).
3. Using the worst-case flight condition, identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of
flight for normal operation. If some loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on
simultaneously (e.g. pitot heat and air conditioning), use only those loads for the worst-case
condition.
4. Identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of flight for emergency operation. As a
minimum, these systems include:
o COM Radio #1
o NAV Radio #1
o Transponder and associated altitude source
o Audio Panel
o Stall Warning System (if applicable)
o Pitot Heat
o Landing Light (switched on during landing only)
o Instrument Panel Dimming

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-38 Rev. 4
 CAUTION

To avoid damage to equipment, ensure that the ammeter is capable of handling the
anticipated load.

5. Insert/attach the calibrated ammeter in the line from the external power source to the master relay
circuit as shown in Figure 3-15 (this will eliminate errors due to the charging current drawn by
the battery).

EXTERNAL ALTNTR
POWER

ELECTRICAL BUS
+
Ammeter placement either
BATTERY location acceptable (does not
- include battery charging current)
MASTER
RELAY

Figure 3-15. Ammeter Placement for Current Measurements

6. Ensure that all circuit breakers are closed.

7. Apply external power to the aircraft. Power source voltage should be set to nominal alternator
voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
8. Turn on the battery master switch.

NOTE

Intermittent electrical loads are not measured. It is assumed that if additional current is
required beyond what the alternator can supply, this short-duration demand will be
provided by the battery.

9. Set the lighting as described below. These settings will be used for every current measurement
that follows.
o All instrument panel and flood lights should be set to maximum brightness.
o The GTN backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
o Any other displays with a backlight should be set to 50% brightness.
10. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the
taxiing phase and record ammeter current reading (measurement (a) in Figure 3-15). The
following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
o The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, but the autopilot should not be engaged.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-39
 CAUTION

The pitot heat should only be switched on long enough to take the current measurement
and then switched off. The pitot probe may get hot so care should be exercised to avoid
burns or damaging the unit.

11. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the
normal takeoff/landing phase and record ammeter current reading. Measurements must be taken
with the landing lights ON and OFF (measurements (b1) and (b2) in Figure 3-16).
12. The following items should be taken into consideration for this measurement:
o The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, and the autopilot should be engaged.
13. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the
normal cruise phase and record the ammeter current reading (measurement (c) in
Figure 3-16).
o The autopilot circuit breaker should be closed, and the autopilot should be engaged.
14. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the
emergency cruise phase and record the ammeter current reading. Record the current drawn with
the Landing Light switched OFF and again with the landing light switched ON.
15. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for
the emergency landing phase and record the ammeter current reading.
16. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the ELA using the blank form in
Figure 3-15. Verify that the maximum demand does not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate
rating.

NOTE
It is permissible to exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating during the
takeoff/landing phase of flight when the pitot heat and landing light are switched on
simultaneously. However, for this condition (i) you must not exceed 95% of the
alternator data plate rating, and (ii) you must not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate
rating with the pitot heat on and the landing light off.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-40 Rev. 4
 Date: ______________ Electrical Load Measurement Tail No.:______________
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
10 min 10 min 60 min (calculated) 10 min
Circuit Used in Used in Used in Used in Used in
Circuit/ Breaker Operating this phase this phase this phase this phase this phase
System No. Time of flight? of flight? of flight? of flight? of flight?

Figure 3-16. Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form
Sheet 1 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-41
 Date: ______________ Electrical Load Measurement (contd)Tail No.:____________
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
10 min 10 min 60 min (calculated) 10 min
Circuit Used in Used in Used in Used in this Used in
Circuit/ Breaker Operating this phase this phase this phase phase of this phase
System No. Time of flight? of flight? of flight? flight? of flight?

(b1)
MEASURED
(Amps): (a) Ldg light ON (c) (d) (e)
VALUE
(b2)
Ldg light OFF
Alternator Rating (Amps):

Percent of Ldg light ON

Alternator Capacity (< 95%) N/A N/A
(< 80 %) (< 80 %)
Used:
Ldg light OFF
(< 80%)

Figure 3-16. Blank Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-42 Rev. 4
 Date: 1/6/2010 Electrical Load Measurement Tail No.: N5272K
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
10 min 10 min 60 min (calculated) 10 min
Circuit Used in Used in this Used in Used in Used in
Circuit/ Breaker Operating this phase phase of this phase this phase this phase
System No. Time of flight? flight? of flight? of flight? of flight?
Alternator Field A1 Continuous X X X
Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous X X X X X
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gage D1 Continuous X X X X X
Ignition D2 Intermittent
PFD D3 Continuous X X X X X
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous X X X
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
ADC E1 Continuous X X X X X
Panel Lights E2 Continuous X X X X X
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous X X X X X
AHRS E4 Continuous X X X X X
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
Com 1 F1 Continuous X X X X X
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous X X X X X
Com 2 F3 Continuous X X X
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous X X X
Autopilot F5 Continuous X* X X
Audio Panel G1 Continuous X X X X X
Radio Blower G2 Continuous X X X
ADF G3 Continuous X X X
Transponder G4 Continuous X X X X X
GDL 69 H1 Continuous X X X
TCAD H2 Continuous X X X
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous X X X X X
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous X X X X X
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous X X X X X
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous X X X X X
Nav Lights SW2 Continuous X X X X X
Recognition Lights SW3 Continuous X X X X X
Landing Light SW4 Continuous X X X
Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous X X X X
Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent
Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent
60.0 (b1)
Ldg light ON
MEASURED
(Amps): 47.5 (a) 43.5 (c) 34.0 (d) 48.1 (e)
VALUE
44.7 (b1)
Ldg light OFF
Alternator Rating (Amps): 70
86 %
Ldg light ON
Percent of (< 95%)
68 % 62 %
Alternator Capacity N/A N/A
(< 80 %) (< 80 %)
Used: 64 %
Ldg light OFF
(< 80%)
PASS PASS PASS
*Autopilot circuit breaker is closed, but autopilot is not engaged.

Figure 3-17. Example Electrical Load Tabulation

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-43
 Date: ______________ Tail No.:______________
Power Sources
Item Number Voltage Manufacturer Model
Installed (DC Volts) Number

Alternator
Battery

Battery Capacity: x 0.75 (derating factor) = ________ Ah x 60 min = ________ A-min [i]

Current drawn during Normal Cruise (amps): ________ (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c) A x 5 min = ________ A-min [ii]

Emergency Landing Current (amps): _________ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e) A x 10 min = ________ A-min [iii]

Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] [ii] [iii]) ________ - ________ - ________ = ________ A-min [iv]

Emergency Cruise Current (amps): _________ (d) enter current measured in step 14. above
Emerg Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d) ): ____________ [iv] / ___________ (d) = __________ min [v]

The total duration of flight on emergency power is determined by adding the time for recognition of the failure
(5 minutes) to the time for emergency cruise (calculated above) to the time for landing (10 mins).

Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [v] + 10) = ________ min [vi]

Verify that the total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is 30 minutes (for a typical Part 23 aircraft).

Assumptions:
1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be _________________________________________

2. Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.

3. Load shedding is accomplished (how)___________________________________________within five minutes of

warning annunciation.

Measured loads using __________________________________________________________________

Figure 3-18. Blank Emergency Power Operation Calculation Form

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-44 Rev. 4
 Date: 1/6/2012 Tail No.: N5272K
Power Sources
Item Number Voltage Manufacturer Model
Installed (DC Volts) Number

Alternator 1 13.75 Prestolite AL 12-P70

Battery 1 12 Gill G-35
Battery Capacity: 35 x 0.75 (derating factor) = 26.25 Ah x 60 min = 1575 A-min [i]

Current drawn during Cruise (amps): 43.5 (c) enter current calculated in step 13. above
Cruise consumption during recognition: (c) 43.5 A x 5 min = ___217.5__ A-min [ii]

Emergency Landing Current (amps): ____48.1_____ (e) enter current measured in step 15. above
Emergency Landing Consumption: (e) 48.1 A x 10 min = ___481 __ A-min [iii]

Capacity remaining for cruise: ([i] [ii] [iii]) 1575 - 217.5 - 481 = 876.5 A-min [iv]

Emergency Cruise Current (amps): ____34.0_____ (d) enter current measured in step 14 above
Cruise Duration ([iv] / (d) ): 876.5 [iv] / ____34.0_____ (d) = ____25.8__ min [v]

Total Duration for Flight on Emergency Power (5 + [h] 25.8 + 10) = _____40.8___ min [vi]

The total flight duration on emergency power [vi] is 30 minutes. [PASS]

Assumptions:

1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be night IFR with the pitot heat operating.
2. Motor load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished manually by the pilot within five minutes of warning annunciation.
4. Measured loads using a calibrated Extech clamp-on DC ammeter on the battery terminal to the master relay
cable.

Figure 3-19. Example of Completed Emergency Power Operation Calculation

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-45
3.8 AFMS Completion
3.8.1 System Capabilities
Section 1.2 of the AFMS contains a list of system capabilities of the installed GTN system and associated
navigation interface. This section contains six options in the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for
Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A2) and three options ([1], [2],
and [5]) in the VFR GPS Limited Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX
GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A5).
[1] VHF Communication Radio
[2] Primary VHF Navigation
[3] Primary GPS Navigation (Enroute) and Approach Capability (LP, LNAV)*
[4] Primary GPS Approach Capability with Vertical Guidance (LNAV/VNAV, LPV)*
[5] TSO-C151b Terrain Awareness and Warning System
*Not included in the VFR GPS Limited Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX
GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A5)
Box [1] is checked if the installed GTN contains a COM radio (GTN 635, GTN 650, GTN 750).
Box [2] is checked if the installed GTN contains a NAV radio (GTN 650, GTN 750).
Box [3] is checked if the installation of the GTN meets the requirements of Section 2.4.1.2 or
Section 2.4.1.3.
Box [4] is checked if the installation of the GTN meets the requirements of Section 2.4.1.2 or
Section 2.4.1.3 and the interfaced navigation indicator includes a vertical deviation indication.
Box [5] is checked if the installed GTN has the TAWS-B feature enabled (see Section 5.5.2.1 for more
information).

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-46 Rev. 4
3.8.2 Autopilot Listed in GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC
For all autopilots listed in Section C.4, the appropriate limitations for that autopilot are identified in
Table 3-15 and described in the paragraphs following the table.

Table 3-15. Autopilot Coupling Limitations

Capabilities Limitations

Section 4.5
Section 2
Manufacturer Model Notes

Vertical
Lateral

AFMS

AFMS
GPSS
KAP 100 X [3]
KAP 150 X X [2]
KAP 140 X X [1]
Honeywell KFC 150/200/250/300 X X [2]
None
(Bendix/King)
KFC 225 X X X ARINC 429 roll
[1]
steering
KFC 275/325 X X X ARINC 429 roll
[2]
steering
I/II X [3]
III/IV X X [2]
21 X (ii) [3]
Century None
31/41 X X (ii) [2]
2000 X X (ii) [2]
Trident X X (ii) [2]
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 X X None [2]
System 20/30/40/50 X (i) [3]
System 55 X X (i) [2]
System 55X X X X ARINC 429 roll
[2]
S-TEC None steering
System 60-1 X (i) [3]
System 60-2/65 X X (i) [2]
System 60 PSS X [2]
300B/400B/800B X X [2]
Cessna None
300 IFCS/400 IFCS/800 IFCS X X [2]
Bendix M4C/M4D X X None [2]
Collins APS 65 ( ) X X None [2]

(i) Roll steering may be provided through the ST-901 GPSS converter.
(ii) Roll steering may be provided through the AK 1081 GPSS converter.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-47
AFMS Section 2.11 Autopilot Coupling Limitations
This section of the AFMS contains one possible limitation:
[a] Lateral coupling only for GPS approaches. Coupling to the vertical path for GPS approaches is
not authorized.
For all autopilots covered by the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC, no limitations apply in this section and none
should be checked on the AFMS. This section is not included in the VFR GPS Limited Airplane Flight
Manual Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS Navigation System (P/N 190-01007-A5).
AFMS Section 4.5 Autopilot Coupling
This section of the AFMS contains three possible choices:
[1] This installation prompts the flight crew and requires the pilot to enable the approach outputs just
prior to engaging the autopilot in APR mode.
[2] This installation supports coupling to the autopilot in approach mode once vertical guidance is
available.
[3] The installation does not support any vertical capture or tracking.
For all autopilots listed in the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC, the appropriate check box for that autopilot is
identified in Table 3-15. The corresponding limitation should be checked in the AFMS.
3.8.3 Autopilot Not Listed in GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC
If an installation has an autopilot interface that is not listed in the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC, additional
FAA approval is required. However, the AFMS provided with the AML STC should still be used, with
the appropriate limitations specified as described below.
AFMS Section 2.11 Autopilot Coupling Limitations
This section of the AFMS contains one possible limitation:
[a] Lateral coupling only for GPS approaches. Coupling to the vertical path for GPS approaches is
not authorized.
For all autopilots that are not listed in the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC, limitation [a] applies, unless the
autopilot is approved for interface to the Garmin G500/G600 under the G500 or G600 AML STC.
Additional FAA approval from the Aircraft Certification Office (ACO) is required for a particular
installation to remove the vertical GPS coupling limitations. This section is not included in the VFR GPS
Limited Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for Garmin GTN 6XX/7XX GPS/SBAS Navigation System
(P/N 190-01007-A5).
AFMS Section 4.5 Autopilot Coupling
This section of the AFMS contains three possible choices:
[1] This installation prompts the flight crew and requires the pilot to enable the approach outputs just
prior to engaging the autopilot in APR mode.
[2] This installation supports coupling to the autopilot in approach mode once vertical guidance is
available.
[3] The installation does not support any vertical capture or tracking.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-48 Rev. 4
For all autopilots that are not listed in the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC, select the appropriate check box as
follows:
Box [1] is checked for any installation that meets all of the following criteria:
The GPS SELECT discrete is set to Prompt on the Main System Config Page (refer to
Section 5.5.1.9).

NOTE
The 6XX/7XX GPS SELECT discrete output is connected to the GPS Select input (or
equivalent) on the autopilot. This input is used by the autopilot to determine if the
navigation source is GPS or VLOC. The autopilot typically goes to wings-level mode
automatically when the navigation source changes between GPS and VLOC. In order to
prevent the autopilot from entering wings-level mode without the pilot noticing the
mode change, the unit prompts the pilot and requires pilot acknowledgement prior to
switching the output signal state. Examples of autopilots that support this input are the
Honeywell KAP 140 or KFC 225.

Box [2] is checked for any installation that meets all of the following criteria:
The GPS SELECT discrete output is configured for Auto on the Main System Config Page
(refer to Section 5.5.1.9).
The 6XX/7XX interface to the autopilot provides vertical deviation information.
Box [3] is checked for any installation that meets all of the following criteria:
The GPS SELECT discrete is set to Auto on the Main System Config Page (refer to
Section 5.5.1.9).
The 6XX/7XX interface to the autopilot provides no vertical deviation information (this is the
case for autopilots with LNAV and altitude hold modes only; i.e., the autopilot does not provide
vertical capture and/or vertical tracking).

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 3-49
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 3-50 Rev. 4
4 CONNECTOR PINOUT INFORMATION
4.1 GTN 6XX/7XX
4.1.1 P1001 Connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 LOOKING FROM
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 PILOTS SEAT
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
LOOKING AFT
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
TOWARD PILOTS
SEAT
78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) -- 40 MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) --
2 MAIN OBS ROTOR C Out 41 MAIN OBS STATOR F In
3 TIME MARK OUT A Out 42 LIGHTING BUS 2 LO In
4 AUDIO OUT HI Out 43 FAN GROUND --
5 RS-232 OUT 4 Out 44 RS-232 GND 3/4 --
6 RS-232 OUT 3 Out 45 RS-232 GND 2 --
7 RS-232 OUT 2 Out 46 RS-232 GND 1 --
8 RS-232 OUT 1 Out 47 ARINC 429 IN 2A In
9 ARINC 429 OUT 2A Out 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A In
10 ARINC 429 OUT 1A Out 49 MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT Out
11 MAIN +TO OUT Out 50 MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT Out
12 MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT Out 51 MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT Out
13 MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out 52 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* Out
14 OBS ANNUNCIATE* Out 53 LOI ANNUNCIATE* Out
15 GPS ANNUNCIATE* Out 54 MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* Out
16 OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* In 55 APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* Out
17 LIGHTING BUS 1 LO In 56 ILS/GPS APPROACH* Out
18 LIGHTING BUS 1 HI In 57 TAWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* Out
19 AIRCRAFT POWER In 58 FAN TACH IN In
20 AIRCRAFT POWER In 59 FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) Out
21 MAIN OBS STATOR D In 60 MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) --
22 TIME MARK OUT B Out 61 LIGHTING BUS 2 HI In
23 AUDIO OUT LO Out 62 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
24 RS-232 IN 4 In 63 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
25 RS-232 IN 3 In 64 CONFIG MODULE GND Out
26 RS-232 IN 2 In 65 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
27 RS-232 IN 1 In 66 ARINC 429 IN 2B In
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2B Out 67 ARINC 429 IN 1B In
29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B Out 68 MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT Out
30 MAIN +FROM OUT Out 69 MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT Out
31 MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT Out 70 MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT Out
32 MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out 71 TAWS WARNING ANNUNCIATE* Out
33 WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* Out 72 TAWS NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* Out
34 TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* Out 73 TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* Out
35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* Out 74 GPS SELECT* Out
36 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* In 75 TRAFFIC TEST* Out
37 TAWS INHIBIT IN* In 76 TRAFFIC STANDBY* Out
38 AIR/GROUND* In 77 AIRCRAFT GND --
39 CDI SOURCE SELECT* In 78 AIRCRAFT GND --

Indicates an Active Low

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 4-1
4.1.2 P1002 Connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 LOOKING FROM PILOTS SEAT

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
LOOKING AFT TOWARD PILOTS SEAT
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 DEMO MODE SELECT* In 14 ETHERNET IN 4B In
2 RESERVED In 15 ETHERNET IN 2A In
3 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* Out 16 ETHERNET IN 2B In
4 ETHERNET OUT 4A Out 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A Out
5 ETHERNET OUT 4B Out 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B Out
6 ETHERNET IN 1A In 19 RS-422 IN A In
7 ETHERNET IN 1B In 20 RS-422 IN B In
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A Out 21 RS-422 OUT A Out
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B Out 22 RS-422 OUT B Out
10 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* In 23 ETHERNET IN 3A In
11 GSR STATUS IN* In 24 ETHERNET IN 3B In
12 GSR REMOTE POWER OUT* Out 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A Out
13 ETHERNET IN 4A In 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B Out

Indicates an Active Low

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 4-2 Rev. 4
4.1.3 P1003 GTN COM Connector (GTN 635/650/750 Only)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
LOOKING FROM PILOTS SEAT
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
LOOKING AFT TOWARD PILOTS SEAT
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED Out 23 RESERVED Out
2 RESERVED In 24 RESERVED Out
3 RESERVED -- 25 RESERVED Out
4 RESERVED -- 26 RESERVED --
5 COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI In 27 COM REMOTE TRANSFER* In
6 RESERVED -- 28 COM REMOTE TUNE UP* In
7 500 COM AUDIO HI Out 29 COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* In
8 RESERVED In 30 AIRCRAFT POWER In
9 RESERVED In 31 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED In 32 RESERVED --
11 COM MIC 1 KEY* In 33 RESERVED --
12 RESERVED -- 34 RESERVED --
13 RESERVED -- 35 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED In 36 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED Out 37 AIRCRAFT GND --
16 RESERVED In 38 AIRCRAFT GND --
17 RESERVED In 39 RESERVED --
18 500 COM AUDIO LO -- 40 AIRCRAFT GND --
19 RESERVED -- 41 RESERVED In
20 MIC AUDIO IN LO In 42 RESERVED In
21 RESERVED -- 43 AIRCRAFT POWER In
22 RESERVED In 44 AIRCRAFT POWER In

Indicates an Active Low

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 4-3
4.1.4 P1004 GTN NAV Connector (GTN 650/750 Only)

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
LOOKING FROM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PILOTS SEAT

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
LOOKING AFT
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
TOWARD PILOTS
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SEAT

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 VOR/LOC +TO Out PAR DME 1MHZ-D/
33 Out
2 VOR/LOC +FROM Out SERIAL DME ON
3 VOR/LOC +FLAG Out 34 GLIDESLOPE +UP Out
4 VOR/LOC -FLAG Out 35 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN B In
5 VOR/LOC +LEFT Out 36 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN A In
6 VOR/LOC +RIGHT Out PAR DME 100KHZ-A/
37 Out
7 RESERVED --- SERIAL DME HOLD
8 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT Out 38 GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG Out
9 VOR OBS ROTOR C Out 39 PAR DME 100KHZ-B Out
10 VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) --- 40 PAR DME 100KHZ-C Out
11 VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) --- 41 DME COMMON In
12 VOR OBS STATOR F In 42 PAR DME 100KHZ-D Out
13 VOR OBS STATOR D In 43 PAR DME 50KHZ Out
14 VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) --- 44 SERIAL DME DME REQUEST In/Out
15 VOR/LOC SUPERFLAG Out 45 PAR DME 1MHZ-A Out
16 500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI Out 46 PAR DME 1MHZ-B Out
17 500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO Out 47 PAR DME 1MHZ-C Out
18 SERIAL DME CLOCK In/Out 48 RESERVED --
19 SERIAL DME DATA In/Out 49 AIRCRAFT GND --
20 SERIAL DME RNAV/CH REQ In 50 RESERVED --
21 SERIAL DME RNAV MODE In 51 AIRCRAFT POWER In
22 AIRCRAFT GND -- 52 AIRCRAFT POWER In
23 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B Out 53 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG Out
24 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A Out 54 PAR DME 100KHZ-E Out
25 VOR OBI CLOCK In 55 GLIDESLOPE +DOWN Out
26 VOR OBI SYNC In 56 PAR DME 1MHZ-E Out
27 VOR OBI DATA In 57 RESERVED --
28 VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER In 58 GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE OUT Out
29 ILS ENERGIZE Out 59 VOR/LOC DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
30 RESERVED -- 60 AIRCRAFT GND --
31 RESERVED -- 61 AIRCRAFT GND --
32 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG Out 62 AIRCRAFT GND --

Indicates an Active Low

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 4-4 Rev. 4
 4.1.5 P1005 Connector (GTN 7XX only)

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 LOOKING FROM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PILOTS SEAT

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
LOOKING AFT
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
TOWARD PILOTS
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SEAT

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED -- 32 RESERVED --
2 RESERVED -- 33 SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE LO) In
3 RESERVED -- 34 SPARE OUTPUT C Out
4 RESERVED -- 35 SYNCHRO X In
5 RESERVED -- 36 SYNCHRO REF HIGH In
6 RESERVED -- 37 ARINC 429 IN 3A In
7 ARINC 429 OUT 3B Out 38 ARINC 429 IN 4A In
8 RS-232 OUT 5 Out 39 RESERVED --
9 RS-232 OUT 6 Out 40 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1A --
10 RESERVED -- 41 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2A --
11 RESERVED -- 42 RESERVED --
12 RESERVED -- 43 RESERVED --
13 RADAR ON* Out 44 RESERVED --
14 SYNCHRO Y In 45 RESERVED --
15 SYNCHRO REF LO In 46 RESERVED --
16 ARINC 429 IN 3B In 47 RESERVED --
17 ARINC 429 IN 4B In 48 RESERVED --
18 ARINC 453/708 IN 1A In 49 RS-232 GND 5 --
19 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1B -- 50 RS-232 GND 6 --
20 ARINC 453/708 IN 2A In 51 RESERVED --
21 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2B -- 52 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED -- 53 SPARE INPUT 1 --
23 RESERVED -- 54 SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE HI) In
24 RESERVED -- 55 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED -- 56 SYNCHRO Z In
26 RESERVED -- 57 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED -- 58 RESERVED --
28 ARINC 429 OUT 3A Out 59 RESERVED --
29 RS-232 IN 5 In 60 ARINC 453/708 IN 1B In
30 RS-232 IN 6 In 61 ARINC 453/708 IN 2B In
31 RESERVED -- 62 RESERVED --

Indicates an Active Low

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 4-5
4.2 GMA 35
4.2.1 P3501 Connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 LOOKING FROM PILOTS SEAT

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
LOOKING AFT TOWARD PILOTS
SEAT
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 MARKER ANTENNA IN HI In 23 RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI In
2 MARKER ANTENNA IN LO In 24 COM ACTIVE* OUT Out
3 COM 3 AUDIO IN HI In 25 TEL 4 AUDIO IN HI In
4 COM 3 AUDIO LO -- 26 TEL 4 AUDIO IN LO In
5 COM 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out 27 TEL 4 MIC OUT HI Out
6 COM 3 MIC KEY* OUT Out 28 TEL 4 MIC OUT LO Out
7 RCVR 4 AUDIO IN HI In 29 ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI In
8 RCVR 4 AUDIO IN LO In 30 COM 2 MIC KEY* OUT Out
9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI In 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI In
10 COM 1 AUDIO LO -- 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO In
11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out 33 PILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI In
12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT Out 34 PILOT MIC KEY* IN In
13 COM 2 AUDIO IN HI In 35 PILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO In
14 COM 2 AUDIO LO -- 36 INNER MARKER LAMP OUT Out
15 COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out 37 OUTER MARKER LAMP OUT Out
16 PILOT PUSH-TO-COMMANDKEY* IN In 38 MIDDLE MARKER LAMP OUT Out
17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI In 39 MIDDLE MARKER SENSE OUT Out
18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO In 40 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out
19 NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI In 41 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT Out
20 NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO In 42 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out
21 RCVR 3 AUDIO IN HI In 43 ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO In
22 RCVR 3 AUDIO IN LO In 44 ALERT 4 (TEL RING) AUDIO IN HI In

Indicates an Active-Low

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 4-6 Rev. 4
4.2.2 P3502 Connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 LOOKING FROM PILOTS SEAT

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28
LOOKING AFT TOWARD PILOTS
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
SEAT
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O

1 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out 23 MUSIC 1 IN LEFT In
2 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out 24 MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT In
3 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out 25 MUSIC 1 IN LO In
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT
4 Out 26 MUSIC 2 IN LEFT In
RIGHT
5 RESERVED In 27 MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT In
6 RESERVED -- 28 MUSIC 2 IN LO In
7 RESERVED In 29 FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI In
COPILOT PUSH-TO-COMMAND
8 AIRCRAFT POWER In 30 In
KEY* IN
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT
9 AIRCRAFT POWER In 31 Out
RIGHT
10 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 32 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI In
11 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 33 COPILOT MIC KEY* IN In
12 PASSENGER ADDRESS MUTE* OUT Out 34 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO In
13 MARKER HI SENSE* IN In 35 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
14 PASS ICS KEY* IN In 36 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI In 37 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
16 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out 38 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN LO Out
17 RS-232 IN In 39 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
18 RS-232 OUT Out 40 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
19 PA MODE SELECTED* OUT Out 41 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
20 COM CYCLE* IN In 42 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
21 RESERVED** -- 43 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO In
CLEARANCE RECORDER PLAYBACK*
22 In 44 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI Out
IN
* Indicates an Active-Low
** This is an Active-Low output, always asserted to ground.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 4-7
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 4-8 Rev. 4
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT
5.1 System Configuration Overview
This section contains instructions for configuring the GTN for each installation as well as checks to
ensure the system is properly installed and functioning correctly. The steps that are not applicable to a
particular installation may be skipped. A checkout log that is included in Table 5-66 at the end of this
section should be filled out during the checkout procedures. The completed checkout log sheet should be
maintained with the aircraft permanent records to document the configuration of this installation. A
summary of the steps required for configuration and checkout of the GTN is as follows:
Perform installation checks (Sections 5.2 and 5.3)
Load software into the GTN (if required) (Section 5.4.1)
Load software into interfacing LRUs if required (Section 5.4.2 through 5.4.5)
Configure the GTN for the specific installation (Sections 5.5)
Perform ground checks to verify the interfaces to external sensors (Sections 5.7 and 5.8)
Perform the specified flight checks (Section 5.8)
Complete the checkout log (Section 5.10.3)
Update the aircraft documentation (Section 5.10)

NOTE
Throughout the next section, many screenshots and examples are used to illustrate the
software loading and configuration and checkout process. Every effort has been made to
ensure the accuracy of these examples; however, changes may occur that result in the
examples being out of date. Always refer to the Equipment List (005-00533-C1) for the
correct software versions and part numbers.

NOTE
Throughout the next section, many screenshots are shown of the GTN 7XX. The
procedures and methods for accessing pages on the GTN 6XX are similar to what is
described for the GTN 7XX, unless specifically noted.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-1
5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks
Verify that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to the shield block of the connectors.
Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify there is no interference between the
cabling and control systems. Ensure that all wiring is installed in accordance with Section 2.4.11.
Prior to powering up the GTN, the wiring harness must be checked for proper connections to the aircraft
systems and other avionics equipment. Point to point continuity must be checked on all wiring to expose
any faults such as shorting to ground. Any faults or discrepancies must be corrected before proceeding. If
any TVSs are installed as part of the installation, proper TVS installation should be verified prior to
application of power. Refer to Section 3.6.5.1 for guidance on checking each TVS assembly. Also, check
the lighting bus wiring to ensure it is wired correctly before applying power to the GTN.

CAUTION
Incorrect lighting bus wiring could cause damage to the GTN.

After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify proper power
distribution to the GTN, including the lighting bus and any high level inputs to the GTN. Any faults or
discrepancies should be corrected at this time. Remove power from the aircraft upon completion of the
harness checkout.
The GTN can be installed after completion of the continuity and power checks. The GTN should be
installed into the rack and secured appropriately, as described in Section 3.4.2. The GTN backplate must
be connected to the wiring harness and antenna coaxial cables.
5.3 Connector Engagement Check
Prior to configuration and checkout of the GTN, the connector engagement should be checked as
described below:
1. Ensure that the GTN GPS/NAV and COM circuit breakers are pulled.
2. Slide the GTN straight into the rack until it stops about 1 inch short of the fully seated position.
3. Insert a 3/32-inch hex drive into the unit retention mechanism access hole at the bottom of the
unit face and rotate the tool clockwise while pressing the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in
the rack.
4. With the GTN seated, reapply power by closing the circuit breakers and turning on the avionics
master switch (if installed).
5. Again, insert the hex drive into the unit retention mechanism access hole. Rotate the tool
counter-clockwise to back out the retention mechanism. Ensure that three (3) complete
revolutions of the Allen screw can be performed without red X indication or loss of power to
the GTN.

NOTE
If power is lost or the red X condition occurs with fewer than three (3) turns, ensure
there are no obstructions to the unit fully seating in the rack. Also, the mounting rack may
need to be moved aft (toward the pilot) such that the instrument panel does not obstruct
the unit from properly engaging in the rack.

6. Re-seat the GTN per step 3.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-2 Rev. 4
5.4 Software Loading

NOTE
Prior to installing a version of the GTN main board software that is older than the
currently installed version, all RS-232 and ARINC 429 ports should be set to Off.

NOTE

Screenshots in this section are provided for reference only. For actual GTN software
versions, refer to the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Equipment List, 005-00533-C1.

The GTN comes pre-loaded with software. However, to ensure that the latest software is loaded it is
recommended that software from a current GTN Software Loader Card, P/N 010-01000-00, be loaded
into the GTN. For dual GTN installations the software loading procedures below must be carried out on
each GTN. See Section 5.5 for instructions pertaining to entering configuration mode.

NOTE

A GTN Software Loader Card must be created. Refer to Section 2.3.3 for additional
information. All RS-232 and ARINC 429 ports should be set to OFF prior to installing
a version of the GTN main board software that is older than what is currently installed.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-3
5.4.1 GTN Software Loading
1. Remove power from the GTN by opening the circuit breaker.
2. Insert the correct GTN Software Loader Card into the SD card slot. See Section 2.3.3 for
instructions on how to create a loader card.
3. Restore power to the GTN by closing the circuit breaker.
4. The Configuration Mode home page, shown in Figure 5-1,should now be displayed. Touch
Updates to display the software updates that are available.
5. Verify that the software version being loaded to the GTN matches the software version listed on
the GTN STC Equipment List, 005-00533-C1. See Figure 5-3. The updates page displays the
version that is installed on the unit and the version installed on the loader card.
6. Verify that the available GTN software updates are being displayed by ensuring that GTN
Software Updates is displayed on the key in the upper left corner of the display.
7. To update the GTN with all software available, touch Select All.
8. To begin the software update, touch Update on the bottom of the display.
9. The GTN will display the prompt, Start GTN Software Updates?.
10. Touch OK to allow the GTN to go through the update process.
11. When the updates are finished, the GTN will display Update Complete!. When finished, remove
power from the GTN and remove the Software Loader Card. Reinsert the database card into the
SD card slot.

Figure 5-1. Configuration Mode Figure 5-2. Updates Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-4 Rev. 4
5.4.2 GMA 35 Software Loading
Before attempting to load software to the GMA 35, the GTN RS-232 port to which the GMA 35 is
connected must be configured for GMA Format 1. See Section 5.5.1.2 for more information.
1. Remove power from the GTN by opening the circuit breaker
2. Insert the correct GMA 35 Loader Card into the GTN 7XX SD card slot. See Section 2.3.3 for
instructions on how to create a loader card.
3. Hold down the HOME key until Garmin is fully lit on the display after power is applied by
closing the circuit breaker for the GTN 7XX.
4. Ensure the GMA 35 circuit breaker is closed.
5. The Configuration Mode home page should now be displayed. Touch the Updates key to display
the software that is available.
6. To select GMA 35 software updates, touch the GTN Software Updates key on the top left corner
of the display and select GMA 35 Software Updates.
7. To update the GMA 35 with all software available, touch Select All.
8. To begin the software update, touch the Update key on the bottom of the display.
9. The GTN will display the prompt, Start GMA 35 Software Updates?
10. Touch OK to allow the GTN to update the GMA 35.
11. When the updates are finished, the GTN will display Update Complete!
12. When finished, turn the GTN off (open the circuit breaker) and remove the Software loader card.
Reinsert the database card in the SD card slot.
13. Cycle power on the GMA 35 and ensure the software was updated correctly by going to the
System Information page and selecting the GMA 35.
5.4.3 GDL 69/69A Software Loading
Although the GTN is a portal to install software for the GDL 69/69A, this STC does not cover the
installation of the GDL 69/69A or its software. Refer to the GDL 69/69A Installation Manual,
P/N 190-00355-02 or 190-00355-07.
1. Remove power from the GTN by opening the circuit breaker.
2. Insert the correct GDL 69/69A Loader Card into the SD card slot.
3. Press and hold the HOME key while applying power until GARMIN is fully lit on the GTN
display. Power is applied by closing the GTN circuit breaker.
4. Ensure the GDL 69/69A circuit breaker is closed.
5. The Configuration Mode home page should now be displayed.
6. Touch the Updates key to display the updates that are available.
7. To select GDL 69/69A software updates, touch the GTN Software Updates key on the top left
corner of the display and select the update type GDL 69/69A Software Updates.
8. To update the GDL 69/69A with all updates available, touch Select All.
9. To begin the software update, touch the Update key on the bottom of the display. The GTN will
display the prompt, Start GDL 69/69A Software Updates?
10. Touch OK to allow the GTN to update the GDL 69/69A.
11. When the updates are finished, the GTN will display Update Complete!
12. When finished, turn the GTN off (open the circuit breaker) and remove the software loader card.
Reinsert the database card in the SD card slot.
13. Cycle power on the GDL 69 and ensure the software was updated correctly by going to the
System Information page on the GTN and select the GDL 69/69A. The correct software version
should be displayed.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-5
5.4.4 GWX 68/70 Software Loading
This STC does not cover the installation of the GWX 68/70 or its software. To install software on the
GWX 68/70, use the GWX Install Tool. Refer to the GWX 68 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00286-01 or
the GWX 70 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00829-01.
5.4.5 GDL 88 Software Loading
Although the GTN is a portal to install software for the GDL 88, this STC does not cover the installation
of the GDL 88 or its software. Refer to the GDL 88 Installation Manual, P/N 190-01310-00.
1. Remove power from the GTN by opening the circuit breaker.
2. Insert the correct GDL 88 Loader Card into the SD card slot.
3. Hold down the HOME key until the name 'Garmin' is fully lit on the display after power is
applied by closing the circuit breaker.
4. Ensure the GDL 88 circuit breaker is closed.
5. The Configuration Mode home page should now be displayed. Touch the Updates key to display
the updates that are available.
6. To select GDL 88 software updates, touch the GTN Software Updates key on the top left corner
of the display and select the update type GDL 88 Software Updates.
7. To update the GDL 88 with all updates available, touch Select All.
8. To begin the software update, touch the Update key on the bottom of the display.
9. The GTN will display the prompt, Start GDL 88 Software Updates? Touch OK to allow the
GTN to update the GDL 88.
10. When the updates are finished, the GTN will display Update Complete! When finished, turn the
GTN off (open the circuit breaker) and remove the Software loader card. Reinsert the database
card in the SD card slot.
11. Cycle power on the GDL 88 and ensure the software was updated correctly by going to the
System Information page on the GTN and select the GDL 88. The correct SW version should be
displayed.
5.4.6 System Information Page
The System Information page, shown in Figure 5-3, allows
information related to the system such as unit type, serial
number, system ID, and software versions to be viewed. To
access the System Information page, touch the System
Information key from the configuration mode home page.
System information for remote LRUs can also be viewed
from this page. To select a remote LRU, touch the key at the
top of the System Information page and select an LRU from
the menu. Select the GTN or other LRU to view applicable
LRU-specific system information.

Figure 5-3. System Information Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3
Page 5-6 Rev. 4
5.5 Configuration Mode Operations

NOTE
A Garmin transponder (GTN 32/327/328/33/330) controlled by the GTN will reboot into
the same mode as the controlling GTN; i.e., if the GTN boots into configuration mode,
the transponder will also boot into configuration mode.

Before configuring the GTN, ensure that no Configuration Module service messages are displayed in the
message queue. This would indicate that the configuration module is improperly wired or damaged.
Configuration mode is used to configure the GTN settings for each specific installation. To access
configuration mode, remove power from the GTN. With the GTN turned off (circuit breaker pulled),
touch and hold the HOME key and reapply power to the GTN (push in the circuit breaker). Release the
HOME key when the display activates and the name Garmin appears fully lit on the screen. The first
page displayed is the configuration mode home page, as shown in Figure 5-1. While in configuration
mode, pages can be selected by touching the desired key on the display. Some pages may require page
scrolling to view all of the information and keys on the page. This can be done by touching the screen and
dragging the page in the desired direction, or by touching the Up or Down keys.

NOTE

The configuration pages shown here reflect main software version 3.00. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier
or later software versions.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-7
5.5.1 GTN Setup Page
The following sections describe pages that are accessed from the main GTN Setup page, as shown in
Figure 5-4 A and B. To access the GTN Setup page, touch the GTN Setup key from the Configuration
Mode home page as shown in Figure 5-1. The UPDATE CONFIG MODULE key stores the current
installation-specific configuration information in the configuration module. Updating the configuration
module is done automatically, so this key will not normally need to be touched.

A. GTN 6XX B. GTN 7XX

Figure 5-4. Setup Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-8 Rev. 4
5.5.1.1 ARINC 429 Configuration Page
To access the ARINC 429 Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-6, first access the GTN Setup page
from the Configuration Home page, shown in Figure 5-4 above, by touching GTN Setup key. Then touch
the ARINC 429 key. This page allows configuration of the ARINC 429 input ports and the ARINC 429
output ports. Select the correct speed for each port depending upon the installed interfaced equipment by
touching the speed key and toggling the high or low selection.

Figure 5-5. Main ARINC 429 Configuration Page

NOTE

Refer to Appendix C for approved third-party equipment interfaces to the GTN. If the
equipment and interface selections described below are not listed in Appendix C, other
FAA approval is required for that interface.

Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for each port. The correct setting is dependent upon the
interfaced equipment. The data selections are described in Table 5-2, Table 5-3, and Table 5-4 below. See
Appendix C for the correct data format selections for each piece of interfaced equipment.

Table 5-1. ARINC 429 Speed Selections

Selection Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-9
 Table 5-2. ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections

GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to this ARINC 429 input
Altitude, temperature, and speed information from the
following Air Data systems:
Airdata Airdata [1]
B&D 90004-003
Bendix/King KDC281/481
Heading, altitude, temperature, and speed information from
Airdata/AHRS Airdata/AHRS Air Data/AHRS systems.
This interface is not used in this STC
This is a Garmin data concentration format. Only high speed
Data Garmin ARINC 429 should be used.
Concentrator GTX 330
This interface is not used in this STC
Selected course, true heading, and magnetic heading
EFIS Format 1 EFIS information from the following EFIS systems: [2]
Bendix/King EFS 40/50
Selected course, true heading, magnetic heading, altitude,
temperature, and true airspeed information from the
EFIS Format 2 EFIS/Airdata [2]
following systems:
Bendix/King EFS 40/50
Selected course, true heading, and magnetic heading
Honeywell information from EFIS systems.
EFIS Format 3
EFIS
This interface is not used in this STC
Selected course and magnetic heading from the following
EFIS systems:
EFIS Format 4 Sandel EHSI Avidyne EXP5000 [2]
Sandel SN 3308
Sandel SN 3500/4500
Selected course, true heading, magnetic heading, and true
Garmin GAD
GAD Format 1 airspeed information from the following system: [3]
42
Garmin GAD 42
Selected course, magnetic heading, pressure altitude, baro-
corrected altitude, temperature, calibrated airspeed, and true
GDU Format 1 Garmin GDU [2]
airspeed information from the following systems:
Garmin GDU 620
True heading and magnetic heading information from the
INS/IRU INS/IRU following Inertial systems: [4]
Collins AHS-85E
Traffic Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 1 [5]
Advisory Garmin GTS 800
Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic
Traffic Format 2 Garmin GTS 820 [5]
Advisory
Garmin GTS 850

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-10 Rev. 4
 GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Traffic Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 3 [5]
Advisory Skywatch HP SKY899
Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic
Traffic Format 4 Bendix/King KTA 870/970 [5]
Advisory
Bendix/King KMH 880/980
Traffic Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 5 [5]
Advisory Avidyne TAS (Ryan 9900BX)
Traffic Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 6 [5]
Advisory Sky 497 Skywatch
[1] For more information, refer to Section C.2.
[2] For more information, refer to Section C.5.
[3] For more information, refer to Section C.15.
[4] For more information, refer to Section C.7.
[5] For more information, refer to Section C.10.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-11
 NOTE
Refer to GTN 625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual, P/N 190-01004-02 and
GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual, P/N 190-01007-02 for information about ARINC
429 labels.

Table 5-3. ARINC 429 DATA OUT Selections

GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to ARINC 429 output
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 Standard ARINC 429 output data (non-GAMA).
ARINC 429 data as defined by the General Aviation Manufacturers
nd
Association (GAMA) General Aviation Subset, 2 Edition. The
GAMA
GAMA 429 output data includes navigation and flight plan information to the [1]
Format 1
following systems:
Bendix/King EFS 40/50
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation Subset,
nd
2 Edition including GAMA Graphics Protocol A. This format
outputs intersection symbols as generic waypoint symbols. The
GAMA GAMA 429
output data includes navigation and flight plan information (including [1] [2]
Format 2 Graphics
graphical representation of flight plan procedures) to the following
EFIS systems:
Avidyne EX500/EX5000/EXP5000
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation Subset,
nd
2 Edition including GAMA Graphics Protocol A. The output data
GAMA 429
GAMA includes navigation and flight plan information (including graphical
Graphics [3]
Format 3 representation of flight plan procedures) to the following systems:
w/Int
Sandel SN3308
Sandel SN3500/4500
GAMA 429 ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation Subset,
GAMA nd
Pro Line 2 Edition. The output data includes navigation and flight plan
Format 4
21 information.
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation Subset,
GAMA GAMA 429 nd
2 Edition. The output data includes navigation and flight plan
Format 5 Sextant
information.
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation Subset,
GAMA 429 nd
GAMA 2 Edition. The output data includes navigation, flight plan and GPS
Bendix [1]
Format 6 vertical guidance information to the following systems:
King
Bendix/King EFS 40/50
Radar
N/A ARINC 429 output for control of ARINC 708 weather radars. [4] [5]
Format 1
[1] For more information, refer to Section C.5.
[2] For more information, refer to Section C.14.
[3] For more information, refer to Section C.6.
[4] For more information, refer to Section C.17.
[5] GTN main software version 3.00 or later.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-12 Rev. 4
 NOTE
Only one ARINC 429 output port can be configured to a GAMA Format output at one
time. If more than one interfaced system requires a GAMA Format output, splice the
GAMA 429 output wires from the GTN into each system requiring GAMA Format
information.

Table 5-4. SDI Selections

Selection Description
RX: Accepts all ARINC 429 inputs
Common
TX: Generates all ARINC 429 outputs with SDI = 0.
Number 1 (Pilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 1 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 1.
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 1.
Number 2 (Copilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 2 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 2.
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 2.

5.5.1.2 RS-232 Configuration Page

Select the RS-232 Configuration page from the Main
GTN Setup page, shown in Figure 5-4, by touching
the RS-232 key. Change the inputs or outputs to match
the equipment that is interfaced to each channel.
Touch the key corresponding to the RS-232 channel
and select the applicable input or output setting. The
input/output settings are described in Table 5-5. See
Appendix C for the correct data format selections for
each piece of interfaced equipment.

Figure 5-6. RS-232 Configuration Page

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-13
 NOTE
Refer to Appendix C for approved third party equipment interfaces to the GTN. If the
equipment and interface selections described below are not listed in Appendix C, other
FAA approval is required for that interface.

Table 5-5. RS-232 Channel Input Selections

GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to input of this channel.
Airdata Serial air data information from the following units:
Shadin-adc [1]
Format 1 Shadin ADC 200/2000
Serial altitude data from the following units:
Icarus Instruments 3000
Altitude
Icarus-alt Sandia SAE5-35 [1]
Format 1 Garmin GTX 327 Transponder
Trans-Cal Industries IA-RS232-X, SSD120
ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above)
Altitude Serial altitude data from the following units:
Shadin-alt [1]
Format 3 Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T
FADC Shadin- Serial air data and fuel flow information from the following units:
[2]
Format 1 FADC INSIGHT TAS 1000 Air Data Computer
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
Fuel Arnav/ei-
ARNAV FC-10, FT-10 [1]
Format 1 fuel
Electronics International FP-5L
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
Fuel Shadin 91053XP, 91204XT(38)D, 91053, 912802-( ) Digital
Shadin-fuel [1]
Format 2 Fuel Management System
JP Instruments EDM-700 Engine Monitor
GMA
N/A This input format supports the GMA 35 audio panel interface. [3]
Format 1
GMA
N/A This interface is not used in this STC. [7]
Format 2
GNS Select this format to transmit flight plan information automatically to
N/A [7] [8]
Crossfill a connected GNS 400W/500W navigator.
GSR Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56.
N/A [6] [7]
Format 1
Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #1. Provides
GTX Mode status data, and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
N/A [4]
C #1 automatically configure the corresponding channel output to the
same setting.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-14 Rev. 4
 GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #2. Provides
GTX Mode status data, and flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
N/A [4]
C #2 automatically configure the corresponding channel output to the
same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES transponder
GTX Mode #1. Provides status data, ICAO address, and Flight ID. Choosing
N/A [4]
S #1 this input setting will automatically configure the corresponding
channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES transponder #1 with
GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
GTX Mode
N/A Provides status data, ICAO address, and Flight ID. Choosing this [4] [7]
S+ #1
input setting will automatically configure the corresponding channel
output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES transponder
GTX Mode #2. Provides status data, ICAO address, and Flight ID. Choosing
N/A [4]
S #2 this input setting will automatically configure the corresponding
channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES transponder #2 with
GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
GTX Mode
N/A Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO address, and Flight ID. [4] [7]
S+ #2
Choosing this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES transponder #1.
GTX w/TIS Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO address, and Flight ID.
N/A [4] [7]
#1 Choosing this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES transponder #1 with
GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
GTX
N/A Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO address, and Flight ID. [4]
w/TIS+ #1
Choosing this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES transponder #2.
GTX w/TIS Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO address, and Flight ID.
N/A [4]
#2 Choosing this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES transponder #2 with
GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
GTX
N/A Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO address, and Flight ID. [4] [7]
w/TIS+ #2
Choosing this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #1. This
Panel GTX
N/A provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/330ES [4] [7]
w/TIS #1
transponder without controlling the transponder via the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #1 with GTX
Panel GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance. This
N/A [4]
w/TIS+ #1 provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/330ES
transponder without controlling the transponder via the GTN.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-15
 GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #2. This
Panel GTX
N/A provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/330ES [4]
w/TIS #2
transponder without controlling the transponder via the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #2 with GTX
Panel GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance. This
N/A [4] [7]
w/TIS+ #2 provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/330ES
transponder without controlling the transponder via the GTN.
Lightning Lightning strike information from an L-3 Communications WX-500
WX-500 [5]
Detector 1 Stormscope.
Traffic Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series traffic system.
Ryan TCAD [5] [7]
Format 7
Traffic Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series traffic system.
Ryan TCAD [5] [7]
Format 8
[1] For more information refer to Section C.3.
[2] For more information refer to Section C.2.
[3] For more information refer to Section C.1.
[4] For more information refer to Section C.7.
[5] For more information refer to Section C.10.
[6] For more information refer to Section C.18.
[7] GTN main software version 3.00 or later.
[8] If Auto GNS Crossfill is used, the GTN should be installed as the #1 navigator.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-16 Rev. 4
 Table 5-6. RS-232 Channel Output Selections

GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to output of this channel.
Serial communication of GPS data to Garmin panel mount [1]
ADS-B ADS-B mode S transponders. Note: This format is not required when
using any other GTX output format.
Serial communication of GPS data to Garmin panel mount [1] [7]
mode S transponders with GTX software version 7.01 or later
ADS-B+ N/A for AC 20-165 compliance. Note: This format is not required
when using any other GTX output format that is described as
being for AC 20-165 compliance.
Serial position, GPS altitude, velocity, and navigation data to the [2]
following units:
Aviation Output 1 Aviation
Garmin MX20 (V5.6 or later), GMX 200
Garmin GTX 327 Transponder
Serial position, velocity, and navigation data to the following [2]
Aviation no
Aviation Output 2 units:
alt
Garmin MX20 (V5.5 or earlier)
HW Serial communication to a Bendix/King (Honeywell) KGP 560 [3]
External EGPWS
EGPWS EGPWS.
GMA Format 1 N/A Control of GMA 35 Audio Panel functions. [4]
GMA Format 2 N/A This interface is not used in this STC. [7]
Select this format to transmit flight plan information [5] [7]
GNS Crossfill N/A
automatically to a connected GNS 400W/500W navigator.
GSR Format 1 N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56. [6] [7]
Control of GTX 32/327 #1 transponder functions, pressure [1]
GTX Mode C #1 N/A
altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Control of GTX 32/327 #2 transponder functions, pressure [1]
GTX Mode C #2 N/A
altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Control of GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES #1 transponder [1]
GTX Mode S #1 N/A
functions, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Control of GTX 33ES/330ES #1 transponder functions, pressure [1] [7]
GTX Mode S+ #1 N/A altitude data, and groundspeed data. For use with GTX software
version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
Control of GTX 33ES/330ES #2 transponder functions, pressure [1]
GTX Mode S #2 N/A
altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Control of GTX 33ES/330ES #2 transponder functions, pressure [1] [7]
GTX Mode S+ #2 N/A altitude data, and groundspeed data. For use with GTX software
version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
Control of GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES #1 transponder functions, [1]
GTX w/TIS #1 N/A
pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-17
 GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Control of GTX 33ES/330ES #1 transponder functions, pressure [1] [7]
GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic. For use with
GTX software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
Control of GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES #2 transponder functions, [1]
GTX w/TIS #2 N/A
pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic.
Control of GTX 33ES/330ES #2 transponder functions, pressure [1] [7]
GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic. For use with
software version 7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #1.This [1]
Panel GTX w/TIS provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude
N/A
#1 information to the transponder without controlling the
transponder via the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #1.This [1] [7]
provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude
Panel GTX
N/A information to the transponder without controlling the
w/TIS+ #1
transponder via the GTN. For use with GTX software version
7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #2. This [1]
Panel GTX w/TIS provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude
N/A
#2 information to the transponder without controlling the
transponder via the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #2. This [1] [7]
provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude
Panel GTX
N/A information to the transponder without controlling the
w/TIS+ #2
transponder via the GTN. For use with GTX software version
7.01 or later for AC 20-165 compliance.
Lightning Serial communication to an L-3 Communications WX-500 [3]
WX-500
Detector 1 Stormscope.
Serial position, GPS altitude, velocity, and navigation data to the [2]
MapMX MapMX following units:
Garmin MX20 (V5.6 or later), GMX 200
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series traffic
Traffic Format 7 Ryan TCAD [3] [7]
system.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series traffic
Traffic Format 8 Ryan TCAD [3] [7]
system.

[1] For more information refer to Section C.7.

[2] For more information refer to Section C.14.
[3] For more information refer to SectionC.10.
[4] For more information refer to Section C.1.
[5] If Auto GNS Crossfill is used, the GTN should be installed as the #1 navigator.
[6] For more information refer to Section C.18.
[7] GTN main software version 3.00 or later.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-18 Rev. 4
5.5.1.3 HSDB Ethernet Configuration Page
The HSDB Ethernet configuration page can be
accessed from the GTN Setup page. To configure each
Ethernet port, touch the key next to the port to
configure it as Connected or Not Connected. See
Figure 5-7. If a Garmin LRU is connected to a specific
Ethernet port, then configure the port as Connected.
If no LRU is connected to the port, configure it as Not
Connected.

Figure 5-7. HSDB Ethernet Port Configuration Page

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-19
5.5.1.4 Interfaced Equipment Configuration
Page
To access the Interfaced Equipment configuration
page, touch the Interfaced Equipment key from the
GTN Setup page, as shown in Figure 5-8 . This page
configures which LRUs are installed and interfaced to
the GTN. From the available list of LRUs, select
either Present or Not Present. The Transponder
Interfaced Equipment configuration should be pre-
populated when the RS-232 data format is selected for
each RS-232 channel.
5.5.1.4.1 Cross-Side Navigator
(Not Shown in Figure 5-8)
In a single GTN installation, select Not Present. In a
dual GTN installation, select Present.
5.5.1.4.2 GDL 69/69A
Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select
either GDL 69 or GDL 69A based upon the installed
LRU.

Figure 5-8. Interfaced Equipment

Configuration Page

5.5.1.4.3 GDL 88
Select either Present or Not Present. If present, touch GDL 88 to select the external traffic source (None,
TCAD, or TAS/TCAS) connected to the GDL 88 and the GDL 88 ADS-B transmit state (Enable or
Disabled). Configuration of these parameters enables portions of the GDL 88 user interface in normal
mode and does not configure the GDL 88. For more information on configuring the GDL 88, refer to the
GDL 88 STC Installation Manual, P/N 190-01310-00.
5.5.1.4.4 Transponder #1 and Transponder #2
Select either GTX Mode C, GTX Mode S, or GTX Mode S+ based upon the interfaced transponder
type. If the type of transponder connected to the cross-side navigator is GTX w/TIS or GTX w/TIS+,
select GTX Mode S or GTX Mode S+, respectively. Note that if the correct data format is selected on
the RS-232 configuration page, this will be filled in and grayed out. Ensure the correct transponder type is
displayed. Also, the transponder should be configured as present even if it is connected to the other
installed GTN. This setting enables the user interface in normal mode.
5.5.1.4.5 GWX (GTN 7XX Only)
Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select GWX 68 or GWX 70, based upon the installed
radar.

NOTE
If an ARINC 708 weather radar is configured, the Present key will not be available for
selection for the GWX weather radar.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-20 Rev. 4
5.5.1.4.6 GSR 56
Select either Present or Not Present. In installations with multiple GTNs, this selection must be the same
on all GTNs.
5.5.1.5 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page

Select the Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration

Page, shown in Figure 5-9, from the GTN Setup
page. This page allows you to calibrate the OBS
resolver, configure the CDI key, selected course for
GPS and VLOC, as well as the V-Flag state.
Configurable fields are described below.
OBS Resolver Calibration
To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate
key from the Main Indicator Configuration page.
Next, select 150 on the External CDI/HSI then
touch the OK key, as prompted on the display. After
the OBS resolver is finished calibrating, the GTN
will display OBS Resolver Calibration Complete!.
Touch OK after the calibration is complete. Verify
OBS operation by checking that the selected course
displayed at the top of the page is within 2 of the
selected course.
CDI Key
To enable or disable the CDI key, touch the key to
the right of CDI key to toggle between enabling and Figure 5-9. Main Indicator
disabling the CDI key. Disabling the CDI key Configuration Page
causes the CDI source to always display as GPS and
removes the CDI key. This may be necessary for
certain EFIS systems where navigation sensor
selection must be accomplished on the EFIS or its
control panel.

Table 5-7. GPS Selected Course

Selection Description
Allowed (Default) Select if it is desired to allow a selected course input from the analog resolver
or ARINC 429 for GPS operation in OBS mode.
Ignored Select to cause the GTN to ignore a selected course input (either analog
resolver or ARINC 429) for GPS operation in OBS mode.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-21
 Table 5-8. VLOC Selected Course

Selection Description
Allowed (Default) Select if it is desired to allow a selected course input from the analog resolver
or ARINC 429 for VLOC operation in OBS mode.
Ignored Select if it is desired to ignore a selected course input such that the VOR valid
flag is dependent only on a valid VOR signal, with lateral deviation calculated
by another display device.

Table 5-9. V-Flag State

Selection Description
Declutter Whenever vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation bar is parked in the
maximum UP position and the vertical flag is removed from view, except in the
following cases: (i) the CDI is in VLOC mode and an ILS frequency is tuned, or
(ii) the CDI is in GPS mode and a GPS approach with vertical guidance is
active. In these cases, whenever the vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical
deviation bar parks in the centered position and the vertical flag is shown.
Normal (Default) Whenever vertical deviation is invalid the vertical deviation bar parks in the
centered position and the vertical flag is shown.

NOTE
The V-Flag declutter setting should only be set for indicators in which 300mVDC is
sufficient to drive the vertical deviation bar out of view.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-22 Rev. 4
5.5.1.6 Lighting Configuration Page
From the GTN Setup page shown in Figure 5-4 above, select
the GTN Lighting Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-10
page allows you to set display parameters that affect the
display backlight and key lighting brightness. Fields listed in
Table 5-10 are adjusted separately for both the Display and
Key lighting features. The display source can only be
configured to track the photocell or lighting bus 1. The display
source cannot be configured to track lighting bus 2.

Figure 5-10. Lighting

Configuration Page

Table 5-10. Display and Key Lighting Adjustable Fields

Field Description
Backlight or key lighting level is determined by the ambient
Photocell
light level as measured by the photocell on the GTN.
Lighting Bus 1 Backlight or key levels track the Lighting Bus 1 levels.
Lighting Bus 2 Key lighting levels track the Lighting Bus 2 levels.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-23
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display. Touch the Minimum Level key corresponding
to either the Keys or the Display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum brightness level can be
adjusted in a range from 0.05% to 100.00% when tracking the lighting bus, and from 0.14% to 100.00%
when tracking the photocell, with 100.00% being the maximum brightness level. The default minimum
display brightness level when tracking the lighting bus is 0.05%. The default minimum display brightness
level when tracking the photocell is 0.14%. The default minimum bezel key brightness level is 0.00%.
5.5.1.6.1 Photocell Configuration Page
The photocell configuration page, shown in Figure 5-11, is
reached by touching Configure Photocell on the lighting
configuration page , shown in Figure 5-10. This page allows
configuration of the photocell parameters listed below.
Response Time
Sets the speed with which the key or display brightness
responds to the input level (bus voltage or ambient light)
changes. The higher the number the slower the display
responds. This field has a range of two to seven seconds, and
is set to two seconds as a default value.
Slope
Sets the sensitivity the brightness of the display or keys has to
changes in the input level. Adjusting the slope higher will
result in a brighter display for a given increase in the input
level. This field has a range of 0 to 100, and is set to 50 as the
default setting. Figure 5-11. Photocell
Configuration Page
Offset
Adjusts the lighting level up or down for any given input level. This field has a range of 0 (zero) to 99,
and is set to 50 as a default value. This may also be used to match lighting curves with other equipment in
the panel.
5.5.1.6.1.1 Photocell Override Options
Key Backlight Cutoff
This parameter configures the point at which key backlighting is switched off in bright light. For example,
a value of 70% results in the key backlights being turned off at photocell source input levels above 70%.
This field has a range of 0 (zero) to 100% and is set to 80% as the default setting.
Photocell Transition
When a lighting bus is used to control the lighting of the display, this parameter sets the point on the
lighting bus control below which the display brightness tracks the GTNs photocell. This field has a range
of 5 to 50, and is set to 25 as the default setting.
5.5.1.6.2 Lighting Bus Configuration Page
The Lighting Bus Configuration page offers the same Response Time, Slope, and Offset adjustments as
described in Section 5.5.1.6.1.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-24 Rev. 4
Lighting Bus Source
To configure the lighting bus source voltage, touch the Lighting Bus 1 or Lighting Bus 2 key. Select
14V DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, or 5V AC, depending on the lighting bus voltage source.
5.5.1.7 Audio Configuration Page
The Audio Configuration page allows the adjustment of Alert
audio volume. See Figure 5-12.
Adjust Alert volume by touching the + or - signs to decrease
or increase the volume accordingly. Volume is displayed as a
percentage of maximum volume, with 0% being muted and
100% being maximum volume. The selected volume can be
checked by selecting Altitude, Terrain, or Test Tone beneath
the volume adjustment and then touching the triangle to the
right of the key. See Section 5.6.7 for the TAWS audio check
procedure.

Figure 5-12. Audio

Configuration Page
5.5.1.8 Traffic Configuration Page
Access the Traffic Configuration page from the Main GTN
Configuration home page. See Figure 5-15. The Traffic
Configuration page allows the external control to be
configured for each specific installation.
Configure the traffic intruder symbol color. If the GTN is
installed with other traffic displays, choose the appropriate
symbol color (White or Cyan) to maintain cockpit
consistency.
Configure the GTN control of the traffic system. If the GTN is
used to control the traffic system, select Yes. If a separate
display device is used to control the traffic system, select No.
The default selection is No.
If the GTN is interfaced to the Avidyne TAS (Ryan 9900BX)
and configured to ARINC 429 Traffic Format 5, this setting
must be configured to No. The Avidyne TAS does not include
provisions for the necessary discrete signals to be controlled
by the GTN. Figure 5-13. Traffic
If the GTN is connected to a GDL 88 that is interfaced with a Configuration Page
TCAD system, the option to configure the GTN control of the
TCAD system will be available. If the GTN is used to control
the traffic system, select Yes. If a separate display device is
used to control the traffic system, select No.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-25
5.5.1.9 Main System Configuration Page
Select Main System from the GTN Setup page. This page
displays miscellaneous configuration options as described
below.
Air/Ground Threshold
The air/ground threshold is the groundspeed at which the GTN
transitions from a ground state to an airborne state, and vice
versa. To adjust the air/ground threshold, touch the key to the
right and enter a value. This field has a range of 0 to 99 knots
and is set to 30 knots as a default value.
Air/Ground Discrete
The AIR/GROUND discrete is active-low, and can be
configured to interpret if the aircraft is airborne or on the
ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open. If it
is desired for the air/ground state to be airborne when the squat
switch input is grounded, then toggle the AIR/GROUND Figure 5-14. Main System
discrete key to Active for Airborne. If it is desired for the
Configuration Page
air/ground state to be airborne when the squat switch input is
open, then toggle the AIR/GROUND discrete key to Active for Ground. The default configuration is
Active for Airborne.
Refer to Table 5-11.

Table 5-11. Air/Ground Discrete Configurations

AIR/GROUND Discrete Configuration AIR/GROUND input state GTN Air/Ground Status

Open Airborne
Configured Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Configured Active for Airborne
Grounded Airborne

GPS Antenna Height Above Ground

This configures the height of the GPS antenna above ground level while the aircraft is sitting on the
ground. Before proceeding, measure the GPS antenna vertical offset (to the nearest tenth of a foot) as
shown in Figure 5-15. Enter the measured value by touching the key and typing the measured value into
the keypad on the display. This field has a range of 0.0 to 99.9 feet.

GPS Antenna
Vertical Offset (ft)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-26 Rev. 4
 Figure 5-15. Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset

Table 5-12 . Fuel Type

Selection Description
AV gas (Default) The aircraft burns Aviation gas (5.8 lbs./gal.)
Jet A The aircraft burns Jet A or Jet A-1 fuel (6.7 lbs./gal.)
Jet B The aircraft burns Jet B (JP-4) fuel (6.5 lbs./gal.)

Table 5-13. Synchro Heading Input (GTN 7XX Only)

Selection Description
Connected A Synchro heading source is connected to the GTN 7XX.
Not Connected (Default) A Synchro heading source is not connected to the GTN 7XX.

NOTE
In a dual GTN installation, both GTNs must be configured for the same GPS SELECT
setting for the unit to function properly. If Auto is selected on one GTN, Auto must
manually be selected on the other, and vice versa.

Table 5-14. GPS Select

Selection Description
When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever a
GPS approach mode is active no associated messages appear and no pilot
Auto (Default)
action is required. The pilot is also allowed to select automatic or manual GPS
to ILS CDI transitions on the AUX CDI/ALARMS page.
When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever a
GPS approach mode is active and the pilot has enabled the A/P APR Outputs
(an associated message is displayed telling the pilot to enable the A/P APR
Prompt Outputs). This setting will not allow the pilot to select automatic GPS to ILS CDI
transitions on the AUX CDI/ALARMS page (only manual transitions are
permitted).
For Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225 and KAP 140 autopilots.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-27
Heading Source Input (software version 3.00 or later)
When upgrading from GTN software version 2.00 to 3.00, this setting defaults to Connected. If a
nuisance heading lost message appears a few minutes after power up and no heading source is present,
configure this setting to 'Not Connected'.
Table 5-15. Heading Source Input

Selection Description

Connected (Default) A heading source is connected to the GTN.

Not Connected A heading source is not connected to the GTN.

Altitude Source Input (software version 3.00 or later)

When upgrading from GTN software version 2.00 to 3.00, this setting defaults to Connected. If a
nuisance altitude source lost message appears a few minutes after power up and no pressure altitude
source is present, configure this setting to 'Not Connected'.
Table 5-16. Altitude Source Input

Selection Description

Connected (Default) A pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN.

Not Connected A pressure altitude source is not connected to the GTN.

Voice Command (software version 3.00 or later)

Table 5-17. Voice Command (software version 3.00 or later)

Selection Description

This setting enables Telligence Voice Command control of the GMA 35. Enabling
Enable
this setting is not covered under this STC.
Disable (Default) Telligence Voice Command is not enabled.

NOTE
The Voice Command setting will be unavailable until an RS-232 port is configured for
GMA Format 1.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-28 Rev. 4
5.5.1.10 COM Configuration Page (GTN 635/650/750 Only)
Select the COM Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-16,
from the main GTN Setup page, shown in Figure 5-4 above.
These values are set at the factory and rarely require
calibration.
To enable or disable the COM radio, touch the key to toggle
between Enabled and Disabled. The COM radio defaults to
the enabled state.
COM RF Squelch
This setting configures the RF squelch threshold for the COM
radio. This field may be set to any value between 0% and
100%. The default is 0%. 0% is the most sensitive (i.e. the
weakest signal level necessary to break squelch). Increasing
the value will require a stronger signal to break squelch.
Mic 1 Gain
The MIC 1 Gain can be adjusted from -12 dB to +30 dB in 6
dB increments. The default is +12 dB. For mics with low
signal levels, this can be adjusted up to increase the signal Figure 5-16. COM
strength. For mics with high signal levels, this can be adjusted Configuration Page
down to decrease the signal strength.
Sidetone Volume
This parameter sets the audio side tone output level. Side tone refers to the audio spoken into the COM
microphone. This setting only affects the volume of the side tone for the GTN COM during PTT. This
value may be set to values between 0.0 dB and 63.0 dB in 0.5 dB increments. The default is 17.5 dB. The
higher the setting, the louder the side tone will be. The side tone is only generated in the COM headset
(low level) audio output.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-29
5.5.1.11 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page
(GTN 650/750 Only)
Select the VOR/LOC/GS key from the GTN Setup page by
touching the key on the display shown in Figure 5-4 above.
This page allows you to verify the CDI outputs from the
VOR/LOC/GS receiver as well as the OBS resolver input to
the VOR receiver. It also allows you to select the format for
the DME tuning data.
NAV Radio
To enable or disable the NAV radio, touch the key to toggle
between Enabled and Disabled. The NAV radio defaults to
the enabled state.
Calibrate OBS Resolver
To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate key from
the VOR/LOC/GS Configuration page. Next, select 150 on
the external CDI/HSI, then touch the OK key when prompted
by the display. Touch OK after calibration is complete. Verify
OBS operation by checking that the selected course displayed Figure 5-17. VOR/LOC/GS
at the top of the page is within 2 of the selected course. Configuration Page

Table 5-18. ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (TX)

Selection Description

Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kilobits per second)

High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kilobits per second)

Table 5-19. SDI

Selection Description
Common Generates all 429 outputs with SDI = 0.
VOR/ILS 1 Number 1 (Pilot) VOR/ILS Receiver
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 1.
VOR/ILS 2 Number 2 (Copilot) VOR/ILS Receiver
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 2.

Table 5-20. DME Mode

Selection Description
Directed freq 1 If the GTN is connected to a multi-channel ARINC 429 DME, channel 1 of
that DME is tuned. Directed freq 1 should be selected if a single-channel
ARINC 429 DME is to be tuned.
Directed freq 2 If the GTN is connected to a multi-channel ARINC 429 DME, channel 2 of
that DME is tuned.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-30 Rev. 4
DME Channel Mode
This configuration setting allows you to set the format for DME tuning data output.

Table 5-21. DME Channel Mode

Selection Description
King serial King Serial DME tuning data
Parallel 2x5 2 of 5 parallel DME tuning.
Parallel BCD Shifted BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) parallel DME tuning
Parallel slip Slip-code parallel DME tuning
2 of 5 parallel DME tuning, compatible with the following DME units:
Narco 890/891 Narco DME 890
Narco DME 891

5.5.1.12 ARINC 453/708 Configuration Page (GTN 7XX Only)

Select the ARINC 708 key from the GTN Setup page by touching the key on the display shown in
Figure 5-4. This page allows the ARINC 453/708 port to be configured for a compatible weather radar.
Refer to Section 5.5.2.4 for information on ARINC 708 weather radar enablement, and Section 5.5.4.11.3
for information on ARINC 708 weather radar configuration.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-31
5.5.2 GTN Options Configuration Page
Access the GTN Options configuration page, shown in
Figure 5-18, by touching the GTN Options key on the
Configuration Mode page. This page allows optional
purchased features to be enabled. All optional features are
activated using the GTN Options Configuration Page.

NOTE

The feature unlock card should be provided to the

customer after the GTN installation.

5.5.2.1 TAWS Enablement

When the optional TAWS feature is enabled, the GTN will Figure 5-18. GTN Options
provide Class B TAWS functionality. This section describes Configuration Page
how to activate the TAWS feature in the GTN.
8. 1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the circuit breaker.
9. 2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a TAWS Enablement
Card,
P/N 010-00878-01.
10. 3. Enter configuration mode by applying power
(closing the circuit breaker) to the GTN while holding
the HOME key.
11. 4. Go to the TAWS page, shown in Figure 5-18
from the GTN Options page. Touch the TAWS B key
next to TAWS Configuration.
12. 5. A window will appear with Enable TAWS-
B? This will consume a feature unlock key when
selected.
13. 6. Touch Yes to enable TAWS-B.
When the TAWS feature is activated, the TAWS B key will
be lit green, as shown in Figure 5-19.
NOTE
If enabling TAWS on the GTN, the audio output from
the GTN must be connected to an unswitched and
unmuted input on the audio panel. Figure 5-19. TAWS
Refer to Figure E-14. Configuration Page
NOTE
TAWS-B should only be enabled on one GTN in dual GTN installations to prevent conflicting
audio messages.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-32 Rev. 4
5.5.2.1.1 TAWS Audio Configuration (Only if TAWS is Enabled)
From the TAWS page in the GTN Options page group, touch
the Configure TAWS Audio key. This page, shown in
Figure 5-20, allows configuration of TAWS Audio. For each
audio alert, select the desired audio text, as described in the
following tables.

Figure 5-20. TAWS Audio

Configuration Page
5.5.2.1.1.1 Caution Fields

Table 5-22. NCR-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Sets the Negative Climb Rate (NCR) cautionary alert to the specified text.
Dont Sink
(Default)
Too Low - Terrain Sets the Negative Climb Rate (NCR) cautionary alert to the specified text.

Table 5-23. EDR-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Sink Rate Sets the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) cautionary alert to the specified text.

Table 5-24. PDA-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Too Low - Terrain Sets the Premature Descent Rate (PDA) cautionary alert to the specified text.

Table 5-25. IOI-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
Obstacle Ahead (2x)
Impact (IOI) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
Caution, Obstacle (2x)
Impact (IOI) cautionary alert to the specified text.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-33
 Table 5-26. ROC-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
Caution, Obstacle (2x)
Obstacle Clearance (ROC) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
Obstacle Ahead (2x)
Obstacle Clearance (ROC) cautionary alert to the specified text.

Table 5-27. ITI-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain Impact
Terrain Ahead (2x)
(ITI) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution, Terrain (2x)
(ITI) cautionary alert to the specified text.

Table 5-28. RTC-CAUTION Field

Selection Description
Caution, Terrain (2x) Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance (RTC) cautionary alert to the specified text. (Default)
Terrain Ahead (2x) Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FTLA) Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance (RTC) cautionary alert to the specified text.

5.5.2.1.1.2 Warning Fields

Table 5-29. IOI-WARNING Field

Selection Description
Obstacle Ahead, Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
Pull-Up (2x) Impact (IOI) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
Obstacle (2x); Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Obstacle
Pull-Up (2x) Impact (IOI) warning alert to the specified text.

Table 5-30. ROC-WARNING Field

Selection Description
Obstacle (2x); Pull-Up Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
(2x) Obstacle Clearance (ROC) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
Obstacle Ahead, Pull-Up Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
(2x) Obstacle Clearance (ROC) warning alert to the specified text.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-34 Rev. 4
 Table 5-31. ITI-WARNING Field

Selection Description
Terrain Ahead, Pull-Up Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain
(2x) Impact (ITI) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Imminent Terrain
Terrain (2x); Pull-Up (2x)
Impact (ITI) warning alert to the specified text.

Table 5-32. RTC-WARNING Field

Selection Description
Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
Terrain (2x); Pull-Up (2x)
Terrain Clearance (RTC) warning alert to the specified text. (Default)
Terrain Ahead, Pull-Up Sets the Forward Looking Terrain Clearance (FLTA) Reduced Required
(2x) Terrain Clearance (RTC) warning alert to the specified text.

Table 5-33. EDR-WARNING Field

Selection Description
Pull Up Sets the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) warning alert to the specified text.

Table 5-34. VCO-WARNING Field

Selection Description
Five Hundred Sets the Voice Callout (VCO) advisory alert to the specified text.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-35
5.5.2.1.2 Airport Criteria Configuration
For installations of the GTN with TAWS enabled, the GTN
provides aural and visual terrain alerts. The alerting algorithm
adapts the terrain alerting criteria based on nearby airports. The
GTN must be configured to specify the minimum criteria that an
airport must meet to be considered as a nearby airport for the
purpose of TAWS/Terrain alerting. For installations with TAWS
enabled, obtain the information listed in Table 5-35.

Figure 5-21. TAWS

Configuration Page

Table 5-35. TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data

Item Description POH/AFM Section Note

Type of surfaces that the
Runway Set to type of runway surface that the
runway must have for the N/A
Surface aircraft will typically use.
aircraft to land.
Set to the shortest ground roll distance
Minimum length that
required for takeoff/landing operations
Minimum runway must have before
5-Performance (typically the distance given for sea
Length being considered a runway
level using the coldest temperature
by TAWS alerting.
given in the POH/AFM).

Configure TAWS Terrain Alerting and Airport Criteria as follows:

1. Access the GTN Options configuration page by touching the GTN Options key from the
Configuration Mode Home page, then touch the TAWS key.
2. Touch the Runway Surface key and select the applicable runway surface type as determined from
the information in Table 5-35.
3. Touch the Minimum Length key and enter the minimum length value from the information in
Table 5-35. This field has a range of 0 to 25,000 ft and defaults to zero.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-36 Rev. 4
5.5.2.2 Charts (GTN 7XX Only)
The GTN 7XX can display Jeppesen charts using the optional ChartView feature, which must be
activated. To configure which Charts to display, touch either None, FliteCharts, or ChartView. If
ChartView is selected, it must be enabled as described below.

NOTE
The ChartView Enablement Card can only
be used on one GTN (for dual GTN
installations a separate ChartView
Enablement Card must be used on each
GTN).

1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the circuit breaker.

2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot
and insert a ChartView Enablement Card, P/N 010-
00878-40.
3. Enter configuration mode on the GTN by applying
power to the GTN (closing the circuit breaker) while
holding the HOME key.

4. Go to the Charts page from the GTN Options page. Touch the ChartView key.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable ChartView.
Figure 5-22. Chart
6. When the ChartView feature is activated, the ChartView Configuration Page
key will be lit green, as shown in
Figure 5-22.

NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be programmed on the ChartView Enablement Card.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-37
5.5.2.3 COM Transmit Power
When the optional 16W COM power is configured, the GTN COM will transmit with 16 watts rather than
the standard 10 watts. 16W COM transmit power should be enabled for aircraft certified to fly above
FL180. This section describes how to enable the 16W COM transmit power.

NOTE
The 16W COM Enablement must only be used in 28V installations.

NOTE

The 16W COM Enablement Card can only be used on one GTN (for dual GTN
installations a separate Enablement Card must be used on each GTN). A new 16W
COM Enablement Card must be used for each GTN that has the 16W COM feature
activated.

1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the circuit breaker.

2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot
and insert a 16W Enablement Card,
P/N 010-00878-04.
3. Enter configuration mode by applying power to the
GTN (closing the circuit breaker) while holding the
HOME key.
4. Go to the COM Transmit Power page from the GTN
Options page. Touch the 16W key.
5. A window will appear with Enable 16W COM? This
will consume a feature unlock key when selected.
6. Touch Yes to enable 16W COM.
7. When the 16W COM feature is activated, the 16W
key will be lit green, as shown in Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-23. COM Transmit Power

Configuration Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-38 Rev. 4
5.5.2.4 Digital Radar (GTN 7XX Only)
This section describes how to enable the Digital Radar
feature, which allows approved ARINC 708 Weather Radars
to be interfaced with the GTN 7XX.

NOTE

The Digital Radar Enablement Card can

only be used on one GTN (for dual GTN
installations a separate Digital Radar
Enablement Card must be used on each
GTN).

1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the circuit breaker.

2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot
and insert a Digital Radar Enablement Card,
(P/N 010-00878-42).

3. Enter configuration mode on the GTN by applying

Figure 5-24. Weather Radar
power to the GTN (closing the circuit breaker) while
Enable Page
holding the HOME key.
4. Go to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page. Touch the Digital Radar key, as
shown in Figure 5-24.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable ARINC 708 Weather Radars. When the feature is activated,
the Digital Radar key will be lit green.
5.5.2.5 GWX 70 Advanced Features (GTN 7XX Only)
The GTN 7XX can enable two Doppler radar features for the GWX 70 (12 inch and 18 inch antenna sizes
only); Ground Clutter Suppression and Turbulence Detection. Each advanced feature requires a separate
Enablement Card. This section describes how to enable these features.

NOTE
The Enablement Card can only be used on one GTN (for dual GTN installations a
separate Enablement Card must be used on each GTN).

1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the circuit breaker.

3. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a Radar AGCS Enablement Card,
(P/N 010-00878-44), or Radar Turbulence Detection Enablement Card, (P/N 010-00878-45).
4. Enter configuration mode on the GTN by applying power to the GTN (closing the circuit breaker)
while holding the HOME key.
5. Go to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page. Turbulence Detection or Ground
Clutter Suppression key, as shown in Figure 5-24.
6. When prompted, touch Yes to enable the selected GWX 70 advanced feature. When the feature is
activated, the selected GWX 70 advanced feature key will be lit green.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-39
5.5.2.6 Flight Simulator
The Flight Simulator enablement is used to support GTN use in flight simulators. Selection of this setting
is not approved under this STC.
5.5.3 GTN Diagnostics Page
The GTN Diagnostics page, shown in Figure 5-25, is accessed
from the Configuration Mode Home page and is a useful tool
for diagnosing issues and troubleshooting problems that arise
during installation. Ground checks are also performed using
the tools in this page. The following sections describe pages
that are accessed from the GTN Diagnostics page.
5.5.3.1 ARINC Inputs
The ARINC Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of
ARINC 429 data that is being received over each ARINC 429
port. Each port can be chosen for display by touching the Port
key and toggling between the input ports. Select a port to
display. The GTN will then display the label, SSM, Data, and
SDI for each ARINC 429 input port. This is useful for
determining if the expected labels are being received and also
for troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input
ports. The data log can be paused by toggling the Pause key.
Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
Figure 5-25. GTN
5.5.3.2 Serial Inputs Diagnostics Page
The Serial Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of serial data that is being received and is useful for
determining if the GTN is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by touching the
key labeled Port and selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by toggling
the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.5.3.3 Discrete Inputs
The Discrete Inputs diagnostics page displays the state of each of the discrete input pins on the GTN. This
page is useful for troubleshooting discrete wiring issues. Refer to Section 5.6.3 for the discrete input
checkout procedure.
5.5.3.4 Discrete Outputs
The Discrete Outputs diagnostics page allows the state of each of the discrete outputs to be toggled
between active and inactive. This is useful for ensuring that annunciator and signal outputs are properly
connected to annunciator lights or 3rd party LRUs and that they are receiving the signal. Refer to
Section 5.6.4 for the discrete output checkout procedure.
5.5.3.5 HSDB Ethernet
The HSDB Ethernet diagnostics page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. This page
displays whether or not each port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not
connected. The configuration status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed. See Section 5.5.1.3
HSDB port configuration instructions.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-40 Rev. 4
5.5.3.6 Main Indicator (Analog)
The Main Indicator diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the main board (P1001) to be ground
checked and allows the interface to be verified. For the Main Indicator checkout procedure, see
Section 5.6.1.
5.5.3.7 Analog Inputs
The analog inputs diagnostics page displays the bus voltage setting for Lighting Bus 1 and Lighting Bus 2
as well is the input voltage setting for each bus. It also displays synchro heading input diagnostics
information such as heading angle, heading valid status, AC voltage, and AC frequency.
5.5.3.8 Power Stats
The power statistics page displays the number of times the GTN has powered up as well as the total
elapsed operating hours for the GTN.
5.5.3.9 WAAS Diagnostics
The WAAS diagnostics page displays the WAAS engine status, including UTC date/time, current
Lat/Lon, overall navigation status, oscillator temperature, and AGC voltage. This page also allows the
GPS/SBAS engine to be reset.
5.5.3.10 Temps
The Temps diagnostics page displays the current, minimum, maximum, and average board temperatures
for the LED Board, Main Board, Display Interface Board, GPS/SBAS Board, and COM Board.
5.5.3.11 Error Log
The Error log diagnostics page allows the error log to be written to the SD card in the front slot. It also
allows the error log to be cleared.
5.5.3.12 Main Data Inputs
The Main Data Inputs page allows the data on ARINC 429, RS-232, and other electrical inputs to be
monitored. This is used for verifying electrical interfaces during installation and troubleshooting.
Information that is not being received by the GTN is dashed out. The data displayed is prioritized
according to the scheme outlined in Section 2.4.2 if the data is being received on multiple inputs. See
Section 5.6.10 for checkout procedure utilizing this page.
5.5.3.13 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog)
The VOR/ILS Indicator diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the NAV board (P1004) to be
ground checked and allows the NAV indicator interface to be verified. See Section 5.6.2 for the ground
check.
5.5.3.14 Clear Config Module
CAUTION
This key should only be touched if the intent is to clear all configuration settings.
Touching the Clear Config Module key opens a confirmation window to reset all of the
settings stored in the configuration module to their defaults.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-41
5.5.4 External Systems Configuration
The following section contains procedures for configuring
remote-mount units that are connected to the GTN. To
configure external systems using the GTN, touch the External
Systems key from the main configuration Home page.
5.5.4.1 GDL 69/69A Configuration
If installed, the GDL 69/69A must be configured to match the
installation. Follow the steps below.
1. Go to the GDL 69/69A configuration page. This can
be accessed from the External Systems page, shown in
Figure 5-26.
2. Adjust the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss to match the
installation. Refer to the GDL 69/69A Installation
Manual, P/N 190-00355-02, to determine the correct
values.
3. Enable any GDL 69/69A Ethernet ports as required by Figure 5-26. External Systems
the installation. Configuration Page

NOTE
The GDL 69/69A XM must be activated before use. If XM activation has not
already been done, see the GDL 69/69A Installation Manual,
P/N 190-00355-02 or 190-00355-07, and the GDL 69/69A XM Activation
Instructions, P/N 190-00355-04.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-42 Rev. 4
5.5.4.2 Stormscope Configuration

NOTE

The Stormscope pages are only available if the WX-500 is connected to the RS-232
channel that is configured for the WX-500.

Select the Stormscope configuration page from the External Systems page, shown in Figure 5-26. The L-3
Communications WX-500 Stormscope configuration is reported by the WX-500 through RS-232 data.
To display the Stormscope configuration information, touch the Configure key. Verify the Status field
indicates OK, and that the other displayed parameters are correct based upon the installation. See the
configuration information in the WX-500 Installation Manual to determine the correct configuration.
When a GTN is interfaced with a WX-500 Stormscope, the Synchro or Serial heading formats may be
used. If another heading format is used, lightning strike information is visible on the Weather Page, but
not the Map Page.

Figure 5-27. Stormscope Page Figure 5-28. Stormscope

Configuration Page

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-43
5.5.4.3 Stormscope Test Page
To access the Stormscope Test page, shown in Figure 5-29,
select the Stormscope Test key from the Stormscope page,
shown in Figure 5-27 above. This page shows current strike
activity, WX-500 status, and the heading supplied by the
WX-500. The WX-500 mode may be changed to Cell, Strike,
Noise, Strike Test, Self Test, and Demo.
The strikes can be cleared from the display by touching the
Clear Strikes key. The view can be changed by touching
either the 360 key or the Arc key.
Verify that the WX-500 mode can be changed. Refer to the
WX-500 manual for specific installation test procedures for
the WX-500, using this page to view strike data, change the
WX-500 mode, view WX-500 status, trigger count, and
heading.
5.5.4.4 Stormscope Download Data Page
Select the Download Data key from the Stormscope page. Figure 5-29. Stormscope
This page shows raw data downloadable from the WX-500. Test Page
Optional sets of data include WX-500 software version,
configuration data, environment data, and fault log data.
Verify that the configuration data is correct as intended. To request which packet of data to display, touch
the key underneath Data to Display and select a data type from the menu.
5.5.4.5 Traffic Test Page

NOTE
The following pages are only available if one of the ARINC 429 or RS-232 inputs is
configured for a traffic format.

The Traffic Test page displays the traffic system modes of

operation and current traffic situation.
Depending on the type of traffic system installed, the
information displayed on the traffic test page can vary.

Figure 5-30. Traffic Test Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-44 Rev. 4
5.5.4.5.1 Ryan TCAD
For Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
Current shield mode
Altitude filter-Normal, Above, Below, and Unrestricted
Barometric pressure
By touching Menu, the traffic menu can be displayed. Under Traffic Audio, the mute duration (9900B
only) and traffic audio volume can be set and the TCAD can be toggled between voice and tone alerts.
Under Shield Setup, the shield settings can be configured for the various shield types. Also, Ground
Mode (9900BX only) and APPR Mode can be toggled.
5.5.4.5.2 Other Traffic Systems
For traffic systems other than Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
Altitude filterNormal, Above, Below, and Unrestricted;
Operating modeStandby, Operate, or TAS Fail
Altitude
Heading
BARO Alt and RAD Alt status

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-45
5.5.4.6 GAD 42 Configuration
The GAD 42 can be configured by the GTN if an ARINC 429
input is connected to the GAD 42. To configure the GAD 42,
select the External Systems page group and then touch the
GAD 42 key.
The GAD 42 configuration page allows remote configuration
of the GAD 42 Interface Adapter Unit. For details on how to
configure the unit, see Chapter 5 of the GAD 42 Installation
Manual, P/N 190-00159-00.

Figure 5-31. GAD 42

Configuration Page

5.5.4.7 Remote Transponder Configuration (GTX 32 or GTX 33)

A remote transponder can be configured by the GTN via RS-232 if a transponder is configured for one of
the RS-232 ports. To configure the transponder, it must first be selected as present and the type of
transponder installed must be specified. To do this, see Section 5.5.1.4.4. Next, go to the External
Systems page and touch the XPDR key. This displays the page shown in Figure 5-32, which allows the
remote transponder to be configured.

NOTE
If the GTN controls any transponder (GTX 32/33/327/328/330), then that transponder
will boot into the same mode (Normal or Configuration) as the GTN.

NOTE
If the GTN is not communicating with the GTX transponder, all of the editable fields for
the setup items shown in the following sections will be dashed out. If the fields are
dashed out, check the wiring and pin connections from the GTN to the transponder.

NOTE
The GTN can interface to the GTX 327/328/330/330 ES; however, configuration of the
panel-mounted GTX 327/328/330/330 ES is not supported. These transponders should be
configured per their installation manuals rather than through the GTN.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-46 Rev. 4
5.5.4.7.1 Transponder Inputs and Outputs
Access the transponder inputs and outputs page, shown in Figure 5-33 by touching the Inputs and Outputs
key from the Remote XPDR configuration page. The transponder RS-232 channel inputs can be
configured by the GTN. RS-232 channel 1 input for the transponder can only be set to Remote, and is the
default for channel 1 input. RS-232 channel 1 is used for control and remote configuring of the
transponder.
5.5.4.7.1.1 RS-232 Configuration
The following outlines RS-232 channel settings and describes what each setting is used for. Select the
correct input/output setting based upon the installed interfaced equipment. It is not necessary to select the
baud rate for the transponder port to which the GTN is connected.

Figure 5-32. Remote XPDR Figure 5-33. Remote XPDR

Configuration Page Inputs/Outputs Page

Table 5-36. RS-232 Channel 1 Inputs

Selection Description
Remote The RS-232 port is configured for remote control by the GTN.

Table 5-37. RS-232 Channel 1 Outputs

Selection Description
Remote RS-232 serial output remote data.
Remote + TIS RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-47
 Table 5-38. RS-232 Channel 2 Inputs

Selection Description
OFF DEFAULT. The altitude code input is not from an RS-232 source.
Airdata Format 1 RS-232 serial air data information from Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000 plus
altitude data. This input is the same as ADC W/ALT in the
GTX 330.
Airdata Format 2 RS-232 serial air data information from Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000.
This input is the same as ADC no ALT in the GTX 330.
Altitude Format 1 RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000. This input is the
same as ICARUS ALT in the GTX 330.
Altitude Format 2 Reports Icarus Instruments 3000 altitude in 25-foot increments. This input
is the same as ICARUS ALT 25 FT in the GTX 330.
Altitude Format 3 RS-232 serial altitude from Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T. This input is
the same as SHADIN ALT in the GTX 330.
Altitude Format 4 Reports Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T altitude in 25-foot increments. This
is the same as SHADIN ALT 25 Ft in the GTX 330.
FADC Format 1 RS-232 serial air data from Shadin 9628XX-X family of Air Data
Computers and Fuel/Air Data Computers plus altitude data. This input is
the same as FADC w/ ALT in the GTX 330.
FADC Format 2 RS-232 serial air data from Shadin 9628XX-X family of Air Data
Computers and Fuel/Air Data Computers. This input is the same as
FADC NO ALT in the GTX 330.
GPS RS-232 groundspeed from a GPS device.
REMOTE RS-232 serial input remote data.

Table 5-39. RS-232 Channel 2 Outputs

Selection Description
OFF Default for channel 2. No unit is connected to the output of this channel.
Altitude Format 1 RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000.
REMOTE RS-232 serial output remote data.
REMOTE w/TIS RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-48 Rev. 4
Baud Rate Selection
Select the baud rate for each RS-232 channel.

Table 5-40. RS-232 Baud Rate Selections

Selection Description
9600 Sets the baud rate to 9600 Bd.
19200 Sets the baud rate to 19200 Bd.
28800 Sets the baud rate to 28800 Bd.
38400 Sets the baud rate to 38400 Bd.
57600 Sets the baud rate to 57600 Bd.

Parity Selections
Select the parity for RS-232 channel 2.

Table 5-41. RS-232 Parity Selections

Selection Description
Even Parity Sets the Parity to Even.
No Parity Sets the Parity to None.
Odd Parity Sets the Parity to Odd.

5.5.4.7.1.2 ARINC 429 Configuration (GTX 33 Only)

Configure the four ARINC 429 input ports and the two ARINC 429 output ports. Select the correct speed
for each port depending upon the installed interfaced equipment by touching the Speed key and toggling
High or Low. Each port can be configured independently for the desired functions by selecting the
desired data format from the menu.

Table 5-42. ARINC 429 Speed Selections

Selection Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-49
ARINC 429 Input Selections
Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for each port. The data selections are described below.

Table 5-43. ARINC 429 Input Selections

Channel Selection Description

All OFF No unit connected to this ARINC 429 input
Selected waypoint information and GPS groundspeed
GPS
recognition.
ADC NO ALT Temperature and speed information
ADC W/ALT Altitude, temperature and speed information
AHRS Attitude and heading information
Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick
EFIS/ADC NO ALT
waypoint and speed information
1 Through 3 Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick
EFIS/ADC W/ALT
waypoint and speed information plus altitude data
Same as GPS with added ability of receiving phase of
GARMIN DISPLAY
flight data.
GARMIN TAS Traffic Advisory System discretes.
Standard GNSS output. Includes position, velocity, and
GARMIN 743A
integrity data.
AFCS Selected altitude, baro setting, and pitch discretes.
Airborne Data Link Processor. ADLP is available only on
4 ADLP
channel 4.

The GTX 33 receives one of the following sets of ARINC 429 data. The labels are chosen when selected
in ARINC 429 INPUT. Data may be received at either LOW or HIGH speed. The default is LOW. The
transmit data labels are as follows:

Table 5-44. AHRS Labels

Label Data
314 True Heading (degrees)
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees)
325 Roll Angle
365 Vertical Rate (feet/min)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-50 Rev. 4
 Table 5-45. Air Data Computer (ADC) Labels

Label Data
203 [1] Pressure Altitude (feet)
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet)
205 Mach Number
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots)
210 True Air Speed (knots)
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees)
212 Vertical Speed (feet/min)
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees)
[1] If ADC W/ALT or EFIS/ADC W/ ALT format selected.

Table 5-46. EFIS Display System (EFIS/ADC) Labels

Label Data
100 Selected Course (degrees)
102 Selected Altitude (feet)
203 [1] Pressure Altitude (feet)
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet)
205 Mach Number
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots)
210 True Air Speed (knots)
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees)
212 Vertical Speed (feet/min)
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees)
234 Barometric Setting (hPa)
235 Barometric Setting (Hg)
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees)
325 Roll Angle
[1] Only if ADC W/ALT or EFIS/ADC W/ALT formats are selected.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-51
 Table 5-47. GPS/FMS Navigation System (GPS) Labels

Label Data
102 Selected Altitude (feet)
310 GPS Latitude (degrees)
311 GPS Longitude (degrees)
312 Groundspeed (knots)
313 Track Angle (degrees)

Table 5-48. Garmin Display Labels

Label Data
310 GPS Latitude (degrees)
311 GPS Longitude (degrees)
261 GPS Discretes
312 GPS Groundspeed (knots)
313 GPS Track Angle (degrees)
314 True Heading (degrees)
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees)

Table 5-49. Garmin TAS Labels

Label Data
274 TAS Discretes

Table 5-50. AFCS Labels

Label Data
102 Selected Altitude (feet)
234 Barometric Setting (hPa)
235 Barometric Setting (Hg)
271 Pitch Discretes

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-52 Rev. 4
ARINC 429 Output Selections
ARINC 429 Channel 1 defaults to Off. ARINC 429 channel 2 defaults to Garmin w/ TIS. The GTX 33
can be configured to include GPS, Airdata, AHRS, EFIS/Airdata, and ADLP ARINC 429 input,
functioning as an ARINC 429 data concentrator. Each output port can be configured independently for the
desired function. Both ARINC 429 outputs send high speed ARINC 429 data.

SELECTION DESCRIPTION
CHANNEL 1 (DATA) DATA SOURCE: OFF, ADLP, GARMIN, GARMIN TAS, or
GARMIN W/TIS.
DEFAULTS to OFF.
ARINC 429 input channel 4 sets the ARINC 429 output channel 1
to the same selection.
CHANNEL 2 (DATA) DATA SOURCE: OFF, GARMIN, GARMIN TAS, or GARMIN
W/TIS.
DEFAULTS to GARMIN W/TIS.
Do not select GARMIN W/TIS if the aircraft contains another traffic
detection system.

The Garmin format is a data concentration function. The following data is sent out at specified intervals
using high speed ARINC 429 (100 kHz). The transmit data labels and their rates are as follows:

Table 5-51. Garmin Format Output Labels (1)

Label Data Rate

100 Selected Course (degrees) 200 ms
203 Pressure Altitude (feet) 100 ms
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet) 100 ms
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots) 100 ms
210 True Air Speed (knots) 100 ms
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees) 100 ms
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees) 100 ms
314 True Heading 100 ms
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees) 100 ms
371 GA Equipment Identifier 500 ms
377 Equipment Identifier 500 ms

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-53
The following data are sent out in packets approximately every 0.5 seconds at high speed (100 kHz), in
the specified sequence.

Table 5-52. Garmin Format Output Labels (2)

Sequence Label Data

1 350 Fault Summary
2 274 Transponder Control
3 313 Own Aircraft Track Angle
4 357 (RTS) Request to Send
5 130 Intruder Range (0 8 sets)
6 131 Intruder Altitude (0 8 sets)
7 132 Intruder Bearing (0 8 sets)
8 357 (EXT) End of Transmission

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-54 Rev. 4
5.5.4.7.2 Transponder Installation Settings Page
VFR Key Code
Input a VFR transponder code by touching the key and typing
the selected code into the keypad. This field has a range of
0000-7777.

NOTE

Exercise care when making routine code

changes. Enter only valid VFR codes.
Avoid using code 7500 and codes in the
7600-7777 range, as these codes trigger
special indicators in automated facilities.

Figure 5-34. Remote XPDR

Aircraft Weight Configuration page
Select the weight of the aircraft in which the transponder is installed.

Table 5-53. Aircraft Weight

Selection Description
<15,500 LBS Configures the aircraft weight to less than 15,500 lbs.
>=15,500 LBS Configures the aircraft weight to equal to or greater than 15,500 lbs.
ROTORCRAFT Configures to rotorcraft use.
UNKNOWN Aircraft weight is unknown.

Auto Standby Delay

This is the number of seconds the aircraft must be on the ground before the transponder automatically
switches to GND mode when it has a means of determining the aircraft is on the ground. It has a range of
0 (zero) seconds to 99 seconds. The default value of 24 seconds is a nominal value for most aircraft. This
value can be changed depending on the types of operations the aircraft is expected to perform.
Altitude Climb Rate for Airborne Transition
This is the climb rate that is required in order to transition from ground to airborne state. This field is
adjustable from 100 fpm to 9999 fpm. This field should be set to the typical vertical speed climb rate of
the aircraft. This number determined the rate of climb necessary for the GTX to assume liftoff for
detecting an airborne state. Refer to the Pilots Operation Handbook (POH) to determine this value. If the
POH does not include aircraft climb rate information, use the default value of 300 fpm.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-55
Air/Ground Logic
Select the source for the air/ground logic.

Table 5-54. Air/Ground Logic

Selection Description
Auto Airborne Off This is not a valid setting.
Squat Switch The transponder is connected to a squat switch to determine airborne
state.
GPS Data The transponder is using GPS data to determine the airborne state.
Only select this setting if a GTX input port is configured to GPS.
Altitude Data Select this setting if a squat switch is not installed and no GTX input
ports are configured for GPS.

Squat Switch Sense

The squat switch sense field may be set to either High or Low. If the air/ground logic field is set to squat
switch, the squat switch sense field is used to define the state of the squat switch input. If the squat sense
field is set to High, then when the squat switch input is high, the aircraft is considered to be on the
ground. If the squat sense field is set to low, then when the squat switch input is low, the aircraft is
considered to be on the ground.
Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 Only)
Select the maximum true airspeed for the aircraft. The default is <= 150 KTS.

Table 5-55. Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 only)

Selection Description
<= 75 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 75 knots TAS.
<= 150 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 150 knots TAS.
<=300 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 300 knots TAS.
<=600 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 600 knots TAS.
<=1200 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 1200 knots TAS.
>1200 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds greater than 1200 knots TAS.
UNKNOWN Max aircraft speed is unknown.

Address Type (GTX 33 Only)

Select the method of entry of the aircraft address.
Table 5-56. Address Type (GTX 33 only)

Selection Description
US Tail N-Registration Number (GTN main software version 3.00 or later)
HEX ID Allows technician to enter the aircraft registration number in hexadecimal
code format.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-56 Rev. 4
Flight ID Type (GTX 33 Only)
Select the flight ID type. For operation requiring the flight crew to enter an aircraft identification
designator, select the page identified as PILOT ENTRY. When this choice is selected and the crew enters
the Flight ID correctly, the flight number call sign for radio contact with ATC is the same flight
identification that the GTX 33 Mode S transponder replies to ATC radar interrogations.

Table 5-57. Aircraft Weight

Selection Description
CONFIG ENTRY Allows technician to enter Flight ID while in configuration mode only.
PILOT ENTRY Allows pilot/technician to enter Flight ID in the GTN in normal mode.
SAME AS TAIL If Address Type is US Tail, allows Flight ID to use the same number.

Selecting PILOT ENTRY allows the flight ID to remain the same as that entered during the previous
flight until it is updated, the crew is not prompted to update the flight ID. The selections SAME AS
TAIL and CONFIG ENTRY are fixed Mode S addresses.
Flight ID (GTX 33 Only)
Enter the flight ID number of the aircraft. This field allows 8 alphanumeric characters.
Aircraft Length (GTX 33 Only)
This field sets the length of the aircraft to less than or equal to 15 meters (49 ft), less than or equal to 25
meters (82 ft), less than or equal to 35 meters (115 ft), less than or equal to 45 meters (148 ft), less than or
equal to 55 meters (180 ft), less than or equal to 65 meters (213 ft), less than or equal to 75 meters
(246 ft), less than or equal to 85 meters (279 ft), or more than 85 meters (279 ft). Enter the aircrafts
minimum length category.
Aircraft Width (GTX 33 Only)
This field sets the wingspan of the aircraft to less than or equal to 11.5 meters (38 ft), less than or equal to
23.0 meters (75 ft), less than or equal to 28.5 meters (94 ft), less than or equal to 33.0 meters (108 ft), less
than or equal to 34.0 meters (112 ft), less than or equal to 38.0 meters (125 ft), less than or equal to 39.5
meters (130 ft), less than or equal to 45.0 meters (148 ft), less than or equal to 52.0 meters (171 ft), less
than or equal to 59.5 meters (195 ft), less than or equal to 67.0 meters (220 ft), less than or equal to 72.5
meters (238 ft), less than or equal to 80.0 meters (262 ft), or more then 80.0 meters (262 ft). Enter the
aircrafts minimum width category.
Enhanced Surveillance (GTX 33 Only)
This field sets Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) to DISABLE or ENABLE. When EHS is set to DISABLE
the enhanced surveillance function is not available.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-57
Surveillance Integrity Level (GTX 33 Only)
This field sets the correct GPS Integrity for the interfaced GPS receiver. Set to 1E-3, 1E-5, or 1E-7. When
interfaced to the GTN, the GPS Integrity must be set to 1E-5.

NOTE

The GPS INTEGRITY configuration field indicates the integrity of the GPS sensor that
is connected to the transponder. It is measured in errors per flight hour, 1E-3 being the
worst and 1E-7 being the best rating. This data is used in ADS-B transmissions.

Temperature Switch Installed (GTX 33 Only)

This field determines if a temperature switch is connected to the GTX 33. Select Yes if a temperature
switch is connected to the transponder. Select No otherwise.
5.5.4.7.3 Transponder Audio Configuration
Select the Audio Config key from the Transponder
Configuration menu. The remote transponder audio
configuration page, shown in Figure 5-35, will display the
following information.
Altitude Monitor
Select the desired audio type for the Altitude Monitor alert.
The choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
Countdown Timer
Select the desired audio type for the Count Down Timer alert.
The choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
TIS Alert
Select the desired audio type for TIS alerts. The choices are
Off, Tone, or Message.
Voice Setting
Figure 5-35. Remote XPDR Audio
Set the voice type to male or female.
Configuration page
Volume
Adjust the desired volume level for transponder audio.
Volume is adjusted from 0 to +63 dB. Ensure the volume level
is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise environments.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-58 Rev. 4
5.5.4.8 GMA 35 Audio Panel Configuration (GTN 7XX Only)
5.5.4.8.1 Audio Terminology
The following terms will be used throughout the audio panel configuration sections and are defined here.
ALERT - Unswitched inputs. These inputs are typically warnings, and there is no way for the user to de-
select the audio.
COPILOT - The second crewmember is considered the COPILOT. The copilot is typically the front
right-seat for airplanes.
CREW - Refers to aircraft occupants who can transmit on radios. i.e. PILOT and COPILOT. In certain
installations, each crew member may be able to individually select radios.
ICS - Intercom Communication System - This refers to the distribution of microphone audio for each
occupant in the aircraft.
PA - Passenger Address - This refers to a crewmember broadcasting audio to the Passengers either
through headsets or speakers outside of the ICS distribution.
PASSENGERS - Occupants considered passengers are not able to transmit or select individual radios,
and are treated as a group in that each PASSENGER hears the same audio.
PILOT - The first crewmember is considered the PILOT. The pilot is typically the front left-seat for
airplanes. This crew position will always hear Selected Audio (SA).
PTT - Push-To-Talk - This refers to keyed microphone transmissions. An input must be activated before
the microphone audio is transmitted.
PRIMARY RADIO - For a crewmember, the Primary Radio is the radio selected for transmission. A
Push-to-talk (PTT) by a crewmember will transmit over the PRIMARY RADIO.
SA - Selected Audio - This refers to the combination of audio sources selected by the crewmember. Note
that Alerts are separate from Selected Audio.
SECONDARY RADIOS - For a crewmember, any radio selected for monitoring that is not selected for
transmission is considered a Secondary Radio.
SOFT MUTE - When music audio is muted due to an audio interruption such as ICS or alerts, Soft Mute
feature allows music audio to fade in gradually to the original volume setting after muting.
SIDETONE - Side tone refers to the audio spoken into the microphone by an occupant. Many half-
duplex radios provide side tone audio to the radio's received audio output. When transmitting on these
radios, it is not desired for the Audio Panel to provide the side tone to the headset since this is usually
provided by the transceiver. For PA and Telephone audio, side tone distribution may be adjusted.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-59
5.5.4.8.2 GMA 35 Audio Panel Settings

NOTE

When configuring volumes and squelches, keys can be touched and held to scroll
quickly through values.

To configure the audio panel, go to the External Systems page

and touch the Audio Panel key to display the audio panel
configuration page shown in Figure 5-36. On the main audio
panel configuration page, there are two keys labeled
Configure and Connected Radios. Touch the Configure key
to access configuration settings for audio routing, volume, and
miscellaneous options. The Connected Radios menu allows
the radios that are connected to the audio panel to be
configured.
For GTN software version 2.00, under the configure page,
touch the Set to Default Config key prior to configuring the
GMA 35. This will command the audio panel settings to the
factory default configuration. This key must be touched prior
to GMA 35 configuration. Touch OK to acknowledge the
prompt shown in Figure 5-36.
For GTN software version 3.00 or later, it is not necessary to
set the GMA 35 settings to default prior to configuration.
Figure 5-36. Audio Panel
Configuration Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-60 Rev. 4
5.5.4.8.2.1 Configuration Settings
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during alerts
This option mutes the passenger ICS audio to the crew during system alerts. Select True to mute
passenger audio during alerts or select False to allow passenger audio to be audible to the crew during
alerts. False is the default selection.
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during selected audio
This option mutes the passenger ICS audio to the crew during selected audio. Select True to mute
passenger audio during selected audio or select False to allow passenger audio to be audible to the crew
during selected audio. False is the default selection.
Passengers hear selected audio
Select True to allow passengers to hear selected audio. Select False to disable selected audio routing to
the passengers. False is the default selection.
Disable PA functionality
Selecting True will disable the passenger address function. Selecting False will enable the PA
functionality. False is the default selection.
Mute PASS music during intercom
Select True if it is desired for passenger music to be muted while the passengers are hearing microphone
audio from an occupant. Select False if it is desired for passenger music to continue playing during ICS
audio. False is the default selection.
Passengers hear alerts
Select True to allow passengers to hear alert audio. Select False to disable alert audio routing to the
passengers. False is the default selection.
Mute secondary radios on primary radio reception (Monitor Mute)
If True is selected, all secondary COM audio is muted upon receiving primary COM audio. If False is
selected, secondary COM audio will be allowed to play simultaneously with primary COM audio
reception. False is the default selection.

NOTE
It is recommended to set the internal side tone settings to true for better audio quality. For
GMA 35 software prior to 2.20, if internal side tone is set to true, the COM radio
Sidetone Volume must be set to zero (see Section 5.5.1.10).

Audio Processor generates COM1 internal side tone

Selecting True causes the audio panel to provide COM1 side tone. Selecting False allows the COM1
radio to generate its own side tone. False is the default selection.
Audio Processor generates COM2 internal side tone
Selecting True causes the audio panel to provide COM2 side tone. Selecting False allows the COM2
radio to generate its own side tone. False is the default selection.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-61
Audio Processor generates COM3 internal side tone
Selecting True causes the audio panel to provide COM3 side tone. Selecting False allows the COM3
radio to generate its own side tone. False is the default selection.
COM 1 is connected as COM 2
Select True if COM 1 is connected as COM 2, select false if COM 1 is connected as COM 1. False is the
default selection. This setting allows the GTN 7XX to be connected to the COM 2 port, but appear to the
pilot as COM 1. Refer to Section 2.4.14 for more information and wiring instructions for this setting.
Ambient Noise Mic On
This setting enables or disables the ambient noise sensor that is built in to the GMA 35. The ambient
noise sensor allows the GMA 35 to adjust the volume of the speaker based upon the ambient noise
environment. The ambient noise sensor is mounted internal to the GMA 35, with no external wiring.
Select either True or False. False is the default selection.
5.5.4.8.2.2 Volume Configuration Settings
Use the following procedure when adjusting volumes in the GMA 35 to provide the best audio results.
This procedure allows the signal levels in the audio wires to be large so that they are more resistant to
noise interference. When audio levels can be controlled at the audio source and the GMA 35 has an input
gain control for the audio source, perform the following procedure:
1. Adjust the source audio level to the minimum and the audio panel input gain control to the
minimum.
2. Adjust the volume settings on the audio panel for normal operation.
3. Increase the audio source level until the desired audio level is reached or the audio source is close
to the maximum specified input level for the audio panel input.
4. If the audio from the audio source is not loud enough, increase the audio panel input gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Repeat this setup for each audio source and audio panel input with
adjustable gains.
5. If the audio source does not have adjustable gain then adjust the gain for the audio panel input
until the desired audio level is reached. For volume adjustments on the GMA 35, increasing the
gain to +96 will increase the volume, and decreasing the gain to -96 will decrease the volume.
6. If the audio panel input does not have adjustable gain then adjust the audio source gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Refer to the audio source manufactures installation documentation
for volume adjustment instructions.

NOTE
For the volume settings described below, higher gain values increase volume, and lower
gain values decrease volume.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-62 Rev. 4
Alert 1 thru 4 input audio volume
These settings allow the unswitched alert input audio to the
GMA 35 to be adjusted. This setting is configurable from -96
to +96. The default is 0.
Failsafe warn input audio volume
This setting allows the failsafe warn audio input to the
GMA 35 to be adjusted. This setting is configurable from -96
to +96. The default is 0.
Marker volume
This adjusts the marker beacon volume output to the crew
headsets. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The
default is 0. This setting adjusts the maximum allowable
volume range in GTN normal mode.
Music 1 and Music 2 Volume
This adjusts the volume of the 2 music inputs to the GMA 35.
This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0. Figure 5-37. Audio Panel
This setting adjusts the maximum allowable volume range in Configuration Page (Volume)
GTN normal mode.
Telephone Volume
This adjusts the Telephone input volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
5.5.4.8.2.3 Speaker Volume Configuration
Pilot PA
This setting adjusts the pilot passenger address to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from
-96 to +96. The default is 0.
Copilot PA
This setting adjusts the copilot passenger address to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable
from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Crew Audio
This setting adjusts the crew audio to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
Alert Audio Sum
This setting adjusts the alert audio to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-63
5.5.4.8.2.4 Squelch Threshold Configuration Settings
COM 1-3 Squelch Threshold
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break
squelch for each input. These are configurable from -96 dB to
0 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to
be broken with low signal levels. The default value is -48 dB.
NAV 1 and NAV 2 Squelch Threshold
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break
squelch on the NAV 1 and NAV 2 inputs. These are
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB.
A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to
be broken with low signal levels.
RCVR 3 Squelch Threshold
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break
squelch on the RCVR 3 input. This is configurable from -96
dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require Figure 5-38. Audio Panel
high signal levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to - Configuration Page (Squelch)
96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RCVR 4 Squelch Threshold
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RCVR 4 input. This is
configurable from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to
break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RCVR 5 Squelch Threshold
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RCVR 5 input. This is
configurable from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to
break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
WARN1 Squelch Threshold
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the WARN1 input. This is
configurable from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to
break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RING1 Squelch Threshold
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RING1 input. This is configurable
from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
ALERT 1-3 Squelch Threshold
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch on the ALERT1-3 inputs. These are
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-64 Rev. 4
5.5.4.8.2.5 Other GMA 35 Configuration Settings
Marker Beacon high sense threshold
The marker high sensitivity threshold configures the marker beacon signal strength that is required to
activate the marker beacon signal in marker high sense mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. A value
of -31 will cause the marker beacon signal to activate at lower signal strength; therefore the beacon signal
will remain active for a longer period of time while on approach. A value of +31 will require the marker
beacon signal strength to be much stronger to activate, which results in the marker beacon activating for a
very short duration while flying directly over the marker beacon. The default value is 0.
Marker Beacon low sense threshold
The marker low sensitivity threshold configures the marker beacon signal strength that is required to
activate the marker beacon signal in marker low sense mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. A value
of -31 will cause the marker beacon signal to activate at a lower signal strength, therefore the beacon
signal will remain active for a longer period of time while on approach. A value of +31 will require the
marker beacon signal strength to be much higher to activate, which results in the marker beacon
activating for a very short duration while flying directly over the marker beacon. The default value is 0.
Marker external lamp lighting offset
When external marker lamps are connected to the GMA 35, this setting allows the lighting level to be
adjusted up or down. It applies an offset to the lighting input that the marker lamps are tracking. If the
lamps are too bright, adjust this number down; if the lamps are too dim, adjust this number up. This
setting is configurable from -31 to +31. The default is 0.
5.5.4.8.2.6 Connected Radios to GMA 35 Configuration
From the main Audio Panel configuration page, touch the
Connected Radios key to configure which radios or systems
are connected to the GMA 35. Compare the interfaced radios
in the aircraft to the GMA 35 Pin function list in Section 4.2 to
determine which radios are connected to the applicable pins in
the GMA 35. The following radios can be configured as
Present or Not Present:
COM 2
COM 3
NAV 1
NAV 2
RCVR 3
RCVR 4
RCVR 5
TEL
Figure 5-39. Connected Radios
Music 1
Configuration page
Music 2
Marker Beacon

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-65
For RCVR 3, RCVR 4, and RCVR 5, the type of radio must also be configured. For each connected
RCVR source, select the type of radio.

Selection Description
ADF 1 An Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
ADF 2 A second Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 1 Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 2 A second Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
AUX An Auxiliary radio is connected to the RCVR input.

5.5.4.9 GDL 88 Configuration

NOTE
This STC does not cover the installation of the GDL 88; refer to the GDL 88 Part 23
AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01310-00). The following instructions are
provided for reference only, and where the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation
Manual and this manual, the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual takes
precedence.

The GDL 88 Install Tool is used to configure GDL 88 settings for a specific installation. Changes made in
the Configuration pages are immediately committed to the GDL 88.
Before configuring the GDL 88, ensure the Configuration Mode status is PASS under the External
Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics Faults page as shown in Figure 5-40. If the Configuration Mode
Fault is FAIL, refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual and resolve the issue before
proceeding.

Figure 5-40. GDL 88 Faults Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-66 Rev. 4
5.5.4.9.1 Aircraft Configuration Page
The aircraft page allows configuration of aircraft information and settings as shown in Figure 5-42. To
access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Configuration Aircraft.

Figure 5-41. GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page

5.5.4.9.1.1 ICAO Address

Enter the aircraft assigned ICAO address code, eight octal digits. This code can be found in either of the
following locations:
The aircraft registration certificate
The N-number inquiry page of http://registry.faa.gov/aircraftinquiry/.

NOTE
Correct entry of the assigned aircraft ICAO address in the GDL 88 is critical.

5.5.4.9.1.2 Aircraft Call Sign

Enter the US registration number (N-number). Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9, and trailing space.
5.5.4.9.1.3 Mode 3/A VFR Code
Enter the VFR transponder code. This field has a range of 0000-7777.
This setting is used for the UAT anonymous mode feature (if enabled), where the transponder must be
tuned to this code before the GDL 88 is capable of transmitting a temporary address and a call sign of
VFR.
NOTE
Enter only valid VFR codes. The code must match the VFR code configured on the
transponder. This is typically 1200 for US-registered aircraft.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-67
5.5.4.9.1.4 Aircraft Category
This setting selects the aircraft emitter category for which the GDL 88 is installed. Select Light for
aircraft with maximum gross weight less than 15,500.
5.5.4.9.1.5 Aircraft Length
Enter the length of the aircraft. This field has a range of 1 to 300 feet.
5.5.4.9.1.6 Aircraft Width
Enter the width (wingspan) of the aircraft. This field has a range of 1 to 300 feet.
5.5.4.9.1.7 Stall Speed
The stall speed setting is used in the GDL 88 air/ground determination for Light category aircraft
(aircraft weight is less than 15,500 lbs).
Enter the aircraft stall speed. This field has a range of 30 to 100 knots. Use the aircraft landing
configuration stall speed (Vs0) as specified in the aircraft pilot operating handbook (POH) or aircraft
approved flight manual supplement (AFMS).
5.5.4.9.1.8 ADS-B Transmit
This setting enables or disables the GDL 88 UAT transmitter. If it is desired for the GDL 88 to transmit,
select Enable, otherwise select Disable (default configuration).

NOTE
The GDL 88 is capable of transmitting ADS-B messages while in configuration mode.
Ensure the aircraft assigned ICAO 24-bit address is entered prior to enabling the GDL 88
UAT transmitter.

5.5.4.9.1.9 FIS-B Processing

This setting enables or disables the processing of Flight Information Service Broadcast (FIS-B). If it is
desired for the GDL 88 to process FIS-B, select Enabled (default configuration), otherwise select
Disabled.
5.5.4.9.1.10 Internal GPS/SBAS
If the GDL 88 unit has an internal GPS/SBAS present, this setting enables or disables the internal
GPS/SBAS receiver (GDL 88/D with internal GPS/SBAS only). If it is desired to utilize the internal
GPS/SBAS receiver as a GPS source, select Enabled (default configuration), otherwise select Disabled.
5.5.4.9.1.11 Transponder Interrogation
This setting enables or disables the transponder interrogation control panel interface. If it is desired for the
GDL 88 to communicate with the transponder wirelessly, select Enabled otherwise select Disabled.
Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual.
5.5.4.9.1.12 UAT Call Sign ID Logic
This setting configures whether the Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) is transmitted in the UAT ADS-B
Out message. This setting must be set to Enabled (default configuration), allowing the GDL 88 to
transmit the pilot-entered Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) to FAA ground stations.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-68 Rev. 4
5.5.4.9.1.13 Air/Ground Discrete
The GDL 88 AIR/GROUND discrete input is active-low, and can be configured to interpret whether the
aircraft is airborne or on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open.
If the GDL 88 AIR/GROUND discrete is not connected, then select Not Installed (default configuration).
If the GDL 88 AIR/GROUND discrete connected, and the aircraft air/ground state is On-Ground when
the input is grounded, the select Active for Ground. If the AIR/GROUND discrete is connected, and the
aircraft air/ground state is airborne when the input is grounded, then select Active for Airborne.
Table 5-58. GDL 88 Air/Ground Discrete Configurations

AIR/GROUND AIR/GROUND Discrete Input State GDL 88

Discrete AIR/GROUND State
Not Installed N/A N/A
Open Airborne
Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Active for Airborne
Grounded Airborne

5.5.4.9.1.14 Pressure Altitude Broadcast Inhibit Switch

This setting configures whether the GDL 88 is interfaced with an external switch for controlling pressure
altitude reporting. If an altitude reporting selection switch is installed and interfaced to the PRESSURE
ALT BROADCAST INHIBIT discrete select Installed, otherwise select Not Installed.
5.5.4.9.1.15 Anonymous Mode

NOTE
If a Mode S Transponder is installed with the GDL 88, the UAT anonymity feature must
be disabled as to prevent two different aircraft addresses from being transmitted
(Transponder Mode S address and the GDL 88 temporary address).

This setting controls whether the UAT anonymity feature is available. Consult the aircraft operator for
guidance on whether this feature should be enabled. When enabled, and the flight crew selects the
anonymous mode with the transponder tuned to the VFR Code, the GDL 88 transmits a temporary
address instead of the aircraft assigned ICAO 24-bit address, and a call sign of VFR.
If it is desired to disable the UAT anonymity feature, select Unavailable (default configuration).
If it is desired to enable the UAT anonymity feature controlled by an interfaced display, select Display
Available. If it is desired to enable the UAT anonymity feature controlled by an anonymous selection
switch interfaced to the ANONYMOUS MODE discrete input, select Switch Available.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-69
5.5.4.9.2 Antenna Configuration Page
The antenna page allows configuration of antenna settings as shown in Figure 5-42. To access this page,
touch External Systems GDL 88 Configuration Antenna.

Figure 5-42. GDL 88 Antenna Configuration Page

5.5.4.9.2.1 UAT/1090 Antenna
These settings control whether the GDL 88 antenna self tests are performed.
If the Top UAT/1090 Antenna (GDL 88D models only) is of the DC grounded type, select Enabled,
otherwise select Disabled. If the Bottom UAT/1090 antenna is of the DC grounded type, select Enabled,
otherwise select Disabled. Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for UAT/1090
antenna information.
5.5.4.9.2.2 GDL 88 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GDL 88/88D with GPS/SBAS Only)
These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the GDL 88 GPS/WAAS antenna on the aircraft.
Enter the GDL 88 GPS/WAAS antenna longitudinal offset distance rounded to the nearest foot from the
nose of the aircraft, and the lateral offset as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward) from the
centerline of the aircraft.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-70 Rev. 4
5.5.4.9.2.3 External GPS/SBAS Source Antenna
These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the external GPS source(s) GPS/WAAS antenna(s).
External GPS #1 is the GPS source connected to GDL 88 Time Mark 1
If external GPS #1 is connected to the GDL 88, enter the external sources GPS/WAAS antenna
longitudinal offset distance rounded to the nearest foot from the nose of the aircraft, and the lateral offset
as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward) from the centerline of the aircraft.
External GPS #2 is the GPS source connected to GDL 88 Time Mark 2
If external GPS #2 is connected to the GDL 88, enter the external sources GPS/WAAS antenna
longitudinal offset as measured in feet from the nose of the aircraft, and the lateral offset as measured in
feet (left or right, looking forward) from the centerline of the aircraft.
5.5.4.9.3 Audio Configuration Page
This page configures the GDL 88 analog audio output volume level and voice type as shown in Figure
5-43. To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Configuration Audio.
1. Select the desired voice gender as Male or Female. Set the audio volume to an acceptable level
as described in the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual.
2. Touch Run Audio Test to check the audio volume level.

Figure 5-43. GDL 88 Audio Configuration

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-71
5.5.4.9.4 ARINC 429 Configuration Page
This page allows configuration of the ARINC 429 input and output ports as shown in Figure 5-44. To
access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Configuration Ports and then select A429 at
the top of the page.
Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for approved third-party equipment interfaces
to the GDL 88. If the equipment and interface selections described below are not listed in the GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual, other FAA approval is required for that interface.

Figure 5-44. GDL 88 ARINC 429 Configuration Page

Select the correct Format and Speed settings for each port. The correct setting is dependent upon the
interfaced equipment. The Data Format and Speed selections are described in Table 5-59, Table 5-60, and
Table 5-61. Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for the correct selections for each
piece of interfaced equipment.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-72 Rev. 4
 Table 5-59. ARINC 429 RECEIVE Selections

Selection Description
Off No unit connected to the ARINC 429 input. Same as Disabled in the
GDL 88 Install Tool.
Airdata #1 Select this format for the Air Data system, or the Air Data system #1 in a
dual Air Data system installation. Provides altitude, airspeed, and
altitude rate information.
Airdata #2 Select this format for the Air Data system #2 in a dual Air Data system
installation. Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate information.
Airdata/Heading No Alt Airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
Airdata/Heading w/Alt Pressure altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
Heading Select this format for heading information.
Radio Altimeter Select this format for radio altimeter information.
TCAS II TA/RA Provides ARINC 429 labels 270 (Vertical RA) and 274 (Transponder
Control) from ACAS or TCAS II systems complying with ARINC 735A.
Used for determining TCAS/ACAS Operational and TCAS/ACAS
Resolution Advisory flags in the UAT ADS-B Out message.
Traffic Format 1 Select this format for traffic information. [1]
Traffic Format 2 Select this format for traffic information. [2]
Traffic Format 3 Select this format for traffic information.
Traffic Format 5 Reserved for future use.

[1] Traffic Format 1 configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to function as traffic
system standby/operate and test control discretes.
[2] Traffic Format 2 configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to function as traffic
system standby/operate and test control discretes.
Table 5-60. ARINC 429 TRANSMIT Selections

Selection Description
Disabled No unit connected to this ARINC 429 output.
Traffic Out Traffic and equipment status output.

Table 5-61. ARINC 429 SPEED Selections

Selection Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kb per second)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-73
5.5.4.9.5 RS-232 Configuration Page
This page allows configuration of the RS-232 input ports and the RS-232 output ports as shown in Figure
5-45. To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Configuration Ports and then select
RS232 at the top of the page.

Figure 5-45. GDL 88 RS-232 Port Configuration

Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for approved third-party equipment interfaces
to the GDL 88. If the equipment and interface selections described below are not listed in the GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual, other FAA approval is required for that interface.
Change the inputs or outputs to match the equipment that is interfaced to each channel. Refer to
Table 5-62 (inputs) and Table 5-63 (outputs). Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation
Manual. Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for the correct selections for each
piece of interfaced equipment.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-74 Rev. 4
 Table 5-62. RS-232 INPUT Selections

Selection Description
Disabled No unit connected to this RS-232 input.
Airdata Format 1 Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate information.
Altitude Format 1 Provides altitude information.
Altitude Format 2 Provides altitude information.
Altitude Format 3 Provides altitude information.
Provides GPS data and FIS-B requests. Same as GNS Series #1 in the
GNS 1
GDL 88 Install Tool.
Provides GPS data and FIS-B requests. Same as GNS Series #2 in the
GNS 2
GDL 88 Install Tool.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
GTX Mode C #1
Mode, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
GTX Mode C #2
Mode, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
GTX Mode S #1
Mode, Flight ID and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
GTX Mode S #2
Mode, Flight ID and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
SL Mode C Format 1 #1
Mode, and Altitude.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
SL Mode C Format 2 #1
Mode, and Altitude.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
SL Mode C Format 2 #2
Mode, and Altitude.
Traffic Format 4 Provides traffic system status information.

Table 5-63. RS-232 OUTPUT Selections

Selection Description
Disabled No unit connected to this RS-232 output.
Provides FIS-B and GDL 88 product information. Same as GNS Series #1
GNS 1
in the GDL 88 Install Tool.
Provides FIS-B and GDL 88 product information. Same as GNS Series #2
GNS 2
in the GDL 88 Install Tool.
GTX Mode C #1 Provides transponder #1 control commands.
GTX Mode C #2 Provides transponder #2 control commands.
GTX Mode S #1 Provides transponder #1 control commands.
GTX Mode S #2 Provides transponder #2 control commands.
Traffic Format 4 Traffic system control commands.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-75
5.5.4.9.6 Ethernet Configuration Page
This page configures which LRUs are installed on the GDL 88 Ethernet (HSDB) network. To access this
page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Configuration Ports and then select HSDB (Ethernet) at
the top of the page. From the available list of LRUs, select either Enabled or Disabled as shown in
Figure 5-46.

Figure 5-46. GDL 88 Ethernet Configuration Page

Refer to the GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual for approved third-party equipment interfaces
to the GDL 88. If the equipment and interface selections described below are not listed in the GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual, other FAA approval is required for that interface.
Change the configuration status to Enabled or Disabled to match the equipment that is interfaced on the
Ethernet (HSDB) network.
5.5.4.9.6.1 GTN 6XX/7XX
Select Enabled if a single GTN or dual GTNs are installed.
5.5.4.9.6.2 GTS 8XX
Select Disabled if no GTS 8XX is installed, or if a GTS 8XX is installed but the installation is not using
the GTS 8XX Ethernet (HSDB) interface for traffic correlation. Select Enabled if a GTS 8XX is installed
and the GTS 8XX Ethernet (HSDB) interface is being used for traffic correlation.

NOTE
GTS 8XX selection of Enabled configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT
2* to function as traffic system standby/operate and test control discretes.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-76 Rev. 4
 NOTE
This setting should only be set to Enabled if the GTS 8XX is interfaced to the GDL 88
via Ethernet (HSDB) instead of ARINC 429 for traffic correlation. If the GTX 8XX is
interfaced to the GDL 88 using ARINC 429, select Disabled.

5.5.4.9.7 GDL 88 Diagnostics

The GDL 88 Diagnostics page is a useful tool for diagnosing issues and troubleshooting problems that
arise during installation. These pages are also used for the GDL 88 checkout procedures in the GDL 88
Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual which must be followed.
5.5.4.9.7.1 System Status
This page is the same as the Unit Information page in the GDL 88 Install Tool. The System Status page
displays device information including the serial number and software versions along with system
statistics. To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics System Status.
5.5.4.9.7.2 Error Log
This page is the same as the Unit Assert Log page in the GDL 88 Install Tool. The Error Log page allows
the GDL 88 assert log to be saved to an SD card or cleared. To access this page, touch External Systems
GDL 88 Diagnostics Error Log.
5.5.4.9.7.3 Faults
This page contains a list of GDL 88 system faults and ADS-B faults. To access this page, touch External
Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics Faults. A description of each fault and troubleshooting
procedures can be found in the GDL 88 STC Installation Manual, P/N 190-01310-00.
5.5.4.9.7.4 Discrete Inputs
The Discrete Inputs diagnostics page displays the state of each of the discrete input pins on the GDL 88.
To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics Discrete Inputs.
5.5.4.9.7.5 Discrete Outputs
The Discrete Outputs diagnostics page allows the state of each of the discrete outputs to be toggled
between active and inactive. To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics
Discrete Outputs.
5.5.4.9.7.6 GPS/SBAS Data
The GPS/SBAS Data page displays the WAAS engine information and PPS status information. For
GDL 88 units with an internal WAAS engine, this page allows the GDL 88 internal WAAS engine to be
reset. To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics GPS/SBAS Data.
5.5.4.9.7.7 External Data
This page is the same as the Data Inputs page in the GDL 88 Install Tool. The External Data page
displays the data received on the GDL 88 from the other connected avionics. To access this page, touch
External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics External Data.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-77
5.5.4.9.7.8 RS-232 Inputs
The RS-232 Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of serial data that is being received and is useful
for determining if the GDL 88 is receiving data on each connected port. To access this page, touch
External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics RS232 Inputs. Select the desired port by touching the
Port key and selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by toggling the
Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.5.4.9.7.9 ARINC Inputs
The ARINC Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of ARINC 429 data that is being received over
each GDL 88 ARINC 429 port. To access this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics
ARINC inputs. Each port can be chosen for display by touching the Port key and toggling between
the input ports. Select a port to display. The GTN will then display the label, SSM, Data, and SDI for
each GDL 88 ARINC 429 input port. This is useful for determining if the expected labels are being
received and also for troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input ports. The data log can be
paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.5.4.9.7.10 HSDB (Ethernet)
The HSDB (Ethernet) diagnostics page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. To access
this page, touch External Systems GDL 88 Diagnostics HSDB (Ethernet). This page displays
whether or not each port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not connected.
The configuration status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed.
5.5.4.10 GSR 56 Configuration
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GTN, the GSR 56 features that will be
used must be enabled.
1. Go to the GSR 56 page in the External Systems page group.
2. Touch on the desired features to be activated. When active, the key for the feature will be lit
green.
3. Ensure that the RUDICS Number setting is 0088160000576. If the RUDICS Number setting is
incorrect, touch Restore Defaults.
4. Ensure that the SMS SCA setting is 881662900005. If the SMS SCA setting is incorrect, touch
Restore Defaults.
5.5.4.11 Weather Radar Configuration (GTN 7XX Only)
5.5.4.11.1 GWX 68/70 Configuration
To configure the GWX 68/70, it must first be selected as present and the model of GWX installed must be
specified. To do this, see Section 5.5.1.4. Next, go to the External Systems page and touch the Weather
Radar key.
5.5.4.11.1.1 GWX Configuration Settings
Pitch Trim
This setting specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the pitch axis. Selections: -4.00 to
+4.00 in 0.01 increments.
Roll Trim
This setting specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the roll axis. Selections: -4.00 to
+4.00 in 0.01 increments.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-78 Rev. 4
Return Bins
This setting specifies the number of range bins used to encode the data for one radar spoke. The default
for this value is 600.
5.5.4.11.2 Roll Trim Configuration in Normal Mode

Figure 5-47. Roll Trim Configuration in Normal Mode

Use the following procedure to configure weather radar roll trim while flying (in normal mode).
1. Start the GTN in Normal Mode.
2. Touch Radar on the Weather page to bring up the radar display.
3. Touch the distance labels on the radar display, one at a time in ascending order (see Figure 5-47)
(1-2-3-4), to bring up the roll trim setting.
4. Once the proper roll trim is set, touch the Enter key to save the setting.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-79
5.5.4.11.3 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Configuration

NOTE

If a GWX weather radar is already configured, the key to configure an ARINC

708 weather radar will be disabled because the radar types are mutually
exclusive.

NOTE
The Digital Radar option must be enabled before ARINC 708 weather radar
can be configured, Refer to Section 5.5.2.4.

As part of the wiring installation the GTN 7XX will be connected to the weather radar as display #1 or
#2, and the GTN 7XX must be configured accordingly. Follow the steps below to perform ARINC 708
weather radar configuration.
1. Enter configuration mode on the GTN by applying power to the GTN (closing the circuit breaker)
while holding the HOME key.
2. Go to the ARINC 708 page in the GTN Setup page group.
3. For External Weather Radar choose the appropriate ARINC 708 weather radar type by touching
Off and selecting the correct type from the list.

NOTE

When an ARINC 708 weather radar is configured, the ARINC 429 Out 3
format will automatically be set to Radar Format 1, which is the format used to
control the weather radar.

4. Go to the Weather Radar page in the External Systems group.

5. Choose the appropriate Display number, to match the connections to the weather radar.
6. The ARINC 708 weather radar system may also require additional calibration. Refer to the
following sections.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-80 Rev. 4
5.5.4.11.3.1 Honeywell (Bendix/King) 2XXX Series Radars
This section describes Post-Installation System Configuration and Calibration of the Bendix/King RDR-
2000 and RDR-2100 Radar Systems using the GTN 7XX. The CM 2000 Configuration Module for the
WXR must be configured using the Honeywell (Bendix/King) KPA 900 Configuration Module
Programmer Kit (P/N 050-03311-0000) in conjunction with a personal computer. Refer to the
configuration module programmer operators guide for detailed setup instructions. Follow the instructions
for the programmer, and any required weather radar settings contained in Section C.17.
Weather Radar Calibration Mode
Place the WXR in calibration mode as follows:
1. Go to the Weather Radar page in the External Systems page group.
2. Set the Radar Mode to Test.
3. Touch the Calibration key and wait for the WXR to enter calibration mode all status indicators
will flash briefly to indicate that the radar is in calibration mode.
Antenna Clearance Check
Perform the antenna clearance check as follows:
1. Ensure that the WXR is in calibration mode.
2. Adjust the Gain field to a value of -26.5 to -28.0, and set the Tilt Settings field to 14.75U. This
will initiate the antenna clearance scan. The antenna will move to each of the extreme positions to
determine that there is no interference with antenna movement and all scan motors are working
properly.
Stabilization Calibration
Perform the WXR stabilization calibration as follows:
1. Ensure that the radar is in calibration mode.
2. Note the Roll Trim value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure. Adjust the
Roll Trim field to 0.000.
3. Beginning with the 400 Hz REF GAIN procedure in Section 2.4.4.1, follow the instructions in
Section 2.4.4.1 of the RDR 2000 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00643-0007) or the
RDR 2100 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00648-0002).
4. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator or noted in step 2, set the
Roll Trim field on the GTN 7XX to this value.
5.5.4.11.3.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) RDS 8X Series Radars
This section describes Post-Installation System Configuration and Calibration of the Bendix/King
RDS-81 (RS 811A) and RDS-82 (RS 181A) Systems using the GTN 7XX.
Weather Radar Calibration Mode
Place the WXR in calibration mode as follows:
1. Go to the Weather Radar page in the WXR page group.
2. Set the Radar Mode to Test.
3. Touch the Calibration key and wait for the WXR to enter calibration mode the RX TX box will
turn red when the radar enters calibration mode.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-81
Stabilization Calibration
Perform the WXR stabilization calibration as follows:
1. Ensure that the radar is in calibration mode.
2. Note the Roll Trim value for re-entry following the stabilization calibration procedure. Adjust the
Roll Trim field to 0.000.
3. Beginning with the step C in Section 2.3.6.3 of the RDS 81 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N
006-00954-0001) or the RDS 82 Installation Manual (Honeywell P/N 006-00955-0006), perform
the stabilization alignment in the aircraft.
4. If the roll trim value was recorded from the previous WXR indicator or noted in step 2, set the
Roll Trim field on the GTN 7XX to this value.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-82 Rev. 4
5.6 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
The following checks are done in Configuration Mode. For instructions on entering Configuration Mode,
see Section 5.5.
5.6.1 Main Indicator Check (Analog Only)

NOTE

If the GTN is interfaced to an electronic HSI/EFIS and the main indicator analog output
is not used, this check is not required.

If the GTN is interfaced to an analog indicator on the main CDI/OBS (P1001), perform the following
steps:
1. Go to the GTN Diagnostics page. See Section 5.5.3.
2. Go to the Main Indicator (Analog) page.
3. Verify correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag and TO/FROM flag using the corresponding
selections.
4. Verify correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
5. Verify correct operation of the OBS knob using the OBS Resolver Setting display. At 30
increments around the OBS card, ensure that the indicated value is within 2 of the value set on
the indicator. If the resolver is not within 2, calibrate the resolver as described in Section 5.5.1.5.
5.6.2 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator (GTN 650/750 Only)
If the GTN is interfaced to an analog indicator on the VOR/ILS Indicator output (P1004), perform the
following steps:
1. Go to the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Go to the VOR/ILS Indicator diagnostics page.
3. Verify correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag and TO/FROM flag using the corresponding
selections.
4. Verify correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
5. Verify correct operation of the OBS knob using the Selected Course display. At 30 increments
around the OBS card, ensure that the indicated value is within 2 of the value set on the indicator.
If the resolver is not within 2, calibrate the resolver as described in Section 5.5.1.11.
4.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-83
5.6.3 Discrete Inputs Checkout
If the GTN is connected to any external switches, perform the
following steps:
1. Go to the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Go to the Discrete Inputs page, shown in Figure 5-48..
3. For each external switch that is connected, exercise
the switch source and check the ACTIVE or
INACTIVE indication on the screen correlating to
the appropriate input, and ensure it is displayed
correctly.
4. If the state of the switch/LRU is not displayed
correctly, check the wiring to the discrete input and
ensure it is not shorted to ground. Also ensure the
correct type of switch/discrete is connected to the
GTN.

Figure 5-48. Discrete Inputs Page

5.6.4 Discrete Outputs Checkout
If the GTN is connected to any external annunciators/systems,
perform the following steps:
1. Go to the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Go to the Discrete Outputs page, shown in
Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49. Discrete

Outputs Page
3. For each annunciator output that is connected to an external system or annunciator, toggle the
output ACTIVE (corresponding box is filled green and displays ACTIVE) and INACTIVE
(corresponding box is not filled green and displays INACTIVE) by touching the key
corresponding to the output. Verify that the appropriate external annunciator illuminates when the
output is set to ACTIVE and extinguishes when the output is set to INACTIVE. If the output is
not connected to an annunciator but provides an input to another system, verify that the other
system receives the signal.
4. If the annunciator and/or other system does not receive the signal, verify the wiring and ensure it
is connected properly and not shorted to ground.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-84 Rev. 4
5.6.5 HSDB Wiring Checkout
If HSDB wiring has been installed for other Garmin LRUs
that interface via HSDB, follow the procedure below to ensure
it has been installed and configured correctly.
1. Access the GTN Diagnostics page from the main
Configuration Mode home page.
2. Touch the HSDB (Ethernet) key. The HSDB
Diagnostics page, shown in Figure 5-50., will be
displayed.
3. Ensure any LRUs connected via HSDB are powered
on and properly configured.
4. For each Ethernet port that has HSDB wiring
connected to it, ensure that the port status displays
Connected and Receiving.
5. If the previous step did not perform correctly, check
the electrical connections and configuration setup.

Figure 5-50. HSDB Diagnostics

Page
5.6.6 Crossfill Check (If Dual GTNs Installed)
1. Turn on both GTN units in the aircraft.
2. For each GTN unit, go to the HSDB Ethernet Diagnostics page shown in Figure 5-50.. For the
port connecting the cross-side GTN, check the Ethernet Port Status and ensure that Connected is
displayed under Connection and Receiving is displayed under Data. If the previous steps do
not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration setup. The ports to
which the GTNs are connected must be configured as Connected for each GTN. Also, under the
Interfaced Equipment page, the cross-side navigator must be set to Present.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-85
5.6.7 TAWS Audio Check (For Units with TAWS Only)

NOTE

The audio panel must also be powered on for the TAWS audio check

The TAWS audio volume has an initial default of 80% of the

maximum value. The TAWS volume needs to be set to ensure
that aural alerts are audible under all anticipated noise
environmental conditions.
1. Touch the Audio configuration page from the Main
GTN Setup page.
2. Under Alert Volume, increase or decrease the
volume by touching the + or - keys.
3. Evaluate the TAWS audio messages for acceptable
volume and intelligibility during both low and high
cockpit noise levels (idle descent at low speed and
high power at Vmo). See Section 5.8.6 for the flight
check procedure.
4. Readjust the Volume as needed to ensure the TAWS
audio messages will be heard in all anticipated cockpit
noise conditions.
Figure 5-51. Audio
5.6.8 GAD 42 Interface Check Configuration Page
This check verifies the interface between the GTN and the GAD 42.
1. Go to the GAD 42 Configuration Page from the
External Systems page. Touch External Systems, then
touch GAD 42.
2. Verify that Status is ACTIVE.
3. Change any of the options to a different number.
4. Verify that after changing one of the options the
STATUS field changes to SENDING then changes
back to ACTIVE. If the entry reverts to the previous
number when ACTIVE is displayed, then check the
wiring connections to the GAD 42. Refer to the GAD
42 Installation Manual for details on how to
configure the GAD 42.

Figure 5-52. GAD 42

Configuration Page

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-86 Rev. 4
5.6.9 Lighting Bus Interface Check
The display and key backlighting on the GTN can track an external lighting/dimmer bus input and use it
to vary the display and key backlight levels accordingly. This check verifies that the interface is
connected correctly.

CAUTION

When 14 VDC or 28 VDC lighting buses are connected to the GTN, connection of the
aircraft lighting bus to the incorrect input pins can cause damage to the GTN. Always
start this test with the dimming bus at the lowest setting, and slowly increase the
brightness. If the LIGHTING level displayed on the GTN does not increase as the
lighting is increased in brightness, verify that the wiring is correct before proceeding.

1. Ensure the lighting bus is set to its minimum setting.

2. Go to the Lighting Bus Configuration page.
3. Slowly vary the lighting bus level that is connected to
the GTN. Verify that the Source Input Level value
displayed on the configuration screen tracks the
lighting bus setting. Continue to maximum brightness
and verify proper operation.

Figure 5-53. Lighting Bus

Configuration Page

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-87
5.6.10 Air/Fuel Data Interface Check
The GTN can receive fuel and altitude data from an external source. This check verifies that the GTN is
receiving data from these sources. Ensure that the GTN is powered on and in configuration mode. If the
following steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections (Appendix E) and configuration
setup (Section 5.5.1.2) for the interfaced data source.
1. Go to the GTN Diagnostics page from the
Configuration Mode Home page.
2. Touch the Main Data Inputs key.
3. If there are multiple sources providing data to the
GTN, remove power from all but one source.
4. Verify that the appropriate data is displayed and
agrees with the active source.
NOTE
After applying power to an altitude source it may take
several minutes to warm up. During the warm-up
period the Pressure Altitude display on the GTN will
be dashed out.
5. If there are multiple sources, remove power from the
currently active source and apply power to another
source that has not been checked.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all available sources have
been checked. Figure 5-54. Main Data
Inputs Page
5.6.11 AHRS/IRU Interface Check
The GTN can receive heading data from an external source.
This check verifies that the GTN is receiving data from these
units. Ensure the GTN is powered on and in configuration
mode. If the following steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration
setup for the interfaced AHRS/IRU.
1. Go to the GTN Diagnostics page from the Configuration Mode Home page.
2. Touch the Main Data Inputs key.
3. Scroll to the Heading data display.

NOTE

If a Sandel EHSI or an ARINC 429 EFIS is also installed, ensure that it is

turned off so that it does not supply heading to the GTN. Verify that the HDG
field displays valid heading data.

4. Remove power from the heading source and verify that the magnetic heading field is dashed out.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-88 Rev. 4
5.7 Ground Checks (Normal Mode)
For the following checks, cycle power on the GTN and power it up in normal mode.
5.7.1 Display of Self Test Data
Following normal power-up, the Database pages are displayed, followed by the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page. Touching Continue displays the Instrument Panel Self-Test page. During this time, the
electrical outputs are activated and set to the values listed below. Touch Continue to acknowledge the
Instrument Panel Self-Test page. This is not a required check, although this page can be useful for
troubleshooting installation problems.

Table 5-64. Self Test Values

Parameter Self-Test Value

Course Deviation Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Glideslope/Vert. Deviation Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Annunciators All On
Selected Course (OBS) The GTN displays the OBS value (149.5 if interfaced to an HSI
with driven course pointer).
Desired Track 149.5 (Displayed as 150)

ITEMS BELOW ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SELF-TEST PAGE

Distance to Go 10.0 nautical miles

Time to Go 4 minutes
Bearing to Waypoint (RMI) 135
Active Waypoint GARMN
Groundspeed 150 knots
Present Position N 3904.05, W 9453.86
Waypoint Alert Active
Phase of Flight En Route
Message Alert Active
Leg/OBS Mode Leg Mode
GPS Integrity Invalid
Roll Steering (if applicable) Flight Director commands 0 bank (level flight) for 5 seconds;
commands increasing right bank at 1/second for 5 seconds;
commands 5 right bank for 5 seconds; commands decreasing
right bank at 1/second for 5 seconds, until command is 0 bank
again. This cycle repeats continuously.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-89
5.7.2 Signal Acquisition Check

NOTE

All other avionics should be turned off at the start of this test, with the GTN powered
on.

Ensure the GTN is able to acquire sufficient satellites to compute a GPS position. From the Home page,
touch the System key and then touch the GPS Status key. Under GPS Solution, ensure that a 3D Fix
or 3D Diff Fix is obtained. If the unit is unable to acquire satellites, move the aircraft away from
obstructions which might be shading GPS reception. If the GPS solution does not improve, check the
GPS antenna installation.

NOTE

After installation, the initial acquisition of position can take up to 20 minutes.

Subsequent acquisitions will not take as long.

Once GPS position information is available, perform the following steps:

1. On the GPS Status Page, verify that the LAT/LON agree with a known reference position.
2. While monitoring the GPS Status page, turn on other avionics one at a time and check the GPS
signal reception to make sure it is not affected (no significant signal degradation).
3. Before proceeding with the VHF COM interference check, ensure that any connected equipment
is transmitting and/or receiving data from the GTN and is functioning properly.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-90 Rev. 4
5.7.3 VHF COM Interference Check
NOTE
Interference checks must be completed on all IFR installations.
Certain non-aviation radios, including marine transceivers, can interfere with civil aviation navigation and
surveillance equipment including the Garmin GTN. When installing GTN equipment, it is the
responsibility of the installer to ensure that the GTN modification is compatible with all previous aircraft
modifications. Garmin recommends that whenever a GTN is installed in an aircraft that has been modified
with non-aviation radios, particular care should be exercised to verify that these do not interfere with
proper function of the GTN.
Special care should also be taken to ensure that there is no interference with the GTN if non-aviation
radios are installed in an aircraft after a GTN has been installed. If interference is found, it can be
addressed by relocating antennas, rerouting cables, using filters to attenuate unintentional harmonic
frequency transmissions, or using various other techniques for elimination of the interference. It may be
necessary to remove or replace the interfering radio with a model that does not interfere with the proper
functioning of the GTN.
If you are testing a transmitter from a non-aviation device, each frequency must be verified by
transmitting for at least 30 seconds on each channel.
Once the Signal Acquisition Test has been completed successfully, perform the following steps:
1. View the Satellite Status Page and verify that at least 7 satellites have been acquired by the GTN.
2. Verify that the GPS LOI flag is out of view.
3. Select 121.150 MHz on the COM transceiver to be tested.
4. Transmit for a period of 35 seconds.
5. Verify that the GPS LOI flag does not come into view.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the following frequencies:
a. 25 kHz COM Channel Spacing:
121.15 MHz 131.22 MHz
121.17 MHz 131.25 MHz
121.20 MHz 131.27 MHz
121.22 MHz 131.30 MHz
121.25 MHz 131.32 MHz
131.20 MHz 131.35 MHz
b. For VHF radios with 8.33 kHz channel spacing, include the following frequencies in
addition to those listed above:
121.185 MHz 130.285 MHz
121.190 MHz 131.290 MHz
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for all remaining COM transceivers installed in the aircraft.
8. If the aircraft is TCAS-equipped, turn on the TCAS system and verify that GPS position remains
valid (if position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to ACQUIRING).
9. If aircraft is SATCOM-equipped, use the SATCOM system and verify that GPS position remains
valid (if position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to ACQUIRING).
10. If the GPS LOI flag comes into view, see Section 2.4.4.5 for options to improve performance.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-91
5.7.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 650/750 Only)
Touch the CDI key to select VLOC mode, which is indicated by a green VLOC annunciation on the
bottom center of the display. Check the VOR reception with ground equipment, operating VOT or VOR,
and verify audio and Morse code ID functions (if possible). Tune a Localizer frequency and verify the
CDI needle and NAV flag, and VDI needle and GS flag operation.
5.7.4.1 NAV Audio Check (For non-GMA 35 Installations)
1. Ensure the audio panel is powered on.
2. Plug in a headset at pilot and copilot position.
3. Tune the GTN NAV receiver to a local VOR station.
4. Ensure the Morse code identifier is being received over the crew headsets.
5. If the audio is not heard, verify the wiring connections to the audio panel.
6. Ensure the audio volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each installed GTN NAV receiver.
5.7.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 635/650/750 Only)
5.7.5.1 Antenna Check
If desired, the antenna VSWR can be checked using an inline wattmeter in the antenna coaxial using
frequencies near both ends of the band. The VSWR should be < 2:1. A VSWR of 2:1 will cause a drop in
output power of approximately 12%.
5.7.5.2 Receiver/Transmitter Operation
Tune the unit to a local VHF frequency and verify the receiver output produces a clear and
understandable audio output. Verify the transmitter functions properly by contacting another station and
getting a report of reliable communications.
5.7.6 GMA 35 Audio Panel Checkout (GTN 7XX Only)
5.7.6.1 GMA 35 Interface Check (GTN 7XX Only)
1. With the GTN running and the GMA 35 audio panel powered on, go to the Home page and touch
the Audio Panel key.
2. Ensure that a red X is not displayed over the Audio Panel key.
After configuring the audio panel, an in-aircraft checkout may be performed with a good microphone,
headset, speaker, and avionics receivers. For testing the marker beacon, use a ramp tester that transmits a
75 MHz marker beacon test signal, or perform the flight check outlined in Section 5.8.7.
For instructions on how to operate the GMA 35 in normal mode during the installation checkout
procedures, refer to the GTN 7XX/GMA 35 Pilots Guide, P/N 190-01007-03. Verify that every function
of the GMA 35 operates correctly. Ensure that the GMA 35 circuit breaker is pressed in and is receiving
power.

NOTE
In the following procedural steps outlined below, allow for variation in the
configuration settings for the particular installation under test.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-92 Rev. 4
5.7.6.2 Failsafe Operation Check
1. Power the GMA 35 off by pulling the GMA 35 circuit breaker.
2. Check the failsafe operation by exercising the COM1 microphone, microphone key and audio
over the pilots headphones.

NOTE

Use of a true mono headset is required for this test to ensure proper wiring even if a
stereo jack is provided in the installation. Wiring left channel (tip contact) and right
channel (ring contact) backwards will cause failsafe mode not to function with mono
headsets. Use of a true mono headset is required for this test (not a stereo headset with
a mono/stereo switch because headset manufactures differ on how they accomplish
this switching). This will guarantee the condition of the right channel (ring terminal)
being shorted to the return (sleeve terminal) by the mono headsets plug. During
power-on operation, this short will not damage the audio panel.

3. Verify that COM1 can key and transmit the pilots mic audio by verifying received sidetone or
checking reception of the transmission with another radio tuned to receive this transmission
(verify Pilot PTT and mic operation is delivered to this transceiver).
4. Turn the unit back on to continue testing.

NOTE

If the configuration setting COM 1 is connected as COM 2 is set to True (described

in Section 5.5.4.8.2.1), then the COM 2 microphone should be exercised rather than
COM 1.

5.7.6.3 COM Transceiver Operational Check

1. Connect a headset to the pilots headset output and mic input jack.
2. Verify that each installed transceiver (COM) can be heard when selected.

NOTE

Depending on configuration settings, the mic selected COM may mute audio from
other COMs.

3. Verify that each installed transceiver keys for transmission and transmits clear audio from the
pilots mic when selected for transmission and the Pilot PTT key is pressed. (Because the audio
panel can be configured to simulate received sidetone internally, verifying transmission with a
separate radio not in the system is recommended.)

NOTE

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-93
 Depending on configuration settings, other transceivers may be muted during
transmit. Also, the audio panel may mute the speaker during PTT.

4. Move the headset to the copilots headset jacks and verify that any one of the installed
transceivers (testing each is not necessary) receives and transmits copilot mic properly as above.
5.7.6.4 NAV Audio Check
Ensure the GMA 35 and each installed NAV receiver is powered on.
1. Tune the NAV receiver to a local VOR station.
2. Ensure the Morse code identifier is being received over the crew headsets.
3. If the audio is not heard, verify the wiring to the audio panel.
4. Ensure the audio volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each installed NAV receiver.
5.7.6.5 Alert Audio Check
If there is an alert audio Source connected to the GMA 35, the interface should be verified as described
below.
1. Cause the alert audio source to produce audio. (e.g., if a traffic system is installed, command the
traffic system into self-test mode; if a TAWS system is installed, command the TAWS system
into self-test mode.)
2. Verify that the alert audio source is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets and that the audio
volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions. Adjust the audio volume level as
needed, following the instructions in Section 5.5.4.8.2.2.
3. If the alert audio source is not heard in the crew headsets, check the wiring from the source to the
GMA 35 alert audio inputs.
4. Repeat this procedure for each alert audio source connected to the GMA 35.
5.7.6.6 Receiver Audio Check
If there are receiver audio sources connected to the GMA 35, the interface should be verified as described
below. Ensure the GMA 35 as well as each interfaced receiver (DME, ADF, etc) is powered on.
1. Plug in a headset at pilot and copilot position.
2. Tune the installed receiver to a valid station.
3. Ensure audio is being received over the crew headsets.
4. Ensure the audio volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions. Adjust the
audio output level as needed at the receiver.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each installed receiver.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-94 Rev. 4
5.7.6.7 Intercom System (ICS) Check
NOTE
If a monaural headset is plugged into any stereo phone jack position, no damage will
occur to the GMA 35. In the case of plugging a monaural headset into any passenger
position, any stereo listener will lose one channel when another passenger plugs in a
monaural headset.

1. Place the audio panel into ALL ICS mode (refer to the GTN Pilots guide) so that all ICS
positions hear all others.
2. Deselect or turn off other audio sources (MKR, transceivers, receivers, alerts). Some
configurations may mute passenger intercom audio to crew when aircraft audio is present.
3. From the pilot headset position, verify the pilot, copilot, and all passenger mic inputs can be
heard in the pilots headset when speaking into the mic input under test (adjust pilot ICS volume
if necessary).
4. Speak into the pilots mic and verify that pilot mic audio is heard in the copilot headset (adjust
copilot ICS volume if necessary) and in each passenger headset (adjust passenger ICS volume if
necessary).
5.7.6.8 Aircraft Receivers Check
1. Select the audio source for each avionics unit installed in the aircraft and check for audio over the
headsets.
2. Touch the Cabin Speaker key and verify that any selected audio is heard over the speaker.
5.7.6.9 Music System Check (if installed)
1. Set the intercom to the ALL mode.
2. Connect a stereo audio source to MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2. Verify that stereo audio is heard over
the Pilot headset position.
3. Tune a station on COM 1 and verify that the sound is muted by active COM 1 audio (break
squelch on COM 1 if necessary).
4. Verify that stereo audio is also heard in the passenger headsets.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-95
5.7.7 TAWS System Check (For Units with TAWS Only)
While on the ground, turn on the GTN following normal power-up procedures. Also turn on the audio
panel.

NOTE

A 3D GPS position fix is required to conduct this check.

1. Select the Terrain page from the normal mode Home page.
2. Touch the MENU key.
3. Touch the Test TAWS key.
4. Wait until the TAWS self-test completes (10-15 seconds) to hear the TAWS system status aural
message.
The aural message TAWS System Test OK will be annunciated if the TAWS system is
functioning properly.
The aural message TAWS System Failure will be annunciated if the TAWS system is NOT
functioning properly. Also, TAWS FAIL will appear in amber on the screen.
If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the audio system or associated wiring and the
TAWS capability must be considered non-functional. Verify the TAWS audio wiring to the audio panel.
5.7.8 Interface Checks
5.7.8.1 Weather Radar Interface Check
5.7.8.1.1 GWX 68/70 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section verifies that the heading interface between the GTN 7XX and the GWX 68/70 weather radar
is functional.
1. Start the GTN in normal mode.
2. On the Home page, touch Weather and then Radar.
3. Touch the Mode key and select Standby mode and wait for the Warm-Up to complete.
4. Touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.
5. Verify that the GWX 68 begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
6. If supported by the installation, verify that stabilization is on (STAB On is displayed in the upper
right corner of the radar display).
7. Using the Mode key, set the mode to Off
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for the second GTN 7XX (if installed).

5.7.8.1.2 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check

This section verifies that the interface between the GTN 7XX and ARINC 708 weather radar is
functional.
1. Start the GTN in normal mode. If there are dual GTN 7XXs, start both in normal mode.
2. On each GTN 7XX, go to the Home page, touch Weather and then Radar.
3. On one GTN, touch the Mode key and select Standby mode and wait for the warmup to
complete.
4. Touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-96 Rev. 4
 5. Verify that the radar begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.

WARNING
Aircraft should be outdoors and personnel should not be in front of the weather radar
when it is radiating (i.e., when Weather or Ground mode is selected on the GTN).

6. If stabilization is supplied to the radar, turn the radar to Weather mode and turn stabilization on in
the weather menu. Verify that STAB On is displayed in the upper right corner or the radar
display. If STAB INOP is displayed, verify that stabilization is being supplied to the weather
radar R/T.
7. Using the Mode key, set the mode to Off.

NOTE
If only one GTN 7XX is installed, the following steps do not have to be carried out.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the second GTN 7XX.

9. On each GTN 7XX, touch the Mode key and select Standby and wait for the warm-up to
complete.
10. On each GTN 7XX, touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.
11. On GTN #1, touch the Zoom Out key to increase the range of the radar display. Verify that the
range on GTN #1 changes and the range on GTN #2 does not change.
12. On GTN #2, touch the Zoom Out key to increase the range of the radar display select a
different zoom level than GTN #1. Verify that the range on GTN #2 changes and the range on
GTN #1 does not change.
13. On each GTN 7XX, using the Mode key, set the mode to Off.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-97
5.7.8.2 GSR 56 Iridium Check

NOTE
When testing the GSR 56, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed
view of the sky.

NOTE
For additional information on using the GSR 56 features refer to the GTN 725/750 Pilots
Guide, P/N 190-01007-03, or the GTN 625/635/650 Pilots Guide, P/N 190-01004-03.

NOTE
To use the position reporting feature of the GSR 56, a short burst data (SBD) Iridium
account is required. To use the phone feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium voice account is
required. To use the SMS feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium SMS account is required. To
use the weather feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium RUDICS account is required. For more
information on how to subscribe to the services offered by the GSR 56, refer to the GSR
56 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00836-00.

If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GTN, check the operation as follows:
1. Ensure that the GTN is in normal mode.
2. If position reporting is enabled, go to the Iridium page in the Utilities page group and touch
Position Reporting. Verify that the Reporting Status is not Unavailable.
3. If the Iridium phone is enabled, go to the Iridium Phone page in the Iridium page group. Verify
that the Phone Status is not Unavailable.
4. Verify that a phone call can be placed.

NOTE
The following steps should only be completed if CONNEXT Weather is enabled. In
order to receive weather updates, the GSR 56 being tested must be registered and the
registration access code must be entered into the GSR 56 using the GTN.

5. Go to the Connext page in the Weather page group.

6. Verify that the Connext settings can be found by touching Menu.
7. If the GSR 56 is registered, touch the Menu key and select the CONNEXT Data Request option
under CONNEXT Settings. Verify that weather is displayed on the map. Refer to the
GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide, P/N 190-01007-03, or the GTN 625/635/650 Pilots Guide,
P/N 190-01004-03, for information on requesting CONNEXT data.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-98 Rev. 4
5.7.8.3 Honeywell (Bendix/King) EFS 40/50 Interface Check
If a Honeywell EFS40/50 has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as described in
this section.
1. Cycle power to the first GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel
Self-Test page (see Section 5.7.1)
2. Ensure that GPS1 data is displayed by pressing the 1-2 key on the EFS40/50 control panel.
3. While the GTN is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify that the EFS40/50 is
displaying data from the GPS source. Refer to Section 5.5.1.1 for configuration information.
Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Active Waypoint: GARMN
Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation (only if installation is setup to display
GPS vertical deviation)
4. On the GTN verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
5. Using a VOR test set verify that the CDI deviation on the EFS40/50 is displayed correctly.
6. Cycle power to the second GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument
Panel Self-Test page.
7. Switch to GPS2 data by pressing the 1-2 key on the EFS40/50 control panel and repeat steps 3
through 5 with the second GTN.
5.7.8.4 Sandel SN 3308 Interface Check
If a Sandel EHSI has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as described in one of
the following sections, as appropriate for the installation.
5.7.8.4.1 One GTN/One SN 3308
1. Cycle power to the GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page (see Section 5.7.1).
2. Ensure that the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.

NOTE
The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the SN3308 is receiving
valid heading.
3. While the GTN is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify that the SN3308 is
displaying the following data from the GPS source.
Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Active Waypoint: GARMN
4. On the GTN verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
5. Acknowledge the self-test on the GTN by touching the Continue key.
6. Select VLOC on the GTN and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or NAV 2 (depending on
the GTN navigation source configuration).
7. Using a VOR test set verify that the CDI deviation on the SN3308 is displayed correctly.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-99
5.7.8.4.2 Two GTNs/One SN3308
1. Remove power from GTN #2.
2. Cycle power to GTN #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page (see Section 5.7.1).
3. Select GPS1 as the navigation source by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308. Verify that GPS1
is displayed on the SN3308.
4. Ensure that the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.

NOTE

The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the SN3308 is receiving
valid heading.

5. While GTN #1 is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify that the SN3308 is
displaying the following data from GPS1.
Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Active Waypoint: GARMN
6. On GTN #1 verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
7. Acknowledge the self test on GTN #1 by touching the Continue key.
8. Select VLOC on GTN #1 and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or NAV 2 (depending on
which navigation source the GTN is).
9. Using a VOR test set verify that the CDI deviation on the SN3308 is displayed correctly.
10. Remove power from GTN #1 and apply power to GTN #2. Acknowledge the prompts until the
Instrument Panel Self-Test page is displayed. See Section 5.7.1. Select GPS2 by pressing the
NAV key on the SN3308.
11. Repeat steps 4-9 with the second GTN.
5.7.8.4.3 Two GTNs/Two SN3308s
1. Remove power from GTN #2.
2. Cycle power to GTN #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page (see Section 5.7.1). Select GPS1 as the navigation source by pressing the NAV key on
the SN3308. Verify that GPS1 is displayed on the SN3308.
3. Ensure that the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.

NOTE

The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the SN3308 is
receiving valid heading.

4. While GTN #1 is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify that the SN3308 is
displaying the following data from GPS1.
Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-100 Rev. 4
 Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Active Waypoint: GARMN
5. On GTN #1 verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
6. Acknowledge the self test on GTN #1 by touching the Continue key.
7. Select VLOC on GTN #1 and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or NAV 2 (depending on
which navigation source the GTN is).
8. Using a VOR test set verify that the CDI deviation on the SN3308 is displayed correctly.
9. Remove power from GTN #1 and apply power to GTN #2. Acknowledge the prompts until the
Instrument Panel Self-Test page is displayed (see Section 5.7.1).
10. Select GPS2 by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308.
11. Repeat steps 4-9 with the second GTN.
12. Perform the same procedure for the second SN3308. Ensure that SN3308 #2 is receiving valid
heading by ensuring the vertical deviation indication is being displayed.
13. Repeat steps 5-12 for SN3308 #2.
5.7.8.5 Sandel SN3500/4500 Interface Check
If a Sandel SN3500/4500 EHSI has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Cycle power to the GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page (see Section 5.7.1).
2. Ensure that the SN3500/4500 is receiving valid heading.

NOTE
The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the
SN 3500/4500 is receiving valid heading.

3. While the GTN is displaying the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, verify that the SN3500/4500 is
displaying data from the GPS source.
Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Active Waypoint: GARMN
4. On the GTN verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
5. Acknowledge the self test on the GTN by touching the Continue key.
6. Select VLOC on the GTN and verify that the SN3500/4500 displays NAV 1 or
NAV 2 (depending on what navigation source the GTN is).
7. Ensure that the NAV1 (or NAV2) indication does not have a red line through it.
8. Repeat steps 3-7 for the second GTN, if installed.
5.7.8.6 Ryan TCAD Traffic System Interface Check
If a Ryan TCAD has been connected to the GTN 6XX/7XX unit, the traffic interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Go the Traffic page on the GTN (on the HOME page group).
2. Verify that NO DATA is not displayed in yellow on the center of the traffic page.
3. Using the SHIELD SETUP under the Traffic Menu, verify that the shield mode can be changed.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-101
5.7.8.7 EHSI Deviation Scaling for HSI/CDI Driven by GTN via ARINC 429 Data
If the GTN has a serial connection to an EFIS display, proper scaling of the EFIS CDI and VDI must be
verified.
1. Cycle power to the GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page (see Section 5.7.1).
2. With the Instrument Panel Self-Test page displayed on the GTN, look on the EHSI/EFIS and
verify that the lateral deviation is half-scale left and not flagged.
3. With the Instrument Panel Self-Test page displayed on the GTN, look on the EHSI/EFIS and
verify that the vertical deviation is half-scale up and not flagged.

NOTE
If the deviations are not as described, the EHSI/EFIS does not scale the GTN deviations
properly and this installation cannot be certified for GPS-based guidance. Contact
Garmin for further assistance

5.7.8.8 ARINC 429 Traffic System Interface Check

If a Garmin GTS 8XX Traffic system, L-3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 Skywatch sensor or a
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810 TAS/KMH 820 IHAS has been connected to the GTN via ARINC
429, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Go to the Traffic page on the GTN from the home page.
2. Verify that NO DATA is not displayed in yellow on the center of the traffic page.
3. If the GTN is configured to control the traffic system (Section 5.5.1.8), verify that the traffic
system mode can be changed from STBY to OPER.
4. Switch the traffic system mode to STBY, and then run the traffic self test from the Menu.
5. Verify that the traffic system executes a self test and that a self-test pattern is displayed on the
GTN traffic display.
6. Restart the GTN in Configuration Mode.
7. On the Traffic page in the External Systems page group, verify that there is data displayed in the
Altitude field.
5.7.8.9 Stormscope Interface Check
If an L-3 Communications WX-500 Stormscope has been connected to the GTN, the Stormscope
interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Go to the Lightning page on the GTN.
2. Verify that STORMSCOPE FAILED is not displayed in yellow on the center of the Lightning
page.
3. Verify that the Stormscope mode can be changed from Strike to Cell, and vice versa.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-102 Rev. 4
5.7.8.10 GMX 200/MX20 Interface Check
If a Garmin GMX 200 or MX20 has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Ensure that the GTN has a 3-D position fix.
2. Create and activate a flight plan on the GTN by touching the Direct-To key and entering a
waypoint.
3. Verify that the RTE and POS data flags are not displayed on the GMX 200/MX20.
4. Verify that the flight plan is displayed on the GMX 200/MX20 using the flight plan (FPL)
function.
5.7.8.11 GDL 69/69A Interface Check
If a Garmin GDL 69 has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as described in
Section 5.7.8.11.1. If a Garmin GDL 69A has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified
as described Sections 5.7.8.11.1 and 5.7.8.11.2. Each of these procedures involves verifying that the
satellite signal is acquired and tracked. Locate the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern
or southwestern sky. XM Satellite Radio satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and
western coasts of the continental United States.

NOTE
The following sections only verify the correct interface of GDL 69/69A to the GTN. It
does not activate the GDL 69 Sirius XM data link radio. Complete instructions for
activating the Sirius XM data link radio can be found in the GDL 69/69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions, P/N 190-00355-04.

5.7.8.11.1 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Weather Checkout Procedure

1. With the GTN running in the normal mode, go to the External LRUs page (in the System page
group) then touch the More Info key next to GDL69.
2. Verify that the Data Radio ID field has a valid ID. For a GDL 69A, the Audio Radio ID field
should also display a valid ID.
3. Verify that at least one subscribed weather product turns green on the GDL 69 status page. This
may take several minutes. This will indicate that the weather products are being received.
4. During SiriusXM activation, Detecting Activation will be displayed in the Subscription Level
field on the SiriusXM Information page, and Aviator or Aviator Pro will be displayed once the
SiriusXM signal is detected.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-103
5.7.8.11.2 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Audio Checkout Procedure
The following steps only need to be completed for GDL 69A installations.
1. Go to the Music page from the Home page.

NOTE

If the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is
available only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should
be available on multiple channels.

2. Ensure the GDL 69A audio is not muted.

3. Verify that audio can be heard over the headsets. Adjust the volume to verify that the data path is
working correctly and to ensure the volume is at an appropriate level.
5.7.8.12 External RMI/OBI Interface Check (GTN 650/750 Only)
The GTN VOR RMI/OBI output can be used to drive an RMI (or OBI) navigation indicator. This check
verifies that the RMI/OBI is receiving data from the GTN. If the following steps do not perform correctly,
check the electrical connections and configuration setup.

NOTE

The aircraft heading system must be operating properly in order for the RMI needle to
point correctly.

5.7.8.12.1 VOR OBI Output

If the VOR OBI output from the GTN 650/750 is connected to an RMI navigation indicator verify the
interface as described in this section.
1. Apply power to the equipment.
2. If installed, set the RMI select switch to the VLOC position.
3. Tune a local VOR station, or use a simulated signal from an approved VOR Test System.
4. Verify that the RMI needle swings and points toward the VOR station.
5.7.8.13 DME Tuning Check (GTN 650/750 Only)
If the GTN is set up to remotely channel a DME, verify the interface as described in this section.
1. Select a VOR/ILS channel that corresponds to (1) a DME station within a 40 nautical mile range,
or (2) the frequency of a DME ground tester.
2. Verify that the DME locks on to the signal and a valid distance is displayed.
3. Tune an invalid VOR station. Verify that the DME data is flagged.
4. If two GTNs are set up to remotely channel a DME, repeat steps 1-3 using the other GTN.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-104 Rev. 4
5.7.8.14 TIS (Garmin GTX 33/330) Interface Test
If a Garmin GTX 33/330 sensor has been connected to the GTN, the traffic interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map on the GTN.
2. Verify that TIS FAIL is not displayed in the upper left corner under Traffic Status, and that NO
DATA (yellow) is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
3. On the upper left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify that the status of the traffic system is
either TIS Standby or TIS Operating/Unavailable (i.e. TAS should not be displayed).
The following additional steps should only be completed if the GTN is controlling the traffic system.
4. Pull the transponder circuit breaker and verify the air data fields are red Xd.
5. If a squat switch (or airspeed switch) is connected to the GTX 33/330, ensure that it is in AIR
mode.
6. Alternately touch the STANDBY key and OPERATE key to change the mode of the traffic
system. It may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes.
7. Verify that the mode of the traffic system can be changed.
5.7.8.15 Transponder Interface Check
If the GTN is interfaced to a GTX 32/33 remote transponder or a GTX 327/328/330 configured as a
remote transponder, the following checks must be completed.
1. With the GTN unit running in normal mode and the transponder powered on, go to the Home
page and ensure there is no red X over the transponder data field on the top right of the screen.
2. Ensure that a code can be entered into the code field. Enter a code using the keypad and then
touch Enter. Ensure the code that was entered is displayed in the transponder data field.
3. If dual transponders are installed, select transponder 2 and perform steps 1 and 2 for the second
transponder as well. Also pull the transponder 1 circuit breaker and ensure the transponder 1 data
field is red Xd rather than the transponder 2 data field to verify that the wiring is not crossed.
(i.e. transponder 1 is incorrectly connected to transponder 2 circuit breaker.)
4. Repeat the preceding steps for the second GTN.
5.7.8.16 Fan Interface Check
The fan that is mounted to the GTN backplate must be checked. With the GTN unit running in normal
mode and the fan powered on and running, go to the Home page and touch the Message Queue key.
Ensure that the COOLING FAN- the cooling fan has failed. message is not displayed. Note that the fan
may take a few minutes to power on if the unit is below normal operating temperature.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-105
5.7.9 GDL 88 Interface Check
When testing the GDL 88, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed view of the sky.
If the GDL 88 is installed and connected to the GTN, check the operation as follows:
1. Start all GTNs in Configuration Mode. See Section 5.5.
2. Go to the GDL 88 page in the External Systems page group.
3. Touch Diagnostics and then GPS/SBAS Data.
4. Verify that the GDL 88 is receiving valid position source data.
5. Verify that the status of the External PPS connection(s) is valid.
If a TAWS system is installed in addition to the GDL 88, check the operation as follows:
6. Go to the GDL 88 Discrete Input page under GDL 88 Diagnostics.
7. Verify the Audio Inhibit #1* discrete input indicates Active when the TAWS system is playing
audio, and Inactive otherwise. See Section 5.6.7.
5.7.10 Magnetic Compass Check
A compass swing should be carried out at completion of installation in accordance with AC 43.13-1B,
Chapter 12, Section 3, paragraph 12-37.
5.7.11 EMI/RFI Check
After installing the GTN and verifying that all interfaces to external equipment are working correctly, a
brief EMI/RFI check must be conducted. This check will verify that the GTN does not produce
unacceptable interference in other avionics systems, and other avionics systems do not produce
unacceptable interference in the GTN.
1. Start the aircraft engines and switch to aircraft power.
2. Turn on all avionics except the GTN.
3. With the GTN switched off, verify that all existing avionics systems are functioning properly.
4. Turn the GTN on and verify that all existing avionics systems continue to function properly.
5. Keep the GTN switched on and remove power from all other avionics systems.

NOTE
Removing power from systems interfaced to the GTN will cause the associated system
flags on the GTN to be displayed. This is normal behavior and does not constitute a test
failure.

6. Turn the display brightness level up to 100%.

7. Apply power to the other avionics systems one at a time and verify that the system functions
properly without any unacceptable interference caused by the GTN.
8. Wait for the system to begin functioning normally before applying power to the next system.
9. Once all of the systems are powered up, transmit on the COM over several different frequencies.
10. While transmitting, verify that the other aircraft systems function normally. If there is
interference, see Section 2.4.4.5 for ways to improve the situation.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-106 Rev. 4
5.8 Flight Checks
All GTN functions that cannot be adequately tested on the ground will require a flight check. Even if all
functions can be verified on the ground, a flight check is required as final installation verification. Verify
system operation as described in the following sections.
The analog deviation (LEFT/RIGHT and UP/DOWN), TO/FROM, and FLAG (lateral and vertical)
outputs to a CDI or HSI should be verified in flight with potential sources of electrical noise such as
autopilot, flaps, gear, heater blowers, etc. operating. Lateral deviation and flags may be checked with
either GPS or VOR/ILS, and vertical deviation and flags must be checked with glideslope. Verify that the
flags are hidden at the correct times, and that the flag is in view at the correct times. Also verify during
flight that any placards and labels added as part of the GTN installation are readable in all anticipated
cockpit lighting conditions.
5.8.1 GPS Flight Check
1. Verify that GPS position is not lost during normal aircraft maneuvering (e.g. bank angles up to 30
degrees and pitch angles associated with take-off, departures, approaches, landings, and missed
approaches as applicable). If GPS position is lost, a Loss of GPS Navigation message will be
displayed.
2. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN by touching the Direct-To key and entering a
waypoint. Fly the flight plan and verify that the display of flight plan data is consistent with the
CDI indication (deviation, TO/FROM) in the pilots primary field of view.
5.8.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 635/650/750)
After the installation is complete, a flight check is required to ensure satisfactory performance. To check
the communications transceiver, maintain an appropriate altitude and contact a ground station facility at a
range of at least 50 nautical miles. Contact a ground station in close proximity. Press the COM volume
knob to select manual squelch and listen for any unusual electrical noise, which would increase the
squelch threshold. If possible, verify the communications capability on both the high, low, and mid bands
of the VHF COM band. It may be required by the governing regulatory agency to verify operation of the
COM transmitter and receiver at the extents of a ground facilitys service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8A).
5.8.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 650/750)
1. Tune a local VOR station within 50 miles.
2. Verify the audio IDENT and voice quality and verify that no objectionable electrical interference
such as magneto noise is present.
3. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
4. Fly to and from the station.
5. Verify NAV flag, TO/FROM flag, and CDI are operational.
It may be required by the governing regulatory agency to verify operation of the VOR receiver at the
extents of a ground facilitys service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8A).
5.8.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 650/750)
1. Tune an ILS at a local airport.
2. Verify the audio IDENT and audio quality and verify that no objectionable electrical interference
such as magneto noise is present.
3. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
4. Fly the approach.
5. Verify NAV flag, GS flag, and CDI and VDI are operational.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-107
5.8.5 Autopilot Flight Check
1. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN. For the GTN 650/750, ensure that GPS is selected on
the CDI. Engage the autopilot in the GPSS mode, if available. Verify that the autopilot flies the
course.
2. Disengage the autopilot and fly off course. Re-engage the autopilot (in GPSS mode) and verify
that it correctly intercepts the course and continues to fly it.
3. Turn off the autopilot GPSS but leave the autopilot engaged in NAV mode. Verify that it
maintains the current course.
4. (GTN 650/750 Only): Reselect the GPSS mode on the autopilot. Touch the CDI key to select
VLOC on the GTN 650/750. Verify that the GPSS mode disengages.
5. For autopilots that provide vertical guidance, fly a vertically coupled LPV approach. Ensure the
autopilot correctly flies the approach.
6. Deviate from the glideslope by using control wheel steering, or by disengaging the autopilot.
Ensure the autopilot correctly follows the approach guidance once re-engaged.
5.8.6 TAWS Audio Flight Check (TAWS-equipped Units Only)

NOTE

The TAWS volume should be loud enough to ensure that aural alerts are audible
under all anticipated noise environmental conditions. This check verifies that TAWS
aurals can be heard during flight.

1. Take-off and ascend to altitude. During the ascent, in a high ambient noise condition with full
power, eject the SD card from the slot. A TAWS fail audio message should be generated.
2. Evaluate the volume of the audio message. Ensure the TAWS audio can be heard clearly and
intelligibly during high power, high noise flight. If the volume is too low, adjust as described in
Section 5.6.7.
3. After re-inserting the SD card into the slot, reboot the GTN by pulling the GTN circuit breaker
and pushing it back in.
4. After this test, during the approach, at approximately 500 ft AGL, the Five Hundred callout will
occur. Verify that Five Hundred can be easily heard and understood.
5.8.7 Marker Beacon Receiver Flight Check (GMA 35)
1. Set up for an approach to the airport, with the marker beacon set to low sensitivity.
2. During the approach, verify that the marker beacon annunciator light is illuminated for a ground
distance of 2000 to 3000 feet when flying at an altitude of 1000 ft AGL on the localizer centerline
in all flap and gear configurations.
An acceptable means to determine ground distances of 2000 to 3000 feet is to fly at a specified
groundspeed and time the duration that the marker beacon light is illuminated. The values listed in
Table 5-65 can be used.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-108 Rev. 4
 Table 5-65. Marker Beacon Annunciator Light Duration

Light Time (seconds)

Groundspeed (Knots)
2000 ft 3000 ft
90 13 20
110 11 16
130 9 14
150 8 12

If the marker beacon annunciator lights do not remain illuminated for the required time, adjust the marker
beacon low sensitivity threshold as described in Section 5.5.4.8.2.5, and then repeat steps 1 and 2.
5.9 Database Check
Check the navigation database to ensure it is current. The database information is displayed during the
unit display start-up sequence. To check the database:
1. Cycle power on the GTN. The GTN will go through its normal start-up sequence.
2. Wait for the Database Verification page to be displayed.
3. Verify that the expiration dates displayed have not passed for each database.
4. The database expiration date can also be viewed in the System Status page which is accessed
from the System page in normal mode. If the database has expired, then remove and replace the
navigation database card and see Section 1.8.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-109
5.10 Documentation Checks
5.10.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Ensure that the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) is completed and inserted in the Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) or Pilots Operating Handbook (POH). See Section 3.8 for information about
completing the AFMS.
1. Fill in the required airplane information in the AFMS.
2. Fill in the appropriate checkbox in the Limitations Section of the AFMS corresponding to the
autopilot coupling limitations.

NOTE

The GPS SELECT setting will determine if the transition into approach mode is
automatic or requires pilot acknowledgement of a message prompt. See
Section 5.5.1.9 for more information about this configuration setting.

3. Fill in the appropriate checkbox in the Normal Procedures Section of the AFMS corresponding to
the autopilot mode transitions.
4. Fill in the appropriate checkboxes in the System Descriptions Section of the AFMS
corresponding to leg sequencing and Terrain Proximity/TAWS.
5. Fill in the appropriate checkboxes in the System Capability Section of the AFMS corresponding
to the capabilities of the installed GTN system.
6. Insert the completed AFMS into the AFM or POH.
5.10.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA)
1. Ensure that the appropriate aircraft information is filled in on the Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness (ICA) in the System Maintenance Manual, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC
(P/N 190-01007-A1) and ensure it is completed and inserted in the aircraft permanent records.
2. Fill in the aircraft make, model, registration number, and serial number information on the cover
of the System Maintenance Manual, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC.
3. Fill in the appropriate wire routing and installed unit information in Appendix A of the GTN
6XX/7XX System Maintenance Manual.
4. Insert the completed System Maintenance Manual, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC and ICA
in the aircraft permanent records.
5.10.3 Checkout Log
The following completed checkout log sheet should be maintained with the aircraft permanent records.

NOTE

If a dual GTN installation is being performed, a checkout log for each unit must be
completed.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-110 Rev. 4
 Table 5-66. GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log
Sheet 1 of 4

GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log

Date: ____ /____ /____
By: ________________
Aircraft Model: Aircraft Serial #:
INSTALLATION
Unit P/N: Mod Level:
INFORMATION:
Unit Model: Serial #:
GPS Antenna P/N: GPS Ant Model:

CONNECTOR ENGAGEMENT (See Section 5.3)

CONNECTOR ENGAGEMENT CHECK
Connector engagement checked

EXTERNAL BONDING REQUIREMENT (See Section 2.4.5)

Metal/Tube and Fabric: Resistance less than or equal to 2.5 milliohms.
Composite: Resistance less than or equal to 5.0 milliohms.

NOTES/COMMENTS:

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-111
 Table 5-66. GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log
Sheet 2 of 4
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
DISCRETE OUTPUTS DISCRETE INPUTS
[ N/A] OBS Annunciate [ N/A] OBS Mode Select
[ N/A] GPS Annunciate [ N/A] TAWS Audio Inhibit
[ N/A] Waypoint Annunciate [ N/A] TAWS Inhibit
[ N/A] Terminal Annunciate [ N/A] Air/Ground
[ N/A] TAWS Audio Active Annunciate [ N/A] CDI Source Select
[ N/A] VLOC Annunciate [ N/A] System ID Program
[ N/A] LOI Annunciate [ N/A] MIC1 Transmit
[ N/A] Message Annunciate [ N/A] COM Remote Transfer
[ N/A] Approach Annunciate [ N/A] COM Remote Tune Up
[ N/A] ILS/GPS Approach Annunciate [ N/A] COM Remote Tune Down
[ N/A] TAWS/Terrain Inhibit Annunciate [ N/A] NAV Remote Transfer
[ N/A] TAWS Warning Annunciate [ N/A] Synchro Valid-High (GTN 7XX)
[ N/A] Terrain Not Available Annunciate [ N/A] Synchro Valid-Low (GTN 7XX)
[ N/A] TAWS Caution Annunciate [ N/A] GSR Status
[ N/A] GPS Select Annunciate
[ N/A] Traffic Test Annunciate VOR/ILS INDICATOR: [ N/A]
[ N/A] Traffic Standby/Operate Annunciate CDI (left, centered, right)
[ N/A] Suspend Annunciate VDI (down, centered, up)
[ N/A] GSR Remote Power TO/FROM flag (OFF, TO, FROM)
[ N/A] Radar On Valid flags
[ N/A] NAV ILS Energize
AHRS/IRU/ADC:
MAIN ANALOG INDICATOR: [ N/A] [ N/A] Air Data Computer
CDI (left, centered, right) [ N/A] AHRS/IRU
VDI (down, centered, up)
TO/FROM flag (OFF, TO, FROM) TAWS AUDIO: [ N/A]
Valid flags Audio checked
OBS (Selected Course) Audio level adjusted

LIGHTING BUS: GAD 42:

[ N/A] Aircraft Lighting Bus [ N/A] GAD 42 Interface Adapter

HSDB WIRING: [ N/A] ADC / ENCODER / FUEL / F/ADC:

HSDB checked in accordance with Section 5.6.5 [ N/A] Air Data Computer
[ N/A] Altitude Encoder (serial)
GTN CROSSFILL: [ N/A] [ N/A] Fuel Sensor
Crossfill checked in accordance with Section 5.6.6 [ N/A] Fuel / Air Data Computer

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-112 Rev. 4
 Table 5-66. GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log
Sheet 3 of 4

SYSTEM CHECKOUT (Continued)

GROUND CHECKS (NORMAL MODE)
SIGNAL ACQUISITION CHECK: ICA CHECKS
Position checked Aircraft Make, Model, Reg # & Serial # filled in
Signal reception checked Completed ICA in aircraft permanent records
Interference from other avionics checked Wire routing information filled in

VHF COM INTERFERENCE [ N/A] INTERFACE CHECKS

VHF COM interference checked [ N/A] Honeywell EFS 40/50
[ N/A] Sandel SN3308
VHF NAV CHECKOUT (GTN 650/750) [ N/A] [ N/A] Sandel SN3500/4500
VOR reception checked [ N/A] Ryan TCAD
Localizer reception checked [ N/A] EHSI Deviation Scaling
Deviation needle and flag checked [ N/A] ARINC 429 Traffic System
[ N/A] L-3 Communications Stormscope
GMA 35 CHECKOUT (GTN 7XX ONLY) [ N/A] [ N/A] Garmin GMX 200 / MX20
COM Transceiver check [ N/A] Garmin GDL 69/69A
Alert audio check [ N/A] External RMI/OBI
Intercom system check [ N/A] DME Tuning
Music system check [ N/A] TIS (GTX 33/330)
Failsafe operation check [ N/A] Transponder
NAV audio check [ N/A] Fan wiring
Receiver audio check [ N/A] Weather Radar
Aircraft receivers check [ N/A] Garmin GSR 56
[ N/A] Garmin GDL 88

TVS ASSEMBLY CHECKS [ N/A] VHF COM CHECKOUT (GTN 635/650/750) [ N/A]
TVSs checked in accordance with Section 3.6.5. Receiver / Transmitter operation checked
Antenna checked VSWR __________
DATABASE CHECKS
Databases checked MAGNETIC COMPASS CHECK
Compass swing performed
AFMS CHECKS
[ N/A] Autopilot Mode transitions checked TAWS SYSTEM: [ N/A]
Completed AFMS inserted in AFM/POH TAWS System Test OK
[ N/A] Autopilot coupling limitations checked
Leg Sequencing checked SOFTWARE CHECKS
Terrain Proximity/TAWS checked
Software versions verified to match GTN STC
Equipment List, 005-00533-C1
FLIGHT CHECKS
GPS checked [ N/A] Autopilot checked
[ N/A] COM checked (GTN 635/650/750 Only) [ N/A] TAWS audio level checked
[ N/A] VOR checked (GTN 650/750 Only) [ N/A] Marker beacon receiver checked
[ N/A] ILS checked (GTN 650/750 Only)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 5-113
 Table 5-66. GTN Post-Installation Checkout Log
Sheet 4 of 4

COMMENTS:

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 5-114 Rev. 4
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to System Maintenance Manual, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC, P/N 190-01007-A1, for
troubleshooting information.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 6-1
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 6-2 Rev. 4
7 LIMITATIONS
Limitations for specific aircraft models can be found in Appendix H.
7.1 Operational Limitations
7.1.1 Operations
There are no Part 23 aircraft type limitations. All functions of the GTN unit meet the appropriate primary
or secondary design assurance qualifications for airplane Class I, Class II, Class III, and Class IV in
accordance with AC 23.1309-1E Figure 2. The TSO authorizations with the RTCA/DO-178B software
levels by function are listed in GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual, P/N 190-01007-02, and
GTN 625/635/650 TSO Installation Manual, P/N 190-01004-02, as well as the GMA 35 Installation
Manual, P/N 190-00858-11.
Data for some aircraft models listed on the AML is currently insufficient to substantiate IFR operations
with the GTN. Consequently, these aircraft models are limited to VFR operation only and must be
placarded in accordance with Section 2.4.1.1. Refer to Table G-1 in Appendix G to determine if a
particular aircraft model is limited to VFR when modified with the installation of the GTN.
7.1.2 Previous Operational Approvals
The installation of a GTN unit or GMA 35 Audio Panel into an aircraft does not alter the operational
approvals previously granted to that aircraft. Additional operational approvals may require FAA
evaluation of all the systems installed in a particular aircraft and is outside the scope of the
GTN AML STC.
7.2 Installation Limitations
7.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTN/GMA 35 Unit
GTN 6XX/7XX or GMA 35 interfaces to aircraft systems other than those identified in this installation
manual are outside the scope of this manual and may require further evaluation for certification and/or
other FAA airworthiness approval.
7.2.2 Preservation of Previous Systems
It is the installers responsibility using data provided in this manual and data identified in the GTN AML
STC to preserve the essential characteristics of the aircraft in accordance with the aircraft manufacturers
original design and the requirements of 14 CFR part 23. This includes the preservation of multiple power
buses, which reduce the probability of interrupting power to essential instruments and avionics. For
aircraft certified under 14 CFR part 23, post amendment 41, use of the GTN unit for IFR operations
requires a functional redundant electrical power system for the primary navigation unit.
7.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the GTN
The GTN is certified to interface to no more than one traffic sensor in an aircraft. The unit supports
multiple types (GDL 88, TCAD, TAS, TCAS I, TIS) of traffic systems, but only one system may be
configured for use. Use of the GDL 88 to correlate traffic from another traffic sensor is acceptable and
does not violate this limitation. For installations with dual GTNs installed, this STC does not approve
interfacing a different traffic sensor to each GTN.
7.2.4 Major Alterations
The installation of the GTN and GMA 35 is a major alteration to the aircraft type design. Following a
major alteration, the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the cognizant aviation
authority. An example would be an FAA Form 337 "Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant,
Propeller, or Appliance" properly executed to describe the major alteration including the equipment and
systems to which the GTN and GMA 35 is interfaced, and submitted to the appropriate FAA office.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 7-1
7.2.5 Rotorcraft Installation
The installation and operational approval for use of a GTN and GMA 35 in rotorcraft is not authorized by
the GTN AML STC SA02019SE-D; however, instructions and data provided in this manual may be
applicable to the alteration. Installation of GTN and GMA 35 equipment in rotorcraft requires separate
approval from the cognizant aviation authority.
The GTN unit TAWS functionality is not approved for use in rotorcraft.
7.2.6 Aircraft Radio Station License
An aircraft radio station license is not required when operating the GTN in U.S. airspace, but may be
required when operating internationally.
7.2.7 GPS/WAAS Antenna Limitations
The GTN GPS/SBAS receivers are limited to using one of the GPS/WAAS antennas listed in Table 1-10.
For multiple GPS installations in non-metallic aircraft, the GPS antennas must not be mounted in a
straight line from the front to the rear of the fuselage, to prevent a single lightning strike causing damage
to all GPS systems.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 7-2 Rev. 4
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
For periodic maintenance refer to the GTN STC Maintenance Manual, P/N 190-01007-A1.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page 8-1
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page 8-2 Rev. 4
Appendix A Outline and Installation Drawings
Figure A-1. GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure A-2. GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly Overview
Figure A-3. GTN 6XX Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure A-4. GTN 650 Mounting Rack Assembly
Figure A-5. GTN 7XX Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure A-6. GTN 750 Mounting Rack Assembly
Figure A-7. GTN 750 with GMA 35 Installation Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure A-8. GTN 750 with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly
Figure A-9. Panel Cutout Detail
Figure A-10. GTN 6XX/7XX Mounting Rack Tab Alignment Detail
Figure A-11. GMA 35 Connector Layout Detail
Figure A-12. GTN 6XX Connector Layout DetailRear View
Figure A-13. GTN 7XX Connector Layout DetailRear View

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-1 Rev. 4
 7.732
6.247
5.997
3.630

1.516
1.475
1.162
.880

1.012
.200
2 X 4.500

2 X 2.250
2 X .800

3 X 5.360
6.290

3.120

NOTES:

1. CG MEASURED WITH UNIT, RACK, BACKPLATE, AND CONNECTORS

WEIGHT

UNIT, RACK, BACKPLATE &

MODEL UNIT
CONNECTOR KIT

GMA 35 1.4 lb [ .64 kg] 2.2 lb [1.00 kg]

Figure A-1. GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-2 Rev. 4
 211-60234-08
1 5
SCREW, 4-40 X .250

115-01464-00
GMA 35 MOUNTING RACK 3

211-63234-11
5 2
SCREW, 4-40 X .437
125-00040-00
1
GMA 35 BACKPLATE
011-00950-02 BACKSHELL (2X)
011-01169-00 GROUND ADAPTER (4X)
2
330-00185-44 CONNECTOR (2X)
336-00021-00 PINS (A/R)

1 PART OF 011-02300-00 BACKPLATE KIT

2 PART OF 011-02302-00 CONNECTOR KIT
3 PART OF 010-00831-01 INSTALLATION KIT
4 SEE TABLE FOR KIT REFERENCE INFORMATION
5 TORQUE 4.5 5.2 IN-LBS

UNIT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION KIT CONNECTOR KIT 3 BACKPLATE KIT 3

GMA 35 010-00831-01 011-02302-00 011-02300-00

Figure A-2. GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly Overview

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-3 Rev. 4
 .894 [22.71]

6.250 [158.75] 6.300 [160.02]

BEZEL RACK

"A"

1.830 [46.48] "B"

10.410 [264.41] TO COAXES

GTN 650 SHOWN
11.270 [286.26] TO D-SUB STRAIN RELIEFS

.213 [5.41] [5.41] .331 [8.41]

100 CSK INSIDE RACK TO .025
.125 [3.18] DIMPLES
(5 PER SIDE)

.985 [25.02]
2.665 [67.69]
2.640 [67.06] 1.970 [50.04] TO .025"
BEZEL .985 [25.02] DIMPLES

.364 [9.25]
.437 [11.10] 8.000 [203.20] TO .025"
DIMPLES

NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS: INCH [mm].
2. CG MEASURED WITH UNIT, RACK BACKPLATE, AND CONNECTORS.

Figure A-3. GTN 6XX Dimensions and Center of Gravity

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-4 Rev. 4
 211-60234-08
1
SCREW, 4-40 x .250 (4X)

330-00053-01
1
BNC CONNECTOR

212-00022-00
1
SHOULDER WASHER

115-01293-00
2
GTN 6XX MOUNTING RACK

253-00421-00
1
CHASSIS GASKET
211-60234-23
330-00053-01 1 4
1 SCREW, 4-40 X 1.375 (4X)
BNC CONNECTOR

125-00220-10
1
GTN 6XX BACKPLATE

371-00013-01
1
FAN

117-00392-00
1
FAN SPACER (4X)

011-02325-0X
2
CONNECTOR KIT

NOTES:

PART OF 011-02245-00 (GTN 625, BLACK), 011-02245-01 (GTN 635, BLACK), AND 011-02245-02 (GTN 650, BLACK AND GRAY) KITS. SEE TABLE FOR
1
KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES.

REFERENCE 010-00811-50 (GTN 625, BLACK), 010-00812-50 (GTN 635, BLACK), 010-00813-50 (GTN 650, BLACK), AND 010-00889-50 (GTN 650, GRAY)
2
KITS

3 SEE TABLE FOR KIT REFERENCE INFORMATION

4 TORQUE 4.5 5.2 IN-LBS

BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
QTY BNC QTY
UNIT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION KIT CONNECTOR KIT 2 BACKPLATE KIT 2 WASHER
(EACH) CONNECTOR (EACH)
GTN 625 010-00811-50 011-02325-00 011-02245-00 1 0
GTN 635 010-00812-50 011-02325-01 011-02245-01 2 1
212-00022-00 330-00053-01
GTN 650 (BLACK) 010-00813-50 011-02325-02 011-02245-02 3 2
GTN 650 (GRAY) 010-00889-50 011-02325-02 011-02245-02 3 2

Figure A-4. GTN 650 Mounting Rack Assembly

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-5 Rev. 4
 .892 [22.65]

6.250 [158.75] 6.300 [160.02]

BEZEL RACK

"A"

1.820 [46.23] "B"

10.410 [264.41] TO COAXES

11.264 [286.11] TO D-SUB STRAIN RELIEFS

1.000 [25.40]
GTN 750 SHOWN
.125 [3.17]

.213 [5.41]
100 CSK INSIDE RACK
2.385 [60.57] (5 PER SIDE)

6.010 [152.65]
6.000 [152.40]
TO .025"
BEZEL
DIMPLES
3.811 [96.80]
2.220 [56.39]
"C" 1.970 [50.04]

8.000 [203.20] .349 [8.86]

TO .025"
DIMPLES

NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS: INCH [mm].
2. CG MEASURED WITH UNIT, RACK, BACKPLATE, AND CONNECTORS.

Figure A-5. GTN 7XX Dimensions and Center of Gravity

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-6 Rev. 4
 211-60234-08
1
SCREW, 4-40 x .250 (4X)

330-00053-02
1
BNC CONNECTOR

212-00022-00
1
SHOULDER WASHER

115-01294-00
2 330-00053-02
GTN 7XX MOUNTING RACK 1
BNC CONNECTOR
253-00421-00
1
CHASSIS GASKET

125-00221-10
1
GTN 7XX BACKPLATE
371-00014-01
1
FAN

117-00392-00
1
FAN SPACER (4X)

211-60234-23
1 4
SCREW, 4-40 X 1.375

011-02326-0X
2 CONNECTOR KIT

1 PART OF 011-02246-00 (GTN 725, BLACK) AND 011-02246-02 (GTN 750, BLACK AND GRAY) KITS. SEE TABLE FOR KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES.

2 REFERENCE 011-00819-50 (GTN 725, BLACK), 011-00820-50 (GTN 750, BLACK), AND 011-00890-50 (GTN 750, GRAY) KITS

3 SEE TABLE FOR KIT REFERENCE INFORMATION

4 TORQUE 4.5 5.2 IN-LBS

BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
QTY QTY
UNIT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION KIT CONNECTOR KIT 2 BACKPLATE KIT 2 WASHER BNC CONNECTOR
(EACH) (EACH)
GTN 725 011-00819-50 011-02326-00 011-02246-00 1 0
GTN 750 (BLACK) 011-00820-50 011-02326-02 011-02246-02 212-00022-00 3 330-00053-02 2
GTN 750 (GRAY) 011-00890-50 011-02326-02 011-02246-02 3 2

Figure A-6. GTN 750 Mounting Rack Assembly

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-7 Rev. 4
 3.225

4.560
9.132

7.647
7.397
1.400

5.169
4.665

2.433

NOTES:

1. CG MEASURED WITH UNIT, RACK, BACKPLATE, AND CONNECTORS

Figure A-7. GTN 750 with GMA 35 Installation Dimensions and Center of Gravity

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-8 Rev. 4
 115-01294-00
1 011-02645-00
GTN 7XX INSTALL RACK 2
GMA 35 INSTALL RACK

211-62237-09
2 3
SCREW, 6-32 X .312 (6X)

PART OF 011-00819-50 (GTN 725, BLACK), 011-00820-50 (GTN 750, BLACK), AND 011-00890-50
1
(GTN 750, GRAY) KITS

2 PART OF 011-02645-00 (GMA 35) KIT

3 TORQUE 8.5 9.5 IN-LBS

Figure A-8. GTN 750 with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-9 Rev. 4
 OPTION 1:
STACK CUTOUT
(RACK INSTALLED
FROM FRONT OF
AIRCRAFT PANEL)

GTN 6XX
GTN 7XX

6.32

OPTION 2:
RADIO CUTOUT
(RACK INSTALLED
FROM FRONT OF
AIRCRAFT PANEL)

6.07 GTN 7XX

2.69 GTN 6XX

6.32 6.32

OPTION 3:
RADIO CUTOUT
(RACK INSTALLED
FROM BACK OF
AIRCRAFT PANEL
ONLY)

MAXIMUM AIRCRAFT 6.00 GTN 7XX

PANEL THICKNESS
IS .125 INCH.
2.62 GTN 6XX

6.25 6.25

NOTES, ALL OPTIONS:

1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. IF THE FRONT LIP OF THE MOUNTING RACK IS BEHIND THE SURFACE OF THE AIRCRAFT
INSTRUMENT PANEL, THE UNIT CONNECTORS MAY NOT FULLY ENGAGE.
3. TOLERANCE: 0.03 INCHES.

Figure A-9. Panel Cutout Detail

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-10 Rev. 4
 GTN 7XX Mounting Rack

GTN 6XX Mounting Rack

During installation of the mounting racks,

ensure edge of the tab (bottom flange of
the rack) is flush with the face of the
instrument panel

Tabs

Figure A-10. GTN 6XX/7XX Mounting Rack Tab Alignment Detail

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-11 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-12 Rev. 4
 VIEW LOOKING AT REAR OF GMA 35

Figure A-11. GMA 35 Connector Layout Detail

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-13 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-14 Rev. 4
 Figure A-12. GTN 6XX Connector Layout DetailRear View

Figure A-13. GTN 7XX Connector Layout DetailRear View

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page A-15
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page A-16 Rev. 4
Appendix B Installation Guidance and Sample Installations
B.1 Requirements for GTN 6XX/7XX Installations
The GTN 6XX/7XX Navigators are designed to be installed in the mounting rack attached to the back of
the instrument panel. In many cases, the existing brackets or rails fastened to the face of an
instrument panel can provide adequate means to attach the GTN 6XX/7XX mounting racks and may be
re-used requiring no modifications to the instrument panel.
Use the decision tree presented in Figure B-1 to determine the installation path (including sections to
reference) and requirements for each installation.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page B-1
 GTN 6XX / 7XX Instrument Panel Installation
Start:
Installation of the GTN 6XX,
Decision Tree
GTN 7XX, or GTN 7XX with
GMA 35 in the instrument panel
Modifications to the aircrafts
instrument panel to create a
new avionics stack are outside
the scope of this installation
Does the instrument panel No Is there an STC or other No guidance. Additional design
already contain an avionics approval method to install an review and approvals required Return to Start
stack? avionics stack in the aircraft? before the GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX
can be installed. Address these
Yes Yes issues before proceeding with
GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX
installation.
See Appendix B.3 for details on
Use STC or other approval changing cutout dimensions for
method to install avionics stack GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX.
in the aircraft before proceeding Return to Start
with GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX
installation.

Will the GTN 6XX or No Yes See Appendix B.3 for details on
Consider existing cutout and
GTN 7XX fit in the existing Does the instrument panel
mounting rails, along with changing cutout dimensions for
instrument panel / mounting rail cutout need to be enlarged?
equipment to be removed. GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX.
configuration?

Yes No

A
Jump to

Yes Can the rails be modified in Yes See Appendix B.4 for details on
Do the mounting rails need to place, by adding holes to
be modified or replaced? accommodate the new
acceptable modifications to the A
mounting rails.
mounting rack? Jump to
No No
Carefully remove old mounting
rails and fabricate new rails.
Are other modifications Can the rails be replaced on the Yes
See Appendix B.4 for details on
necessary to install existing instrument panel
installation of new rails to A
GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX? structure?
existing instrument panel Jump to
structure.
No
Reconsider space available and
installation requirements. Carefully remove old instrument
Additional modifications may be No panel (including mounting rails).
Is the existing instrument panel
required which are outside the See Appendix B.5 for details on
scope of this installation
structure part of the primary
fabrication and installation of A
structure of the aircraft?
guidance. Address these issues the new instrument panel and Jump to
before proceeding with GTN mounting rails.
6XX / GTN 7XX installation. Yes
Modifications to the aircrafts
primary structure are outside
Return to Start the scope of this installation
guidance. Additional design
review and approvals required
before the GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX
can be installed. Address these
issues before proceeding with
GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX
installation.

Return to Start

Prepare for
Install GTN 6XX,
GTN 6XX / GTN 7XX
A Unit Installation
GTN 7XX, or
GTN 7XX with GMA 35
See Appendix B.2 for details.

Figure B-1. GTN 6XX/7XX Instrument Panel Installation Decision Tree

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page B-2 Rev. 4
B.2 General Requirements for GTN 6XX/7XX Installations
Figure B-2 illustrates the avionics rack mounting rails and forward rack support required in all
GTN 6XX/7XX installations.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the GTN 6XX/7XX the following conditions must be
met:
1. If existing structure is to be used for mounting the GTN 6XX/7XX, it must meet the following
requirements:
a. Sheet aluminum instrument panel structure must be at least 0.062 thick
b. Avionics stack brackets or rails must be at least 0.032 thick
2. It is acceptable to reuse existing support brackets or plates. Minor modifications can be made to
adjust for the GTN 6XX/7XX mounting rack hole patterns.
a. Maintain an edge distance of at least 2*D (center of hole to edge of part) for all new
holes.
b. Maintain a minimum of 3*D (center to center) for all new holes.
3. If support brackets or plates do not exist, cannot be modified to fit, or otherwise need to be
fabricated for this installation, they should be fabricated and attached to the aircraft instrument
panel structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2, AC 43.13-1B
Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
a. Material shall be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum (bare or Clad), minimum of 0.032 thick
b. Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc.) appropriate to material type and
thickness.
c. Bracket or plate must have a minimum of two fastener holes (6-32 screws) for each
GTN 6XX/7XX mounting rack. Nutplates may be installed on the bracket or plate to secure
the 6-32 screws.
d. Fabricated parts shall be corrosion protected. Apply zinc chromate primer that meets FED
STD TT-P-1757, or epoxy primer that meets MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection
methods listed in the aircrafts maintenance manual.
e. If possible, fabricate and install a support between the mounting tray and a nearby
structural member of the aircraft, as recommended in AC 43.13-2B, Chapter 2.
See Section B.6 for example layouts.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page B-3
 Use existing avionics mounting rails for the attachment to
instrument panel. Existing mounting rails must be electrically
grounded to the instrument panel. The rail surface that
touches the GTN 6XX or GTN 7XX racks need to be cleaned
and prepped for electrical bond. See Section 2.4.4.4 for
electrical bonding guidance.

Ensure support of forward end of

installation by securing mounting
brackets together using a plate
(shown), bracket, links, or similar
method. A minimum of two
fastener locations is required to
be utilized per mounting rack.

Figure B-2. GTN 6XX/7XX Mounting Rack Plate Support

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page B-4 Rev. 4
B.3 Avionics Stack Cutout
Some instrument panels may require minor modification to increase width or height of the avionics stack
cutout to accommodate installation of the GTN 6XX, GTN 7XX, or both.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the installation of the GTN 6XX/7XX the following
conditions must be met:
1. A cutout cannot be made into aircraft primary structure.
2. Cutout area must not affect any subpanel structure.
3. Some stationary instrument panels are considered primary structure. Modification of such panels
is not covered by this STC and requires additional approval.
4. Refer to Figure A-9 for dimensions of GTN 6XX/7XX cutouts.
5. Radius corners and remove burrs from cut edges. Finish paint the cut edge or apply corrosion
protection as specified in Section B.2.
B.4 Modification of Avionics Stack Mounting Rails
Existing mounting rails may contain holes from previously installed equipment. If existing rail holes do
not match holes in GTN 6XX/7XX mounting racks, it may be acceptable to modify the rails by adding
fastener holes to accept installation of GTN 6XX/7XX mounting racks.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the installation of the GTN 6XX/7XX the following
conditions must be met:
1. Additional fastener holes shall maintain an edge distance at least 2*D.
2. Added and existing holes in the mounting rail shall maintain at least 3*D distance between hole
centers.
3. If existing brackets or mounting rails are determined to be unsuitable for installation of the
GTN 6XX/7XX, new parts need to be fabricated. In some cases, there may be too many holes
from previous avionics mounting tray installations.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the installation of the GTN 6XX/7XX the following
conditions must be met:
1. Carefully remove existing mounting rails from instrument panel. Avoid enlarging existing rivet
holes.
2. Fabricate new parts as close to the original design as possible (e.g. rails that have had too many
holes drilled to be functional for another installation should be replaced with new rails of the
same material thickness and type with only the holes necessary for the planned avionics stack).
3. If material type of the original rails or brackets is unknown, replace with 2024-T3 (bare or Clad)
of the same thickness as the original part. Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc.)
appropriate to material type and thickness.
4. Fabricated parts shall be corrosion protected. Apply zinc chromate primer that meets FED STD
TT-P-1757, or epoxy primer that meets MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection methods
listed in the aircrafts maintenance manual. Area around the fastener holes on the side of the
fabricated rail that attaches to the GTN mounting rack must be cleaned and prepared for electrical
bond per Section 2.4.5 of this manual.
5. Install fabricated mounting rails to instrument panel. Use number and size of rivets appropriate to
original rivets removed.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page B-5
 3*D
MINIMUM

0.144 0.005

2*D
MINIMUM
USE EXISTING
RAIL THICKNESS

Figure B-3. Avionics Rack Mounting Rail Considerations

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page B-6 Rev. 4
B.5 Fabrication of Instrument Panel
Given the age of the aircraft and the number and type of past avionics rack modifications, it may not be
possible to reuse the existing instrument panel. For example, removal and replacement of the mounting
rails may create a scenario where the rivet holes in the instrument panel have been enlarged too much to
repair. Under certain conditions, it may be possible to fabricate an identical instrument panel to allow
installation of the GTN 6XX/7XX.
Instrument panel must not be a part of aircraft primary structure to make modifications for this STC.
Modifications that affect instrument panel structure are not approved through this STC and require
separate review and approval.
If the existing instrument panel is replaced with a new instrument panel, the new panel must comply with
the following requirements:
Material must be the same thickness and type as the original instrument panel (with a minimum
thickness of 0.062)
Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc.) appropriate to the material type and
thickness refer to AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 4, Section 4 (Metal Repair Procedures).
The original mounting locations, shape, form, and/or bends shall not be modified from the
original design.
Bends in the material must not exceed the minimum bend radius specification of the material
used.
OEM processes may allow for tighter bends (e.g. a soft material is formed then heat treated to
increase hardness.
Panels shall not be combined (i.e. an original two-piece panel cannot be combined to create a
single-piece panel). Likewise, panels shall not be split (e.g. creating a two-piece panel from a
single-piece panel.
Movement or consolidation of instruments, gauges, annunciators, placards, lighting, etc. is
beyond the scope of this STC and will require separate approval.
Instrument panels are often more than a single piece of aluminum: they are an assembly with
other brackets and components permanently or semi-permanently attached to the main panel. For
example, angles may have been riveted to create attach points for other pieces of equipment (e.g.
rails for the radio rack) or they may be used to resist bending of the panel due to weight and
center of gravity of the instruments; brackets or channels may exist to create additional attach
points to the aircraft. The new instrument panel must not alter the design of the instrument panel
assembly features from the original design. These features must be duplicated in the new panel
structure.
The only intended difference between the new and the old instrument panel assembly is the
installation of the GTN 6XX/7XX which should occur in the location of the existing radio stack.
Every other feature of the panel, including aspects of the structure invisible to the pilot, must be
duplicated. Modification of the instrument panel that will not comply with these requirements is
not approved under this STC. MIL-P-23377, or other corrosion protection method listed in the
aircrafts maintenance manual. Consider the finish paint for the instrument panel when choosing
corrosion protection to ensure compatibility.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page B-7
B.6 Example Instrument Panel Layouts with GTN 6XX/7XX
Navigator Installations
Figure B-4, Figure B-5, and Figure B-6 show various configurations utilizing the GTN 6XX and/or the
GTN 7XX with other avionics.

Figure B-4. GTN 6XX and GTN 7XX Example Installation

GTX330

S-TEC FIFTY FIVE X

HDG NAV APR REV ALT VS

Figure B-5. GTN 6XX Example Installation

Figure B-6. GTN 7XX Example Installation

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page B-8 Rev. 4
Appendix C GTN Equipment Compatibility and Configuration
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GTN system when configured as
described herein. For detailed configuration information refer to Section 5.
C.1 Audio Panel
Audio panels not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved;
The VHF COM audio and VHF NAV audio (if applicable) must be verified as described in
Section 5.7.4 and Section 5.7.4.1.
The audio panel must have an unswitched audio input that is used for the GTN audio.
Table C-1. Compatible Audio Panel Models

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes

SL10 Analog Audio
SL10MS Analog Audio
SL10M Analog Audio
SL10S Analog Audio
SL15 Analog Audio
SL15M Analog Audio
GMA 340 Analog Audio
Garmin
GMA 347 Analog Audio
GTN RS-232 format should be configured
for GMA Format 1. GMA software version
Analog Audio 2.00 required for GTN software version.
GMA 35
RS-232 2.00. GMA software version 2.20 or later
required for GTN software version 3.00 or
later.
Analog Audio RS-232 connection is provisional for future
GMA 350/350H
RS-232 use.
KMA 24 Analog Audio

Honeywell KMA 24H-70/71 Analog Audio

(Bendix/King) KMA 26 Analog Audio
KMA 28 Analog Audio
PMA 6000 Analog Audio
PS Engineering PMA 7000 Series Analog Audio
PMA 8000 Series Analog Audio

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C-1
C.2 Air Data Computer
Air data computers not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the
following conditions are met:
The air data computer provides the following labels:
203 Pressure Altitude
204 Barometric-Corrected Altitude
210 True Airspeed
The interface check for the altitude encoder described in Section 5.6.10 must be successfully
completed.
The installation of the air data computer was previously FAA-approved.
The air data computer is TSO approved.
The connections to the GTN must utilize shielding wiring of the type specified in this manual.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN side to connector shield block ground and on the Air
Data Computer side in accordance with the Air Data Computer installation data. If the Air Data
Computer installation data does not specify a shielding method then terminate the shield at the
Air Data Computer using the guidelines provided in Section 2.4.11.4.
If these conditions are met the interface can be approved under this GTN AML STC.
Table C-2. Compatible Air Data Computer Models

Mfg Model Data Format Configuration

B&D 90004-003 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KDC 281 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
KDC 481 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
Insight TAS 1000 RS-232 FADC Format 1

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page C-2 Rev. 4
C.3 Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data
Altitude serializers/encoders not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the
following conditions are met:
The altitude serializer/encoder is TSO approved;
The installation of the altitude serializer/encoder was previously FAA-approved;
The interface check for the altitude serializer/encoder described in Section 5.6.10 must be
successfully completed.
The connections to the GTN must utilize shielding wiring of the type specified in this manual.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN side to connector shield block ground and on the Altitude
Serializer or Fuel/Air Data installation data. If the Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data installation
data does not specify a shielding method then terminate the shield at the Altitude Serializer or
Fuel/Air Data using the guidelines provided in Section 2.4.11.4.

Table C-3. Compatible Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data Models

Mfg Model Data Format Configuration

ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above) RS-232 Altitude Format 1
FC-10 RS-232 Fuel Format 1
ARNAV
FT-10 RS-232 Fuel Format 1
Electronics International FP-5L RS-232 Fuel Format 1
Garmin GTX 327 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
Icarus Instruments 3000 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
JP Instruments EDM-700 RS-232 Fuel Format 2
Sandia SAE 5-35 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
8800T RS-232 Altitude Format 3
9000T [1] RS-232 Altitude Format 3
9200T [1] RS-232 Altitude Format 3
F/ADC-200 RS-232 Airdata Format 1
Shadin F/ADC-2000 RS-232 Airdata Format 1
91204XT(38)D (Miniflo-L) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
91053XP (Digiflo-L) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
91053XT-D (Digiflo-L) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
912802-( ) (Digidata) RS-232 Fuel Format 2
IA-RS232-X RS-232 Altitude Format 1
Trans-Cal Industries
SSD120 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
[1] This source must not be connected to the GTN if the GTN is the pressure altitude source
for a Mode S transponder.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C-3
C.4 Autopilot
Autopilots that will be coupled to GPS vertical guidance for GPS approaches must be specifically listed
in the table below, unless the interface to the autopilot is installed in accordance with the G500
(STC #SA02015SE-D) or G600 (STC #SA02153LA-D) AML STC.
Autopilots not listed below can still be approved under the GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
The installation of the autopilot was previously FAA-approved;
All interfaces between the GTN and the autopilot are analog;
The installation must use existing navigation signals which interface the autopilot to a standard
VHF navigation receiver (i.e. CDI/HSI L/R and Up/Dn)
A successful in-air flight check must be completed prior to returning the aircraft to service.
The AFMS is properly completed, limiting the GPS to lateral coupling only (LNAV) unless the
autopilot is listed as an approved interface in the G500 or G600 AML STC.
If these conditions are met the interface can be approved under this GTN AML STC. These autopilots are
limited to those operations for which they were previously FAA-approved when interfaced with the other
TC'd or STC'd navigation units (e.g. if the previous unit was installed and approved for coupled VOR,
ILS, LOC, BC and GPS LNAV approaches, this upgraded installation will also be approved for these
operations; however, GPS and RNAV approaches with GPS/SBAS-based vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV and LPV modes on the GTN) are not authorized when coupled to the autopilot), unless the
autopilot is listed as an approved interface in the G500 or G600 AML STC.
If the GTN 6XX/7XX is connected to a GDU 620, the GTN 6XX/7XX STC does not impose any vertical
coupling limitations on the interface between the GDU 620 and the autopilot.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page C-4 Rev. 4
 Table C-4. Compatible Autopilot Models

Mfr. Model Data Format Notes

If an EFIS is installed, the GTN is connected
KAP 100/140/150, to the EFIS using ARINC 429 and the EFIS
Analog Deviation, interfaces to the autopilot. The GTN is not
KFC 150/200/250/
Discrete connected directly to the autopilot.
Honeywell 300
(Bendix/King) [1] (KAP 140)
Analog Deviation, [1] (KFC 225)
KFC 225/275/325 Discrete,
ARINC 429 GPSS [2]

I/II/III/IV, 21/31/41, Analog Deviation,

Century 2000, Trident Discrete
AK 1081 ARINC 429 GPSS [2] [3]
System 20/30/40/
Analog Deviation,
50/55/60-1/60-2/
Discrete
60 PSS/65
S-TEC Analog Deviation,
System 55X Discrete, [2]
ARINC 429 GPSS
ST-901 ARINC 429 GPSS [2] [3]
300B/400B/800B (CA550A/FD computer)
Cessna 300 IFCS/400,
Analog Deviation, 400A Nav-o-matic (CA530FD computer)
IFCS/800 IFCS
Discrete
Bendix M4C, M4D
Collins APS 65 ( )
Analog Deviation,
Sperry SPZ 200A/500
Discrete
[1] GPS Select configuration should be set to Prompt.
[2] Configure output to any ARINC or GAMA format.
[3] GPSS Roll Steering Converter.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C-5
 C.5 EFIS Displays
Data
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes
Format
EXP5000 IN: Low, EFIS Format 4
Avidyne [1]
P/N 700-00006-( ) OUT: Low, GAMA Format 2
IN: Low, EFIS Format 2 [2]
ARINC 429
Honeywell EFS 40/50 OUT: Low, GAMA Format 6
(Bendix/King) (SG 465) IN: Low, EFIS Format 1 [3]
OUT: Low, GAMA Format 1
ARINC 429 Setup
IN: Low, GDU Format 1
OUT: High, GAMA Format 1
SDI: LNAV1 (for GPS 1)
LNAV2 (for GPS 2)
RS-232 Setup
OUT: MapMX
For single GDU 620 installations, enable
the Main indicator (Analog) CDI key
ARINC 429, (i.e. Main CDI/VDI outputs can be GPS
Garmin GDU 620
RS-232 or VLOC).
For dual GDU 620 installations, disable
the Main indicator (Analog) CDI key
(i.e. Main CDI/VDI outputs can only be
GPS).
VOR/LOC/GS Setup
ARINC 429 Config
Tx Speed: Low
SDI: VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
[1] PFD software P/N 530-00194-( ) or later is required.
[2] SG 465 software 1201 or later is required. Vertical guidance is provided for GPS
approaches.
[3] SG 465 software 1501. Vertical guidance is provided for GPS approaches.
C.6 EHSI
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration Notes
GPS lateral and vertical
GAMA Format 3,
SN 3308 Analog/ARINC 429 guidance is provided using the
low speed
analog interface.
Sandel Vertical guidance is provided
GAMA Format 3, for GPS approaches.
SN3500/4500 ARINC 429
low speed Software version 3.06 or later
is required for SN3500.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page C-6 Rev. 4
C.7 IRU/AHRS
Other IRU/AHRS sources can provide heading to the GTN via the following ARINC 429 labels:
314-True Heading
320-Magnetic Heading
IRU/AHRS not listed below can still be approved under the GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
The IRU/AHRS provides ARINC 429 labels 314 and/or 320;
The installation of the IRU/AHRS was previously FAA-approved;
The checkout procedure described in Section 5.6.11 must be completed successfully before
approving the aircraft for return to service;
The connections to the GTN must utilize shielding wiring of the type specified in this manual.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN side to connector shield block ground and on the
IRU/AHRS side in accordance with the IRU/AHRS installation data. If the IRU/AHRS
installation data does not specify a shielding method then terminate the shield at the IRU/AHRS
using the guidelines provided in Section 2.4.11.4 Shield Termination Considerations.
If these conditions are met, the interface can be approved under this GTN AML STC.

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes/Configuration

Collins AHS-85E ARINC 429 INS/IRU, high speed

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C-7
 C.8 Transponder
Data
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes/Configuration
Format
GTX 32 GTX Mode C #1 or #2
GTN Control of GTX 327:
GTX Mode C #1 or #2
No GTN Control of GTX 327: GTX software version
GTX 327 Aviation Output 1(output) to send 2.10 or later
GPS groundspeed. Altitude
Format 1 (input, optional) to
receive pressure altitude
GTX 328 GTX Mode S #1 or #2
Garmin RS-232
GTX 33/33D
GTX 33/33D GTX (Mode S or w/TIS) #1 or #2
with ES
GTX software version
GTX 330/330D GTN Control of GTX 330: 6.11 or later
GTX (Mode S or w/TIS) #1 or #2
No GTN control of GTX 330:
GTX 330/330D Panel GTX w/TIS #1 or #2
with ES
No GTN control of GTX 330 and
no TIS: ADS-B

NOTE
When the GTN is used with a GTX 32, GTX 33, or GTX 33D installed using
STC SA01473SE, then the limitation in STC SA01473SE requiring use of the GNS 480
(CNX 80) is no longer applicable and all configuration and operation functions of the
GNS 480 are replaced by the GTN.

C.9 NAV Indicator

Data
Manufacturer Model Notes/Configuration
Format
Honeywell KI 202A, KI 203, KI 204, KI 206, KI 208/A,
(Bendix/King) KI 209/A, KI 525A, KPI 552/B, KPI 553/A/B
Century NSD 360A, NSD 1000
331A-6P, 331A-9G, PN101 (331A-3F/3G),
Collins [1]
IND-351D
Analog
Garmin GI 102/A, GI 106/A
MD222-402, MD222-406,
Mid Continent
MD200-302/303/306/307
Sperry RD 444, RD 550A, RD 650
S-TEC ST 180

[1] Interfacing to the Collins IND-351D, P/N 622-2083-001 is not covered by this STC.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page C-8 Rev. 4
 C.10 Weather, Traffic, and Terrain
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration Notes
Minimum GDL
GDL 69/69A Garmin HSDB 69/69A software
level is 4.02.
GTX 330/33/330D/33D Refer to
RS-232
Garmin (with or without ES) Section C.8.
GTS 800 ARINC 429 Traffic Format 1 High Speed
GTS 820/850 ARINC 429 Traffic Format 2 High Speed
GTS 800/820/850 ARINC 429 Any GAMA Format High Speed
KGP 560 RS-232 External EGPWS

Honeywell KTA 870 (KTA 810),

(Bendix/King) KMH 880 (KMH 820),
ARINC 429 Traffic Format 4 High Speed
KTA 970 (KTA 910),
KMH 980 (KMH 920)
TAS 6XX
ARINC 429 Traffic Format 5 High Speed
(TCAD 9900BX)
Avidyne (Ryan)
TCAD 9900B Traffic Format 7
RS-232
TCAD 9900BX Traffic Format 8
High Speed,
TRC 497
SKY497 (Skywatch) ARINC 429 Traffic Format 6
software version
1.8 or later.
L-3 Communications
SKY899
ARINC 429 Traffic Format 3 High Speed
(Skywatch HP)
WX-500 RS-232 Lightning Detector 1

C.11 DME
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
Collins DME 40, DME 42 Parallel 2x5
Parallel 2x5
KN62/62A
or King Serial
Honeywell KN63/KDI 572/KDI 574 King Serial
(Bendix/King)
KN64 King Serial
KDM 706/KDI 572/KDI 574 King Serial
Narco DME 890, IDME 891 Narco 890/891

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C-9
C.12 CDI/HSI Source Selection Annunciators
An external CDI/HSI Source Selection Annunciation or external GPS annunciations may be required for
some installations see Section 2.4.10.1 for additional information describing when external
annunciation is required. The following indicators and indicator/switches are suitable for external
annunciation:

Manufacturer Part Number Type Notes

MD41-1510,
MD41-1511,
MD41-1512,
MD41-1513,
MD41-1514, Both 14VDC and 28VDC indicators
MD41-1515, (refer to Mid-Continent documentation
MD41-1408A, for availability of switch functions on
MD41-1404A, each unit)
Indicator/Switch/
Mid-Continent MD41-1418A,
MD41-1414A, GPS Annunciations
The MD41-151X ACU is the preferred
MD41-1468A, indicator, although the MD41-14XX
MD41-1478A, ACU is acceptable. Refer to
MD41-1464A, Section 2.4.9 for more information.
MD41-1474A,
MD41-1470,
MD41-1484W,
MD41-1488W
Staco Switch 992561-1241762200 Indicator 14VDC Indicator
Staco Switch 992561-1241862200 Indicator 28VDC Indicator
28VDC Indicator (can be converted to
14VDC operation by replacing four
Vivisun 95-40-17-B6-AW724 Indicator
28VDC lamps with 14VDC lamps
P/N 14-113).
28VDC Indicator with momentary
switch (can be converted to 14VDC
Vivisun 95-45-11-B6-AW724 Indicator/Switch
operation by replacing qty 4 28VDC
lamps with 14VDC lamps P/N 14-113).

Vendor Contact Information (provided for convenience only)

Staco Switch, 1139 Baker Street Costa Mesa, CA 92626
Phone: (877) STACO4U
Vivisun Aerospace Optics, 3201 Sandy Lane Fort Worth, Texas 76112
Phone: (888) VIVISUN
Mid-Continent Instrument Co Inc., 9400 E. 34th Street N., Wichita, KS 67226,
Phone: (316) 630-0101, www.mcico.com

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page C-10 Rev. 4
C.13 TAWS Annunciator Panels
An external TAWS annunciator may be required for some installations. See Section 2.4.10.1 for
additional information describing when a TAWS annunciator is required. The following indicators are
suitable for external annunciation.

Manufacturer Part Number Type Notes

Garmin 013-00079-XX Indicator/switch 5VDC, 14VDC, and 28VDC indicators.
Mid-Continent MD41-10XX Indicator/Switch Both 14VDC and 28VDC indicators (refer to
Mid-Continent documentation for availability of
switch functions on each unit)

Vendor Contact Information (provided for convenience only)

Mid-Continent Instrument Co Inc., 9400 E. 34th Street N., Wichita, KS 67226,
Phone: (316) 630-0101, www.mcico.com
C.14 Multifunction Displays
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration/Notes
Aviation Output 2 format for MX20 version 5.5
and earlier.
Aviation Output 1 format for MX20 version 5.6
MX20 and later. (MX20 will not accept GPS altitude
Garmin RS-232 even though it is part of Aviation Output 1
Format).
MapMX format for MX20 version 5.6 or later.
Aviation Output 1 format
GMX 200
MapMX format (preferred)
EX500 Use GAMA Format 2, low speed
(P/N 700-00007- MFD software P/N 530-00193-( ) or later is
( )), required
EX5000
Avidyne ARINC 429
(P/N 700-00004- Use GAMA Format 2, low speed
()
MFD software P/N 530-00195-( ) or later is
or P/N 700-
required
00030-( ))

C.15 Interface Adapters

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes/Configuration
GAD Format 1, low speed
Garmin GAD 42 ARINC 429 Any ARINC 429 output format may be used to
allow configuration of the GAD 42.

C.16 Synchro Heading Sources

Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes/Configuration
Synchro Heading Input = Connected. Refer to
Bendix/King KI-525A Analog
Section 5.5.1.9.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page C-11
C.17 Weather Radar
Data
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes/Configuration
Format
Configured for Return Bins:
600. Within the radome,
HSDB cabling to the weather
radar transceiver must be
Garmin GWX 68 HSDB HSDB protected with overbraid.
Refer to Section 5.5.1.4.
GWX 68 software version
2.12 or later.
Configured for Return Bins:
600. Within the radome,
HSDB cabling to the weather
Garmin GWX 70 HSDB HSDB
radar transceiver must be
protected with overbraid.
Refer to Section 5.5.1.4.
Overbraiding not required.
RDR 2000:
Configured for:
Desired Antenna Sweep
100
Map Gain Change
Accepted
Target Alert Disabled
ARINC
RDS 81 (RS 811A),
429,
ARINC 429 RDR 2100:
RDS 82 (RS 181A), Setup: Configured for:
Bendix/King ARINC
RDR 2000 (ART 2000) OUT: Low, Desired Antenna Sweep
708,
RDR 2100 (ART 2100) Radar Format 1 100
Discrete
Wx Gain Change Ignored
Map Gain Change
Accepted
ARL Disabled
Auto Step Scan Disabled
Autotilt Disabled
Target Alert Disabled

C.18 Iridium Transceiver

Data
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes
Format
Garmin GSR 56 RS-232 GSR Format 1

C.19 ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources

Data
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes
Format
Garmin GDL 88 HSDB HSDB Refer to Section 5.5.1.4.3.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page C-12 Rev. 4
Appendix D GMA 35 Equipment Compatibility
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GMA 35 Audio Panel when
configured as described herein. For detailed configuration information refer to Section 5.5.4.8.
D.1 COM Radios
COM radios not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
The COM radio is TSO approved;
The installation of the COM radio was previously FAA-approved;
The operational check for the COM radio described in Section 5.7.6.3 must be successfully
completed.
Mfg Model Data Format Notes
GNS 430W
GNS 530W
Garmin GTN 635/650/750 Analog Audio
SL 30
SL 40

D.2 NAV Radios

NAV radios not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
The NAV radio is TSO approved;
The installation of the NAV radio was previously FAA-approved;
The audio check for the NAV radio described in Section 5.7.6.4 must be successfully completed.
Mfg Model Data Format Notes
GNS 430W
GNS 530W
Garmin Analog Audio
GTN 650/750
SL 30

D.3 Other Audio Sources

Audio sources listed in Appendix F may be interfaced to the GMA 35. Other analog audio sources may
also be interfaced to the GMA 35 under this GTN AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
The installation of the audio source was previously FAA-approved.
The audio source provides standard analog audio, designed to drive at least a 600 load.
The applicable audio check described in Section 5.7.6.5, 5.7.6.6, or 5.7.6.9 must be successfully
completed.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page D-1
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page D-2 Rev. 4
Appendix E GTN Interconnect Diagrams
Figure E-1. GTN System Interface Diagram
Figure E-2. GTN 650/750 Typical Installation Interconnect
Figure E-3. GTN 625/725 Typical Installation Interconnect
Figure E-4. GTN Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect
Figure E-5. GTN 6XX/7XX PFD/MFD Interconnect
Figure E-6. GTN 6XX/7XX ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect
Figure E-7. External Navigation Source Selection Annunciator Interconnect
Figure E-8. GTN 6XX/7XX CDI Interconnect
Figure E-9. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King KI 209A Interconnect
Figure E-10. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King KI 208A Interconnect
Figure E-11. GTN 6XX/7XX VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect
Figure E-12. GTN 6XX/7XX Transponder Interconnect
Figure E-13. GTN 6XX/7XX Traffic Sources Interconnect
Figure E-14. GTN 6XX/7XX Audio Panel Interconnect
Figure E-15. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather/Terrain Interconnect
Figure E-16. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather Radar Interconnect
Figure E-17. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 69/69A Interconnect
Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect
Figure E-19. GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS Annunciators Interconnect
Figure E-20. GTN 6XX/7XX Switch Interconnect (Optional)
Figure E-21. GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 Interconnect
Figure E-22. GTN 6XX/7XX GAD 42 Interconnect
Figure E-23. GTN 6XX/7XX Air Data/AHRS Computer Interconnect
Figure E-24. GTN 650/750 RMI Interconnect
Figure E-25. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3500 Interconnect
Figure E-26. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3308 Interconnect
Figure E-27. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs Interconnect
Figure E-28. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs and Two SN3308s Interconnect
Figure E-29. GTN 650/750 Bendix King DME Interconnect
Figure E-30. GTN 650/750 DME Interconnect
Figure E-31. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King Autopilot Interconnect
Figure E-32. GTN 6XX/7XX Century Autopilot Interconnect
Figure E-33. GTN 6XX/7XX Cessna Autopilot Interconnect
Figure E-34. GTN 6XX/7XX Collins Autopilot Interconnect
Figure E-35. GTN 6XX/7XX S-TEC Interconnect
Figure E-36. GTN 7XX Heading Synchro Interconnect
Figure E-37. GTN GTN Crossfill Interconnect
Figure E-38. GTN 6XX/7XX - GSR 56 Interconnect
Figure E-39. GTN 6XX/7XX GDU 620 Interconnect
Figure E-40. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 88/88D Interconnect
Figure E-41. GTN 6XX/7XX Sperry Autopilot Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-1 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-2 Rev. 4
 GTN 6XX/7XX
CONNECTOR P1001

AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS MAIN CDI/HSI
AIRCRAFT LIGHTING BUS LIGHTING BUS TO/FROM (GPS/VOR/ILS)
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
EXTERNAL INSTRUMENTATION TIME MARK OUT
SUPERFLAGS
RS-232 IN MAIN OBS
STORMSCOPE
RS-232 OUT
ARINC 429 IN
TRAFFIC
FUEL/AIR DATA DISCRETES
OR RS-232 IN
SERIALIZER SWITCHES SWITCHES/
ARINC 429 IN ANNUNCIATORS
ANNUNCIATORS
ARINC 429 OUT
FLIGHT CONTROL
SYSTEM ILS/GPS APPROACH RS-232 OUT EXTERNAL MAP
LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS DISPLAY
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
SUPERFLAGS RS-232 IN
TRANSPONDER
RS-232 IN RS-232 OUT
RS-232 OUT
GNS 400W/500W RS-232 IN RS-232 IN
SERIES CROSSFILL RS-232 OUT RS-232 OUT GSR 56
(INTERFACE NOT
COVERED BY GTN
STC SA02019SE-D) GTN 6XX/7XX
CONNECTOR P1002
GARMIN
GTN 6XX/7XX ETHERNET IN DISCRETES
(CROSSFILL) ETHERNET OUT

GARMIN ETHERNET IN ETHERNET IN

WEATHER RADAR ETHERNET OUT ETHERNET OUT
OTHER GARMIN LRUs
(GTN 7XX ONLY)

GTN 635/650/750
CONNECTOR P1003
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND

AUDIO PANEL
COM MIC AUDIO MICROPHONE
COM MIC KEY
(RS-232 INTERFACE COM REMOTE TRANSFER COM REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
COM MIC AUDIO
IS ONLY COM AUDIO
APPROVED FOR COM REMOTE TUNE UP COM REMOTE TUNE
SWITCHES
THE GTN 7XX WITH ANALOG AUDIO COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN
THE GMA 35)
GTN 650/750
CONNECTOR P1004
VLOC AUDIO

CDI/HSI
LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS (VOR/ILS ONLY)
TO/FROM
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
RMI VOR OBI SUPERFLAGS
VOR OBS
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND
VLOC COMPOSITE OUT
NAV ILS ENERGIZE
ARINC 429
EFIS/EHSI
NAV ARINC 429 IN SERIAL DME CLOCK/DATA KING SERIAL
NAV ARINC 429 OUT DME REQUEST COMMON TUNED DME

PARALLEL TUNED PARALLEL DME TUNING NAV REMOTE TRANSFER NAV REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
DME NAV DME COMMON

GTN 6XX/7XX
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA

CONNECTOR P1006
GTN 635/650/750 COM ANTENNA

CONNECTOR P1007

GTN 650/750 NAV ANTENNA

CONNECTOR P1008

Figure E-1. GTN System Interface Diagram

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-3 Rev. 4
 GTN 650/750 TYPICAL INSTALLATIONSEE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRING INFORMATION 4

GTN 650/750 NAVIGATION

P1001 INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
8
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 9 NAV/GPS 7
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 AVIONICS BUS
5A (28 VDC)
GARMIN
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 AIRCRAFT
7.5A (14 VDC) GTX 33
GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 77 TRANSPONDER
AIRCRAFT GND 78 P3301

RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 SIGNAL GROUND
s
P1003 COMM 7
AIRCRAFT POWER 30 AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 43 5A (28 VDC)
10A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 44
GARMIN
AIRCRAFT GND 37 GMA 35 6
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT AUDIO PANEL
GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 40 P3501 (GTN 7XX ONLY)
500 COM AUDIO HI 7 9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI
500 COM AUDIO LO 18 10 COM 1 AUDIO LO
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20
s
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI
COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT
s
P1001
AUDIO OUT LO 23 43 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN LO
AUDIO OUT HI 4
s P3502
RS-232 OUT 2 7 17 RS-232 IN
RS-232 IN 2 26 18 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45 15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI
s
P1004 s P3501
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO
s
AIRCRAFT GND 61 AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 62 GROUND
AIRCRAFT POWER 51 AIRCRAFT
10 GROUND
AIRCRAFT POWER 52 GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
P1006
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA COM ANTENNA
P1007
COM ANTENNA
NAV ANTENNA
P1008
NAV ANTENNA

AIRCRAFT
10 GROUND

Figure E-2. GTN 650/750 Typical Installation Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-4 Rev. 4
NOTES:
1. SEE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRE GAUGE INFO
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE
LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO
SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE,
NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL GTN 6XX/7XX INSTALLATION. REFER TO APPROPRIATE INTERCONNECT
DIAGRAMS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.
5. AIRCRAFT POWER INPUT TO THE MAIN, COM, AND NAV BOARDS MUST BE 11-33 VDC.
6. THE GMA 35 CAN ONLY BE INTERFACED AND CONTROLLED WITH THE GTN 7XX. FOR GTN 6XX INSTALLATIONS, USE AN
ALTERNATE AUDIO PANEL.
7. REFER TO FIGURE E-4 FOR POWER AND GROUND WIRING DETAILS.
8. CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE
USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P1001.
9. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1001 CONNECTOR.
10. VERIFY AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 2.4.5.

Figure E-2. GTN 650-750 Typical Installation Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-5 Rev. 4
 GTN 625/725 TYPICAL INSTALLATIONSEE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRING INFORMATION 4

GTN 625/725 P1001 NAVIGATION

INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s

GPS 6
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 5A

AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 77 GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 78
7
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4
GARMIN
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG GTX 33
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE TRANSPONDER
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 P3301
8

RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 GROUND
s

FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED GARMIN
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK GMA 340
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW AUDIO PANEL
J1
AUDIO OUT HI 4 31 HI ALERT 1
AUDIO OUT LO 23 32 LO AUDIO IN

GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
P1006

GPS/SBAS ANTENNA

AIRCRAFT
9 GROUND

NOTES:
1. SEE DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRE GAUGE INFO.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE
LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO
SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE,
NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL GTN 625/725 INSTALLATION. REFER TO APPROPRIATE INTERCONNECT
DIAGRAMS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.
5. AIRCRAFT POWER INPUT TO THE GTN MUST BE 11-33 VDC.
6. REFER TO FIGURE E-4 FOR POWER AND GROUND WIRING DETAILS.
7. CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE
USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P1001.
8. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1001 CONNECTOR.
9. VERIFY AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 2.4.5.

Figure E-3. GTN 625/725 Typical Installation Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-6 Rev. 4
 GTN 6XX/7XX
P1001 8
NAV/GPS
22 AWG (5A C/B) AVIONICS BUS 11
AIRCRAFT POWER 19
AIRCRAFT POWER 20
20 AWG (7.5A C/B) 5A (28 VDC)
14 7.5A (14 VDC)
3 22 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 77 AIRCRAFT
20 AWG (7.5A C/B, 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 78 GROUND

5
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
4

LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 18 TO DISPLAY

LIGHTING BUS 1 LO 17 DIMMER
LIGHTING BUS 2 HI 61 TO KEYPAD 6
LIGHTING BUS 2 LO 42 DIMMER
10
9 FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
12
P1004

AIRCRAFT POWER 51
AIRCRAFT POWER 52

3 AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 61 20 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 62

7
P1003 13
COMM 11
20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC) AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 30
AIRCRAFT POWER 43
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC) 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 44 10A (14 VDC)

3
20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC) AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 37 GROUND
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT GND 40

AIRCRAFT
2 GROUND

Figure E-4. GTN Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-7 Rev. 4
 NON-METAL AIRCRAFT
(VFR-ONLY INSTALLATIONS EXCLUDED)
GTN 6XX/7XX
8
P1001 NAV/GPS
6" (MAX)
11
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 20 AWG AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 20
F1 5A (28 VDC)
STRIPE ON TVS 7.5A (14 VDC) 15
TVS1 INDICATES TVS
3 s CATHODE SIDE 14 ASSY
15 (TVS2)
12" F1
AIRCRAFT GND 77 20 AWG (MAX)
AIRCRAFT GND 78 AIRCRAFT 4-PIN CONNECTOR
GROUND
TVS (qty 4)
5
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 1 CONFIG STRIPE ON TVS
BLK MUST BE TOWARD
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONNECTOR
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
4

LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 18 TO DISPLAY

LIGHTING BUS 1 LO 17 DIMMER
LIGHTING BUS 2 HI 61 TO KEYPAD 6
LIGHTING BUS 2 LO 42 DIMMER

9 FAN
FAN POWER OUT 59 RED
10
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
P1004
12
AIRCRAFT POWER 51
AIRCRAFT POWER 52

AIRCRAFT GND 61 20 AWG

AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 62 GROUND
7
P1003 13
COMM
11
20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 30 AVIONICS BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 43
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC) 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 44 10A (14 VDC)

3 20 AWG (5A C/B, 28VDC)

AIRCRAFT GND 37
18 AWG (10A C/B, 14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 40 GROUND

AIRCRAFT
2 GROUND

Figure E-4. GTN Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-8 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

2
VERIFY AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 2.4.5.

3 ALL POWER LEADS AND GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED. 22 AWG WIRE CAN BE USED FOR THE SPLICE.
USE APPROPRIATE HEAT-SHRINK TUBING TO PROVIDE SUFFICIENT INSULATION FROM SURROUNDING
CONTACTS.

4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1001 CONNECTOR.

5 CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P1001.

6 OPTIONAL CONNECTION. LIGHTING CAN BE CONTROLLED BY THE INTEGRATED PHOTOCELL, A SINGLE

LIGHTING BUS, OR DUAL LIGHTING BUSES. IF THE AIRCRAFT HAS A SINGLE LIGHTING BUS, ONLY LIGHTING
BUS 1 NEEDS TO BE WIRED. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.6 FOR CONFIGURATION DETAILS.

7 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS COM, COM1, OR COM2 DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT. ALTERNATE
SPELLINGS OF COM ARE ACCEPTABLE (E.G., COMM)

8 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS: GPS, GPS1, OR GPS 2 FOR THE GTN 625/635/725, AND
NAV/GPS, NAV/GPS1, OR NAV/GPS2 FOR THE GTN 650/750, DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE CIRCUIT
BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT.

9 IF MODIFICATION OF THE HARNESS FROM THE FAN TO THE P1001 CONNECTOR IS NECESSARY, THE
MODIFIED LENGTH MUST NOT BE LONGER THAN 8 INCHES. THE FAN HARNESS PART NUMBER IS 320-00600-
00, AND IS SUPPLIED AS PART OF THE GTN 6XX OR 7XX CONNECTOR KIT.

10 FAN SUPPLIED AS PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.

11 REFER TO SECTION 2.7 FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON POWER DISTRIBUTION TO THE GTN FOR SINGLE
AND DUAL INSTALLATIONS.

12 GTN 650 AND GTN 750 ONLY

13 GTN 635, GTN 650, AND GTN 750 ONLY

14 THE GTN 625 AND GTN 725 ONLY REQUIRE A 5 AMP C/B

15 TVS PROTECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED ON ONE GTN IN A DUAL NAV/COM, NON-METAL AIRCRAFT
INSTALLATION. FOR VFR-ONLY INSTALLATIONS, WIRE AS SHOWN ON SHEET 1. REFER TO SECTION 2.3.2.4
FOR PART NUMBERS. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.5 FOR ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.

Figure E-4. GTN Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-9 Rev. 4
 9 10 11 ARINC 429 PFD/MFD
GTN 6XX/7XX AVIDYNE

Page E-10
#1 EX500 EX5000 EXP5000
MFD MFD PFD
P1001 12 8 P1 J732
13
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 - - 22 LNAV TRANSMITTER A
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 - - 21 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s s s
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 5 5 41 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 25 25 40 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
48 48 43 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
6 P1004 68 68 42 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 - - 4 NAV 1 RECEIVER A
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 - - 3 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
- - 7 NAV 2 RECEIVER A
- - 6 NAV 2 RECEIVER B

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

GTN 6XX/7XX
#2

P1001

Sheet 1 of 2
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s

6 P1004
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s

Figure E-5. GTN 6XX/7XX PFD/MFD Interconnect

14

GARMIN
MX20/
GMX 200
GTN 6XX/7XX
P1001 37-PIN

RS-232 OUT 1 8 4

RS-232 GND 1 46 23
s

190-01007-A3
Rev. 4
 NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY IN USE FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE
ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.
5. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS
OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
6. THESE OUTPUTS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650/750 ONLY.
7. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1 FOR CONFIGURATION INFORMATION.
8. TERMINATE SHIELDS AT PFD/MFD IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION.
9. DISPLAY P/N 700-00007-( ) WITH SOFTWARE P/N 530-00193-( ) OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION WITH
THE GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT.
EX500 MFD GPS/FMS SETUP: RECEIVER 1: GAMA 429 FORMAT
PORT: ARINC 429 1 GPS A DEFAULT
SPEED: LOW
RECEIVER 2: GAMA 429 FORMAT
PORT: ARINC 429 4
SPEED: LOW
10. DISPLAY P/N 700-00004-( ) OR P/N 700-00030-( ) WITH SOFTWARE P/N 530-00195-( ) OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER
OPERATION WITH THE GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT.
EX5000 MFD GPS/FMS SETUP: RECEIVER 1: GAMA 429 FORMAT
PORT: ARINC 429 1
SPEED: LOW
RECEIVER 2: GAMA 429 FORMAT
PORT: ARINC 429 4
SPEED: LOW
11. DISPLAY P/N 700-00006-( ) WITH SOFTWARE P/N 530-00194-( ) OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION WITH
THE GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT.
EXP5000 PFD SETUP: GPS 1: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 1
GPS 2: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 3
VHF 1: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 2
VHF 2: GARMIN 430/530 ON ARINC 4
12. ALL CONNECTIONS TO THE AVIDYNE EXP 5000 PFD MUST BE OVERBRAIDED PER THE AVIDYNE EXP 5000
INSTALLATION MANUAL. USE OVERBRAID P/N AND METHOD OUTLINED IN THE AVIDYNE EXP 5000 INSTALLATION
MANUAL. CONNECTIONS TO THE EX 500/5000 MFD DO NOT NEED TO BE OVERBRAIDED.
13. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

GTN P100X

s
s

14. MAPMX IS THE PREFERRED COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR THE MX20/GMX 200. OTHER INPUT PORTS ON THE MX20/
GMX 200 MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THE PORT SHOWN. REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL DETAILS.

Figure E-5. GTN 6XX/7XX PFD/MFD Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-11 Rev. 4
 9

Page E-12
7 ARINC 429 EFIS
GTN 6XX/7XX 6
#1 Bendix/King DISPLAY # 1
EFS 40/50
SG 465
P1001
P4652A P4652B
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 47 LNAV TRANSMITTER A
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 20 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s
10
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 67 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 53 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B
s

64 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
P1004 63 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
10
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A
8
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
s

38 NAV 2 RECEIVER A

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

25 NAV 2 RECEIVER B

Sheet 1 of 3
7 ARINC 429 EFIS
Bendix/King DISPLAY # 2
GTN 6XX/7XX 6
#2 EFS 40/50
SG 465
P1001
P4652A P4652B
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 47 LNAV TRANSMITTER A
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 20 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s

67 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
53 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B

ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 64 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A

Figure E-6. GTN 6XX/7XX ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 63 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
s
10
16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A
P1004 29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 38 NAV 2 RECEIVER A

8
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 25 NAV 2 RECEIVER B
s
10

190-01007-A3
Rev. 4
 9
7 ARINC 429 EFIS
6

Page E-13
GTN 6XX/7XX
#1 Bendix/King DISPLAY # 1
EFS 40/50
SG 465
P1001
P4652A P4652B
10
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 47 LNAV TRANSMITTER A
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 20 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s

ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 67 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 53 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B
s

64 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
P1004 63 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A

8
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
s

38 NAV 2 RECEIVER A

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

25 NAV 2 RECEIVER B

Sheet 2 of 3
GTN 6XX/7XX 6
#2
P1001

ARINC 429 IN 1A 48
4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s

ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10

Figure E-6. GTN 6XX/7XX ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s

P1004

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24

8
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s

190-01007-A3
Rev. 4
 NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE
ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.
5. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS
OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
6. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR GTN 6XX/7XX CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
7. SG 465 SOFTWARE 1101 OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION WITH THE GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT.
USE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS FOR CONFIGURING THE EFIS 40/50 WITH SOFTWARE 1101 OR LATER:
FMS VNAV CONFIGURATION: 2: FEET OR ANGLE
VARIABLE LNAV CONFIGURATION: LNAV 1/2:VAR
FMS #1/#2 CONFIGURATION: 5: KLN 90-GPS*
*KLN 90-GPS SETTING MUST BE USED FOR VERTICAL GPS DEVIATION TO BE DISPLAYED CORRECTLY.
USE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS FOR CONFIGURING THE EFIS 40/50 WITH SOFTWARE 1501 OR LATER:
FMS VNAV CONFIGURATION: 2: FEET OR ANGLE
FMS #1/#2 CONFIGURATION: 7: GAMA 429-GPS
LNAV X-TRACK SCALE FACTOR: LNAV 1/2:VAR (AS APPROPRIATE)
VNAV DEVIATION SCALE FACTOR: LNAV 1/2:VAR (AS APPROPRIATE)
LNAV VERT APR COUPLING TO AFCS: LNAV 1/2:YES (AS APPROPRIATE)
L/VNAV VERT APR COUPLING TO AFCS: LNAV 1/2:YES (AS APPROPRIATE)
LP VERT APR COUPLING TO AFCS: LNAV 1/2:YES (AS APPROPRIATE)
LPV VERT APR COUPLING TO AFCS: LNAV 1/2:YES (AS APPROPRIATE)
LNAV SELECT OUT: 1: ENROUTE ONLY (SETTING DOES NOT MATTER IF THIS
DISCRETE OUTPUT IS NOT USED IN THE INSTALLATION)
8. THESE OUTPUTS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650/750 ONLY.
9. WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GTN #1 IN A SINGLE GTN INSTALLATION.
10. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE REMOTE END CONNECTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUAL. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU PXX

Figure E-6. GTN 6XX/7XX ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-14 Rev. 4
 EXTERNAL NAVIGATION SOURCE
SELECTION ANNUNCIATORS
5

STACO INDICATOR CONNECTION 6

(WHITE) VLOC

GTN 6XX/7XX (GREEN) GPS

P1001 P1 VLOC (W) P1 4
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 2 3
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
N/C 9 6 DIMMER CIRCUIT 13

GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 11 12
GPS (G)
NAV/GPS INDICATOR

VIVISUN INDICATOR CONNECTION 7

(WHITE) VLOC

GTN 6XX/7XX (GREEN) GPS

P1001 P1 VLOC (W) P1 4
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 C B
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
G DIMMER CIRCUIT 13
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 D A
GPS (G)
NAV/GPS INDICATOR

VIVISUN INDICATOR/SWITCH CONNECTION 8

(WHITE) VLOC

GTN 6XX/7XX (GREEN) GPS

P1001 P1 VLOC (W) P1 4
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 C B
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
G DIMMER CIRCUIT 13
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 D A
GPS (G)

CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39 1 3

NAV/GPS INDICATOR
SWITCH

Figure E-7. External Navigation Source Selection Annunciator Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-15 Rev. 4
 MID-CONTINENT PREFERRED SOURCE
SELECTION ANNUNCIATOR

MD41-151X
GPS ACU
GTN 6XX/7XX
14 15 157X
P1001
J1
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 2 VLOC ANNC
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 1 GPS ANNC
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* 33 8 WPT ANNC
TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* 34 3 TERM ANNC
APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* 55 9 APR ANNC
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* 54 10 MSG ANNC
OBS ANNUNCIATE* 14 11 OBS INPUT
LOI ANNUNCIATE* 53 20 LOI ANNC
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16 12 OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT
CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39 4 CDI SOURCE SELECT

P1002
SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* 3 24 SUSP ANNC

MID-CONTINENT ACU CONNECTIONS FOR

PRE-EXISTING ACUs ONLY

9 11 12 MD41-14xx
GPS ACU
GTN 6XX/7XX MID-CONTINENT MD41-XXXX
-1484W -1404A/1408A -1464A/1474A
14 15 1470
-1488W -1414A/1418A -1468A/1478A
P1001
J1 J1 J1 J1
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 7 - 2 2 VLOC ANNC
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 8 - 1 1 GPS ANNC
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* 33 2 8 8 8 WPT ANNC
TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* 34 4 3 3 3 TERM ANNC
APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* 55 6 9 9 9 APR ANNC
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* 54 3 10 10 10 MSG ANNC
OBS ANNUNCIATE* 14 - 24 24 24 OBS ANNC
LOI ANNUNCIATE* 53 1 20 20 20 INTG ANNC
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16 - 12 12 12 OBS MODE SELECT
CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39 - - 4 - CDI SOURCE SELECT
10
P1002
SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* 3

Figure E-7. External Navigation Source Selection Annunciator Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-16 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
s
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. IF A CDI/HSI SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATOR IS REQUIRED, INDICATORS ON THIS PAGE ARE SUITABLE TO
MEET THE ANNUNCIATION REQUIREMENT.
4. LEGENDS ARE HIDDEN (BLACK) WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
5. THE PREFERRED ANNUNCIATION IS VLOC/GPS ALTHOUGH NAV/GPS IS ACCEPTABLE.
6. STACO SWITCH INDICATOR P/N 992561-1241762200 (14V SYSTEMS) AND P/N 992561-1241862200 (28V
SYSTEMS) SHOWN.
7. VIVISUN INDICATOR P/N 95-40-17-B6-AW724 (28V SYSTEMS) SHOWN. INDICATOR MAY BE CONVERTED TO 14V
OPERATION BY REPLACING 28V LAMPS WITH 14V LAMPS P/N 14-113.
8. VIVISUN INDICATOR WITH MOMENTARY SWITCH P/N 95-45-11-B6-AW724 (28V SYSTEMS) SHOWN. INDICATOR
MAY BE CONVERTED TO 14V OPERATION BY REPLACING 28V LAMPS WITH 14V LAMPS P/N 14-113.
9. THESE UNITS ALSO PROVIDE NAVIGATION SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATION. MID-CONTINENT
ANNUNCIATION CONTROL UNITS FOR BOTH 14V AND 28V SYSTEMS SHOWN. REFER TO MID-CONTINENT
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
10. CDI SOURCE SELECTION AND ANNUNCIATION IS DONE WITH EXTERNAL RELAYS. REFER TO MID-CONTINENT
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION.
11. THE MD41-14XX ANNUNCIATORS SHOWN DO NOT PROVIDE A SUSP ANNUNCIATION, AND ARE ONLY TO BE
USED IF THEY ARE PRE-EXISTING IN THE AIRCRAFT. IF PERFORMING A NEW INSTALLATION AND SOURCE
SELECTION ANNUNCIATIONS ARE REQUIRED, USE THE MD41-151X SHOWN ON THIS PAGE. SEE SECTION 2.4.9
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
12. SINCE MD41-14XX ANNUNCIATORS DO NOT PROVIDE A SUSP ANUNCIATION, THEY MUST BE PLACARDED
DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE ACU: GREEN OBS INDICATES OBS OR SUSP MODE--GTN ANNUNCIATOR BAR
INDICATES WHICH IS ACTIVE. PUSH OBS BUTTON TO CHANGE OBS OR SUSP MODE. AS AN ALTERNATIVE, THE
MD41-151X MAY BE INSTALLED, AS SHOWN ON THIS PAGE. SEE SECTION 2.4.9 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
13. LAMPS SHOULD RECEIVE POWER FROM THE SAME POWER BUS TO WHICH THE GTN IS CONNECTED.
14. FOR GTN 625/635/725 INSTALLATIONS, IF THE ACU CONTAINS A CDI SOURCE SELECT SWITCH, THEN THE CDI
SOURCE SELECT SWITCH (LABELED CDI OR NAV GPS) WILL NOT BE USED AND MUST BE PLACARDED
DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE ACU: CDI SWITCH UNUSED OR NAV GPS SWITCH UNUSED (DEPENDING ON
THE LABEL OF THE INSTALLED SWITCH).
15. FOR GTN 625/635/725 INSTALLATIONS, THE CONNECTIONS FROM THE ACU TO P1001-52, VLOC ANNUNCIATE*,
AND P1001-39, CDI SOURCE SELECT*, ARE NOT NECESSARY.

Figure E-7. External Navigation Source Selection Annunciator Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-17 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-18 Rev. 4
 NAVIGATION
INDICATOR
MID-CONTINENT GARMIN HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)

KPI 552
KPI 552B
KPI 553 7
MD200- MD200- MD222- MD222- GI 102 GI 106
KI 206 KI 525A KPI 553A
GTN 6XX/7XX 306/307 302/303 402 406 GI 102A GI 106A
KPI 553B
P1001 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2061 P1 P2 P101
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 11 11 22 22 11 11 n V - i CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 12 12 23 23 12 12 j b - h CDI+ R
s

MAIN +TO OUT 11 9 9 16 16 9 9 e Z - j +TO FLAG

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 10 10 17 17 10 10 S T - k +FROM FLAG
s

MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 7 7 20 20 7 7 N K - f NAV+ FLAG

6 MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 8 8 21 21 8 8 F F - g NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 13 - - 25 - 13 k - E JJ + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 14 - - 24 - 14 m - B HH + DOWN
s

MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 15 - - 18 - 15 H - J FF G/S+ FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 16 - - 19 - 16 J W - GG G/S- FLAG
s

MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c - X W OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Z - a N,V OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 L - V Z OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 5 5 5 5 5 5 P - Y a OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 4 4 6 6 4 4 T - b Y OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 6 6 4 4 6 6 W - e X OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 17 17 15 15 - 17 5 - - - -
GPS ANNC
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 24 24 8 8 - 18 5 - - - - NAV ANNC

Figure E-8. GTN 6XX/7XX CDI Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-19 Rev. 4
 NAVIGATION
INDICATOR
S-TEC SPERRY ROCKWELL COLLINS CENTURY

GTN 6XX/7XX ST 180 RD 444 RD 550A RD 650 331A-6P 331A-9G PN-101 IND 351D NSD 1000
NSD 360A
P1001 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P1 P2 P1 P1 CD132
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 27 - F - F - 4 29 - 4 j 11 17 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 43 - E - E - 3 28 - 3 i 12 18 CDI+ R
s

MAIN +TO OUT 11 26 - A - A - 1 26 - 1 n 9 33 +TO FLAG

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 - B - B - 2 27 - 2 p 10 34 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 37 - - - - - - 31 - - k 7 31 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 38 - - - - - - 32 - - m 8 32 NAV- FLAG
6 s
MAIN LAT SUPERFLAG OUT 13 - - P - P 39 - - - 37 - - - NAV SUPERFLAG
- - S - S - 36 - - 38 - - - NAV SUPERFLAG LO
MAIN VERTICAL + UP OUT 12 44 - C - C - 5 33 - 5 r 13 27 + UP
MAIN VERT + DOWN OUT 31 28 - D - D - 6 34 - 6 q 14 28 + DOWN
s

MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 36 - - - - - - 35 - - s 15 30 GS+ FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 35 - - - - - - 36 - - t 16 29 GS- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL
32 - - U - U 38 - - - 7 - - - GS SUPERFLAG
SUPERFLAG OUT
- - W - W - 8 - - - - - - GS SUPERFLAG LO

MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 22 DD - DD - 6 - 1 1 - a 19 15 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 24 FF - FF - 8 - 3 3 - c 2 16 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s

MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 25 z - z - 9 - 4 4 - d 3 24 OBS RESOLVER {D}

MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 39 AA - AA - 10 - 5 5 - e 5 23 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s

MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 40 BB - BB - 11 - 6 6 - f 4 26 OBS RESOLVER {F}

MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 41 CC - CC - 12 - 7 7 - g 6 25 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s

4 ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 - a - - - - 47 - - - - - - ILS ENERGIZE

Figure E-8. GTN 6XX/7XX CDI Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3
\

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-20 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD
TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE
REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION
2.4.11.4.
4. THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE IS REQUIRED BY SOME CDIs/ HSIs THAT ARE USED WITH THE M4C/D
AUTOPILOTS. IF REQUIRED, ENSURE THAT THE SIGNAL SUPPLIED TO THE INDICATOR IS THE CORRECT
POLARITY (ACTIVE-HIGH OR ACTIVE-LOW)
5. THESE INPUTS ARE NOT USED ON THE GI 106.
6. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES
OVERBRAID OVER THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE
GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT
CENTER CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE
EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.
7. THE OBS INTERFACE TO THE GTN WORKS ONLY FOR KPI 552/553/553A UNITS THAT HAVE A COURSE KNOB

Figure E-8. GTN 6XX/7XX CDI Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-21 Rev. 4
 NAVIGATION INDICATOR
BENDIX/KING
KI 209A
GTN 6XX/7XX P209A1
P1001
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 20 LNAV LATERAL DEV +LEFT IN
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 21 LNAV LATERAL DEV +RIGHT IN
s

MAIN +TO OUT 11 43 LNAV +TO IN

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 LNAV +FROM IN
s

MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 48 LNAV LATERAL +FLAG IN

8
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 3 LNAV LATERAL -FLAG IN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 27 LNAV VERTICAL +UP IN
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 26 LNAV VERTICAL +DOWN IN
s

MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 23 LNAV VERTICAL +FLAG IN

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 22 LNAV VERTICAL -FLAG IN
s

ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 9 LNAV FCS LOC ENGAGE IN

MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 50 OBS RETURN
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 LNAV OBS EXCITATION IN
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 15 LNAV OBS SIN OUT
s
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 N/C
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 14 LNAV OBS COS OUT
s
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 N/C VOR/ILS
6
N/C

GPS

GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 5 RELAY ENGAGE

P1004
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 10 NAV LOC ENGAGE IN
GLIDESLOPE +UP 34 29 NAV VERTICAL +UP IN
GLIDESLOPE +DOWN 55 28 NAV VERTICAL +DOWN IN
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 32 25 NAV VERTICAL +FLAG IN
GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 53 24 NAV VERTICAL -FLAG IN
s

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS
POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF
OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. PROPER CONNECTION OF THE RELAY ENGAGE INPUT OF THE KI 209A IS DEPENDENT ON THE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE.
REFER TO KI 209A DOCUMENTATION FOR PROPER CONNECTION.
6. IF THE GTN 625/635/725 IS INSTALLED, AND ANOTHER VOR/ILS RECEIVER IS AVAILABLE TO DRIVE THE NAVIGATION
INDICATOR, AN EXTERNAL SOURCE SELECTION SWITCH MUST BE USED IN LIEU OF THE GPS ANNUNCIATE OUTPUT. AN
ACCEPTABLE SWITCH IS CARLINGSWITCH P/N 112-A-63. LABEL AS SHOWN. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL
SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
7. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650/750 ONLY.
8. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES OVERBRAID OVER THE
GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE
MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO OR LESS
THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-9. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King KI 209A Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-22 Rev. 4
 NAVIGATION
BENDIX/KING INDICATOR
KI 208A
GTN 6XX/7XX P208A1
P1001
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 20 LNAV LATERAL DEV +LEFT IN
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 21 LNAV LATERAL DEV +RIGHT IN
s

MAIN +TO OUT 11 43 LNAV +TO IN

8 MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 LNAV +FROM IN
s

MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 48 LNAV LATERAL +FLAG IN

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 3 LNAV LATERAL -FLAG IN
s

ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 9 LNAV FCS LOC ENGAGE IN

MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 50 OBS RETURN
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 LNAV OBS EXCITATION IN
s

MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 15 LNAV OBS SIN OUT

s
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 N/C
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 14 LNAV OBS COS OUT
s
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 N/C
VOR/ILS

N/C 6

GPS
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 5 RELAY ENGAGE

P1004
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 10 NAV LOC ENGAGE IN

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION
LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. PROPER CONNECTION OF THE RELAY ENGAGE INPUT OF THE KI 208A IS DEPENDENT ON ITS POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE. REFER TO KI 208A DOCUMENTATION FOR PROPER CONNECTION.
6. IF THE GTN 625/635/725 IS INSTALLED, AND ANOTHER VOR/ILS RECEIVER IS AVAILABLE TO DRIVE THE
NAVIGATION INDICATOR, AN EXTERNAL SOURCE SELECTION SWITCH MUST BE USED IN LIEU OF THE GPS
ANNUNCIATE OUTPUT. AN ACCEPTABLE SWITCH IS CARLINGSWITCH P/N 112-A-63. LABEL AS SHOWN. REFER
TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
7. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE USED ON THE GTN 650/750 ONLY.
8. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES
OVERBRAID OVER THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS
P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER
CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT
AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-10. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King KI 208A Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-23 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-24 Rev. 4
 GTN 650/750 NAVIGATION
GARMIN BENDIX/KING INDICATOR
GI 102/A GI 106/A KI 202 KI 203 KI 204 KI 206 KI 208 KI 209 KI 208A KI 209A
P1004 P1 P1 P2021 P2031 P2041 P2061 P2081 P2091 P208A1 P209A1

VOR/LOC +LEFT 5 11 11 n - - n - - - - +LEFT

VOR/LOC +RIGHT 6 12 12 j - - j - - - - +RIGHT
s
VOR/LOC +TO 1 9 9 e - - e - - - - +TO
VOR/LOC +FROM 2 10 10 S - - S - - - - +FROM
s
VOR/LOC +FLAG 3 7 7 N - - N - - - - NAV +FLAG
VOR/LOC -FLAG 4 8 8 F - - F - - - - NAV -FLAG
s
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 - - - Y Y - 2 2 6 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 - - - K K - 4 4 10 10 ILS ENERGIZE

GLIDESLOPE +UP 34 - 13 - - k k - 3 - 29 +UP

GLIDESLOPE +DOWN 55 - 14 - - m m - 6 - 28 +DOWN
s

GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 32 - 15 - - H H - 9 - 25 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG

GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 53 - 16 - - J J - 12 - 24 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG
s

VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) 10 1 1 c - - c - - - - OBS A/H

VOR OBS ROTOR C 9 2 2 Z - - Z - - - - OBS C
s

VOR OBS STATOR D 13 3 3 L - - L - - - - OBS D (COS HI)

VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) 11 5 5 P - - P - - - - OBS E (COS LO)
s

VOR OBS STATOR F 12 4 4 T - - T - - - - OBS F (SIN HI)

VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) 14 6 6 W - - W - - - - OBS G (SIN LO)
s

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS
POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF
OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. THIS INTERCONNECT APPLIES ONLY WHEN IT IS DESIRED FOR A SEPARATE INDICATOR TO DISPLAY GTN 650/750 VOR/ILS
INFORMATION REGARDLESS OF THE GTNS CDI SELECTION (GPS OR VLOC).

Figure E-11. GTN 6XX/7XX VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-25 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-26 Rev. 4
 SINGLE GTN/SINGLE GTX WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTN 6XX/7XX TRANSPONDER
GTX 32 GTX 33/33D
#1 GTX 327 GTX 328
GTX 330/330D
P1001 7 P3271 P3281 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 RS232 TxD1

4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 RS232 RxD1

RS-232 GND 1 46 25 51 51 SIGNAL GROUND

s

SINGLE GTN/DUAL GTXs WITH OR WITHOUT TIS

GARMIN GTX
GTN 6XX/7XX TRANSPONDER
#1 GTX 32
GTX 328 GTX 33/33D #1
GTX 327 GTX 330/330D
P1001 7 P3271 P3281 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 RS232 TxD1

4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 RS232 RxD1

RS-232 GND 1 46 25 51 51 SIGNAL GROUND

s

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTX 32
GTX 328 GTX 33/33D #2
GTX 327 GTX 330/330D
7 P3271 P3281 P3301
RS-232 IN 2 26 20 23 23 RS232 TxD1

4 RS-232 OUT 2 7 19 22 22 RS232 RxD1

RS-232 GND 2 45 25 51 51 SIGNAL GROUND

s

Figure E-12. GTN 6XX/7XX Transponder Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-27
 DUAL GTNs/SINGLE GTX WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTN 6XX/7XX TRANSPONDER
GTX 32
#1 GTX 327
GTX 328 GTX 33/33D
GTX 330/330D
P1001 7 P3271 P3281 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 8 23 23 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 RS232 RxD1

RS-232 GND 1 46 25 6 51 51 SIGNAL GROUND

s

GTN 6XX/7XX
#2
P1001 7
RS-232 IN 1 27 24 8 25 25 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 2 24 24 RS232 RxD2

RS-232 GND 1 46 25 6 58 58 SIGNAL GROUND

s

DUAL GTNs/DUAL GTXs WITHOUT TIS

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN 6XX/7XX GTX 32 GTX 328 GTX 33/33D #1
GTX 327 GTX 330/330D
#1 P3271 P3281 P3301
P1001 7 20 23 23 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 IN 1 27
19 22 22 RS232 RxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8
25 51 51 SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 GND 1 46
s

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN 6XX/7XX GTX 32 GTX 33/33D #2
#2 GTX 327
GTX 328
GTX 330/330D
P1001 7
P3271 P3281 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 RS232 TxD1

4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 RS232 RxD1

RS-232 GND 1 46 25 51 51 SIGNAL GROUND

s

Figure E-12. GTN 6XX/7XX Transponder Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 4

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-28 Rev. 4
 DUAL GTNs/DUAL GTXs WITH TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTN 6XX/7XX TRANSPONDER
#1 GTX 33/33D #1
GTX 330/330D
P1001 P3301
7
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS232 TxD1

4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS232 RxD1

RS-232 GND 1 46 51 SIGNAL GROUND

s 7
RS-232 IN 2 26

4 RS-232 OUT 2 7

RS-232 GND 2 45
s

GTN 6XX/7XX
#2
P1001
7
RS-232 IN 1 27 25 RS232 TxD2

4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 24 RS232 RxD2

RS-232 GND 1 46 58 SIGNAL GROUND

s

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTX 33/33D #2
GTX 330/330D
P3301
23 RS232 TxD1

22 RS232 RxD1

51 SIGNAL GROUND
7
RS-232 IN 2 26 25 RS232 TxD2

4 RS-232 OUT 2 7 24 RS232 RxD2

RS-232 GND 2 45 58 SIGNAL GROUND

s

Figure E-12. GTN 6XX/7XX Transponder Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 4

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-29
 NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD
TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT
EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO
EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. IF THESE RS-232 PORTS ARE ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
5. WHEN TIS IS USED IN THE AIRCRAFT DO NOT CONNECT ANOTHER TRAFFIC SYSTEM TO THE SAME
GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT.
6. SPLICE BOTH RS-232 SIGNAL GROUND WIRES TOGETHER AND TERMINATE INTO PIN 25.
7. IF THIS INSTALLATION IS REPLACING A GNS 400W/500W SERIES UNIT, THE RS-232 DATA PATH
REPLACES THE ARINC 429 AND DISCRETE SIGNALS PREVIOUSLY USED TO INTERFACE THE
TRANSPONDER TO THE GNS 400W/500W SERIES.
8. CONNECTOR P3271 PIN 24 IS APPLICABLE TO THE GTX 32 ONLY. FOR THE GTX 327, SPLICE
CONNECTOR P3271 PIN 20 TO BOTH GTNs.
9. TIS TRAFFIC IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE GTX 32, 327, OR 328. SEE SECTION 1.9 FOR MORE
INFORMATION.
10. TRANSPONDER RS-232 PORT SETTINGS:
TRANSPONDER IN OUT
GTX 32 REMOTE REMOTE
GTX 33 REMOTE REMOTE (FOR NON-TIS) OR
REMOTE W/TIS (FOR TIS UNITS)
GTX 327 (GTN CONTROL) REMOTE REMOTE
GTX 327 GPS ICARUS ALT*
(NO GTN CONTROL)
GTX 328 REMOTE REMOTE
GTX 330 REMOTE REMOTE (FOR NON-TIS) OR
REMOTE W/TIS (FOR TIS UNITS)
*WHEN THE GTX 327 IS NOT BEING CONTROLLED BY THE GTN, CONNECT THE OUTPUT OF
THE TRANSPONDER TO THE GTN AND USE ICARUS ALT AS THE OUTPUT FORMAT ONLY IF
THE TRANSPONDER IS USED TO SUPPLY PRESSURE ALTITUDE TO THE GTN.

Figure E-12. GTN 6XX/7XX Transponder Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 4

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-30 Rev. 4
 CONNECTIONS TO ARINC 429 TRAFFIC SOURCE
11
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
6 L3 COMM HONEYWELL 8 RYAN SYSTEM
GTN 6XX/7XX TRC 497 TRC 899
KTA 870
KMH 880
KTA 970
KMH 980
9900BX
4 P1001 P1 P1 J10 J10 P1
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 34 42 54 54 8 A
ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 33 43 55 55 9 B
s

TRAFFIC TEST* 75 85 19 2 2 - TAS TEST IN

(OPTIONAL) 7 8
TRAFFIC STANDBY* 76 82 21 23 23 - STANDBY / OPERATE
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 32 34 22 22 - TA INHIBIT*
(TAWS UNITS ONLY)

CONNECTIONS TO TIS SOURCE

TIS SOURCE
GARMIN (TRANSPONDER)
GTN 6XX/7XX GTX 330 14
4 GTX 33
P1001 P3301
RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 SIGNAL GND
s

CONNECTIONS TO HSDB SOURCE

GTN 6XX/7XX GARMIN GTS 8XX
4
P1002 P8001
ETHERNET IN 4A 13 10 15
52 A ETHERNET OUT
ETHERNET IN 4B 14 53 B
ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 54 A
55 B ETHERNET IN
ETHERNET OUT 4B 5
s s
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 14 A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 15 ARINC 429 OUT
B
s s

ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 16 A

ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 17 GPS ARINC 429 IN 1
B
s s
P8002

TRAFFIC TEST* 75 74 TAS TEST IN

(OPTIONAL) 7
TRAFFIC STANDBY* 76 75 STANDBY / OPERATE
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 11 TA INHIBIT*
(TAWS UNITS ONLY)

Figure E-13. GTN 6XX/7XX Traffic Sources Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-31
 CONNECTION TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE

RYAN 9900B/BX TCAD

GTN 6XX/7XX PROCESSOR
P1001 P1
RS-232 IN 1 27 17 RS-232 OUT 2
13 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 RS-232 IN 2

RS-232 GND 1 46 18 RS-232 GND 2

s

12 16 SWITCH

DUAL GTN CONNECTION TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE

GTN 6XX/7XX RYAN 9900B/BX TCAD

#1 PROCESSOR
P1001 P1
RS-232 IN 1 27 17 RS-232 OUT 2
13 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 RS-232 IN 2

RS-232 GND 1 46 18 RS-232 GND 2

s

GTN 6XX/7XX
#2
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 RS-232 OUT 3

13 RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 3

RS-232 GND 1 46 21 RS-232 GND 3

s

12 16 SWITCH

Figure E-13. GTN 6XX/7XX Traffic Sources Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-32 Rev. 4
 NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT THE GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A
CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4. ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN. IN DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS, THE TRAFFIC
SOURCE SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO EACH GTN ON WHICH TRAFFIC IS TO BE DISPLAYED.
5. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 AND 5.5.1.2 FOR GTN 6XX/7XX CONFIGURATION SETUP.
6. SOFTWARE VERSION 1.6 OR HIGHER REQUIRED FOR THE TRC 497.
7. THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GTN 6XX/7XX IS CONFIGURED FOR
GTN CONTROL OF TRAFFIC SYSTEM=NO. IN THIS CASE, THE GTN 6XX/7XX WILL ONLY BE A TRAFFIC DISPLAY
AND WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM OPERATION. SEE SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR THIS
SETTING.
8. FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS THE FUNCTIONAL TEST AND STBY/OPERATE DISCRETE INPUTS TO
THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MUST BE CONNECTED TO ONE DISPLAY ONLY.
9. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
10. USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:
MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)
CARLISLEIT 392404 (24 AWG)
11. FOR NEW RYAN 9900BX INSTALLATIONS, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO USE THE RS-232 INTERFACE. WHEN
INTERFACING THE GTN TO THE RYAN 9900BX VIA ARINC 429, THE GTN CONTROL OF TRAFFIC SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION SETTING MUST BE SET TO NO. THE RYAN 9900BX DOES NOT INCLUDE THE NECESSARY
DISCRETE INPUTS TO CONTROL THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MODE.
12. THE RYAN TCAD PROCESSOR SWITCH PIN (P1-16) SHOULD BE GROUNDED TO TURN THE PROCESSOR UNIT
ON, AND OPEN TO TURN THIS UNIT OFF. IF A RYAN TCAD DISPLAY UNIT IS NOT IN THE INSTALLATION, A
DEDICATED SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO TURN THE TCAD PROCESSOR UNIT ON AND OFF. REFER TO THE
9900BX INSTALLATION MANUAL P/N 32-2351 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
13. IF THESE RS-232 PORTS ARE ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
14. REFER TO FIGURE E-12 FOR ADDITIONAL TRANSPONDER CONNECTION INFORMATION.
15. FOR GTN SOFTWARE VERSION 2.00, THESE HSDB WIRES SHOULD NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN.

Figure E-13. GTN 6XX/7XX Traffic Sources Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-33
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-34 Rev. 4
 AUDIO PANEL INTERCONNECT
9 AUDIO PANEL
3 GARMIN PS ENGINEERING BENDIX/KING
GTN 6XX/7XX
SL 10 SERIES PMA 6000 KMA 24H
SL 15 SERIES
GMA 340 GMA 347 PMA 8000 KMA 24 KMA 26 KMA 28
PMA 7000 -70/-71
P1003 BOTTOM J1 J3471 J1 (BOTTOM) BOTTOM P241 P261 J1 (BOTTOM) P241
5
3 500 COM AUDIO HI 7 9/(10) 9/(13) 7/(12) 9/(13) 9/(10) 9/(10) 4/(5) 9/(10) T/(16) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI
500 COM AUDIO LO 18 GND LUG 10/(14) 8/(13) 10/(14) GND LUG GND LUG 21/(22) GND LUG GND LUG COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO

COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 P/(H) 11/(15) 26/(32) 11/(15) P/(H) P/(H) 37/(39) P/(H) 3/(E) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO
6 COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 R/(V) 12/(30) 27/(33) 12/(30) R/(V) R/(V) 38/(40) R/(V) C/(H) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20 GND LUG 10/(14) 8/(13) GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO LO
7 7
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 T 31 54 31 T T 14 T 10 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 23 GND LUG 32 55 32 GND LUG GND LUG 31 GND LUG 14 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN LO 8

P1004

500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 12/(13) 17/(19) 6/(14) 17/(19) 12/(13) 12/(13) 7/(8) 12/(13) P/(13) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI
3
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 GND LUG 18/(20) 25/(34) 18/(20) GND LUG GND LUG 24/(25) GND LUG GND LUG NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO

MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS 8

BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION

EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL

AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED

LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN

R
GTN 6XX/7XX

AUDIO OUT

Figure E-14. GTN 6XX/7XX Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-35 Rev. 4
 GMA 350/350H INTERCONNECT
GMA 350/350H
3
GTN 6XX/7XX

P1003 P3501
5
3 500 COM AUDIO HI 7 9/(13) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI
500 COM AUDIO LO 18 10/(14) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO 7
s
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20
6 COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 11/(15) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO
COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 12/(30) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY
s

P1004

500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 17/(19) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI

3
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 18/(20) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO
s

P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 23 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO 8
s

P3502
RS-232 OUT 2 7 17 RS-232 IN
10 11 RS-232 IN 2 26 18 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45
s

Figure E-14. GTN 6XX/7XX Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-36 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 THE 500 OHM AUDIO OUTPUTS ARE BALANCED OUTPUTS, AND THE LO OUTPUTS MUST BE CONNECTED. IF
THE AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE A LO INPUT, THE LO OUTPUT SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO A GROUND
LUG AT THE AUDIO PANEL.

4 REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

5 SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT ONE END (WITH LEADS LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES)
AND LEFT FLOATING AT THE OTHER END. IF SHIELDED AUDIO CABLE IS CARRIED THROUGH A
DISCONNECT, CARRY THE SHIELD GROUND THROUGH THE DISCONNECT ON A SEPARATE PIN.

6 CONNECTING TWO MICROPHONES TO MIC AUDIO HI/LO AT THE SAME TIME MAY RESULT IN WEAK OR
DISTORTED AUDIO. MIC ISOLATION RELAYS ARE RECOMMENDED SO THAT ONLY ONE MIC IS ACTIVE AT A
TIME.

7 SPLICE 500 COM AUDIO LO AND MIC AUDIO IN LO TOGETHER INTO THE SAME PIN ON AUDIO PANEL.

8 IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES
NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM THE GTN 6XX/7XX MUST BE MIXED WITH AN
EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A TYPICAL
VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390 W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL
HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.

9 FOR GMA 35 INTERCONNECT WIRING SEE APPENDIX F.

10 THE RS-232 CONNECTION TO THE GMA 350/350H IS FOR FUTURE USE. THIS CONNECTION CAN ONLY BE
MADE TO ONE GTN PER INSTALLATION. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE THIS CONNECTION TO THE #1 GTN.

11 ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL
SETTINGS.

Figure E-14. GTN 6XX/7XX Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-37 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-38 Rev. 4
 SINGLE GTN CONNECTION TO WX-500
GTN 6XX/7XX
L3 Communications
WX-500

P1001 P3 4

RS-232 OUT 4 5 8 RS-232 RX

5
RS-232 IN 4 24 20 RS-232 TX
RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s P2
5 RS-232 GROUND

DUAL GTN CONNECTIONS TO WX-500

GTN 6XX/7XX #1
L3 Communications
WX-500

P1001 P3 4

RS-232 OUT 4 5 8 RS-232 RX

5
RS-232 IN 4 24 20 RS-232 TX
RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s P2
5 RS-232 GROUND

GTN 6XX/7XX #2
7

P1001

RS-232 IN 4 24
5 RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s

GTN CONNECTION TO KGP 560

GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix/King KGP 560
GA Enhanced GPWS

P1001 P1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 6 GPS_RXA
5
RS-232 GND 1 46 29 COMMON
s

Figure E-15. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather/Terrain Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-39
 NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND s AIRFRAME GROUND

3 AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD
TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE
REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION
2.4.11.4.

4 FOR WX-500 DATA TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE GTN 6XX/7XX MAP PAGE THE GTN 6XX/7XX MUST HAVE A
DIGITAL HEADING SOURCE, OR THE WX-500 MUST HAVE A SYNCHRO OR SERIAL HEADING SOURCE. A
STEPPER HEADING SOURCE WILL NOT ALLOW WX-500 DATA TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE MAP PAGE.

5 ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS.

6 REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

7 WHEN CONNECTING TWO GTNS TO THE WX-500, CONFIGURE ONLY RS-232 TX/RX WHICH ARE ACTUALLY
CONNECTED TO THE WX-500.

Figure E-15. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather Terrain Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-40 Rev. 4
 METAL AIRCRAFT ONLY
SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS

GARMIN WEATHER
GWX 68 GWX 70 RADAR
GTN 7XX P1002 P400 P3271
4 7
A 17 34 4 A
ETHERNET OUT 2 ETHERNET IN
B 18 35 3 B
A 15 36 23 A ETHERNET OUT
ETHERNET IN 2 B
B 16 37 22
s s
5
44 56 RT ON/OFF
15 8 POWER GROUND
4 RED 17 24 CONFIG MODULE POWER
CONFIG 1 BLK 1 43 CONFIG MODULE GROUND
MODULE 3 YEL 16 61 CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT 31 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
6

DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS

GARMIN WEATHER
RADAR
GWX 68 GWX 70
GTN 6XX/7XX #1
P1002 P400 P3271
4 7
A 17 34 4 A
ETHERNET OUT 2 ETHERNET IN
B 18 35 3 B
A 15 36 23 A ETHERNET OUT
ETHERNET IN 2 16 37 22 B
B
s s
5
44 56 RT ON/OFF
15 8 POWER GROUND
4 RED 17 24 CONFIG MODULE POWER
CONFIG 1 BLK 1 43 CONFIG MODULE GROUND
MODULE 3 YEL 16 61 CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT 31 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
6

GTN 6XX/7XX #2
P1002 P1002 5
5 4
A 6 8 A ETHERNET OUT 1
ETHERNET IN 1
B 7 9 B
A 8 6 A ETHERNET IN 1
ETHERNET OUT 1
B 9 7 B
s s

Figure E-16. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-41
 ARINC 708 WXR SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS
WEATHER RADAR R/T
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
11
RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100
RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100 15
GTN 7XX 11
P1005 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
10
A 18 8 8 42 42 A ARINC 453 OUT
8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1 B 60 9 9 43 43 B (WEATHER)
s

A 28 19 (18) 19 (18) 2 (4) 2 (4) A ARINC 429 IN #1 (#2)

14 ARINC 429 OUT 3
B 7 20 (5) 20 (5) 3 (5) 3 (5) B (CONTROL)
s

WX RADAR ON* 13 24 (12) 24 (12) 31 (32) 31 (32) RT ON/OFF #1 (#2)

N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN
A 40 12 12
ARINC 453/708 IN 1 TERM
B 19 9 12

ARINC 708 WXR DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS

WEATHER RADAR R/T
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
11
RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100 15
RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100
GTN 7XX #1 11
P1005 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
A 40
ARINC 453/708 IN 1 TERM 9
B 19

A 28 19 19 2 2 A ARINC 429 IN #1
14 ARINC 429 OUT 3
B 7 20 20 3 3 B (CONTROL)
s

WX RADAR ON* 13 24 24 31 31 RT ON/OFF #1

A 18
8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1
B 60
s

10

GTN 7XX #2 11
P1005 13
s

A 18 8 8 42 42 A ARINC 453 OUT

8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1
B 60 9 9 43 43 B (WEATHER)
s

A 28 18 18 4 4 A ARINC 429 IN #2
14 ARINC 429 OUT 3
B 7 5 5 5 5 B (CONTROL)
s

WX RADAR ON* 13 12 12 32 32 RT ON/OFF #2

N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN
A 40 N/C 8 12 12 12
ARINC 453/708 IN 1 TERM
B 19 N/C

Figure E-16. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-42 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 AT THE GTN, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE
LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GWX 68/70 TO ITS CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE GWX 68/70 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

4 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THESE INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)
CarlisleIT 392404 (24 AWG)

5 IF ETHERNET PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE
CONNECTED. REFER TO SECTION 4 FOR PINOUT INFORMATION. ONLY THE GTN 7XX IS CAPABLE OF
DISPLAYING GWX 68/70 DATA. RECOMMEND CONNECTING THE GTN 725 OR GTN 750 DIRECTLY TO THE
GWX 68/70. SEE SECTION 2.4.16 FOR MORE INFORMATION.

6 CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P400/P3271.

7 THE WIRING TO THE HSDB WEATHER RADAR R/T MUST BE OVERBRAIDED IN THE RADOME AREA, PRIOR TO
ENTERING THE FUSELAGE. SEE APPENDIX G FOR OVERBRAID PROCEDURE

8 THE WXR ARINC 453/708 INPUT IS UNTERMINATED.

9 IF THE GTN IS THE ONLY EQUIPMENT ON THE ARINC 453/708 OUTPUT BUS FROM THE WEATHER RADAR, OR
IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE THE GTN INTERNAL TERMINATION RESISTOR, INSTALL THE TERMINATION
JUMPER SHOWN. THIS LENGTH OF THIS JUMPER SHOULD NOT EXCEED 3. IF MULTIPLE PIECES OF
EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS, ONLY ONE TERMINATION RESISTOR SHOULD BE UTILIZED, AT
THE LAST LRU ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS.

10 AT WEATHER RADAR UNIT, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A
CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

11 THE GTN MAY BE CONNECTED AS INDICATOR #1 OR INDICATOR #2. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.4.10 FOR
DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE GTN DISPLAY HEAD #1 / #2.

12 IF THE STRUT SWITCH INPUT IS CONNECTED TO THE WXR, DISCONNECT IT. THE GTN WILL
AUTOMATICALLY COMMAND THE WXR TO STANDBY UPON LANDING. THIS ALSO ALLOWS THE PILOT TO
TURN THE WXR ON PRIOR TO TAKEOFF.

13 SPLICE MUST BE MADE WITHIN 6" OF CONNECTOR BACKSHELL (WITHIN CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IS
PREFERRED).

14 ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT 3 MUST BE USED FOR CONTROLLING THE WEATHER RADAR.

15 THE ART 2100 IS SUPPORTED WHEN CONFIGURED TO EMULATE AN ART 2000. ONLY ART 2000 FUNCTIONS
ARE AVAILABLE. SEE APPENDIX C FOR REQUIRED ART 2100 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.

Figure E-16. GTN 6XX/7XX Weather Radar Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-43
 7

GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 69/69A

P1002 P691
5
ETHERNET IN 3A 23 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 3B 24 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
4 25 23 6
ETHERNET OUT 3A ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
s s

GDL 69/69A BLK 1 CM GROUND

RED 21 CM POWER OUT
CONFIGURATION YEL 40 CM DATA
MODULE WHT 60 CM CLOCK

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT THE GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 69/69A
TO ITS CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS.
4. ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF ETHERNET PORT 3. IF THERE ARE NO FREE
PORTS ON THE GTN 6XX/7XX, THE OTHER LRU CAN BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE GTN 6XX/
7XX AND THE GDL 69/69A CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN 6XX/7XX IN ITS PLACE. THE
DISCONNECTED LRU CAN BE CONNECTED TO ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, OR 4 ON THE GDL 69/69A.
5. USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THESE INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)
CARLISLEIT 392404 (24 AWG)

6. ETHERNET PORTS 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED LIEU OF PORT 1. THE PORT THAT IS USED MUST
BE ENABLED IN CONFIGURATION MODE. REFER TO THE GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION MANUAL
FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
7. IN DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS, GDL 69 DATA WILL BE FORWARDED TO THE OTHER GTN VIA
HSDB.

Figure E-17. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 69/69A Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-44 Rev. 4
 SINGLE GTN INSTALLATION 1

VOR/LOC/GS Antenna

GTN 6XX/7XX COM Antenna

P1008

NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2

P1007
COM

P1006 5 5

GPS/WAAS
s

DUAL GTN INSTALLATION 1

COM Antenna

2
GTN 6XX/7XX #1 GPS/WAAS Antenna

P1007
COM

P1006 5 5
VOR/LOC/GS
GPS/WAAS
s Antenna
P1008

NAV 3

1
Splitter S
2

GTN 6XX/7XX #2 COM Antenna

P1008

NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2

P1007
COM

P1006

GPS/WAAS

Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-45
 G/S Antenna
SINGLE GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION 1 VOR/LOC Antenna

4 7

G/S
ANT Diplexer
VOR

GTN 6XX/7XX COM Antenna

P1008

NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2

P1007
COM

P1006 5 5

GPS/WAAS
s

DUAL GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION 1

COM Antenna

2
GTN 6XX/7XX #1 GPS/WAAS Antenna

P1007
COM

P1006 5 5

GPS/WAAS
s
G/S Antenna
P1008

NAV

VOR/LOC Antenna

3 4 7

1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR

GTN 6XX/7XX #2 COM Antenna

P1008

NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2

P1007
COM

P1006 5 5

GPS/WAAS
s

Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 5

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-46 Rev. 4
 SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO (SEPARATE G/S AND
VOR/LOC ANTENNA PORTS), AND SINGLE ANTENNA
GTN 650/750 #1 VOR/LOC/GS
Antenna
P1008

NAV 3

1
Splitter S
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 2
SEPARATE G/S AND
VOR/LOC ANTENNA
PORTS G/S
G/S
Diplexer ANT
VOR

VOR/LOC

REFERENCE ONLY

SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO (SEPARATE G/S AND

VOR/LOC ANTENNA PORTS), AND DUAL ANTENNAS G/S Antenna

GTN 650/750 #1 3
4 7
VOR/LOC Antenna
P1008 G/S 1
ANT Diplexer Splitter S
NAV
VOR 2

VHF NAV RADIO WITH 1

SEPARATE G/S AND Splitter S
VOR/LOC ANTENNA 2
PORTS G/S

VOR/LOC

REFERENCE ONLY

Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 5

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-47
 SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND SINGLE ANTENNA

VOR/LOC/GS
GTN 650/750 Antenna
P1008

NAV 3

1
Splitter S
2

VHF NAV RADIO WITH

COMBINED VOR/LOC/
GS ANTENNA PORTS
NAV

REFERENCE ONLY

SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND DUAL ANTENNAS

GTN 650/750

G/S Antenna
P1008

NAV

VOR/LOC Antenna

3 4 7

1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR

VHF NAV RADIO WITH

COMBINED VOR/LOC/
GS ANTENNA PORTS
NAV

REFERENCE ONLY

Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 4 of 5

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-48 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.1, 3.3.2, AND 3.3.3 FOR ANTENNA CABLE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. THE GPS ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE MUST BE DOUBLE OR TRIPLE SHIELDED AND THE LOSS (INCLUDING
CONNECTORS) MUST USUALLY BE GREATER THAN 1.5 dB AND LESS THAN 6.5 dB. REFER TO SECTION 3.3 FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
3. GARMIN P/N 013-00112-00 (MINI-CIRCUITS SPLITTER P/N ZFSC-2-1B+) MUST BE USED.
4. COMANT DIPLEXER P/N CI 507 MUST BE USED.
5. OVERBRAID REQUIRED ON THE GPS/WAAS ANTENNA CABLES FOR ALL IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT. SEE
APPENDIX G FOR A LIST OF AIRCRAFT REQUIRING OVERBRAID PROTECTION. SEE SECTION 3.3.1.1 FOR OVERBRAID
PROCEDURE AND PART NUMBER SPECIFICATION. OVERBRAID IS NOT REQUIRED FOR METAL OR TUBE-AND-FABRIC
AIRCRAFT.
6. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.3 FOR SPLITTER AND DIPLEXER INSTALLATION GUIDANCE.
7. THE DIPLEXER IS INSTALLED BACKWARDS FROM TRADITIONAL APPLICATIONS. WHEN A G/S AND VOR/LOC ANTENNA IS
INSTALLED, IT IS REQUIRED TO JOIN THE SIGNALS OF BOTH ANTENNAS WITH THE CI-507 DIPLEXER.

Figure E-18. GTN 6XX/7XX Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 5 of 5

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-49
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-50 Rev. 4
 TAWS ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
GARMIN MID-CONTINENT
GTN 6XX/7XX 013-00079-XX MD41-10XX
J1 J1 5
P1001
TAWS NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* 72 10 10 TERR N/A ANNC IN
TAWS WARNING ANNUNCIATE* 71 11 11 TERR PULL UP ANNC IN
TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* 73 5 5 TERR CAUTION ANNC IN
TAWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* 57 19 19 TAWS INHIBIT ANNC IN
TAWS INHIBIT IN* 37 20 20 TAWS INHIBIT OUT
21 21 AIRCRAFT GROUND
22 22 AIRCRAFT GROUND
23 23 AIRCRAFT GROUND
24 24 AIRCRAFT GROUND
25 25 AIRCRAFT GROUND

TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 7

9
GARMIN PS Engineering Bendix/King AUDIO PANEL
SL15 KMA 24 KMA 26
GMA 340 GMA 347 GMA 350 PMA6000
PMA7000
PMA8000
SL15M KMA 28 8
Bottom J1 J3471 J3501 Bottom J1 Bottom P261
AUDIO OUT HI 4 T 31 54 31 T 31 T 14 UNSWITCHED IN HI
6
AUDIO OUT LO 23 Gnd Lug 32 55 32 Gnd Lug 32 Gnd Lug 31 UNSWITCHED IN LO
s

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0".
CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT
EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN
FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.10.1.4 TO DETERMINE IF EXTERNAL TAWS ANNUNCIATION IS REQUIRED.
6. ONLY ONE GTN SHOULD HAVE TAWS ENABLED TO PREVENT CONFLICTING AUDIO MESSAGES.
7. CONNECT TO THE AUDIO INHIBIT INPUTS OF OTHER SYSTEMS WITH LOWER PRIORITY AURALS THAN TAWS, SUCH AS TRAFFIC. SEE TRAFFIC
INTERCONNECT DRAWING FOR CONNECTIONS.
8. OTHER UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS ON THE AUDIO PANEL MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THOSE SHOWN.
9. FOR GMA 35 INTERCONNECT WIRING SEE APPENDIX F.

Figure E-19. GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS Annunciators Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-51 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-52 Rev. 4
 GTN 6XX/7XX CDI
P1001 3

CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39

OBS/SUSP 4

OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16

AIR/GROUND* 38 5

COM RMT XFR

P1003
COM REMOTE TRANSFER* 27
6

COM CHAN UP
COM REMOTE TUNE UP* 28
7
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* 29
COM CHAN DN

NAV RMT XFR 8

P1004
VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER 28

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
s
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. THE CDI SOURCE SELECT INPUT MAY BE USED TO TOGGLE BETWEEN GPS AND VLOC COURSE DEVIATION
SOURCES. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT
TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. THIS
SWITCH MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IF A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WITH A CDI SWITCHING FUNCTION IS
CONNECTED TO THE GTN.
4. OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* MAY BE USED TO REMOTELY TOGGLE BETWEEN GPS AUTO AND GPS OBS/SUSP
MODE. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO
THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. THIS SWITCH
MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IF A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WITH AN OBS/SUSP SWITCHING FUNCTION IS
CONNECTED TO THE GTN.
5. THE AIR/GROUND* INPUT IS USED TO CONTROL THE AIR/GROUND STATUS OF THE GTN. THIS INPUT MUST BE
GROUNDED TO ACTIVATE. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.9 FOR CONFIGURATION INFORMATION.
6. COM REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY COM FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE COM
FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN
DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS.
7. COM REMOTE TUNE UP AND COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN MAY BE USED TO SCROLL THROUGH A LIST OF PRESET
COM FREQUENCIES. MAY USE TWO GRAYHILL SWITCHES P/N 30-3. THE SWITCHES MUST BE LABELED AS
SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. ADDITIONALLY, AN ON-OFF-ON SWITCH, CARLINGSWITCH P/N
62012481-0-0 CAN BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
8. VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY NAV FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE NAV
FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN
DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS.

Figure E-20. GTN 6XX/7XX Switch Interconnect (Optional)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-53
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-54 Rev. 4
 7 6 ALTITUDE
GTN 6XX/7XX ACK Trans-Cal Shadin Icarus Sandia ENCODER
Technologies IA-RS232-X 8800T/9000T Instruments SAE5-35
A-30 SSD-120 9200T 3000
P1001
10 DB15 DB9 DB15 P3 (DB9) J5
4 RS-232 IN 2 26 7 (14) 4 (9) 7 2 1 (2) RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 2 45 SHELL 5 15 SHELL 5 RS-232 OUT LO
s s s
s

TO GTN #2 - 1 - - - CONFIG JUMPER

(IF INSTALLED) 9 - 2 - - - (RESOLUTION)

8 - 7 - - - CONFIG JUMPER
9 - 8 - - - (OUTPUT FORMAT)

FUEL/AIR
GARMIN ARNAV JP Instruments Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Electronics DATA
GTX 327 FC-10 EDM-700
Miniflo-L Digiflo-L Digiflo-L Digidata F/ADC-2000 F/ADC-200 International
FT-10 91204XT(38)D 91053XP 91053XT-D 912802-( ) 962830A-( ) F/ADC-2000 FP-5L
P3271 J1 J2
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 2 1 6 5 J 5 39 6 15 RS-232 OUT HI
4
RS-232 GND 1 46 13 4 SHELL 2 2 D 2 23 9 SHELL RS-232 OUT LO
s

RS-232
RECEIVER
JP Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin
GARMIN
Instruments Miniflo-L Digiflo-L Digiflo-L Digidata F/ADC-2000 F/ADC-200
GTX 327
EDM-700 91204XT(38)D 91053XP 91053XT-D 91802-( ) 962830A-() F/ADC-2000
P3271 J1 J2
RS-232 OUT 1 8 2 2 9 12 H 12 21 5 RS-232 IN HI
4
13 SHELL 2 2 D 2 23 9 RS-232 IN LO
s

Figure E-21. GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-55 Rev. 4
NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0".
CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT
EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. RS-232 CHANNEL PORTS 1 TO 3 ARE SHOWN. ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR PORT CONFIGURATION
INFORMATION.
5. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
6. IF USING THE SERIAL PORT SOFTWARE METHOD TO CONFIGURE THE OUTPUT OF THE ENCODER, ENSURE THAT THE TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS
FORMAT IS SELECTED.
7. MOD LEVEL 8 (OR HIGHER) IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT RS-232 INTERFACE. ENSURE THAT JUMPERS ARE SET FOR TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS AND
10 FOOT RESOLUTION.
8. IN A DUAL GTN INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE ALTITUDE SOURCE TO BOTH GTN #1 AND GTN #2. USE NEXT AVAILABLE RS-232 IN PORT. ENSURE BOTH
PORTS ARE CONFIGURED TO THE CORRECT DATA FORMAT SETTING AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.5.1.2.
9. THE LENGTH OF THE STRAPS MUST BE LIMITED TO THE LENGTH SPECIFIED IN THE MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION MANUAL.
10. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

GTN P100X

s
s

Figure E-21. GTN 6XX/7XX RS-232 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-56 Rev. 4
 GTN 6XX/7XX GARMIN GAD 42
4 5

P1001 P421
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 1 GPS ARINC 429 IN A
7
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 2 GPS ARINC 429 IN B
s

ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 13 ARINC 429 OUT A

ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 14 ARINC 429 OUT B
s

P1004

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 3 NAV ARINC 429 IN A

6 23 4
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B NAV ARINC 429 IN B
s

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD
TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE
GAD 42 INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. FOR GTN 6XX/7XX CONFIGURATION SETTINGS, SEE SECTION 5.5.1.1.
5. SEE GARMIN GAD 42 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT
INFORMATION. CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 BUS SPEED TO MATCH THE GTN 650/750 OUTPUT
SPEED.
6. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY USED ON THE GTN 650/750.
7. IF THE ARINC 429 OUT 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -10 AND -29) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER
PURPOSE, ANY ARINC 429 OUT PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1
FOR ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS, AND SECTION 4 FOR PINOUT.

Figure E-22. GTN 6XX/7XX GAD 42 Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Page E-57
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-58 Rev. 4
 AIR DATA
GTN 6XX/7XX COMPUTER
Shadin Shadin B&D Bendix/King Bendix/King
ADC 2000 ADC 2000 90004-003 KDC 281 KDC 481
P1001
J2 (DB 15) J1 (MS CONN) P2811 P4811

ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 7 40 27 5 U TRANSMITTER A

5 8 22 9 6 i TRANSMITTER B
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s

IRU/AHRS
GTN 6XX/7XX
Collins
AHC-85E
P1001
P1
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 16 IRU/AHRS TRANSMITTER A
5 ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 14 IRU/AHRS TRANSMITTER B
s

AIR DATA COMPUTER

GTN 6XX/7XX
Insight
TAS 1000
P1001 DSUB-25 PLUG
RS-232 OUT 1 8 23 RS-232 RXD
4 10 RS-232 TXD
RS-232 IN 1 27
RS-232 GND 1 46 11 SIGNAL GROUND
s

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF
THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS. RS-232 CHANNEL 1 PORT IS SHOWN. ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED.
5. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR ARINC 429 CHANNEL SETTINGS. IF ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT IS BEING USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY
BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.
6. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

Figure E-23. GTN 6XX/7XX Air Data/AHRS Computer Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-59 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-60 Rev. 4
 TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO RMI
RADIO MAGNETIC
INDICATOR
BENDIX/KING
GTN 650/750 KNI 582 KNI 582
KI 229 KDA 692
P1004 Pointer #1 Pointer #2
P2291 P6921 P5821 P5821
VOR OBI CLOCK 25 12 11 8 7 OBI CLOCK
s

VOR OBI DATA 27 19 L 17 16 OBI DATA

s

VOR OBI SYNC 26 11 M 33 24 OBI SYNC

s

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION
LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT/CONFIGURATION
INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

Figure E-24. GTN 650/750 RMI Interconnect

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-61
 ARINC 429 EHSI
GTN 6XX/7XX
Sandel
DISPLAY
SN3500
7 8
P2
P1004

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 3/(35) NAV 429 IN PORT A 1/(2)

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 33/(21) NAV 429 IN PORT B 1/(2)
s

P1001

ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 30 429 OUT A

4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 15 429 OUT B
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 31/(2) GPS 429 IN PORT A 1/(2)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 17/(32) GPS 429 IN PORT B 1/(2)
s

6 Autopilot

ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 LOCALIZER ENGAGE

MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 +LEFT

MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 +RIGHT
s

MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 LATERAL +FLAG

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 s
LATERAL -FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 +UP

MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 +DOWN
s

MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 VERTICAL +FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 VERTICAL -FLAG
s

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE
SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE
SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD
TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS
AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.11.4.
4. IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE,
ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 4
FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.
5. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND
INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
6. AUTOPILOT SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE AUTOPILOT
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM.
7. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR GTN 6XX/7XX CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
8. SANDEL SN3500 SETUP ITEMS:
LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 530 (ARINC) ANNUN: SERIAL
LAT DV: SERIAL
VERT DV: SERIAL
VERT ENA: SERIAL

NAV/ILS/DME-1/2: NAV TYPE: 429 TO

Figure E-25. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3500 Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-62 Rev. 4
 ARINC 429 EHSI
GTN 6XX/7XX
Sandel DISPLAY # 1
SN3308
8
P1 P3
P1004 9

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 26 429-3 RX-A

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 7 429-3 RX-B
s

P1001

ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 11 429-1 TX-A

4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 29 429-1 TX-B
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 10 429-1 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 28 429-1 RX-B
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 17 +TO (FLAG)
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 35 +FROM (FLAG)
s
27 ILS 1 ENERGIZE 7

37 CDI+L
19 CDI+ R

18 NAV+ VALID (FLAG)

36 NAV VALID (FLAG)

16 GSI+ UP
34 GSI+ DOWN

15 GS+ VALID (FLAG)

33 GS- VALID (FLAG)

10

6 Autopilot

ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 LOCALIZER ENGAGE

s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 +LEFT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 +RIGHT
s s s
11 s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 LATERAL +FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 s s
LATERAL -FLAG
s
11 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 +DOWN
s s s
11 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 VERTICAL +FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 VERTICAL -FLAG
s s s
11

Figure E-26. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3308 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-63 Rev. 4
NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

s
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0".
CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION
REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION
2.4.11.4.
4. IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.
5. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
6. AUTOPILOT SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE AUTOPILOT INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM.
7. USE ILS ENERGIZE 2 (P1-8) IF GTN 6XX/7XX UNIT IS BEING CONNECTED AS GPS2/NAV2.
8. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
9. SANDEL SN3308 SETUP ITEMS:
LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 430 (ARINC) ANNUN: SERIAL RELAY SENSE: NAV-2: OFF
COURSE: OBS/LEG GPS-1: OFF
DEVIATION: SERIAL GPS-2: OFF
OBS ROT: NORMAL CDI SRC SEL: OFF
OBS CAL: 000.0 RCVR 1/2: OFF
NAV CHANGE: NAV 1/2 ENABLE: YES
PORT: 429 PORT-3*
* FOR SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, NAV 1/2 MUST TEMPORARILY BE SET TO ANALOG AND ILS MUST BE SET TO VALID
LOW FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THE VDI.
10. FOR SN3308 SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, ANALOG CONNECTIONS TO THE SN3308 ARE REQUIRED TO ALLOW VERTICAL GUIDANCE
TO BE DISPLAYED FOR GPS APPROACHES. FOR SOFTWARE VERSION 2.30 AND LATER, THESE ANALOG CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
11. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

GTN P100X

s
s

Figure E-26. GTN 6XX/7XX Sandel SN3308 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-64 Rev. 4
 9 ARINC 429 EHSI
6 VOR/ILS 1
Sandel
SN3308 DISPLAY
(RELAXED) 7
P1 P2 P3
GTN 6XX/7XX N/C
#1 33 NAV 1/2 RELAY SENSE 11
P1004

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 9 429-2 RX-A

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s 27 429-2 RX-B

VOR/ILS 2
(ENERGIZED)
5 VHF NAV 2 SWITCHING RELAY
15
AIRCRAFT POWER 13
P1001 14 21 GPS 2 SWITCHING RELAY
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 11 429-1 TX-A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 29 429-1 TX-B
s s s s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 10 429-1 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 28 429-1 RX-B
s
26 429-3 RX-A
7 429-3 RX-B

ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 27 ILS 1 ENERGIZE

MAIN +TO OUT 11 3 CDI SOURCE CONTROL 11
MAIN +FROM OUT 30
s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 12 RCVR 1/2 11
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50
17 +TO (FLAG)
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69
s 35 +FROM (FLAG)
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12
37 CDI+L
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31
s 19 CDI+ R
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51
18 NAV+ VALID (FLAG)
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70
s 36 NAV VALID (FLAG)

16 GS+ UP
34 GS+ DOWN
6

GTN 6XX/7XX
15 GS+ VALID (FLAG)
33 GS- VALID (FLAG)
#2
P1004 8 ILS 2 ENERGIZE

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s

P1001

ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 10
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 NAV SYSTEM 1
s (RELAXED)
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 N/C
s

8 5

MAIN +TO OUT 11

AUTOPILOT
MAIN +FROM OUT 30
s
LOCALIZER ENGAGE
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56

+LEFT
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49
+RIGHT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68
s 14
LATERAL +FLAG
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50
LATERAL -FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69
s 14
+UP
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12
+DOWN
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31
s 14
VERTICAL +FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51
VERTICAL -FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70
s
NAV SYSTEM 2 14
(ENERGIZED)

15
AIRCRAFT POWER

Figure E-27. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-65
 NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS
OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. AUTOPILOT SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE INSTALLED A/P INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM.
6. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR GTN 6XX/7XX #1 AND #2 ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
7. SANDEL SN3308 #1 SETUP ITEMS: NAV CHANGE: NAV1 ENABLE: YES
LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 530 (ARINC) PORT: 429 PORT-2*
NAV2 ENABLE: YES
PORT: 429 PORT-2*

LNAV 1/2 CHANGE: ANNUN: SERIAL RELAY SENSE: NAV2: P233

COURSE: OBS/LEG GPS1: OFF
DEVIATION: ANALOG IN GPS2: OFF
OBS ROT: NORMAL CDI SRC SEL: P23
OBS CAL: 000.0 RCVR 1/2: P212

* FOR SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, NAV 1/2 MUST TEMPORARILY BE SET TO ANALOG AND ILS
MUST BE SET TO VALID LOW FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THE VDI.
8. FOR SANDEL SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, ANALOG CONNECTIONS TO THE SN3308 ARE REQUIRED TO ALLOW
VERTICAL GUIDANCE TO BE DISPLAYED FOR GPS APPROACHES. FOR SOFTWARE VERSION 2.30 OR LATER, THESE
ANALOG CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
9. USE RELAY LEACH P/N WN-460-( )( )( ).
10. USE RELAY AMERI-KING P/N AK-950-R12-( )V.
11. THESE PINS ON THE SN3308 ARE CONFIGURABLE AND CAN BE CHANGED TO SUIT THE PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
12. IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE THE NAV RECEIVERS AS A SOURCE FOR THE SN3308 BEARING POINTERS, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT THE GTN 6XX/7XX #1/#2 COMPOSITE OUTPUTS (P1004-8) BE CONNECTED TO THE SN3308
COMPOSITE INPUTS (P1-29 AND P1-10, #1 AND #2 RESPECTIVELY) AND THE SN3308 BRG NAV-1/NAV-2 BE SET TO
429+COMP.
13. USE DIODE P/N 1N4004 OR EQUIVALENT.
14. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

GTN P100X
LRU PXX

s
s

15. CONNECT TO SANDEL 3308 EFIS CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.

Figure E-27. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-66 Rev. 4
 8 ARINC 429 EHSI
DISPLAY #1
Sandel
VOR/ILS 1 SN3308
(RELAXED) 7
P2 P3
GTN 6XX/7XX N/C
6
#1 33 NAV 1/2 RELAY SENSE 10
P1004
13
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 9 429-2 RX-A
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s s s 27 429-2 RX-B

s VOR/ILS 2
(ENERGIZED)
5 VHF NAV 2 SWITCHING RELAY
14
A/C PWR 12
P1001 21 GPS 2 SWITCHING RELAY
13
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 11 429-1 TX-A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 29 429-1 TX-B
s s s s 13
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 10 429-1 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 28 429-1 RX-B
s s s
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 26 429-3 RX-A
7 429-3 RX-B
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49
3 CDI SOURCE CONTROL 10
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 12 RCVR 1/2 10
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 15
s PILOT
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 ARINC 429 EHSI
DISPLAY #2
Sandel
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 SN3308
s FCS
SWITCH 8 P3 7
P2
VOR/ILS 1
GTN 6XX/7XX (RELAXED)

6
#2 P1004 N/C 33 NAV 1/2 RELAY SENSE 10
COPILOT
9 429-2 RX-A
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24
27 429-2 RX-B
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23
s
VOR/ILS 2
P1001 (ENERGIZED)
5 VHF NAV 2 SWITCHING RELAY
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 14
A/C PWR
12
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 21 GPS 2 SWITCHING RELAY
s
11 429-1 TX-A
29 429-1 TX-B

10 429-1 RX-A
28 429-1 RX-B
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 26 429-3 RX-A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 7 429-3 RX-B
s s s
3 CDI SOURCE CONTROL
13 10

12 RCVR 1/2 10
9
NAV SYSTEM 1
(RELAXED)

N/C
AUTOPILOT
5
LOCALIZER ENGAGE
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56

+LEFT
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49
+RIGHT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68
s
LATERAL +FLAG
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50
LATERAL -FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69
s
+UP
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12
+DOWN
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31
s
VERTICAL +FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51
VERTICAL -FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70
s
NAV SYSTEM 2
(ENERGIZED)

14
A/C PWR

Figure E-28. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs and Two SN3308s Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-67
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
s
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS
OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. AUTOPILOT SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE AUTOPILOT INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM.
6. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR GTN 6XX/7XX #1 AND #2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
7. SANDEL SN3308 #1 AND #2 SETUP ITEMS:
LNAV 1/2 SELECT: GNS 530 (ARINC) NAV CHANGE: NAV1 ENABLE: YES
PORT: 429 PORT-2*
NAV2 ENABLE: YES
PORT: 429 PORT-2*

LNAV 1/2 CHANGE: ANNUN: SERIAL RELAY SENSE: NAV2: P233

COURSE: OBS/LEG GPS1: OFF
DEVIATION: ANALOG IN GPS2: OFF
OBS ROT: NORMAL CDI SRC SEL: P23
OBS CAL: 000.0 RCVR 1/2: P212

* FOR SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO 2.30, NAV 1/2 MUST TEMPORARILY BE SET TO ANALOG AND ILS
MUST BE SET TO VALID LOW FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THE VDI.
8. USE RELAY LEACH P/N WN-460-( )( )( ) OR EQUIVALENT.
9. USE RELAY AMERI-KING P/N AK-950-R12-()V OR EQUIVALENT.
10. THESE PINS ON THE SN3308 ARE CONFIGURABLE AND CAN BE CHANGED TO SUIT THE PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
11. IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE THE NAV RECEIVERS AS A SOURCE FOR THE SN3308 BEARING POINTERS, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT THE GTN 6XX/7XX #1/#2 COMPOSITE OUTPUTS (P1004-8) BE CONNECTED TO THE SN3308
COMPOSITE INPUTS (P1-29 AND P1-10, #1 AND #2 RESPECTIVELY) AND THE SN3308 BRG NAV-1/NAV-2 BE SET TO
429+COMP.
12. USE DIODE P/N 1N4004 OR EQUIVALENT.
13. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

GTN P100X

s
s

14. CONNECT TO SANDEL 3308 EFIS CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.
15. USE GRAYHILL SWITCH SERIES 34A-4P1. LABEL AS SHOWN. SEE SECTION 2.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS.

Figure E-28. GTN 6XX/7XX SN3308 Two GTNs and Two SN3308s Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-68 Rev. 4
 KING SERIAL DME (PANEL-MOUNTED DME)
DME TRANSCEIVER
GTN 650/750 #1 BENDIX/KING

5 P1004 KN62/62A KN64

7 P621/P62A1 P641
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18 14 14 CLOCK BUS
s s s
s 7
SERIAL DME-DATA 19 13 13 DATA BUS
s s s
s 7
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20 L L RNAV/CHANNEL REQ
s s s
s NAV 1

DME COMMON 41
C C DME COMMON

NAV 2
GTN 650/750 #2 NAV SELECTION SW 6
5 P1004

SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18
s
SERIAL DME-DATA 19
s
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20
s

DME COMMON 41

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD
TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE
REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT
EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO
EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT
INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. THE GTN 650/750 MUST BE CONFIGURED AT INSTALLATION TO OUTPUT KING SERIAL DME TUNING
DATA UNDER THE DME CHANNEL MODE. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.11 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
6. THE NAV SELECTION SWITCH IS ONLY REQUIRED IF TWO GTN 650/750S ARE INSTALLED. FOR SINGLE
GTN INSTALLATIONS, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GTN #1. AN ACCEPTABLE SWITCH IS CARLINGSWITCH P/N
112-A-63. LABEL AS SHOWN. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.8 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS.
7. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

GTN
P100X

s
s

Figure E-29. GTN 650/750 Bendix King DME Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-69
 KING SERIAL DME (REMOTE-MOUNTED)
REMOTE DME
GTN 650/750 #1 BENDIX/KING
P1004 KN63 KDM 706
7 7 P631 P7061
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18 F 8 CLOCK BUS
s s s s s
s s
SERIAL DME-DATA 19 6 9 DATA BUS
s s s s s
s 7 s 7
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20 D 24 DME REQUEST
s s s
s
7
NAV DME COMMON 41

DME INDICATOR
BENDIX/KING
GTN 650/750 #2 KDI 572 KDI 574
P1004 P5721 P5741
15 15 DME REQUEST
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18
s 11 11 DATA BUS
SERIAL DME-DATA 19
s 12 12 CLOCK BUS
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20
s 17 17 RNAV REQUEST

48 48 NAV 1 COMMON

NAV DME COMMON 41 49 49 NAV 2 COMMON

N/C 33 33 10 BIT/50 BIT SELECT

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 650/750, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS
OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. THE GTN 650/750 MUST BE CONFIGURED AT INSTALLATION TO OUTPUT KING SERIAL DME TUNING DATA UNDER THE
DME CHANNEL MODE. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.11 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
6. FOR SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GTN #1.
7. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:
GTN P100X

s
s

Figure E-29. Dual GTN 650/750 Bendix King DME Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-70 Rev. 4
 4 4 4 6 5 5
GTN 650/750
BENDIX/KING COLLINS COLLINS NARCO NARCO DME
KN 62A DME 40 DME 42 DME 890 IDME 891
P621 P1 P1 P301 P301
P1004
PAR DME 1MHZ-A 45 12 28 28 2 31 1 MHZ-A
PAR DME 1MHZ-B 46 - - - 3 12 1 MHZ-B
PAR DME 1MHZ-C 47 9 32 32 4 30 1 MHZ-C
PAR DME 1MHZ-D/SERIAL DME ON 33 8 43 43 5 11 1 MHZ-D
PAR DME 1MHZ-E 56 11 35 35 - - 1 MHZ-E

PAR DME 100KHZ-A/SERIAL DME HOLD 37 7 11 11 B 28 100 KHZ-A

PAR DME 100KHZ-B 39 - - - C 9 100 KHZ-B
PAR DME 100KHZ-C 40 4 19 19 D 27 100 KHZ-C
PAR DME 100KHZ-D 42 6 27 27 E 8 100 KHZ-D
PAR DME 100KHZ-E 54 H 12 12 - - 100 KHZ-E
PAR DME 50KHZ 43 5 44 44 H 32 50 KHZ

7 DME COMMON 41 C 42 8 42 8 1 35 DME COMMON

- 52 52 - - 10 MHZ-A
- 51 51 - - 10 MHZ-E

- 6 6 - - GROUND

J - 48/50 - - 2 X 5 CODE SELECT

N/C D - - - - SLIP CODE SELECT
N/C M - - - - BCD CODE SELECT

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.11 FOR GTN CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
4. THE GTN 650/750 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR PARALLEL 2X5 DME CHANNELING MODE FOR PROPER OPERATION WITH THIS MODEL OF DME TRANSCEIVER.
5. THE GTN 650/750 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR NARCO 890/891 DME CHANNELING MODE FOR PROPER OPERATION WITH THIS MODEL OF DME TRANSCEIVER.
6. DME 42 MUST BE STRAPPED FOR 2X5 TUNING. REFER TO DME 42 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR STRAPPING INFORMATION.
7. FOR DUAL GTN INTERFACES TO THE DME, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO INSTALL A TOGGLE SWITCH FOR THE DME COMMON INPUT. INSTALL SWITCH AS SHOWN FOR KING
SERIAL PANEL DME INTERCONNECT.
8. P1-42 AND P3-46 ON THE HPU-74 NEED TO BE DISCONNECTED FROM GROUND IN ORDER TO ENTER DME HOLD MODE.

Figure E-30. GTN 650/750 DME Interconnect

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-71
 TO MAIN CDI

VERTICAL +DOWN
LATERAL -FLAG
LATERAL +FLAG

VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +UP
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
AUTOPILOT

BENDIX/KING
GTN 6XX/7XX KFC 200
KAP 150 KFC 275
KAP 100 KAP 140 KFC 250 KFC 225 KFC 300
KFC 150 KFC 325
(KC 190) (KC 140) (KC 295) (KC 225) (KCP 320)
(KC 19X) (KCP 220)
(KCP 299)
P1001
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 J1 J2TP P1 P2 P3
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - 22 - - - - - 23 - - 30 48 - - LAT DEV FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - 23 - - - - - 24 - - 31 49 - - LAT DEV FLAG-
s
8 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 U - 24 - U - - C 25 - 2 - 3 - - LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 17 - 25 - 17 - - A 26 - 1 - 2 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
11 8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - 31 - 21 C - - 14 - 24 - 27 - GS DEV FLAG+
-
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - 12 - Y D - - 15 - 25 - 10 - GS DEV FLAG-
s
8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - - - 9 - V M - - 12 3 - - 11 - GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - - - 10 - 19 K - - 52 4 - - 28 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
8
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 - - - - - - - - 46 - - - - - 48 ARINC 429 IN A
6 ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 - - - - - - - - 47 - - - - - 49 ARINC 429 IN B
s

7 GPS SELECT* 74 - - - 26 - - - - - 34 - - - - - GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)

ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 B - 7 - B - AA - 7 - - 29 22 - - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)

5 5

Figure E-31. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix King Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-72 Rev. 4
 TO MAIN CDI

VERTICAL +DOWN
ILS/GPS APPROACH*
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG

VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +UP
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
4

P1001
GTN 6XX/7XX AUTOPILOT
BENDIX
M4C M4D
5536E-2 5536F
J1 J2 J1 J2
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - LAT DEV FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - - - LAT DEV FLAG-
s 8 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 1 - 1 - LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 5 - 5 - LAT DEV +RT
s 8
11 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - GS DEV FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - GS DEV FLAG-
s 8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 34 - 34 - GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 35 - 35 - GS DEV +DOWN
s
8

4 ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 - 51 - 51 NAV A+ ON LOC

NOT APPROACH MODE
(RELEASED)

APPROACH MODE
(ENERGIZED)

AIRCRAFT POWER
9

10

Figure E-31. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-73
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT THE GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR
AS PRACTICAL.
4. THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE IS REQUIRED BY SOME CDIS/ HSIS THAT ARE USED WITH THE M4C/D
AUTOPILOTS. IF REQUIRED, ENSURE THAT THE SIGNAL SUPPLIED TO THE INDICATOR IS THE CORRECT
POLARITY (ACTIVE-HIGH OR ACTIVE-LOW).
5. THE GPS SELECT OUTPUT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE GPS SELECT INPUT OF THE AUTOPILOT. THIS OUTPUT
IS GROUNDED IN GPS MODE, UNLESS A GPS APPROACH IS ACTIVE AND THE PILOT HAS ENABLED THE A/P
APPROACH OUTPUTS. THIS WILL ALLOW THE AUTOPILOT TO CAPTURE THE GPS GLIDEPATH WHILE THE CDI IS
DISPLAYING GPS INFORMATION.
6. ALL GAMA 429 CONFIGURATIONS OF THE GPS ARINC 429 OUTPUT PROVIDE DATA REQUIRED BY THE AUTOPILOT
FOR GPSS. THE ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION CANNOT BE USED.
7. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.9 FOR THE CORRECT GPS SELECT CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. FOR THE BENDIX/KING
KFC 225 AND KAP 140 AUTOPILOTS, THE GPS SELECT CONFIGURATION SETTING MUST BE SET TO PROMPT.
8. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU
PXX

s
s

9. CONNECT TO BENDIX AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.

10. AN ACCEPTABLE RELAY IS LEACH P/N WN460-( )( )( ).
11. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES OVERBRAID
OVER THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/
VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER CONSOLE WITH
ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT AND THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-31. GTN 6XX/7XX Bendix Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-74 Rev. 4
 TO MAIN CDI

VERTICAL +DOWN
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG

VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +UP
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
AUTOPILOT
CENTURY
Century Century Century Century Century Century Century Century
I II III IV 21 31/41 2000 Triden
CD92 CD34 CD34 CD58 CD66 CD194 CD191 CD191 CD191
GTN 6XX/7XX P1001
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - - 2 7 7 7 LAT DEV FLAG +
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - - - - 3 8 8 8 LAT DEV FLAG -
s 8 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 13 B B - 32 4 6 6 6 LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 14 A A - 31 5 5 5 5 LAT DEV +RT
s
9 8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - - - 2 2 2 GS DEV FLAG +
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - - - 1 1 1 GS DEV FLAG -
s
8 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - - - B 45 - 4 4 4 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - - - A 46 - 3 3 3 GS DEV +DOWN
s
8
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 - - - - 44 1 9 9 9 LOC SWITCH

Figure E-32. GTN 6XX/7XX Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-75
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE
SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE
SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. THE CENTURY IV REQUIRES AN ISOLATION DIODE TO BE INSTALLED ON THE LOCALIZER SWITCHING INPUT AS SHOWN BELOW.

AUTOPILOT
GTN 6XX/7XX
CENTURY
IV
P1001
CD66
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 44 LOC SWITCH
1N4444 OR
EQUIV.

5. INSTALL JUMPER AS REQUIRED TO SET AK 1081 ARINC 429 SPEED TO MATCH THE GTN OUTPUT SETTING. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL
DETAILS.

Century AK 1081
GTN 6XX/7XX GPSS converter
6 P1001
CD278
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 1 ARINC 429 IN A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 2 ARINC 429 IN B
s 3 SHIELD GND
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 8 NAV SELECTED
4 ARINC 429 IN A SPD SELECT
5 5 ARINC 429 IN B SPD SELECT

6. THE GTN CAN BE CONFIGURED TO ANY GPS ARINC 429 OUTPUT TO PROVIDE GPSS DATA. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
7. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
8. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU
PXX

s
s

9. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES OVERBRAID OVER THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT)
THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING
EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-32. GTN 6XX/7XX Century Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-76 Rev. 4
 To Main CDI

LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG

LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT

VERTICAL +FLAG
VERTICAL -FLAG

VERTICAL +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN
AUTOPILOT
CESSNA
300B 400B 800B 300IFCS 400IFCS 800IFCS
CA550A/ CA550A/ CA550A/ CA530FD CA530FD CA530FD
FD FD FD
J1/P4 J2/P5 J1/P4 J2/P5 J1/P4 J2/P5 J1/P5 J1/P5 J1/P5
GTN 6XX/7XX P1001
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - - - - - - NAV FLAG +
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 - - - - - - - - - NAV FLAG -
s
6 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 - 5 - 5 - 5 A A A L/R +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 - 2 - 2 - 2 B B B L/R +RT
s
7 6 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - - - - - - G/S FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - - - - - - G/S FLAG-
s
6 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 18 - 18 - 18 - C C C G/S +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 17 - 17 - 17 - D D D G/S +DOWN
s
6
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 - 9 - 9 - 9 5 5 5 LOC SWITCH
4 4 4

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS MUST BE LESS
THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD
TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED
3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE BACK COURSE RELAY REFER TO
MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
5. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR CORRECT CONNECTION OF THE VOR/LOC RELAY USING AN ACTIVE LOW INPUT.
6. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU PXX

s
s

7. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES OVERBRAID OVER THE GPS/
WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO
THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS
BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-33. GTN 6XX/7XX Cessna Autopilot Interconnect

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-77
 TO MAIN CDI

VERTICAL SUPERFLAG
VERTICAL +DOWN
VERTICAL + UP

LATERAL SUPERFLAG
LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG

VERTICAL -FLAG
VERTICAL +FLAG
LATERAL +LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT
AUTOPILOT
GTN 6XX/7XX COLLINS COMPUTER
APC 65/65B/ FGC-65( ) APC 65A
65C/65E/65F/ FYD-65 APC 65G
65H/65J
P1001 J1 J3 J1 J3 J1 J3
s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 - 54 - 54 - 54 VOR/LOC DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 - 53 - 53 - 53 VOR/LOC DEV +RT
s
5 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - 41 - 41 - 41 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - 44 - 44 - 44 GS DEV +DOWN
s
5
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - 4 - 4 - - NAV LL FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL FLAG OUT 69 - 1 - 1 - - NAV LL FLAG-
s
6 5 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - 12 - 12 - - GS LL FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - 9 - 9 - - GS LL FLAG-
s
5
4 4
s
MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 13 - 4 - 4 - 4 NAV HL FLAG
5 N/C - 1 - 1 - - NAV LL FLAG-

MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 - 12 - 12 - 12 GS HL FLAG

N/C - 9 - 9 - - GS LL FLAG-

ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 35 - 35 - 35 - LOC FREQ GND

Figure E-34. GTN 6XX/7XX Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-78 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS
AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. CONNECT EITHER THE LOW-LEVEL FLAGS OR THE SUPERFLAGS. DO NOT CONNECT BOTH SETS OF FLAGS IN A
PARTICULAR INSTALLATION. IF ONE SET OF FLAGS IS ALREADY WIRED, USE THE PRE-EXISTING FLAG WIRING TO THE
GTN.
5. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU PXX

s
s

6. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES OVERBRAID OVER
THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS
MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO
OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-34. GTN 6XX/7XX Collins Autopilot Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-79
 TO MAIN CDI

LATERAL - FLAG

VERTICAL - FLAG
VERTICAL + FLAG
LATERAL + FLAG

LATERAL + RIGHT

VERTICAL + DOWN
LATERAL + LEFT

VERTICAL + UP
S-TEC AUTOPILOT
GTN 6XX/7XX
System System System System System System System System System
P1001 20 30 40 50 55 55 X 60-1 60 PSS 60-2 / 65
s
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2 P1 P2 0109 0110 0109 0110
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 - - - - 13 - 13 - 24 - 24 - NAV FLAG+
MAIN LATERAL FLAG OUT 69 - - - - 14 - 14 - 6 - 6 - NAV FLAG-
s
12 s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 9 9 14 14 31 - 31 - 23 - 23 - L/R +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 10 10 13 13 30 - 30 - 21 - 21 - L/R +RT
15 s
12 s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 - - - - - 1 - 1 - 77 - 77 G/S FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 - - - - - 2 - 2 - 58 - 58 G/S FLAG-
s
12 s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - - - - - 18 - 18 - 46 - 46 G/S +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - - - - - 19 - 19 - 45 - 45 G/S +DOWN
s
12
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 - - - - - - - 38 - - - - GPSS STEERING
42 42 26 26 49 - 49 - - - - - GPS TRACK GAIN 7
6

ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 - - - - 32 - 32 - 16 - 16 - LOC SWITCH

ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 - - - - - - - 36 - - - - A GPSS DATA IN

11 ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 - - - - - - - 37 - - - - B
s

Figure E-35. GTN 6XX/7XX S-TEC Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-80 Rev. 4
 S-TEC ST-901 GPSS CONVERTER CONNECTION 8 S-TEC ST-901 GPSS CONVERTER CONNECTION 9

GTN 6XX/7XX S-TEC ST-901 GTN 6XX/7XX 10 S-TEC ST-901

GPSS CONVERTER GPSS CONVERTER
P1001 J3 P1001 GPSS (RELAXED) J3
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 8 A 8 A
11 ARINC DATA IN ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 ARINC DATA IN
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 9 B 11 9 B
s ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29
s

TO OTHER SYSTEM REQURING

VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 22 GPS OVERRIDE VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL
4 NO GPSS (ENERGIZED)
10 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52
13
AIRCRAFT POWER
14

CONNECTION TO OTHER SYSTEMS

GPS ANNUNCIATE VLOC ANNUNCIATE

GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX S-TEC ST-901 GPSS

S-TEC AUTOPILOT J3 CONVERTER
16
GPSS STEERING 22 GPS OVERRIDE
GPS TRACK GAIN

TO OTHER SYSTEM REQURING

TO OTHER SYSTEM REQURING
VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL
GPS ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL
P1001 P1001
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52
13 13
AIRCRAFT POWER 4 AIRCRAFT POWER
14 14

Figure E-35. GTN 6XX7XX S-TEC Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-81
 NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT THE GTN, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT
GROUND WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4. IF VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS USED ONLY BY AUTOPILOT, THIS MAY BE CONNNECTED DIRECTLY. IF VLOC ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS REQUIRED BY OTHER SYSTEMS,
CONNECT AS SHOWN IN FIGURE LABELED CONNECTION TO OTHER SYSTEMS.
5. CONNECT OTHER PINS THAT ARE NOT SHOWN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
6. IF GPS ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS USED ONLY BY AUTOPILOT, THIS MAY BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY. IF GPS ANNUNCIATE SIGNAL IS REQUIRED BY OTHER SYSTEMS (I.E. CDI,
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR), CONNECT AS SHOWN IN FIGURE LABELED CONNECTION TO OTHER SYSTEMS.
7. GPS TRACK GAIN IS USED TO IMPROVE TRACKING WHEN GPS IS SELECTED ON THE CDI AND THE AUTOPILOT IS IN ANALOG NAVIGATION MODE (AND ROLL STEERING IS NOT
ENGAGED).
8. FOR CONVERTERS 01278-() S/N 600A AND ABOVE.
9. FOR CONVERTERS 01278-() S/N 599 AND BELOW.
10. ONLY REQUIRED FOR GTN 650/750.
11. ALL GAMA FORMAT CONFIGURATIONS OF THE GPS ARINC 429 OUTPUT PROVIDE DATA REQUIRED BY THE AUTOPILOT FOR GPSS. THE ARINC 429 CONFIGURATION CANNOT BE
USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
12. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU PXX

s
s

13. CONNECT TO AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR AIRCRAFT POWER.

14. AN ACCEPTABLE RELAY IS LEACH P/N WN460-( )( )( ).

15. FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES OVERBRAID OVER THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT)
THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING
EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.
16. REFER TO SHEET 1 OF THIS FIGURE FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.

Figure E-35. GTN 6XX/7XX S-TEC Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-82 Rev. 4
 GTN 7XX BENDIX/KING HSI
P1005 P2 (BOT)
7 KI-525A
SYNCHRO X 35 5
S HDG XMT X

SYNCHRO Y 14 V HDG XMT Y

SYNCHRO Z 56 T HDG XMT Z

SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE LOW) 33 s

6
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE HI) 54 N/C
9
SYNCRO REF HI 36 R HDG XMT H

SYNCHRO REF LO 15 U HDG XMT C

s s
s

A/C 26VAC 400 HZ HI

A/C 26VAC 400 HZ LO

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION
LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR THE REMOTE
EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0". SEE SECTION 2.4.11.4.
4. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
5. A DIRECTIONAL GYRO OR HSI BOOTSTRAP OUTPUT MAY BE USED TO PROVIDE SYNCHRO HEADING TO THE GTN
7XX. IN A DUAL GTN INSTALLATION, THE GTN 7XX WILL CROSSFILL SYNCHRO HEADING TO THE OTHER GTN.
6. EITHER THE HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE HI) OR HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE LO) SHOULD BE CONNECTED. DO NOT
CONNECT BOTH OF THESE INPUTS TO THE SYNCHRO.
7. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.9 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. THE SYNCHRO HEADING INPUT MUST BE
CONFIGURED AS CONNECTED.
8. LOWER CASE LETTERS ARE SHOWN AS UNDERLINED UPPERCASE LETTERS.
9. THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN:

LRU PXX

s
s

Figure E-36. GTN 7XX Heading Synchro Interconnect

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-83
 GTN 6XX/7XX #1 GTN 6XX/7XX #2

P1002 P1002
5
ETHERNET IN 1A 6 8 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 1B 7 9 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 8 6 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 9 7 ETHERNET IN 1B
s s
10 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 4
s

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN 6XX/7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD TERMINATION LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0".
4. GROUNDING THIS PROGRAM PIN TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL ALLOWS THE SYSTEM TO IDENTIFY ITSELF AS
GTN #2.
5. USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)
CARLISLEIT 392404 (24 AWG)

Figure E-37. GTN GTN Crossfill Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-84 Rev. 4
 GARMIN GARMIN
GTN 6XX/7XX GSR 56
P561
P1002
31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT
GSR STATUS IN* 11

GSR REMOTE PWR* 12 16 IRIDIUM RMT PWR ON*

P1001
RS-232 IN 4 24 12 RS-232 OUT
5 RS-232 OUT 4 5 13 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 4 44 14 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

AUDIO PANEL
4
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT HI 4 GSR 56 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT LO 5 GSR 56 AUDIO IN LO
(OPTIONAL)
TEL AUDIO IN HI
1 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 2 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT LO
s

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. AT GTN, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0 ". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GSR 56 TO ITS CONNECTOR BACKSHELL
IN ACCORDANCE WITH GSR 56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
4. OPTIONAL AUDIO CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED IF THE PHONE FEATURE OF THE GSR 56 IS
UTILIZED.
5. IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.

Figure E-38. GTN 6XX/7XX - GSR 56 Interconnect

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-85
 DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT SINGLE GDU
GTN 6XX/7XX #1 P1004 P6202 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 7 ARINC 429 IN 4A
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B NAV 1
23 24 ARINC 429 IN 4B
s s

P1002
6 P6201
4 ETHERNET IN 2A 15 13 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 14 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 17 11 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 18 12 ETHERNET IN 1B
s s

P1001 P6202
RS-232 OUT 2 7 12 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 GND 2 45 46 RS-232 GND 3
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 40 TIME MARK IN 1A
GPS 1
TIME MARK OUT B 22 41 TIME MARK IN 1B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 6 ARINC 429 IN 3A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 23 ARINC 429 IN 3B
s s

ARINC 429 IN 2A 47 3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 66 20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s

GTN 6XX/7XX #2
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47
4
ARINC 429 IN 2B 66
s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 13 RS-232 IN 4
RS-232 GND 2 45 47 RS-232 GND 4
s s

TIME MARK OUT A 3 42 TIME MARK IN 2A GPS 2

TIME MARK OUT B 22 43 TIME MARK IN 2B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 8 ARINC 429 IN 5A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 25 ARINC 429 IN 5B
s s
P1002 P6201
6
ETHERNET IN 2A 15 32 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 17 30 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 18 31 ETHERNET IN 2B
s s
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 10 s

P1004 P6202
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 9 ARINC 429 IN 6A
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B NAV 2
23 26 ARINC 429 IN 6B
s s

Figure E-39. GTN 6XX/7XX GDU 620 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-86 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUD

3 IF ONLY ONE GTN 6XX/7XX IS INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GTN #1.

4 IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED GTN6XX/7XX UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN #1 ONLY TAWS

ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN #1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD.

5 REFER TO GDU 620 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
PIN-OUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

6 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)
CARLISLEIT 392404 (24 AWG)

7
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN
3.0".

Figure E-39. GTN 6XX/7XX GDU 620 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-87
 SINGLE GTN AND GDL 88

3
GTN 6XX/7XX TO EXISTING GDL 88/D
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING P881

S
TIME MARK OUT A 3 22 TIME MARK 1A

TIME MARK OUT B 22 3 TIME MARK 1B

S S
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*
(GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS UNITS ONLY)
P1002
A 23 53 A
ETHERNET IN 3 ETHERNET OUT 1
B 24 54 B
4 6
A 25 51 A ETHERNET IN 1
ETHERNET OUT 3
B 26 52 B
S S

Figure E-40. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 88/88D Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-88 Rev. 4
 DUAL GTNS AND GDL 88

GTN 6XX/7XX
3
TO EXISTING GDL 88/D
#1 P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
P881

S
TIME MARK OUT A 3 22 TIME MARK 1A

TIME MARK OUT B 22 3 TIME MARK 1B

S S

TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*

(GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS UNITS ONLY)

P1002
A 23 53 A
ETHERNET IN 3 ETHERNET OUT 1
B 24 54 B
4 5 6
A 25 51 A
ETHERNET OUT 3 ETHERNET IN 1
B 26 52 B
S S

A 13
ETHERNET IN 4
B 14
4
A 4
ETHERNET OUT 4
B 5
S

GTN 6XX/7XX
6

#2 P1002
B 24
ETHERNET IN 3
A 23
4
B 26
ETHERNET OUT 3
A 25
S
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 10
3
TO EXISTING
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
S

TIME MARK OUT A 3 28 TIME MARK 2A

TIME MARK OUT B 22 9 TIME MARK 2B

S S

NOTES:

1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. IF GTN TIME MARK OUTPUT IS ALREADY CONNECTED TO AIRCRAFT WIRING, SPLICE INTO THIS
WIRING FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE GDL 88.
4. IF ETHERNET PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE
CONNECTED. REFER TO SECTION 4 FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.
5. CONNECTION MAY BE MADE TO GTN 6XX/7XX #2 IN LIEU OF GTN 6XX/7XX #1.
6. USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)
CARLISLEIT 392404 (24 AWG)

Figure E-40. GTN 6XX/7XX GDL 88/88D Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page E-89
 TO MAIN CDI

AUTOPILOT

VERTICAL SUPERFLAG
LATERAL SUPERFLAG
LATERAL + RIGHT
LATERAL + LEFT

VERTICAL + DOWN
VERTICAL + UP
SPERRY COMPUTER
SPZ-200A/500
FZ-500
GTN 6XX/7XX FD Computer
J1A J1B
P1001
s s
LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 13 16 - LAT SUPERFLAG
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 20 - LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 21 - LAT DEV +RT
s
4
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 - 7 G/S SUPERFLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 - 16 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 - 17 GS DEV +DN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH* 56 22 - LOC FREQ GROUND

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 AT THE GTN, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE
LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4 FOR IFR-CERTIFIED COMPOSITE AIRCRAFT ONLY (EACH AIRCRAFT IN APPENDIX G THAT REQUIRES
OVERBRAID OVER THE GPS/WAAS CABLE): ANY LRU (I.E. CDI, AUTOPILOT) THAT CONNECTS TO THE GTNS
P1001 MAIN CDI/VDI OUTPUTS MUST BE MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL OR COCKPIT CENTER
CONSOLE WITH ELECTRICAL BONDING EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN 20 MILLIOHMS BETWEEN THE
EQUIPMENT AND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.

Figure E-41. GTN 6XX/7XX Sperry Autopilot Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page E-90 Rev. 4
Appendix F GMA 35 Interconnect Diagrams
Figure F-1. GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect ..................................................................................... F-2
Figure F-2. GMA 35 Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect .......................................................... F-4
Figure F-3. GMA 35 Headset Interconnect ........................................................................................... F-5
Figure F-4. GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect....................................................................... F-7
Figure F-5. GMA 35 Discrete Interconnect ........................................................................................... F-9

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page F-1
 GMA 35 Audio COM 1 Transceiver*
Panel Garmin 3
*See Next Page for COM Wiring SL 30/ GTN 635/ 400/500
To GMA 35 with GTN 750 COM SL 40 650/750 Series
P4002/
P1 P1003
5 P5002
P3501
COM 1 AUDIO IN HI 9 14 7 7 500 COM AUDIO HI
COM 1 AUDIO LO 10 13 18 19 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
7 20 18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 1 MIC KEY OUT* 12 4 11 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 11 8 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s

COM 2 Transceiver*
Garmin 3
SL 30/ GTN 635/ 420W/
SL 40 650/750 430W/530W
P4002/
P1 P1003
P5002
5
COM 2 AUDIO IN HI 13 14 7 7 500 COM AUDIO HI
COM 2 AUDIO LO 14 13 18 19 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
7 20 18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 2 MIC KEY OUT* 30 4 11 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 15 8 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s

COM 3 Transceiver
Garmin
SL 30/ GTN 635/ 420W/
SL 40 650/750 430W/530W
P4002/
P1 P1003
P5002
5
COM 3 AUDIO IN HI 3 14 7 7 500 COM AUDIO HI
COM 3 AUDIO LO 4 13 18 19 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
7 20 18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 3 MIC KEY OUT* 6 4 11 4 COM MIC KEY
XCVR 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 5 8 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s

NAV 1 Receiver
Garmin
GTN GNS 430W/
SL 30 650/750 530W
37-Pin P4006/
5 P1004
Connector P5006
NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI 17 23 16 16 500 VLOC AUDIO OUT HI
NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO 18 20 17 17 500 VLOC AUDIO OUT LO
s

RCVR 3 AUDIO IN HI 21
RCVR 3 AUDIO IN LO 22 4 5
s
RCVR 4 AUDIO IN HI 7 NAV 2 Receiver
4 5 Garmin
RCVR 4 AUDIO IN LO 8
s GTN GNS 430W/
SL 30 650/750
RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI 23 530W
4 5 37-Pin P4006/
5 P1004
s Connector P5006
NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI 19 23 16 16 500 VLOC AUDIO OUT HI
NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO 20 20 17 17 500 VLOC AUDIO OUT LO
s

Figure F-1. GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-2 Rev. 4
 GTN 750 Installation with Second COM 3

COM 1 Transceiver
(Connected as COM 2)
GMA 35 Audio Garmin
GTN 750
Panel
P3501 P1003
COM 2 AUDIO IN HI 13 7 500 COM AUDIO HI
COM 2 AUDIO LO 14 18 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
20 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 2 MIC KEY OUT* 30 11 COM MIC KEY
COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 15 5 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s

COM 2 Transceiver
Garmin (Connected as COM 1)
GNS 530W
P5002
COM 1 AUDIO IN HI 9 7 500 COM AUDIO HI
COM 1 AUDIO LO 10 19 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 1 MIC KEY OUT* 12 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 11 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. WHEN A SECOND COM RADIO IS INSTALLED WITH THE GTN 750 AND GMA 35, THE GTN 750 SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO THE GMA 35 COM 2 PINS AND THE OTHER RADIO SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO COM 1 PINS. THIS
WILL PREVENT LOSS OF BOTH COM RADIOS IN THE EVENT THE GTN 750 LOSES RS-232 COMMUNICATION WITH
THE GMA 35. A FAILSAFE CIRCUIT IN THE GMA 35 CONNECTS THE PILOTS HEADSET AND MICROPHONE DIRECTLY
TO COM 1 IN CASE POWER TO THE GMA 35 OR RS-232 COMMUNICATION WITH THE GTN 750 IS LOST. REFER TO
SECTION 5.5.4.8.2.1 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. REFER TO SECTION 2.4.14 FOR ADDITIONAL
CONSIDERATIONS FOR FAILSAFE OPERATION.
4. THESE INPUTS CAN BE USED FOR ANALOG AUDIO SUCH AS ADF OR DME ANALOG AUDIO. THESE INPUTS ACCEPT
UP TO 15 MW INTO A 600 OHM LOAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.4.8.2.6 TO CONFIGURE EACH RECEIVER INPUT. DO
NOT USE THESE INPUTS FOR AUDIO SOURCES FOR WHICH LOSS WOULD BE CLASSIFIED AS MAJOR OR HIGHER
IN AC 23.1309-1E, SUCH AS TAWS AUDIO OR AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT TONE.
5. TO PREVENT COUPLED INTERFERENCE AND GROUND LOOPS FROM BEING INJECTED INTO THE AUDIO INPUTS,
GROUND THE SHIELDS AT ONLY ONE END.

Figure F-1. GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page F-3
 GMA 35 Audio Panel 7
P3502 AUDIO
14/28 VDC AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT POWER 8 20 AWG POWER
AIRCRAFT POWER 9 3A (14/28 VDC)

AIRCRAFT GROUND 10 20 AWG AIRCRAFT

AIRCRAFT GROUND 11 GROUND

GTN 725/750
3 P1001
RS-232 IN 17 7 RS-232 OUT 2
RS-232 OUT 18 26 RS-232 IN 2 8
45 RS-232 GND 2
s s

Marker Beacon
Antenna

P3501
5
MARKER ANTENNA IN HI 1
MARKER ANTENNA IN LO 2

MIDDLE MARKER SENSE OUT 39 4

INNER MARKER LAMP OUT 36

MIDDLE MARKER LAMP OUT 38 6
OUTER MARKER LAMP OUT 37

AIRCRAFT
9 GROUND

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. THE RS-232 CONNECTION TO THE GTN 725/750 IS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND AND CONTROL OF THE GMA 35 AUDIO
PANEL FUNCTIONS. THE GTN 7XX IS THE CONTROLLER FOR THE GMA 35.
4. THE MIDDLE MARKER SENSE OUTPUT IS AN ACTIVE-HIGH DISCRETE SIGNAL. IT CAN BE USED BY SOME FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEMS TO INCREASE THE AUTOPILOT GAIN AFTER THE AIRCRAFT PASSES THE MIDDLE MARKER.
REFER TO THE SPECIFIC AUTOPILOT INSTALLATION DATA FOR MORE DETAIL.
5. REFER TO SECTION 3.6.7 FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON WIRING THE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS TO THE GMA 35.
6. THESE OUTPUTS CAN BE USED TO DRIVE EXTERNAL MARKER LAMPS, IF DESIRED.
7. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT.
8. IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF
THIS PORT. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
9. VERIFY AIRCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 2.4.5.

Figure F-2. GMA 35 Power/RS-232/Marker Beacon Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-4 Rev. 4
 GMA 35 Audio Panel
P3501
MIC JACK
PILOT MIC KEY IN* 34
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI 33 PILOT PTT
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO 35
s

P3502 MIC JACK

COPILOT MIC KEY IN* 33
COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI 32 COPILOT PTT
COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO 34
s

PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI 35 PASS 1 MIC JACK

PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO 36
s

PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN HI 37 PASS 2 MIC JACK

PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN LO 38
s

PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI 39 PASS 3 MIC JACK

PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO 40
s

PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN HI 41 PASS 4 MIC JACK

PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN LO 42
s

PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 16

PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 31 PILOT HEADSET
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 1
s

COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 3

COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 4 COPILOT HEADSET
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 2
s

SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI 44 +

SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO 43 - COCKPIT SPEAKER
s

P3501
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 40
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 41 PASS 1 HEADSET
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 42
s

PASS 2,3,4 HEADSETS 3

NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
s
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. UP TO 4 PASSENGER HEADSETS MAY BE WIRED IN PARALLEL.

Figure F-3. GMA 35 Headset Interconnect

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page F-5
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-6 Rev. 4
 GMA 35 Audio Traffic Advisory
Panel L3 COMM HONEYWELL RYAN GARMIN System
KTA 870 KTA 970
TRC 497 TRC 899 KMH GTX 330/ GTS 8XX GDL 88
880 KMH 980 9900B 9900BX 33
P3501 P1 P1 J10 J10 P1 P1 P3301 P8002 P881
4
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI 31 92 89 20 20 3 3 15 58 4 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI
3
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO 32 90 91 21 21 4 4 16 59 23 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO
s

4 POTS Telephone
TEL AUDIO IN HI 25 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 26 AUDIO OUT LO
s
TEL MIC OUT HI 27 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC OUT LO 28 AUDIO IN LO
s
ALERT 4 (TEL RING)
44 TEL RING AUDIO OUT HI
AUDIO IN HI
ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO 43 TEL RING AUDIO OUT LO
s

GDU 620 5
P6201
29 AUDIO OUT LO
ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI 29 28 AUDIO OUT HI
s

4 P1001 GTN 6XX/7XX

P3502 23 AUDIO OUT LO
ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI 15 4 AUDIO OUT HI
s

FAILSAFE WARN TO FAILSAFE AUDIO SOURCE 6

29
AUDIO IN HI s
MUSIC 2 IN LEFT 26
MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT 27 TO OTHER STEREO AUDIO SOURCE GDL 69/69A
MUSIC 2 IN LO 28 P691
s 4
MUSIC 1 IN LEFT 23 19 AUDIO OUT LEFT
MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT 24 18 AUDIO OUT RIGHT
MUSIC 1 IN LO 25 17 AUDIO OUT LO
s

Figure F-4. GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-7 Rev. 4
 NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

2

3 THE GMA 35 HAS 4 UNSWITCHED ALERT AUDIO INPUTS FOR ALERT AUDIO SOURCES SUCH AS TAWS OR
TRAFFIC.

4 TO PREVENT COUPLED INTERFERENCE AND GROUND LOOPS FROM BEING INJECTED INTO THE AUDIO
INPUTS, GROUND THE SHIELDS AT ONLY ONE END. EITHER END OF THE SHIELD MAY BE GROUNDED.

5 FOR REFERENCE ONLY. SEE THE G500 OR G600 STC INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAIL.

6 FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IS HEARD DURING NORMAL OPERATION AS A FIFTH ALERT INPUT. DURING
FAILSAFE MODE BOTH FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI AND COM 1 AUDIO INPUT ARE CONNECTED TO THE
PILOT HEADSET LEFT OUTPUT. DURING THIS TIME THE OUTPUT OF THE COM 1 RADIO AND THE OUTPUT OF
THE DEVICE CONNECTED TO FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI WILL BECOME SHORTED TOGETHER,
POTENTIALLY CAUSING DAMAGE OR INTERFERENCE. IF THE FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IS USED,
INSTALL SUMMING RESISTORS IN SERIES BETWEEN THESE SOURCES AND THE INPUTS TO THE AUDIO
PANEL TO PROTECT THE OUTPUTS FROM DAMAGE. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390
W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING
RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.

Figure F-4. GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-8 Rev. 4
 GMA 35 Audio
Panel
P3501
COM ACTIVE* OUT 24 4

P3502 3

MARKER HI SENS* IN 13

PASS ICS KEY* IN 14

PA MUTE* OUT 12 5

PA MODE SELECTED* OUT 19 6

COM CYCLE* IN 20

3
CLEARANCE RECORDER
22
PLAYBACK* IN

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

2

3 THESE SWITCHES ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. INSTALLATION OF THESE SWITCHES IS NOT
COVERED BY THIS STC.

4 THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY OTHER SYSTEMS TO MUTE APPLICABLE AUDIO SOURCES WHEN COM
RECEIVE IS ACTIVE. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR THESE SYSTEMS FOR MORE
DETAIL.

5 THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY EXTERNAL PA SYSTEMS TO MUTE THE PA WHEN PA MODE IS ACTIVE AND
THE PTT BUTTON IS PRESSED. REFER TO THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE
DETAIL.

6 THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY EXTERNAL PA SYSTEMS TO ENABLE THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM WHEN PA
MODE IS ACTIVE. REFER TO THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE DETAIL.

Figure F-5. GMA 35 Discrete Interconnect

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-9 Rev. 4
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page F-10 Rev. 4
Appendix G Lightning Protection
G.1 Lightning Protection in Metal Aircraft
G.1.1 HSDB Weather Radar Interface
When interfacing the GTN 6XX/7XX to an HSDB weather radar (WXR), overbraid is required over any
HSDB cabling in the radome area prior to entering the metal fuselage (or metallic wing). Any wiring for
weather radar configuration modules does not require overbraid as part of this STC. This
section describes how to install the overbraid for the WXR cabling.
The GTN may be interfaced to a weather radar in metal aircraft only. Nonmetallic aircraft
(see Table G-1) must not interface the GTN to a weather radar.
Refer to Appendix E for weather radar interconnect information.

NOTE

Refer to Table G-1 to determine if the aircraft is classified as metal or nonmetallic.

G.1.1.1 Materials Required but Not Supplied

The following materials (or equivalents) are required to install WXR cabling overbraid in the radome
area:
Tinned copper flat braid, 3/4, QQB575F36T0781 (recommended)
OR
Tinned copper tubular braid, 7/16, QQB575R30T0437
Electrical tie-down strap, adjustable, MS3367-{1, 2, or 7}-X
Terminal lug, 5/16, uninsulated, MS20659-131
Terminal stud, 5/16 (or equivalent 5/16 bolt/nut)
NAS970-516 (AN970-516) washer
G.1.1.2 Overbraid Installation Procedure

NOTE

The length of overbraid required is approximately equal to the length of the WXR
cabling in the radome area (measured from the bulkhead or metallic wing entry area
to the WXR R/T connector) plus six inches.

Refer to Figure G-1 and Figure G-2 while completing the following overbraid installation procedure:
1. Remove the backshell from the WXR R/T connector and save for reinstallation. This will allow
the overbraid to slide over the cable without unpinning the connector.
2. Slide the overbraid onto the cable from the WXR R/T to the bulkhead (or grounding provisions at
the metallic wing entry area).
3. Reinstall the WXR R/T connector backshell body.
4. At the WXR R/T end of the overbraid, fold one inch of overbraid back over itself. Position the
overbraid so that the fold will lie under the backshell cover plate, while the overbraid ends will lie
just outside the strain relief bar. Refer to Figure G-1.
5. Install the backshell cover plate and strain relief bar.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page G-1
 CAUTION

All overbraid ends must be secured outside the backshell by the strain relief
bar. Failure to do so may allow overbraid ends to contact and short HSDB
pins, resulting in weather radar malfunction or damage.

6. At the bulkhead end of the overbraid (or grounding provisions at the metallic wing entry area),
comb out a maximum of two inches of braid, twist it, cut to length if necessary, and terminate it
in a terminal lug. Refer to Figure G-1.
7. Secure the overbraid pigtail to a terminal stud.

G.1.1.3 Overbraid Terminal Bonding

Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces must be done in accordance with
SAE ARP1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5. The overbraid terminal lug must be electrically bonded to a 5/16
stud installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Section 11-189, as well as the following restrictions:
1. If possible, use an existing tooling hole to install the stud.
2. If no suitable tooling hole exists, use an existing fastener (5/16 or larger).

NOTE

Installation of a stud into a pressure bulkhead is not authorized under this STC. If a new
stud must be installed into a pressure bulkhead, additional approval for installation of the
stud will be required.
3. If there is no suitable fastener, install a new stud as follows:
a) When adding a new stud hole to the bulkhead, the center of the hole must be located a
minimum of one inch away from any existing, non-stiffened hole.
b) The new stud hole must be located such that the terminal lug face, neck, or attaching
hardware will not intrude into the flange bend radius of any edge or stiffened hole.
Refer to MS20659 for terminal lug dimensions.
Verify overbraid terminal bonding by checking resistance between the overbraid and the bulkhead (or the
metallic wing structure for a wing-mounted WXR). Resistance should be less than 2.5 m.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page G-2 Rev. 4
 OVERBRAID
QQB575R30T0437
OR
QQB575F36T0781

OVERBRAID INSTALLED OVER WEATHER

RADAR CABLING THAT IS IN RADOME AREA,
PRIOR TO ENTERING THE METAL FUSELAGE

ELECTRICAL TIE-DOWN STRAP

MS3367-{1, 2, or 7}-X

OVERBRAID ENDS ALL HSDB CABLING THAT ENTERS THE

Ensure that the 1
METAL FUSELAGE
overbraid does not
protrude more than
past the strain relief bar
into the backshell.

5/16" TERMINAL LUG

MS20659-131

WEATHER RADAR
CONNECTOR

NOTES:

1 THE OVERBRAID MUST BE INSERTED INTO THE GROUNDING LUG BY "COMBING" IT OUT
INTO A FLAT CONFIGURATION AND THEN COMPRESS INTO A SMALL DIAMETER BUNDLE
NEAR ITS END WHICH MAY BE INSERTED INTO THE GROUNDING LUG.

Figure G-1. WXR HSDB Cable Overbraid Installation

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page G-3
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page G-4 Rev. 4
 BULKHEAD

1 2

2" MAXIMUM
EXPOSED CABLE

OVERBRAID

WEATHER RADAR R/T MUST BE

ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO BULKHEAD

INSTALL 5/16" GROUNDING HARDWARE IN

1. ACCORDANCE WITH AC 43.13-1B, SECTION 11-189. IF
THERE IS AN EXISTING HOLE LOCATED IN AN
APPROPRIATE AREA IT MAY BE UTILIZED FOR THE
GROUNDING HARDWARE OTHERWISE AN EXISTING
FASTER (5/16" OR LARGER) MAY BE USED. IF THERE IS
NO EXISTING HOLE OR SUITABLE FASTER USABLE FOR
THIS PURPOSE THEN DRILL AND DE-BURR A 0.323"-
0.332" HOLE.
2. MS20659-131 TERMINAL LUG (OR EQUIVALENT).
ENSURE THAT CHAFE PROTECTION IS INSTALLED
WHERE THE HSDB WIRES ENTER THE BULKHEAD.

Figure G-2. WXR Overbraid Termination

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page G-5
 G.2 Lightning Protection for Nonmetallic Aircraft
Table G-1 provides detailed information about the lightning protection components that are required for a
particular aircraft model. Only nonmetallic models are listed. A Y in the LRU column indicates that a
TVS and fuse combination is required for that LRU; a N indicates that the TVS and fuse combination is
not required. The interconnect diagrams showing how the TVS and fuse are connected for a particular
LRU are found in Appendix E.

NOTE

Aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only are not required to have TVSs
and associated fuses installed. Consequently, these models do not appear in Table G-1.

Table G-1. Lightning Protection for Nonmetallic Aircraft

Protection Required?
Aircraft Make GPS
(TCDS Holder) Aircraft Model Designation Coaxial Notes
[common name or previous make] TVS1 TVS2
Cable
Overbraid
Alexandria Aircraft
14-19, 14-19-2, 14-19-3, 14-19-3A, 17-30, 17-31,
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC) Y N N
17-31TC
[Bellanca, Inc.]
Alexandria Aircraft
(Alexandria Aircraft LLC)
[Bellanca Aircraft Corp; 17-30A, 17-31A, 17-3A1TC Y N N
Viking Aviation, Inc.;
Bellanca, Inc.]
American Champion
(American Champion 8KCAB, 8GCBC Y N N
Aircraft Corporation)
American Champion
7GCA, 7GCB, 7KC, 7GCBA, 7GCAA, 7GCBC,
(American Champion Y N N
7KCAB
Aircraft Corporation)
Bellanca
14-13, 14-13-2, 14-13-3, 14-13-3W Y N N
(Bellanca Aircraft Corporation)
Cessna
(Cessna Aircraft Company)
LC40-550FG, LC41-550FG, LC42-550FG Y Y Y
[Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing,
The Lancair Company]
Cessna
T-50 (Army AT-17, UC-78 Series, Navy JRC-1) Y N N
(Cessna Aircraft Company)
Cirrus Design Corporation
SR20, SR22 Y Y Y
(Cirrus Design Corporation)
Cub Crafters
CC18-180, CC18-180A Y N N
(Cub Crafters, Inc.)
Diamond
DA 40 Y Y Y
(Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH)
Extra
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- und
EA-400 Y Y Y
Vertriebs- GmbH)
[Extra Flugzeugbau GmbH]
FS2003 Corp.
(FS 2003 Corporation PA-12, PA-12S Y N N
[New Piper Aircraft]
GROB
G120A Y Y Y
(GROB-WERKE)

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page G-6 Rev. 4
 Protection Required?
Aircraft Make GPS
(TCDS Holder) Aircraft Model Designation Coaxial Notes
[common name or previous make] TVS1 TVS2
Cable
Overbraid
Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)
D17S (UC43, UC43B, GB-1, GB-2), SD17S Y N N
[Beech Aircraft Company;
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Hawker Beechcraft
(Hawker Beechcraft Corporation)
G17S Y N N
[Beech Aircraft Company;
Raytheon Aircraft Company]
Howard
DGA-15P (UC-70, GH-1, GH-2, GH-3, NH-1),
(Howard Aircraft Foundation) Y N N
DGA-15J (UC-70B), DGA15W
[Jobmaster Co]
Liberty
XL-2 Y Y Y
(Liberty Aerospace Incorporated)
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C, M-4S, M-4T, M-4-180C,
M-4-180S, M-4-180T, M-4-210, M-4-210C,
M-4-210S, M-4-210T, M-4-220, M-4-220C,
M-4-220S, M-4-220T, M-5-180C, M-5-200,
M-5-210C, M-5-210TC, M-5-220C, M-5-235C,
Maule M-6-180, M-6-235, M-7-235, MX-7-235, MX-7-180,
Y N N
(Maule Aerospace Technology, Inc.) MX-7-420, MXT-7-180,MT-7-235, M-8-235,
MX-7-160, MXT-7-160, MX-7-180A, MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B, M-7-235A, M-7-235C,
MX-7-180C, M-7-260, MT-7-260, M-7-260C,
M-7-420AC, MX-7-160C, MX-7-180AC, M-7-420A,
MT-7-420, M-4-180V, M-9-235
PA-18, PA-18S, PA-18 "105" (Special),
PA-18S "105" (Special), PA-18A, PA-18 "125",
Piper Aircraft, Inc.
PA-18S "125", PA-18AS "125", PA-18 "135",
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Y N N
PA-18A "135", PA-18S "135", PA-18AS "135",
[New Piper]
PA-18 "150", PA-18A "150", PA-18S "150",
PA-18AS "150", PA-19, PA-19S
Piper Aircraft, Inc.
PA-20, PA-20S, PA-20 "115", PA-20S "115",
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Y N N
PA-20 "135", PA-20S "135"
[New Piper]
Piper Aircraft, Inc.
PA-22, PA-22-108, PA-22-135, PA-22S-135,
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Y N N
PA-22-150, PA-22S-150, PA-22-160, PA-22S-160
[New Piper]
Sky International
(Sky International, Inc.)
A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C-180, A-1C-200 Y N N
[Christen Industries; Aviat, Inc.; White
International, LTD.; Pitts]
Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.
(Symphony Aircraft Industries Inc.) OMF-100-160, SA 160 Y N N
[OMF]
Triton Aerospace LLC
(Triton Aerospace LLC)
A500 Y Y Y
[Triton America LLC;
AAI Acquisition, Inc.; Adam Aircraft]
Univair
(Univair Aircraft Corporation) 108, 108-1, 108-2, 108-3, 108-5 Y N N
[Stinson]
WACO
YMF Y N N
(The WACO Aircraft Company)

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page G-7
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page G-8 Rev. 4
 Appendix H Aircraft Model Specific Information
Table H-1 provides additional limitations that are placed on some aircraft as a part of this STC.
Table H-1. Aircraft Model Specific Information
Aircraft Make
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model Notes
[common name or previous
make]
Must have optional radio box
AT-502, AT-502A,
Air Tractor (P/N 60616-1) installed as a prerequisite
AT-502B, AT-802, for the installation of the GTN.
(Air Tractor, Inc.)
AT-802A
[1]
Diamond
DA20-A1, DA20-C1 [1]
(Diamond Aircraft Industries, Inc.)
Diamond
Must have Diamond OSB 40-004/3
(Diamond Aircraft Industries DA 40
incorporated. Otherwise, [1]
GmbH)
To install a GTN 6XX or 7XX unit in an
EA-300/L aircraft, the aircraft must have
one of the following sub panels installed:
EA-8D501.20 Sub Panel GTN 635/650
EA-8D501.21 Sub Panel GTN 750
Alternately, EA-300/L aircraft with the
following sub panels previously installed
Extra may be used with modifications to the
(Extra Flugzeugproduktions- EA-300/L subpanel side walls for the GTN
undVertriebs GmbH) installation rack mounting hole pattern.
EA-86501.4
EA-86501.8
EA-86501.10
For more information on these subpanels,
contact Extra Aircraft
(http://www.extraaircraft.com/contact.php).
[1]
G115, G115A, G115B,
GROB
G115C, G115C2, G115D, [1]
[GROB-WERKE)
G115D2, G115EG
For installations in these aircraft, this STC
Vulcanair S.p.A. (Vulcanair S.p.A.) P68 Observer, P68TC only approves the installation of the GTN
[Partenavia] Observer, P68 Observer 2 and GMA 35 in the console and not in the
instrument panel.
WACO
(WACO Classic Aircraft
Corporation) 2T-1A, 2T-1A-1, 2T-1A-2 [1]
[Great Lakes Aircraft Company]
[John Duncan]
[1] Installation approved for VFR operation only.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page H-1
 This page intentionally left blank

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page H-2 Rev. 4
Appendix J Acceptable Hardware
Screws, Non-Structural
Size
Type
6-32 8-32
NASM35206
Pan Head, Low Carbon Steel - (MS35206)
(AN515)
NASM35214
Pan Head, Brass - (MS25214)
(AN515B)
MS51957
Pan Head, Stainless -
(AN515C)
Pan Head, Alloy Steel - NAS602
NASM24693
100 Deg Countersunk (MS24693) -
(AN507)
100 Deg Countersunk, Alloy
NAS514P -
Steel

Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may still be
available and/or referenced on packaging material.
Screws, Structural
Type Size
8-32
Pan Head NASM27039
(MS27039)
(NAS220)

Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may still be
available and/or referenced on packaging material.
Washers, Carbon Steel, Cad Plated
Nominal Inside Size
Diameter
.016 Thick .032 Thick .063 Thick
#6 NAS1149FN616P NAS1149FN632P
-
(AN960-6L) (AN960-6)
#8 NAS1149FN816P NAS1149FN832P
-
(AN960-8L) (AN960-8)

Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may still be
available and/or referenced on packaging material.

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page J-1
Washers, Stainless Steel
Nominal Inside Size
Diameter
.016 Thick .032 Thick .063 Thick
#6 NAS1149CN616R NAS1149CN632R
-
(AN960C-6L) (AN960C-6)
#8 NAS1149CN816R NAS1149CN832R
-
(AN960C-8L) (AN960C-8)

Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may still be
available and/or referenced on packaging material.
Nuts, Steel
Size Type
Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking
Metal, Hex, Thin Elastic, Hex, Thin Metal, Hex Elastic, Hex
6-32 NASM21042L06 NASM21083N06 NASM21045L06 NASM21044N06
NAS1291-06 NAS1022N06 (MS21045L06) NAS1021N06
(MS21042L06) (MS21083N06) (AN363-632) (MS21044N06)
(MS20364-632A) (MS20365-632A)
(AN364-632A) (AN365-632A)
8-32 NASM21042L08 NASM21083N08 NASM21045L08 NASM21044N08
NAS1291-08 NAS1022N08 (MS21045L08) NAS1021N08
(MS21042L08) (MS21083N08) (AN363-832) (MS21044N08)
(MS20364-832A) (MS20365-832A)
(AN364-832A) (AN365-832A)

Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may still be
available and/or referenced on packaging material.

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page J-2 Rev. 4
Nuts, Stainless Steel
Size Type
Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking Nut, Self-locking
Metal, Hex, Thin Elastic, Hex, Thin Metal, Hex Elastic, Hex
6-32 NASM21043-06 NASM21083C06 NASM21046C06 MS20365C632A
NAS1291C06 (MS21083C06) MS20365C632C MS21044C06
(MS21043-06) (AN364C632A) NAS1021C06 (AN365C632A)
(MS21046C06)
(AN363C632)
8-32 NASM21043-08 NASM21083C08 NASM21046C08 MS20365C832A
NAS1291C08 (MS21083C08) MS20365C832C MS21044C08
(MS21043-08) (AN364C832A) NAS1021C08 (AN365C832A)
(MS21046C08)
(AN363C832)

Note: Part numbers in parentheses are inactive or cancelled part numbers; these numbers may still be
available and/or referenced on packaging material.
Nutplates, Steel

Size Type
One Lug One Lug Two Lug Two Lug Corner Side-by-Side
Fixed Floating Fixed Floating
6-32 MS21051 MS21061 MS21047 MS21059 MS21055 MS21086
MS21053 MS21049 MS21075 MS21057
MS21071 MS21069 MS21073
8-32 MS21051 MS21061 MS21047 MS21059 MS21055 MS21086
MS21053 MS21049 MS21075 MS21057
MS21071 MS21069 MS21073

190-01007-A3 GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 4 Page J-3
Nutplates, Stainless Steel
Size Type
One Lug One Lug Two Lug Two Lug Corner Side-by-Side
Fixed Floating Fixed Floating
6-32 MS21052 MS21062 MS21048 MS21060 MS21056 MS21087
MS21054 MS21050 MS21076 MS21058
MS21072 MS21070 MS21074
8-32 MS21052 MS21062 MS21048 MS21060 MS21056 MS21087
MS21054 MS21050 MS21076 MS21058
MS21072 MS21070 MS21074

GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3

Page J-4 Rev. 4